Posiadam projektor NEC VT670. Projektor nie posiada lampy, i nie uruchamia się po podłączeniu do prądu ( nie zapalają się diody, brak reakcji) Myślę że padł zasilacz. Pomyślałem, że mógłbym go przerobić na: -zasilanie z własnego zasilacza, - Lampę led. (np 10w lub 100 w.) mam jedną i drugą, więc coś dobiorę Znalazłem schemat z service manual w internecie, jednak nie do końca jestem sobie w stanie poradzić z jego odczytaniem. A jak wiadomo w tego typu sprzęcie błąd popełnia się tylko raz ;) Generalnie chodzimi o to co połączyć żeby oszukać płytę główną przy połączeniu balastu (lampy nie będzie WCALE) i jak podłączyć (i gdzie) zasilanie, oraz jakie powinno mieć napięcie. No i czy to w ogóle ma sens. P.s. W załączniku service manual. Schemat na stronie 399
MODEL VT37/VT47/VT470/VT570/VT575/VT670/VT676
VT37G/VT47G/VT470G/VT570G/VT575G/VT670G/VT676G
VT47J/VT470J/VT470JY/VT670J/VT676J
(Japanese model)
VT47+/VT470+/VT670+/VT675+/VT676+
(Chinese model)
LCD Projector
SERVICE MANUAL
No.3N9911115 (3rd Edition)
Better Service
Better Reputation
Better Profit
Copyright
1. Contens
2. Safety precautions
3. Users manual
4. Troubleshooting
5. Method of adjustments
6. Serviceman mode
7. Cleaning
8. Circuit description
9. Method of disassembly
10. Disassembly
11. Assembly diagram
12. Packaging
13. Replacement part list
14. Connection diagrams
15. Block diagrams
16. Schematic diagrams
17. Appendix
Back cover
SAFETY CAUTION:
Before servicing this chassis, it is important that the service
technician read and follow the “Safety Precautions” and “Product
Safety Notice” in this Service Manual.
WARNING:
SHOCK HAZARD - Use an isolation transformer when servicing.
(1) Copyright (C) 2005, NEC Viewtechnology, Ltd.
All Rights Reserved
This document contains confidential information.
Unauthorized copying, duplication, distribution, or
republication is strictly prohibited.
(2) The contents of this manual are subject to change
without prior notice.
CONTENTS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ..................................................................................................................................2-1
USERS MANUAL ..............................................................................................................................................E-2
Quick Setup Guide
Important Information
USERS MANUAL (VT37 only)
Quick Setup Guide (VT37 only)
Important Information (VT37 only)
TROUBLESHOOTING .......................................................................................................................................4-1
Operation Checks .........................................................................................................................................4-1
POWER block ...............................................................................................................................................4-2
I/O block sync block, and ADC block ............................................................................................................ 4-4
LC panel driver block ....................................................................................................................................4-9
Picture quality judgement standard ...............................................................................................................4-12
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS ..........................................................................................................................5-1
PC control software .......................................................................................................................................5-1
Adjustment of the optical axis ....................................................................................................................... 5-43
Adjustment of the polarizing plate ................................................................................................................. 5-49
SERVICEMAN MODE .......................................................................................................................................6-1
CLEANING ........................................................................................................................................................7-1
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION ...................................................................................................................................8-1
I/O terminals ..................................................................................................................................................8-1
Input signals ..................................................................................................................................................8-1
Circuit operation ............................................................................................................................................8-2
METHOD OF DISASSEMBLY ...........................................................................................................................9-1
DISASSEMBLY .................................................................................................................................................10-1
Main body .....................................................................................................................................................10-1
Engine sassy .................................................................................................................................................10-2
ASSEMBLY .....................................................................................................................................................11-1
PACKAGING ...................................................................................................................................................12-1
VT37 ...........................................................................................................................................................12-1
VT47 ...........................................................................................................................................................12-3
VT470 .........................................................................................................................................................12-5
VT570 .........................................................................................................................................................12-7
VT575 .........................................................................................................................................................12-9
VT670 .........................................................................................................................................................12-11
VT676 .........................................................................................................................................................12-13
VT37G .........................................................................................................................................................12-15
VT47G .........................................................................................................................................................12-17
VT470G .......................................................................................................................................................12-19
VT570G .......................................................................................................................................................12-21
VT575G .......................................................................................................................................................12-23
VT670G .......................................................................................................................................................12-25
VT676G .......................................................................................................................................................12-27
VT47JA .......................................................................................................................................................12-29
VT470J ........................................................................................................................................................12-31
VT470JY .....................................................................................................................................................12-33
VT670J ........................................................................................................................................................12-35
VT676J ........................................................................................................................................................12-37
1-1
REPLACMENT PART LIST .............................................................................................................................13-1
VT37 series (VT37/VT37G) ........................................................................................................................13-1
VT47 series (VT47/VT47G/VT47J/VT47+) ................................................................................................13-5
VT470 series (VT470/VT470G/VT470J/VT470+) .......................................................................................13-9
VT470JY (Japanese model) .......................................................................................................................13-13
VT570 series (VT570/VT570G) ..................................................................................................................13-17
VT575 series (VT575/VT575G) ..................................................................................................................13-21
VT670 series (VT670/VT670G/VT670J/VT670+/VT675+) ..........................................................................13-25
VT676 series (VT676/VT676G/VT676J/VT676+) .......................................................................................13-29
CONNECTION DIAGRAMS ............................................................................................................................14-1
VT37/VT47/VT470: LCD PANEL 24P .........................................................................................................14-1
VT470/VT570/VT575/VT670/VT676 : LCD PANEL 30P .............................................................................14-2
BLOCK DIAGRAMS ........................................................................................................................................15-1
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS ...............................................................................................................................16-1
VT470/VT570/VT575/VT670/VT676 (LCD PANEL 30P) : MAIN PWB ....................................................... 16-1
VT470/VT570/VT575/VT670/VT676 (LCD PANEL 30P) : I/O PWB ...........................................................16-9
VT470/VT570/VT575/VT670/VT676 (LCD PANEL 30P) : REM PWB ........................................................16-11
VT37/VT47/VT470 (LCD PANEL 24P) : MAIN PWB ..................................................................................16-12
VT37/VT47/VT470 (LCD PANEL 24P) : I/O PWB ......................................................................................16-20
VT37/VT47/VT470 (LCD PANEL 24P) : REM PWB ...................................................................................16-22
APPENDIX .......................................................................................................................................................17-1
VT70 series Specifications ..........................................................................................................................17-1
VT70 series Optical System ........................................................................................................................17-2
1-2
http://getMANUAL.com
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
CAUTION:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE
COVER. NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING
TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
This symbol warns the user that uninsulated voltage within the unit may
have sufficient magnitude to cause electric shock. Therefore, it is dangerous
to make any kind of contact with any part inside of this unit.
This symbol alerts the user that important literature concerning the
operation and maintenance of this unit has been included.
Therefore, it should be read carefully in order to avoid any problems.
ATTENTION
RISQUE D'ELECTROCUTION
NE PAS OUVRIR
MISE EN GARDE:
AFIN DE REDUIRE LES RISQUES D' ELECTROCUTION, NE PAS
DEPOSER LE COUVERCLE, IL N'Y A AUCUNE PIECE
UTILISABLE A L'INTERIEUR DE CET APPAREIL. NE CONFIER
LES TRAVAUX D'ENTRETIEN QU'A UN PERSONNEL QUALIFIE.
Ce symbole a pour but de prévenir I' utilisateur de la présence d'
une tension dangereuse, non isolée se trouvant à l' intérieur de l'
appareil. Elle est d' une intensité suffisante pour constituer un risque
d' électrocution. Eviter le contact avec les pièces à l' intérieur de
cet appareil.
Ce symbole a pour but de prévenir l' utilisateur de la présence d'
importantes instructions concernant l' entretien et le fonctionnement
de cet appareil. Par conséquent, elles doivent être lues
attentivement afin d' éviter des problèmes.
WARNING
HEATSINK MAY BE ENERGIZED.
TEST BEFORE TOUCHING.
Heat sink located on the power board, is electrified.
mark is putted on the primary heat sink.
Pay attention to this area.
2-1
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
During servicing carefully observe the following.
1. OBSERVE ALL PRECAUTIONS
Items and locations that require special care during servicing, such as the cabinet, chassis, and parts are labelled
with individual safety instructions. Carefully comply with
these instructions and all precautions in the instruction
manual.
2. BE CAREFUL OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
The chassis carries an AC voltage. If you touch the
chassis while it is still alive, you will get a severe shock.
If you think the chassis is alive, use an isolating
transformer or gloves, or pull out the plug before
replacing any parts.
3. USE SPECIFIED PARTS
The components have been chosen for minimum
flammability and for specific levels of resistance value
and withstand voltage. Replacement parts must match
these original specifications. Parts whose specifications
are particularly vital to safe use and maintenance of the
set are marked on the circuit diagrams and parts list.
Substitution of these parts can be dangerous for you
and the customer, so use only specified parts.
4. REMOUNT ALL PARTS AND RECONNECT ALL
WIRES AS ORIGINALLY INSTALLED
For safety, insulating tape and tubes are used
throughout, but some lift-off parts on the printed wiring
board require special attention.
All wires are positioned away from high-temperature and
high-voltage parts, and, if removed for servicing, they
must be retuned precisely to their original positions.
2-2
5. LAMP
Be very careful of the lamp because it generates high
heat while it is used at high voltage. When replacing
the bulb, make sure it is cool enough.
6. LENS
Do not look into the lens during projection. This important
to avoid damage to the eyes.
7. SERVICING
At the time of repair or inspection services, use an earth
band (wrist band), without fail.
8. RUN A COMPLETE SAFETY CHECK AT THE
COMPLETION OF SERVICING
After completion of servicing, confirm that all screws,
parts, and wiring, removed or disconnected for servicing,
have been returned to their original positions. Also
examine if the serviced sections and peripheral areas
have suffered from any deterioration as a result of
servicing. In addition, check insulation between external
metallic parts and blades of wall-outlet plugs. This
examination is indispensable in confirming complete
establishment of safety.
(Insulation check)
Pull out a plug from a wall outlet to disconnect the
connection cable. Then turn on the POWER switch.
Use a 500V megger (Note 2) and confirm that the
insulation resistance is 1MΩ or more between each
terminal of the plug and exposed external metal (Note
1). If the measured value is below the specified level,
then it is necessary to inspect and fix the set.
(Note 1)
Exposed external metal....RGB input terminals, control
terminals, etc.
(Note 2)
If a 500V megger is not available for an unavoidable
reason, then use a circuit tester or the like for inspection.
Portable Projector
VT676/VT670/VT575/VT470/VT47
User’s Manual
Important Information
Safety Cautions
Precautions
Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC VT676/VT670/VT575/VT470/VT47 Projector and keep the
manual handy for future reference. Your serial number is located on the bottom of your projector. Record it here:
CAUTION
To turn off main power, be sure to remove the plug from power outlet.
The power outlet socket should be installed as near to the equipment as possible, and should be easily
accessible.
CAUTION
TO PREVENT SHOCK, DO NOT OPEN THE CABINET.
NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED NEC SERVICE PERSONNEL.
This symbol warns the user that uninsulated voltage within the unit may be sufficient to cause electrical
shock. Therefore, it is dangerous to make any kind of contact with any part inside of the unit.
This symbol alerts the user that important information concerning the operation and maintenance of this
unit has been provided.
The information should be read carefully to avoid problems.
WARNING: TO PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
DO NOT USE THIS UNIT’S PLUG WITH AN EXTENSION CORD OR IN AN OUTLET UNLESS ALL THE PRONGS
CAN BE FULLY INSERTED.
DO NOT OPEN THE CABINET. THERE ARE HIGH-VOLTAGE COMPONENTS INSIDE. ALL SERVICING MUST
BE DONE BY QUALIFIED NEC SERVICE PERSONNEL.
DOC Compliance Notice (for Canada only)
This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.
Acoustic Noise Information Ordinance-3. GSGV (for Germany only):
The sound pressure level is less than 70 dB (A) according to ISO 3744 or ISO 7779.
CAUTION
Avoid displaying stationary images for a prolonged period of time.
Doing so can result in these images being temporarily sustained on the surface of the LCD panel.
If this should happen, continue to use your projector. The static background from previous images will
disappear.
CAUTION
Do not put the projector on its side when the lamp is turned on.
Doing so may cause damage to the projector.
WARNING TO CALIFORNIA RESIDENTS:
Handling the cables supplied with this product, will expose you to lead, a chemical known to the State of California
to cause birth defects or other reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling.
© NEC Viewtechnology, Ltd. 2004 - 2005
i
Important Information
RF Interference (for USA only)
WARNING
The Federal Communications Commission does not allow any modifications or changes to the unit EXCEPT those
specified by NEC Solutions (America), Inc. in this manual. Failure to comply with this government regulation could
void your right to operate this equipment. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by
turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the
following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio / TV technician for help.
For UK only: In UK, a BS approved power cable with moulded plug has a Black (five Amps) fuse installed for use with
this equipment. If a power cable is not supplied with this equipment please contact your supplier.
Important Safeguards
These safety instructions are to ensure the long life of your projector and to prevent fire and shock. Please read them
carefully and heed all warnings.
Installation
1. For best results, use your projector in a darkened room.
2. Place the projector on a flat, level surface in a dry area away from dust and moisture.
3. Do not place your projector in direct sunlight, near heaters or heat radiating appliances.
4. Exposure to direct sunlight, smoke or steam can harm internal components.
5. Handle your projector carefully. Dropping or jarring can damage internal components.
6. Do not place heavy objects on top of the projector.
7. If you wish to have the projector installed on the ceiling:
a. Do not attempt to install the projector yourself.
b. The projector must be installed by qualified technicians in order to ensure proper operation and reduce the
risk of bodily injury.
c. In addition, the ceiling must be strong enough to support the projector and the installation must be in accordance with any local building codes.
d. Please consult your dealer for more information.
Place the projector in a horizontal position
The tilt angle of the projector should not exceed 10 degrees, nor should the projector be installed in any way other than
the desktop and ceiling mount, otherwise lamp life could decrease dramatically.
10˚
ii
Important Information
Fire and Shock Precautions
1. Ensure that there is sufficient ventilation and that vents are unobstructed to prevent the build-up of heat inside
your projector. Allow at least 4 inches (10 cm) of space between your projector and a wall.
2. Prevent foreign objects such as paper clips and bits of paper from falling into your projector.
Do not attempt to retrieve any objects that might fall into your projector. Do not insert any metal objects such as
a wire or screwdriver into your projector. If something should fall into your projector, disconnect it immediately
and have the object removed by a qualified NEC service personnel.
3. Do not place any liquids on top of your projector.
4. Do not look into the lens while the projector is on. Serious damage to your eyes could result.
5. Keep any items such as magnifying glass out of the light path of the projector. The light being projected from the
lens is extensive, therefore any kind of abnormal objects that can redirect light coming out of the lens, can
cause unpredictable outcome such as fire or injury to the eyes.
6. Do not cover the lens with the supplied lens cap or equivalent while the projector is on. Doing so can lead to
melting of the cap and possibly burning your hands due to the heat emitted from the light output.
7. Do not place any objects, which are easily affected by heat, in front of the projector lens or a projector exhaust
vent.
Doing so could lead to the object melting or getting your hands burned from the heat that is emitted from the
light output and exhaust.
8. The projector is designed to operate on a power supply of 100-240V AC 50/60 Hz. Ensure that your power
supply fits this requirement before attempting to use your projector.
9. Handle the power cable carefully and avoid excessive bending.
A damaged cord can cause electric shock or fire.
10. If the projector is not to be used for an extended period of time, disconnect the plug from the power outlet.
11. Do not touch the power plug during a thunderstorm. Doing so can cause electrical shock or fire.
12. Do not handle the power plug with wet hands.
CAUTION
• Do not try to touch the ventilation outlet on the left side (when seen from the front) as it can become heated
while the projector is turned on.
• Do no use the tilt-foot for purposes other than originally intended. Misuses such as gripping the tilt-foot or
hanging on the wall can cause damage to the projector.
• When carrying the projector by the carrying handle, make sure the two screws that attach the carrying handle
to the projector cabinet are tight. (VT676/VT670/VT470 only)
Insufficient tightening of the two screws could result in the projector falling and causing injury.
• Do not send the projector in the soft carrying case by parcel delivery service or cargo shipment. The projector
inside the soft carrying case could be damaged.
• Select [High] in Fan mode if you continue to use the projector for consecutive days. (From the menu, select
[Advanced] → [Fan Mode] → [High].)
• Do not unplug the power cable from the wall outlet under any one of the following circumstances.
Doing so can cause damage to the projector:
* While the Hour Glass icon appears.
* While the cooling fans are running. (The cooling fans continue to work for 30 seconds after the projector is
turned off).
iii
Important Information
Lamp Replacement
•
To replace the lamp, follow all instructions provided on page 50.
•
Be sure to replace the lamp when the message “The lamp has reached the end of its usable life. Please
replace the lamp.” appears. If you continue to use the lamp after the lamp has reached the end of its usable
life, the lamp bulb may shatter, and pieces of glass may be scattered in the lamp case. Do not touch them as the
pieces of glass may cause injury.
If this happens, contact your NEC dealer for lamp replacement.
•
Allow a minimum of 30 seconds to elapse after turning off the projector. Then turn off the main power switch,
disconnect the power cable and allow 60 minutes to cool the projector before replacing the lamp.
iv
Table of Contents
Important Information ........................................................................... i
1. Introduction ...................................................................................... 1
ᕡ What's in the Box? ........................................................................................................ 1
ᕢ Introduction to the Projector ......................................................................................... 2
ᕣ Part Names of the Projector ......................................................................................... 4
Attaching the Supplied Carrying Handle (VT676/VT670/VT470 only) .................... 5
Top Features ........................................................................................................... 6
Terminal Panel Features ......................................................................................... 7
ᕤ Part Names of the Remote Control .............................................................................. 8
Battery Installation ........................................................................................... 10
Remote Control Precautions ............................................................................ 10
Operating Range for Wireless Remote Control ................................................ 10
2. Installation and Connections ....................................................... 11
ᕡ Setting Up the Screen and the Projector .................................................................... 11
Selecting a Location .............................................................................................. 11
VT676/VT670/VT575/VT470 ........................................................................... 11
VT47 ................................................................................................................ 12
Throw Distance and Screen Size .......................................................................... 13
ᕢ Making Connections ................................................................................................... 15
Enabling the computer’s external display .............................................................. 15
Connecting Your PC or Macintosh Computer ........................................................ 15
To connect SCART output (RGB) ......................................................................... 16
Connecting an External Monitor ........................................................................... 17
Connecting Your DVD Player with Component Output .......................................... 18
Connecting Your VCR or Laser Disc Player .......................................................... 19
Connecting the Supplied Power Cable ................................................................. 20
3. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)...................................... 21
ᕡ Turning on the Projector ............................................................................................. 21
Note on Startup Screen (Menu Language Select screen) .................................... 22
ᕢ Selecting a Source ..................................................................................................... 23
ᕣ Adjusting the Picture Size and Position ...................................................................... 24
ᕤ Correcting Keystone Distortion ................................................................................... 26
ᕥ Optimizing RGB Picture Automatically ....................................................................... 28
ᕦ Turning Up or Down Volume ....................................................................................... 28
ᕧ Turning off the Projector ............................................................................................. 29
ᕨ After Use ..................................................................................................................... 29
v
Table of Contents
4. Convenient Features ...................................................................... 30
ᕡ Turning Off the Image and Sound ............................................................................... 30
ᕢ Freezing a Picture ...................................................................................................... 30
ᕣ Enlarging and Moving a Picture .................................................................................. 30
ᕤ Using the Remote Mouse Function (VT676/VT670/VT470 only) ............................... 31
5. Using On-Screen Menu ................................................................. 32
ᕡ Using the Menus ......................................................................................................... 32
ᕢ Menu Elements ........................................................................................................... 34
ᕣ List of Menu Items ...................................................................................................... 35
ᕤ Menu Descriptions & Functions [Picture].................................................................... 37
ᕥ Menu Descriptions & Functions [Image] ..................................................................... 39
ᕦ Menu Descriptions & Functions [Setup] ..................................................................... 40
ᕧ Menu Descriptions & Functions [Advanced] ............................................................... 42
ᕨ Menu Descriptions & Functions [Information] ............................................................. 46
ᕩ Menu Descriptions & Functions [Default] ................................................................... 47
6. Maintenance .................................................................................... 48
ᕡ Cleaning or Replacing the Filter ................................................................................ 48
ᕢ Cleaning the Cabinet and the Lens ........................................................................... 49
ᕣ Replacing the Lamp ................................................................................................... 50
7. Appendix ........................................................................................... 53
ᕡ Troubleshooting ......................................................................................................... 53
ᕢ Specifications ............................................................................................................ 56
ᕣ Cabinet Dimensions .................................................................................................. 58
VT676/VT670/VT575/VT470 ................................................................................. 58
VT47 ..................................................................................................................... 59
ᕤ Pin Assignments of D-Sub COMPUTER Input Connector ........................................ 60
ᕥ Compatible Input Signal List ...................................................................................... 61
ᕦ PC Control Codes and Cable Connection ................................................................. 62
ᕧ Optional Presentation Remote Control Kit (PR52KIT) ............................................... 64
ᕨ Troubleshooting Check List ........................................................................................ 68
¾ TravelCare .................................................................................................................. 70
vi
1. Introduction
ᕡ What's in the Box?
Make sure your box contains everything listed. If any pieces are missing, contact your dealer.
Please save the original box and packing materials if you ever need to ship your projector.
FO
S
CU
ZO
OM
S
E
LE
C
T
P
M
LA
US
AT
ST
ER
W
PO
O
DE
VI
D
AN
ST
N/
O
BY
O
DE
VI
S-
1
RTE
PU
M
CO
2
RTE
PU
M
CO
TO
AU J.
AD
Projector
Soft carrying case
(24BS7423)
Lens cap
(24F40111)
O
FF
M
AG
ER
PIC
W
Y
PO
NIF
UT
N
-M
O
E
UP
E
U
G
EN
PA
M
DO
W
N
R
TE
EN
LCLI
CK
IT
M
EO
EX
VID
O
US
TE
M
TO
LU
AU
VO
R
1
EO
PU
CK
LI
R-C
E
M
ID
CO
S-V
AD
2
E
J.
AS
PE
CT
PIC
LP
RE
HE
TU
FR
EE
ZE
Power cable
(US: VT676/VT670/VT470: 7N080213)
(US: VT575/VT47: 7N080212)
(EU: VT676G/VT670G/VT470G: 7N080007)
(EU: VT575G/VT47G: 7N080005)
RGB/VGA signal cable
(7N520032)
Remote control
(7N900522)
Batteries (AAA)2ן
k
ic
Qu tup
Se ide
Gu
nt
rta ion
po at
Im orm
f
In
For North America only
Registration card
Limited warranty
Quick Setup Guide
Important Information
CD-ROM
User’s manual
For VT676, VT670 and VT470 only
Remote mouse receiver
(7N900561)
Carrying handle (24F39671)
Screw (M442 :2ןN07502)
Flathead screwdriver (24H51611)
1
For Europe only
Guarantee policy
http://getMANUAL.com
1. Introduction
ᕢ Introduction to the Projector
This section introduces you to your new VT676/VT670/VT575/VT470/VT47 Projector and describes the features and
controls.
Congratulations on Your Purchase of The VT676/VT670/VT575/VT470/VT47 Projector
The VT676/VT670/VT575/VT470/VT47 is one of the very best projectors available today. The VT676/VT670/VT575/
VT470/VT47 enables you to project precise images up to 300 inches across (measured diagonally) from your PC or
Macintosh computer (desktop or notebook), VCR, DVD player, document camera, or a laser disc player.
You can use the projector on a tabletop or cart, you can use the projector to project images from behind the screen,
and the projector can be permanently mounted on a ceiling*1. The remote control can be used wirelessly.
*1 Do not attempt to mount the projector on a ceiling yourself.
The projector must be installed by qualified technicians in order to ensure proper operation and reduce the
risk of bodily injury.
In addition, the ceiling must be strong enough to support the projector and the installation must be in accordance with any local building codes. Please consult your dealer for more information.
Features you'll enjoy:
•
Auto vertical keystone correction up to +/– 30 degrees
•
Built-in Wall Color Correction presets provide for adaptive color correction when projecting onto non-white
screen material
•
Quick Start & Quick Shutoff
The quick start & quick shutoff function means you can set up or put away the projector without delay.
Nine seconds after turning on the power, the projector is ready to display PC or video images.
When you're finished, the fans stop in 30 seconds after turning off the power, so you can put away the projector
quickly after the conference or class.
•
Low level operation noise
•
Short focal length lens
•
130W lamp (110W Eco mode) : VT575/VT47
180W lamp (150W Eco mode) : VT670/VT470
190W lamp (150W Eco mode) : VT676
•
Direct keys for source selection
•
New Color Management system
•
New menu design improves operation
•
Safety protect by Security function
Security feature prevents the projector from being used by unauthorized individuals.
Keyword prevents unauthorized individuals from changing projector settings or adjustments.
•
NEC’s exclusive Advanced AccuBlend intelligent pixel blending technology - an extremely accurate image
compression technology - offers a crisp image with UXGA (1600 )0021ןresolution*2
•
Supports most IBM VGA, SVGA, XGA , SXGA/UXGA(with Advanced AccuBlend)*2, Macintosh, component
signal (YCbCr/ YPbPr) or any other RGB signals within a horizontal frequency range of 24 to 100 kHz and a
vertical frequency range of 50 to 120 Hz. This includes NTSC, PAL, PAL-N, PAL-M, PAL60, SECAM and
NTSC4.43 standard video signals.
*2 A UXGA (1600 )0021ןand SXGA image (1280 )4201ןare displayed with NEC’s Advanced AccuBlend on
VT676, VT670 and VT575.
A UXGA (1600 ,)0021ןSXGA (1280 )4201ןand XGA (1024 )867ןimage are displayed with NEC’s Advanced AccuBlend on VT470.
An SXGA (1280 )4201ןand XGA (1024 )867ןimages are displayed with NEC’s Advanced AccuBlend on
VT47.
2
1. Introduction
NOTE: Composite video standards are as follows:
NTSC: U.S. TV standard for video in U.S. and Canada.
PAL: TV standard used in Western Europe.
PAL-N: TV standard used in Argentine, Paraguay and Uruguay.
PAL-M: TV standard used in Brazil.
PAL60: TV standard used for NTSC playback on PAL TVs.
SECAM: TV standard used in France and Eastern Europe.
NTSC4.43: TV standard used in Middle East countries.
•
You can use the supplied wireless remote control and remote mouse receiver to operate your PC mouse
wireless from across the room. The remote mouse receiver supports almost any PC using a USB connection
(VT676, VT670 and VT470).
•
You can control the projector with a PC or control system using the PC Control port.
•
The contemporary cabinet design is light, compact, easy to carry, and complements any office, boardroom or
auditorium.
About this user's manual
The fastest way to get started is to take your time and do everything right the first time. Take a few minutes now to
review the user's manual. This may save you time later on. At the beginning of each section of the manual you'll find an
overview. If the section doesn't apply, you can skip it.
•
IBM is a trademark or registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.
•
Mac and PowerBook are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
•
Windows, Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows XP or Windows 2000 are trademarks or registered trademarks
of Microsoft Corporation.
•
Other product and company names mentioned in this user’s manual may be the trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective holders.
3
1. Introduction
ᕣ Part Names of the Projector
Front/Top
Controls
(See page 6)
TO
AU J.
AD
OM
ZO
Zoom Lever (VT676/VT670/VT575/VT470)
Digital Zoom Button (VT47)
(See page 25)
E
S
LE
T
C
LA
M
P
STA
TU
S
PO
W
ER
O
N
VID
/S
EO
TA
N
D
BY
S-V
FO
ID
EO
S
CU
C
O
M
PU
TE
R
-1
C
O
M
PU
TE
R
-2
Ventilation (inlet) / Filter Cover
(See page 48)
Focus Ring
(See page 25)
FO
S
CU
ZO
OM
Remote sensor
(See page 10)
Built-in Security Slot (
)*
Ventilation (inlet)
Lens
Adjustable Tilt Foot Lever
(See page 24)
Lens Cap
Adjustable Tilt Foot
(See page 24)
*
This security slot supports the MicroSaver ® Security System. MicroSaver ® is a registered trademark of
Kensington Microware Inc. The logo is trademarked and owned by Kensington Microware Inc.
Rear
S
CU
FO
ZOOM
SELE
CT
P
P
M
S
LA
TU
STA ER
W
O
EO
VID
D
N
TA
/S
N
O
BY
EO
ID
S-V
-1
R
TE
PU
M
O
C
-2
R
TE
PU
M
O
C
TO
AU J.
AD
Monaural Speaker
(1W)
VID
EO
Remote sensor
(See page 10)
IN
L/M
S-VID
EO
ON AU
O DI
O
R
IN
AU
DIO
L/M
ON AU
O DI
O
R
AU
DIO
OU
T
CO
MP
UT
ER
CO
MP
UT
ER
1 IN
AU
DIO
OU
T
PC
CO
NT
RO
L
CO
MP
UT
ER
2 IN
AC
Ventilation (outlet)
Heated air is exhausted from here.
IN
AC Input
Connect the supplied power cable's two-pin plug here, and
plug the other end into an active wall outlet. (See page 20)
Terminal Panel
(See page 7)
Main Power Switch
When you plug the supplied power cable into an active wall outlet
and turn on the Main Power, the POWER indicator turns orange
and the projector is in standby mode.
(See page 21)
4
1. Introduction
Bottom
Lamp Cover
(See page 50)
Adjustable Tilt Foot
(See page 24)
Adjustable Tilt Foot Lever
(See page 24)
Adjustable Tilt Foot Lever
(See page 24)
For VT676, VT670 and VT470 only
Attaching the supplied carrying handle
You can carry the projector by attaching the supplied carrying handle securely to the projector.
To attach the supplied carrying handle, use the supplied flathead screwdriver and two screws.
Place a soft cloth on the working surface before turning the projector over to prevent scratching the top cover.
Make sure that the carrying handle is attached with correct orientation as shown below.
Flathead screwdriver
Screw
Carrying handle
CAUTION
When carrying the projector by the carrying handle, make sure the two screws that attach the carrying handle
to the projector cabinet are tight.
5
1. Introduction
Top Features
VT676/VT670/VT575/VT470
VT47
COMPUTER
11 10 2 3 4
9
7
LAMP
AUTO
ADJ.
STATUS
POWER
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
COMPUTER-1 COMPUTER-2
8
SELECT
ON/STAND BY
AUTO
ADJ.
12
13
1
5
6
7
8
7. COMPUTER1 and 2 Buttons (one COMPUTER
port on VT47) Button
Press this button to select an RGB source from computer or component equipment connected to your
COMPUTER 1 or 2 port.
1. POWER Button (ON / STAND BY) ( )
Use this button to turn the power on and off when the
main power is supplied and the projector is in standby
mode.
To turn on the projector, press and hold this button for
a minimum of two seconds. To turn off the projector,
press this button twice.
8. AUTO ADJ. Button
Use this button to adjust an RGB source for an optimal picture (See page 28).
2. POWER Indicator
When this indicator is green, the projector is on; when
this indicator is orange, it is in standby mode. See the
Power Indicator section on page 53 for more details.
9. Source Indicators
When one of the COMPUTER, VIDEO or S-VIDEO
input is selected, the corresponding source indicator
lights.
3. STATUS Indicator
If this light blinks red rapidly, it indicates that an error
has occurred, the lamp cover is not attached properly
or the projector has overheated. If this light remains
orange, it indicates that you have pressed a cabinet
key while the Cabinet Button Lock is enabled. See the
Status Indicator section on page 53 for more details.
10. MENU Button
Displays the menu.
11. SELECT ̆̄̇̈ / Volume Buttons
̆̄ : Use these buttons to select the menu of the
item you wish to adjust.
̇̈ : Use these buttons to change the level of a selected menu item. A press of the ̈ button executes the selection. When no menus appear,
these buttons work as a volume control.
4. LAMP Indicator
If this light blinks red rapidly, it's warning you that the
lamp has reached the end of its usable life. After this
light appears, replace the lamp as soon as possible
(See page 50). If this is lit green continually, it indicates that the lamp mode is set to Eco. See the Lamp
Indicator section on page 53 for more details.
12. ENTER Button
Executes your menu selection and activates items
selected from the menu.
5. VIDEO Button
Press this button to select a video source from a VCR,
DVD player, laser disc player or document camera.
13. EXIT Button
Pressing this button will return to the previous menu.
While you are in the main menu, pressing this button
will close the menu.
6. S-VIDEO Button
Press this button to select an S-Video source from a
VCR, DVD player, laser disc player or document camera.
6
1. Introduction
Terminal Panel Features
VT676/VT670/VT575/VT470
4
VIDEO IN
1
L/MONO
L/MONO
S-VIDEO IN
AUDIO R
COMPUTER 1 IN
AUDIO R
AUDIO OUT
3
2
1
4
VT47
VIDEO IN
L/MONO
AUDIO R
MONITOR OUT
AUDIO
AUDIO
COMPUTER 2 IN
PC CONTROL
5
COMPUTER IN
S-VIDEO IN
MONITOR OUT
3
2
PC CONTROL
5
For example, when a cable mini-plug is inserted into
the left AUDIO IN jack only, only left sound is output.
1. COMPUTER 1 and 2 IN / Component Input Connector
(Mini D-Sub 15 Pin) (One COMPUTER port on VT47)
Connect your computer or other analog RGB equipment such as IBM compatible or Macintosh computers. Use the supplied RGB cable to connect to your
computer. This also serves as a component input connector that allows you to connect a component video
output of component equipment such as a DVD player.
This connector also supports SCART output signal.
See page 16 for more details.
3. S-VIDEO IN Connector (Mini DIN 4 Pin)
Here is where you connect the S-Video input from an
external source like a VCR.
NOTE: S-Video provides more vivid color and higher
resolution than the traditional composite video format.
S-VIDEO AUDIO Input Jacks L/R (RCA)
COMPUTER AUDIO Input Mini Jack (Stereo Mini)
These are your left and right channel audio inputs for
stereo sound from an S-Video source.
This is where you connect the audio output from your
computer or DVD player when connected to the COMPUTER input. A commercially available audio cable is
required.
4. VIDEO IN Connector (RCA)
Connect a VCR, DVD player, laser disc player, or document camera here to project video.
2. MONITOR OUT Connector (Mini D-Sub 15 Pin)
VIDEO AUDIO Input Jacks L/R (RCA)
You can use this connector to loop your computer
image to an external monitor from the RGB input
source.
These are your left and right channel audio inputs for
stereo sound from a Video source.
NOTE: The VIDEO AUDIO inputs can also be used as SVIDEO AUDIO inputs on VT47.
This connector outputs RGB signal in standby mode.
AUDIO OUT Mini Jack (Stereo Mini)
(Not available on VT47)
5. PC CONTROL Port (DIN 8 Pin)
You can use this jack to output sound from the currently selected source (COMPUTER, VIDEO or SVIDEO). Output sound level can be adjusted in accordance with the sound level of the internal speaker.
Use this port to connect a PC or control system. This
enables you to control the projector using serial communication protocol. If you are writing your own program, typical PC control codes are on page 62.
Note that this cannot be used as a headphone jack.
(When audio equipment is connected, the projector
speaker is disabled.)
When a cable mini-plug is inserted into this jack, both
the right and left audio signals are not mixed, but separate.
7
1. Introduction
ᕤ Part Names of the Remote Control
5. PIC-MUTE Button
This button turns off the image and sound for a short
period of time. Press again to restore the image and
sound.
1
OFF
3
ON
2
POWER
MAGNIFY PIC-MUTE
PAGE
6. PAGE UP/DOWN Button
(Not available on VT575 and VT47)
Use these buttons to operate your computer with the
supplied remote mouse receiver. See page 31. You
can use these buttons to scroll the viewing area of the
window or to move to the previous or next slide in
PowerPoint on your computer.
UP
4
6
DOWN
7
5
MENU
8
9
ENTER
EXIT
L-CLICK
11
13
14
12
8. SELECT ̆̄̇̈ (Mouse) Button
̆̄ : Use these buttons to select the menu of the
item you wish to adjust.
̇̈ : Use these buttons to change the level of a selected menu item. A press of the ̈ button executes the selection.
When an image is magnified, the SELECT ̆̄̇̈
button moves the image. See page 30.
COMPUTER AUTO ADJ.
1
S-VIDEO
2
VOLUME
17
R-CLICK
MOUSE
VIDEO
7. MENU Button
Displays the menu for various settings and adjustments.
10
ASPECT
HELP
PICTURE
16
15
18
20
FREEZE
21
19
9. ENTER Button
Use this button to enter your menu selection. It works
the same way as the ENTER button on the cabinet.
See page 6.
NOTE: If you are using a Macintosh computer, you can click
either the MOUSE R-CLICK or MOUSE L-CLICK button to
activate the mouse. (VT676/VT670/VT470 only)
10. EXIT Button
It works the same way as the EXIT button on the cabinet. See page 6.
1. Infrared Transmitter
Direct the remote control toward the remote sensor
on the projector cabinet.
11. MOUSE L-CLICK Button
(Not available on VT575 and VT47)
This button works as the mouse left button when the
supplied remote mouse receiver is connected with your
computer. See page 31.
2. POWER ON Button
When the main power is on, you can use this button
to turn your projector on.
12. MOUSE R-CLICK Button
(Not available on VT575 and VT47)
This button works as the mouse right button when the
supplied remote mouse receiver is connected with your
computer. See page 31.
NOTE: To turn on the projector, press and hold the POWER
ON button for a minimum of two seconds.
3. POWER OFF Button
You can use this button to turn your projector off.
NOTE: To turn off the projector, press the POWER OFF
button twice.
13. VIDEO Button
Press this button to select a video source from a VCR,
DVD player, laser disc player or document camera.
4. MAGNIFY (+)(–) Button
Use this button to adjust the image size up to 400%.
The image is magnified about the center of the screen.
See page 30.
14. S-VIDEO Button
Press this button to select an S-Video source from a
VCR.
8
1. Introduction
1
OFF
3
20. HELP Button
Provides the information on the current signal and projector settings. See page 46.
2
21. FREEZE Button
This button will freeze a picture. Press again to resume motion.
ON
POWER
MAGNIFY PIC-MUTE
PAGE
UP
4
6
DOWN
7
5
MENU
8
9
ENTER
EXIT
L-CLICK
11
13
14
12
COMPUTER AUTO ADJ.
1
S-VIDEO
2
VOLUME
17
R-CLICK
MOUSE
VIDEO
10
ASPECT
HELP
PICTURE
16
15
18
20
FREEZE
21
19
15. COMPUTER 1/2 Button
Press this button to select COMPUTER 1 or 2 (or Component) input. (One COMPUTER port on VT47)
16. AUTO ADJ. Button
Use this button to adjust an RGB source for an optimal picture.
See page 28.
17. VOLUME (+)(–) Button
Press (+) to increase the volume and (–) to decrease
it.
18. ASPECT Button
Press this button once to display the Aspect Ratio
select menu. Keep pressing will change aspect ratios.
See page 39.
19. PICTURE Button
Press this button to display the Picture adjustment
menu to adjust Wall Color, Picture Management,
Brightness, Contrast, Sharpness, Color and Hue. See
pages 37 to 38.
9
1. Introduction
Battery Installation
1 Press firmly and slide the
2 Remove both old batteries and
3 Slip the cover back over the bat-
install new ones (AAA). Ensure
that you have the batteries' polarity (+/–) aligned correctly.
teries until it snaps into place. Do
not mix different types of batteries or new and old batteries.
battery cover off.
Remote Control Precautions
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Handle the remote control carefully.
If the remote control gets wet, wipe it dry immediately.
Avoid excessive heat and humidity.
If you will not be using the remote control for a long time, remove the batteries.
Do not place the batteries upside down.
Do not use new and old batteries together, or use different types of batteries together.
Dispose of used batteries according to your local regulations.
Operating Range for Wireless Remote Control
Remote control
Remote sensor on projector cabinet
7m/22 feet
30°
30°
30°
30°
7m/22 feet
• The infrared signal operates by line-of-sight up to a distance of about 22 feet/7 m and within a 60-degree angle of
the remote sensor on the projector cabinet.
• The projector will not respond if there are objects between the remote control and the sensor, or if strong light falls
on the sensor. Weak batteries will also prevent the remote control from properly operating the projector.
10
2. Installation and Connections
This section describes how to set up your projector and how to connect video and audio sources.
Your projector is simple to set up and use.
But before you get started, you must first:
1
z Set up a screen and the projector.
x Connect your computer or video equipment to the projector. See pages 15 to
19.
c Connect the supplied power cable. See
page 20.
3
2
NOTE: Ensure that the power cable and any
other cables are disconnected before moving
the projector. When moving the projector or
when it is not in use, cover the lens with the
lens cap.
To the wall outlet.
ᕡ Setting Up the Screen and the Projector
Selecting a Location (VT676/VT670/VT575/VT470)
The further your projector is from the screen or wall, the larger the image. The minimum size the image can be is
approximately 21 " (0.53 m) measured diagonally when the projector is roughly 29 inches (0.73 m) from the wall or
screen. The largest the image can be is 300 " (7.6 m) when the projector is about 393 inches (10 m) from the wall or
screen. Use the drawing below as a guide.
Screen Size (Unit: cm/inch)
609.6(W)(2.754ןH) / 240(W)(081ןH)
Screen Size
30
0 "
487.7(W)(8.563ןH) / 192(W)(441ןH)
24
0 "
406.4(W)(8.403ןH) / 160(W)(021ןH)
20
0 "
365.8(W)(3.472ןH) / 144(W)(801ןH)
18
0 "
304.8(W)(6.822ןH) / 120(W)(09ןH)
15
0 "
243.8(W)(9.281ןH) / 96(W)(27ןH)
12
203.2(W)(4.251ןH) / 80(W)(06ןH)
162.6(W)(9.121ןH) / 64(W)(84ןH)
"
121.9(W)(4.19ןH) / 48(W)(63ןH)
/3
9
31
4
8.
0/
23
6
6.
6/
26
2
)
6.
0/
/1
96
/in
ch
5.
0
57
m
is
ta
nc
e
(U
ni
t:
30
0/
1
4.
/1
10
4
6/
3.
3
D
IN
2.
1.
0
0
29 .7/
"
/3
8
1.
51 3/
2.
0/
78
3
10
.0
"
40
21 " 0 "
AC
3
60
61.0(W)(7.54ןH) / 24(W)(81ןH)
Lens center
0 "
80
81.3(W)(0.16ןH) / 32(W)(42ןH)
42.7(W)(23ןH) / 17(W)(31ןH)
0 "
10
11
http://getMANUAL.com
2. Installation and Connections
Selecting a Location (VT47)
The further your projector is from the screen or wall, the larger the image. The minimum size the image can be is
approximately 25 " (0.64 m) measured diagonally when the projector is roughly 23 inches (0.6 m) from the wall or
screen. The largest the image can be is 300 " (7.6 m) when the projector is about 287 inches (7.3 m) from the wall or
screen. Use the drawing below as a guide.
Screen Size (Unit: cm/inch)
609.6(W)(2.754ןH) / 240(W)(081ןH)
30
0 "
Screen Size
487.7(W)(8.563ןH) / 192(W)(441ןH)
24
0 "
406.4(W)(8.403ןH) / 160(W)(021ןH)
20
0 "
18
0 "
365.8(W)(3.472ןH) / 144(W)(801ןH)
304.8(W)(6.822ןH) / 120(W)(09ןH)
15
0 "
243.8(W)(9.281ןH) / 96(W)(27ןH)
12
203.2(W)(4.251ןH) / 80(W)(06ןH)
80
121.9(W)(4.19ןH) / 48(W)(63ןH)
60
81.3(W)(0.16ןH) / 32(W)(42ןH)
40
50.8(W)(1.83ןH) / 20(W)(51ןH)
0 "
0 "
10
162.6(W)(9.121ןH) / 64(W)(84ןH)
25
"
"
"
)
ch
1. 56
9/
2. 76
4/
2. 95
9/
1
3. 14
6/
1
4. 43
4/
17
4. 2
9/
1
5. 91
8/
D
22
is
ta
nc 7.3 9
e
/
(U 28
7
n
/in
4/
IN
it:
m
1.
AC
1.
0/
0.
23 6/
37
"
Lens center
NOTE: Digital Zoom can cause result in a blurry image because zooming is made electronically.
12
2. Installation and Connections
Throw Distance and Screen Size
The following shows the proper relative positions of the projector and screen. Refer to the table to determine the
position of installation.
Distance Chart
Screen Width
Screen Diagonal
Screen center
Screen Height
(B)
Screen Bottom
(D)
Lens Center
Throw Angle (Ͱ)
Throw Distance (C)
AC
B = Vertical distance between lens center and
screen center
C = Throw distance
D = Vertical distance between lens center and
bottom of screen (top of screen for ceiling
application)
α = Throw angle
NOTE: Distances may vary +/-5%.
IN
VT676/VT670/VT575/VT470
Diagonal
inch
21
25
30
40
60
72
80
84
90
100
120
150
180
200
210
240
270
300
Screen Size
Width
inch
17
20
24
32
48
58
64
67
72
80
96
120
144
160
168
192
216
240
B
Height
inch
13
15
18
24
36
43
48
50
54
60
72
90
108
120
126
144
162
180
VT47
Diagonal
inch
25
30
40
60
72
80
84
90
100
120
150
180
200
210
240
270
300
inch
5
6
7
10
14
17
19
20
22
24
29
36
43
48
50
57
65
72
Screen Size
Width
inch
20
24
32
48
58
64
67
72
80
96
120
144
160
168
192
216
240
C
Wide – Tele
inch
–– –
29
28 –
34
34 –
42
46 –
56
70 –
85
84 – 102
93 – 113
98 – 119
105 – 128
117 – 142
141 – 171
176 – 214
212 – 257
236 – 285
247 – 300
283 – 343
319 – 386
354 – 429
Height
inch
15
18
24
36
43
48
50
54
60
72
90
108
120
126
144
162
180
D
inch
-1
-2
-2
-2
-4
-4
-5
-5
-6
-6
-7
-9
-11
-12
-13
-15
-17
-18
B
C
inch
6
7
10
14
17
19
20
22
24
29
36
43
48
50
57
65
72
inch
23
28
37
56
68
76
80
85
95
114
143
172
191
201
229
258
287
α
Wide – Tele
degree
–– – 9.9
12.0 – 9.8
11.9 – 9.8
11.7 – 9.7
11.6 – 9.6
11.6 – 9.6
11.6 – 9.6
11.6 – 9.6
11.5 – 9.6
11.5 – 9.6
11.5 – 9.5
11.5 – 9.5
11.5 – 9.5
11.5 – 9.5
11.5 – 9.5
11.5 – 9.5
11.4 – 9.5
11.4 – 9.5
D
Diagonal
mm
533
635
762
1016
1524
1829
2032
2134
2286
2540
3048
3810
4572
5080
5334
6096
6858
7620
inch degree
-2
14.6
-2
14.5
-2
14.4
-4
14.2
-4
14.2
-5
14.2
-5
14.2
-6
14.1
-6
14.1
-7
14.1
-9
14.1
-11
14.1
-12
14.0
-13
14.0
-15
14.0
-17
14.0
-18
14.0
13
Height
mm
320
381
457
610
914
1097
1219
1280
1372
1524
1829
2286
2743
3048
3200
3658
4115
4572
mm
130
150
180
240
360
440
490
510
550
610
730
910
1090
1210
1270
1460
1640
1820
Diagonal
mm
635
762
1016
1524
1829
2032
2134
2286
2540
3048
3810
4572
5080
5334
6096
6858
7620
α
Screen Size
Width
mm
427
508
610
813
1219
1463
1626
1707
1829
2032
2438
3048
3658
4064
4267
4877
5486
6096
B
C
Wide – Tele
mm
––– – 730
720 – 870
870 – 1060
1170 – 1420
1770 – 2150
2130 – 2590
2370 – 2880
2490 – 3020
2670 – 3240
2970 – 3600
3580 – 4330
4480 – 5420
5380 – 6520
5980 – 7240
6280 – 7610
7190 – 8700
8090 – 9790
8990 – 10880
Screen Size
Width
mm
508
610
813
1219
1463
1626
1707
1829
2032
2438
3048
3658
4064
4267
4877
5486
6096
Height
mm
381
457
610
914
1097
1219
1280
1372
1524
1829
2286
2743
3048
3200
3658
4115
4572
B
C
mm
150
180
240
360
440
490
510
550
610
730
910
1090
1210
1270
1460
1640
1820
mm
580
700
950
1440
1730
1920
2020
2170
2410
2900
3630
4360
4850
5100
5830
6560
7290
D
D
mm
-30
-40
-50
-60
-90
-110
-120
-130
-140
-160
-190
-230
-280
-310
-330
-370
-420
-470
α
mm degree
-40
14.6
-50
14.5
-60
14.4
-90
14.2
-110
14.2
-120
14.2
-130
14.2
-140
14.1
-160
14.1
-190
14.1
-230
14.1
-280
14.1
-310
14.0
-330
14.0
-370
14.0
-420
14.0
-470
14.0
α
Wide – Tele
degree
–– – 9.9
12.0 – 9.8
11.9 – 9.8
11.7 – 9.7
11.6 – 9.6
11.6 – 9.6
11.6 – 9.6
11.6 – 9.6
11.5 – 9.6
11.5 – 9.6
11.5 – 9.5
11.5 – 9.5
11.5 – 9.5
11.5 – 9.5
11.5 – 9.5
11.5 – 9.5
11.4 – 9.5
11.4 – 9.5
2. Installation and Connections
• Ensure that you have adequate ventilation around your
projector so heat can dissipate. Do not cover the vents
on the side or the front of the projector.
WARNING
* Installing your projector on the ceiling must be done
by a qualified technician. Contact your NEC dealer for
more information.
* Do not attempt to install the projector yourself.
• Only use your projector on a solid, level surface. If the
projector falls to the ground, you can be injured and
the projector severely damaged.
• Do not use the projector where temperatures vary
greatly. The projector must be used at temperatures
between 41˚F (5˚C) and 95˚F (35˚C).
• Do not expose the projector to moisture, dust, or
smoke. This will harm the screen image.
Reflecting the Image
Using a mirror to reflect your projector's image enables
you to enjoy a much larger image. Contact your NEC
dealer if you need a mirror system. If you're using a mirror system and your image is inverted, use the MENU
and SELECT buttons on your projector cabinet or your
remote control to correct the orientation. See page 41.
14
2. Installation and Connections
ᕢ Making Connections
NOTE: When using with a notebook PC, be sure to connect between the projector and the notebook PC before turning on the
power to the notebook PC. In most cases signal cannot be output from RGB output unless the notebook PC is turned on after
connecting with the projector.
* If the screen goes blank while using your remote control, it may be the result of the computer's screen-saver or power
management software.
Enabling the computer’s external display
Displaying an image on the notebook PC’s screen does not necessarily mean it outputs a signal to the projector.
When using a PC compatible laptop, a combination of function keys will enable/disable the external display.
Usually, the combination of the ‘Fn” key along with one of the 12 function keys gets the external display to come on
or off. For example, NEC laptops use Fn + F3, while Dell laptops use Fn + F8 key combinations to toggle through
external display selections.
Connecting Your PC or Macintosh Computer
NOTE: • VT676/VT670/VT575/VT470: The COMPUTER 1 connector supports Plug & Play (DDC2).
• VT47: The COMPUTER connector supports Plug & Play (DDC2).
VT676/VT670/VT575/VT470
VT47
COMPUTER 1 IN
VIDEO IN
L/MONO
AUDIO
R
S-VIDEO IN
L/MONO
AUDIO
R
COMPUTER 1 IN
COMPUTER 2 IN
AUDIO
COMPUTER IN
COMPUTER 2 IN
VIDEO IN
L/MONO
AUDIO
R
AUDIO
COMPUTER IN
PC CONTROL
AUDIO OUT
MONITOR OUT
AUDIO
S-VIDEO IN
MONITOR OUT
PC CONTROL
AC IN
RGB/VGA signal cable (supplied)
To mini D-Sub 15-pin connector on the projector. It
is recommended that you use a commercially
available distribution amplifier if connecting a
signal cable longer than the supplied one.
Audio cable
(not supplied)
PHONE
PHONE
NOTE: For older Macintosh, use a
commercially available pin adapter
(not supplied) to connect to your
Mac's video port.
IBM VGA or Compatibles (Notebook
type) or Macintosh (Notebook type)
IBM PC or Compatibles (Desktop type)
or Macintosh (Desktop type)
Connecting your PC or Macintosh computer to your projector will enable you to project your computer's screen image
for an impressive presentation.
To connect to a PC or Macintosh, simply:
1. Turn off the power to your projector and computer.
2. Use the supplied RGB/VGA signal cable to connect your PC or Macintosh to the projector.
3. Connect the supplied power cable. See page 20.
4. Turn on the projector and the computer.
5. If the projector goes blank after a period of inactivity, it may be caused by a screen saver installed on the computer
you've connected to the projector.
15
2. Installation and Connections
NOTE: The projector is not compatible with video decoded outputs of either the NEC ISS-6020 and ISS-6010 switchers.
NOTE: An image may not be displayed correctly when a Video or S-Video source is played back via a commercially available scan
converter.
This is because the projector will process a video signal as a computer signal at the default setting. In that case, do the following.
* When an image is displayed with the lower and upper black portion of the screen or a dark image is not displayed correctly:
Project an image to fill the screen and then press the AUTO ADJ button on the remote control or the projector cabinet.
To connect SCART output (RGB)
Projector
COMPUTER 1 IN
VIDEO IN
Video equipment such as DVD player
L/MONO
AUDIO
L/MONO
AUDIO
R
COMPUTER 1 IN
R
S-VIDEO IN
AUDIO OUT
AUDIO
COMPUTER 2 IN
PC CONTROL
MONITOR OUT
Female
AC IN
To COMPUTER 1 input
(COMPUTER input on VT47)
ADP-SC1
Commercially available SCART cable
Before connections: An exclusive SCART adapter (ADP-SC1) and a commercially available SCART cable are required for this connection.
NOTE: Audio signal is not available for this connection.
1. Turn off the power to the projector and your video equipment.
2. Use the NEC ADP-SC1 SCART adapter and a commercially available SCART cable to connect the RGB input of
your projector and a SCART output (RGB) of your video equipment.
3. Connect the supplied power cable. See page 20.
4. Turn on the power to the projector and your video equipment.
5. Use the COMPUTER 1 button on the projector cabinet to select the COMPUTER 1 input.
Use the COMPUTER button on the projector cabinet to select the COMPUTER input on VT47.
6. Press the MENU button on the projector cabinet to display the menu.
7. From the menu, select [Advanced] → [Signal Select] → [Computer 1 ([Computer] on VT47)] → [Scart].
SCART is a standard European audio-visual connector for TVs, VCRs and DVD players. It is also referred to as
Euro-connector.
NOTE: The ADP-SC1 SCART adapter is obtainable from your NEC dealer in Europe. Contact your NEC dealer in Europe for more
information.
16
2. Installation and Connections
Connecting an External Monitor
VIDEO IN
L/MONO
AUDIO
R
S-VIDEO IN
L/MONO
AUDIO
R
MONITOR OUT
COMPUTER 1 IN
AUDIO
AUDIO
COMPUTER 2 IN
PC CONTROL
AUDIO OUT
MONITOR OUT
MONITOR OUT
AC IN
RGB/VGA signal cable (supplied)
RGB/VGA signal cable (not supplied)
You can connect a separate, external monitor to your projector to simultaneously view on a monitor the RGB analog
image you're projecting.
To do so:
1. Turn off the power to your projector, monitor and computer.
2. Use an RGB/VGA cable to connect your monitor to the MONITOR OUT (Mini D-Sub 15 pin) connector on your projector.
3. Connect the supplied power cable. See page 20.
4. Turn on the projector, monitor and the computer.
NOTE: Daisy chain connection is not possible.
17
2. Installation and Connections
Connecting Your DVD Player with Component Output
VT676/VT670/VT575/VT470
VT47
AUDIO
COMPUTER 1 IN
COMPUTER IN
VIDEO IN
VIDEO IN
L/MONO
AUDIO
S-VIDEO IN
L/MONO
AUDIO
R
COMPUTER 1 IN
R
AUDIO
COMPUTER 2 IN
L/MONO
AUDIO R
AUDIO
COMPUTER IN
S-VIDEO IN
AUDIO OUT
MONITOR OUT
PC CONTROL
PC CONTROL
MONITOR OUT
AC IN
Optional 15-pin - to - RCA (female)
3ןcable (ADP-CV1)
Component video RCA3ן
cable (not supplied)
Audio Equipment
DVD player
Y
Cb
Cr
Component
L
R
AUDIO IN
AUDIO OUT
L
R
Audio cable (not supplied)
You can connect your projector to a DVD player with component output or Video output. To do so, simply:
1. Turn off the power to your projector and DVD player.
2. If your DVD player has the component video (Y,Cb,Cr) output, use a commercially available component video cable
(RCA )3ןand the optional 15-pin-to-RCA (female) 3ןcable to connect your DVD player to the COMPUTER IN
connector on the projector.
For a DVD player without component video (Y,Cb,Cr) output, use common RCA cables (not provided) to connect a
composite VIDEO output of the DVD player to the Video Input of the projector.
3. Connect the supplied power cable. See page 20.
4. Turn on the projector and DVD player.
A component signal will be automatically displayed. If not, from the menu, select [Advanced] → [Signal Select] →
[Computer], and then place a check mark in the Component radio button.
NOTE: Refer to your DVD player's owner's manual for more information about your DVD player's video output requirements.
18
2. Installation and Connections
Connecting Your VCR or Laser Disc Player
VIDEO IN
AUDIO
VIDEO IN
L/MONO
AUDIO
S-VIDEO IN
L/MONO
AUDIO
R
COMPUTER 1 IN
R
S-VIDEO IN
AUDIO OUT
AUDIO
COMPUTER 2 IN
PC CONTROL
MONITOR OUT
AUDIO
AC IN
S-Video cable (not supplied)
Video cable (not supplied)
Audio equipment
VCR/ Laser disc player
L
R
AUDIO OUT
VIDEO S-VIDEO
AUDIO IN
VIDEO OUT
L
R
Audio cable (not supplied)
Use an RCA or S-Video cable (not provided) to connect the video and use RCA cables (not provided) to connect
the audio from your VCR, laser disc player or document camera to your projector.
To make these connections, simply:
1. Turn off the power to the projector and VCR, laser disc player or document camera.
2. Connect one end of an RCA cable to the video output (or one end of an S-Video cable to the S-Video output
connector) on the back of your VCR or laser disc player, connect the other end to the appropriate video input
on your projector. Connect one end of a pair RCA cables (not supplied) to the audio output on the back of your
VCR or laser disc player, connect the other end to your audio equipment or to the appropriate audio input on
the projector.
Be careful to keep the right and left channel connections correct for stereo sound.
NOTE: The AUDIO IN L/MONO and R jacks (RCA) are shared between the Video and S-Video inputs on VT47.
3. Connect the supplied power cable. See page 20.
4. Turn on the projector and the VCR or laser disc player.
NOTE: Refer to your VCR or laser disc player owner's manual for more information about your equipment's video output
requirements.
NOTE: An image may not be displayed correctly when a Video or S-Video source is played back in fast-forward or fast-rewind via
a scan converter.
19
2. Installation and Connections
Connecting the Supplied Power Cable
Connect the supplied power cable to the projector.
First connect the supplied power cable's two-pin plug to the AC IN of the projector, and then connect the other plug of
the supplied power cable in the wall outlet.
C
FO
US
ZOOM
SELE
CT
LA
M
P
ST
AT
U
S
PO
W
ER
N
VID
O
TA
EO
/S
N
D
BY
S-V
ID
EO
C
O
M
PU
TE
R
-1
C
O
M
PU
TE
R
-2
TO
AU DJ.
A
VIDE
O IN
L/M
ON AU
O DI
O
S-VI
DE
R
O IN
AU
DIO
L/M
ON AU
O DI
O
CO
R
MPU
TE
AU
DIO
R1
OUT
IN
AU
DIO
CO
MPU
TE
R
OUT
CO
PC
MPU
TE
R2
CO
NT
RO
IN
L
AC
IN
To wall outlet ←
Make sure that the prongs are fully inserted into
both the AC IN and the wall outlet.
CAUTION:
Do not unplug the power cable from the wall outlet under any one of the following circumstances.
Doing so can cause damage to the projector:
• While the Hour Glass icon appears.
• While the cooling fans are running. The cooling fans continue to work for 30 seconds after the projector is
turned off.
20
3. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
This section describes how to turn on the projector and to project a picture onto the screen.
ᕡ Turning on the Projector
NOTE:
• The projector has two power switches: a main power switch and a POWER (ON/STAND BY) button (POWER ON and OFF on the
remote control).
• When plugging in or unplugging the supplied power cable, make sure that the main power switch is pushed to the off (⅜)
position. Failure to do so may cause damage to the projector.
LAMP
FO
CU
S
STATUS
POWER
ZO
OM
1. To turn on the main power to the projector, press the
Main Power switch to the on position ( I ).
•
The POWER indicator will light orange.
See the Power Indicator section on page 53 for more
details.
AC
2. Press the POWER (ON/STAND BY) button on the
projector cabinet or the POWER ON button on the
remote control for a minimum of 2 seconds. The
POWER indicator will turn to green and the projector
will become ready to use.
IN
LAMP
STATUS
POWER
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
SELECT
ON/STAND BY
After you turn on your projector, ensure that the
computer or video source is turned on and that your
lens cap is removed.
OFF
ON
POWER
MAGNIFY PIC-MUTE
NOTE: When no signal is available, a blue, black or logo screen is
displayed.
When the projector displays a blue or a black screen (not logo),
the Eco mode will be automatically selected in " Lamp Mode. "
NOTE: If you turn on the projector immediately after the lamp is
turned off or when the temperature is high, the fans runs without
displaying an image for some time and then the projector will
display the image.
PAGE
UP
DOWN
MENU
Standby
Blinking
Power On
LAMP
LAMP
LAMP
STATUS
STATUS
STATUS
POWER
POWER
POWER
Steady orange light
Blinking green
light
See page 53 for more details.
21
Steady green
light
http://getMANUAL.com
3. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
Note on Startup screen (Menu Language Select screen)
When you first turn on the projector, you will get the Startup menu. This menu gives you the opportunity to select one
of the 8 menu languages.
To select a menu language, follow these steps:
1. Use the SELECT ̆ or ̄ button to select one of the 8
languages for the menu.
LAMP
STATUS
POWER
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
COMPUTER-1 COMPUTER-2
SELECT
ON/STAND BY
AUTO
ADJ.
OFF
ON
POWER
MAGNIFY PIC-MUTE
PAGE
UP
DOWN
MENU
ENTER
EXIT
LAMP
STATUS
POWER
2. Press the ENTER button to execute the selection.
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
COMPUTER-1 COMPUTER-2
SELECT
ON/STAND BY
After this has been done, you can proceed to the menu operation.
If you want, you can select the menu language later. See " Language " on pages 35 and 41.
AUTO
ADJ.
OFF
ON
POWER
MAGNIFY PIC-MUTE
PAGE
UP
DOWN
MENU
ENTER
EXIT
NOTE: Immediately after turning on the projector, screen flicker may occur. This is not a fault. Wait 3 to 5 minutes until the lamp
lighting is stabilized.
When the Lamp mode is set to Eco, the LAMP indicator will light green.
If one of the following things happens, the projector will not turn on.
• If the internal temperature of the projector is too high, the projector detects abnormal high temperature. In this
condition the projector will not turn on to protect the internal system. If this happens, wait for the projector's internal
components to cool down.
• When the lamp reaches its end of usable life, the projector will not turn on. If this happens, replace the lamp.
• If the lamp fails to light, and if the STATUS indicator flashes on and off in a cycle of six times, wait a full minute and
then turn on the power.
22
3. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
ᕢ Selecting a Source
Selecting the computer or video source
NOTE: Turn on the computer or VCR connected to the projector.
Using the cabinet buttons
LAMP
STATUS
Press any one of the COMPUTER 1/2 (COMPUTER button on VT47),
VIDEO and S-VIDEO buttons.
The corresponding indicator will light green.
Using the Remote Control
POWER
COMPUTER-1 COMPUTER-2
AUTO
ADJ.
R-CLICK
VIDEO
COMPUTER AUTO ADJ.
MOUSE
1
S-VIDEO
2
VOLUME
ASPECT
HELP
PICTURE
23
S-VIDEO
ON/STAND BY
L-CLICK
Press any one of the COMPUTER 1/2, VIDEO or S-VIDEO buttons.
(One COMPUTER port on VT47)
VIDEO
SELECT
FREEZE
3. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
ᕣ Adjusting the Picture Size and Position
Place your projector on a flat level surface and ensure that the projector is
square to the screen.
FOC
Lift the front edge of the projector to center the image vertically.
* If the projected image does not appear square to the screen then use the
Keystone feature for proper adjustment. See page 26.
US
ZOOM
AC
IN
Move the projector left to center the image horizontally on the screen.
US
FOC
ZOOM
AC
IN
Adjust the Tilt Foot
1. Lift the front edge of the projector.
CT
LE
SE
MP
LA
US
AT
ST
ER
W
PO
VI
O
DE
ND
TA
/S
ON
BY
O
DE
VI
S-
-1
ER
UT
MP
CO
-2
ER
UT
MP
CO
TO
AU J.
AD
1
2. Push up the Adjustable Tilt Foot Levers on the right and left sides
of the projector to extend the adjustable tilt feet (maximum height).
FO
S
CU
OM
ZO
2
Adjustable Tilt
Foot Lever
2
Adjustable Tilt Foot
Adjustable Tilt
Foot Lever
-2
ER
UT
MP
CO
-1
ER
UT
MP
CO
O
DE
ND
/S
4
LE
SE
CT
S
CU
24
ON
ER
W
PO
US
AT
ST
MP
LA
3
FO
CAUTION
Do not use the tilt-foot for purposes other than originally intended. Misuses
such as gripping the tilt-foot or hanging on the wall can cause damage to the
projector.
TA
BY
VI
S-
O
DE
VI
4
OM
ZO
4. Lower the front of the projector to the desired height and release
the Adjustable Tilt Foot Lever to lock the Adjustable tilt foot. There
is approximately 10 degrees of up and down adjustment for the
front of the projector.
TO
AU J.
AD
3. Push down the Adjustable Tilt Foot Levers.
3. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
VT676/VT670/VT575/VT470
Zoom
VT676/VT670/VT575/VT470
C
FO
Use the ZOOM lever to finely adjust the image size on the
screen.
US
ZOO
M
VT47
VT47
C
FO
Use the Digital ZOOM button on the projector cabinet to
electronically enlarge or reduce the image size.
US
ZOO
M
US
FOC
NOTE: Digital Zoom can cause result in a blurry image because
zooming is made electronically.
ZOOM
AC
IN
Focus
Use the FOCUS ring to obtain the best focus.
C
FO
US
US
FOC
ZOOM
AC
25
IN
3. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
ᕤ Correcting Keystone Distortion
Auto Keystone Correction
The Auto Keystone correction feature will correct the vertical distortion of a projected image on the screen. No special
operation required. Just put the projector on a flat surface.
Note that the vertical keystone angle can be corrected between 30 degrees upward and 30 degrees downward of
projector tilt from level.
NOTE: Auto and Manual Keystone correction angle could be less than 30 degrees depending on some kinds of signal and aspect
ratios.
NOTE: The Auto Keystone Correction feature can cause an image to be slightly blurred because the correction is made electronically.
Manual Keystone Correction
You can also correct the vertical keystone distortion manually.
To do so:
1. Press the MENU button.
The menu will be displayed.
2. Turn off the Auto Keystone function.
Use the SELECT ̄ button to select
“Image” and then press the SELECT ̈
button. The “Auto Keystone” will be
displayed. Press the SELECT ̈ to select
“Off”.
3. Select the Keystone function.
Use the SELECT ̄ button to select
“Keystone”.
4. Correct the vertical distortion.
Use the SELECT ̇ or ̈ button to correct
the vertical keystone distortion.
NOTE: The Keystone Correction feature can cause
an image to be slightly blurred because the
correction is made electronically.
26
3. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
5. Press the MENU button to close the menu.
NOTE: You can save the changes using the Keystone Save
feature when you turn off the projector. See page 39.
27
3. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
ᕥ Optimizing RGB Picture Automatically
Adjusting the Image Using Auto Adjust
Optimizing an RGB image automatically.
Press the AUTO ADJ. button to optimize an RGB image automatically.
[Poor picture]
VT676/VT670/VT575/VT470
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
COMPUTER-1 COMPUTER-2
AUTO
ADJ.
VT47
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
COMPUTER
AUTO
ADJ.
[Normal picture]
L-CLICK
R-CLICK
VIDEO
COMPUTER AUTO ADJ.
MOUSE
1
S-VIDEO
2
VOLUME
ASPECT
HELP
PICTURE
FREEZE
Press the AUTO ADJ. button to fine-tune the computer image or to remove any vertical banding that might appear and
to reduce video noise, dot interference or cross talk (this is evident when part of your image appears to be shimmering). This function adjusts the clock frequencies that eliminate the horizontal banding in the image. This function also
adjusts the clock phase to reduce video noise, dot interference or cross talk. (This is evident when part of your image
appears to be shimmering.)
This adjustment may be necessary when you connect your computer for the first time.
NOTE:
Some signals may not be displayed correctly or take time.
• The Auto Adjust function does not work for component and video signal.
• If the Auto Adjust operation cannot optimize the RGB signal, try to adjust Horizontal/Vertical Position Clock and Phase
manually. See pages 45 and 46.
ᕦ Turning Up or Down Volume
L-CLICK
R-CLICK
VIDEO
COMPUTER AUTO ADJ.
MOUSE
1
S-VIDEO
Increase volume
2
VOLUME
ASPECT
HELP
PICTURE
FREEZE
Decrease volume
28
Sound level from the speaker and the AUDIO OUT jack (Stereo mini) on the projector can be adjusted.
3. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
ᕧ Turning off the Projector
To turn off the projector:
LAMP
STATUS
First, press the POWER (ON/STAND BY) button on the
projector cabinet or the POWER OFF button on the remote control. The “Power Off / Are you sure?” message
will appear.
POWER
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
COMPUTER-1 COMPUTER-2
SELECT
ON/STAND BY
AUTO
ADJ.
OFF
ON
POWER
MAGNIFY PIC-MUTE
PAGE
UP
DOWN
MENU
Secondly, press the ENTER button or press the POWER
(ON/STAND BY) or the POWER OFF button again.
The power indicator will glow orange. After the projector
turns off, the cooling fans keep operating for 30 seconds
(Cooling-off time).
Immediately after turning on the projector and displaying
an image, you cannot turn off the projector for 60 seconds.
Finally, turn off the Main Power switch. The power indicator will go out.
ENTER
L-CLICK
Power On
Fan running
Standby
LAMP
LAMP
LAMP
STATUS
STATUS
STATUS
POWER
POWER
POWER
Steady orange
light
ᕨ After Use
Preparation: Make sure that the projector is turned off.
1. Unplug the power cable.
2. Disconnect any other cables.
3. Retract adjustable tilt feet if extended.
4. Cover the lens with the lens cap.
5. Put the projector and its accessories in the supplied soft carrying case.
OM
ZO
CAUTION
Do not unplug the power cable from the wall outlet or do not turn off
the main power under any one of the following circumstances. Doing
so can cause damage to the projector:
• While the Hour Glass icon appears.
• While the cooling fans are running. (The cooling fans continue to
work for 30 seconds after the projector is turned off)
Blinking
orange light
FO
CU
S
Steady green light
29
EXIT
R-CLICK
AC
IN
4. Convenient Features
³ Turning off the Image and Sound
Press the PIC-MUTE button to turn off the image and sound for a short
period of time. Press again to restore the image and sound.
OFF
ON
POWER
MAGNIFY PIC-MUTE
PAGE
UP
DOWN
MENU
ENTER
EXIT
· Freezing a Picture
Press the FREEZE button to freeze a picture. Press again to resume
motion.
1
S-VIDEO
2
VOLUME
ASPECT
HELP
PICTURE
FREEZE
ᕣ Enlarging and Moving a Picture
You can enlarge the picture up to 400 percent.
To do so:
1. Press the MAGNIFY (+) button to magnify the picture.
To move the magnified image, use the SELECT button.
OFF
ON
POWER
MAGNIFY PIC-MUTE
PAGE
UP
DOWN
MENU
ENTER
EXIT
OFF
ON
POWER
MAGNIFY PIC-MUTE
PAGE
UP
DOWN
MENU
ENTER
EXIT
2. Return the image to the original size.
OFF
ON
POWER
MAGNIFY PIC-MUTE
PAGE
UP
DOWN
MENU
ENTER
30
EXIT
4. Convenient Features
ᕤ Using Remote Mouse Receiver
(VT676/VT670/VT470 only)
The remote mouse receiver enables you to operate your computer’s mouse functions from the remote control. It is a
great convenience for clicking through your computer-generated presentations.
Connecting the remote mouse receiver to your computer
If you wish to use the remote mouse function, connect the mouse receiver and computer.
The mouse receiver can be connected directly to the computer’s USB port (type A).
NOTE: Depending on the type of connection or OS installed on your computer, you may have to restart your computer or change
your computer settings.
Computer
Remote mouse receiver
To USB port of PC or Macintosh
When operating a computer via the remote mouse receiver
7m/22 feet
30˚
30˚
Remote sensor on the
remote mouse receiver
When connecting using the USB terminal
For PC, the mouse receiver can only be used with a Windows 98/Me/XP* or Windows 2000 operating system.
* NOTE: In Windows XP, if the mouse cursor will not move correctly, do the following:
Clear the Enhance pointer precision check box underneath the mouse speed slider in the Mouse Properties dialog box [Pointer
Options tab].
NOTE: Wait at least 5 seconds after disconnecting the mouse receiver before reconnecting it and vice versa. The computer may
not identify the mouse receiver if it is repeatedly connected and disconnected in rapid intervals.
Operating your computer’s mouse from the remote control
You can operate your computer's mouse from the remote control.
PAGE UP/DOWN Button: scrolls the viewing area of the window or to move to the previous or next slide in PowerPoint
on your computer.
̆̄̇̈ / Mouse Buttons: moves the mouse cursor on your computer.
MOUSE L-CLICK Button: works as the mouse left button.
MOUSE R-CLICK Button: works as the mouse right button.
31
http://getMANUAL.com
5. Using On-Screen Menu
ᕡ Using the Menus
NOTE: The on-screen menu may not be displayed correctly while interlaced motion video image is projected.
1. Press the MENU button on the remote control or projector cabinet to display the Menu.
OFF
ON
POWER
MAGNIFY PIC-MUTE
PAGE
UP
DOWN
MENU
ENTER
EXIT
2. Press the SELECT ̆ or ̄ button on the remote control or the projector cabinet to highlight the menu for
the item you want to adjust or set.
OFF
ON
POWER
MAGNIFY PIC-MUTE
PAGE
UP
DOWN
MENU
ENTER
EXIT
3. Press the SELECT ̈ button or the ENTER button on the remote control or the projector cabinet to select
a submenu or item.
OFF
ON
POWER
MAGNIFY PIC-MUTE
PAGE
UP
DOWN
MENU
ENTER
32
EXIT
5. Using On-Screen Menu
4. Use the SELECT ̆ or ̄ button on the remote control or the projector cabinet to select the item you want
to adjust or set.
OFF
ON
POWER
MAGNIFY PIC-MUTE
PAGE
UP
DOWN
MENU
ENTER
5. Adjust the level or turn the selected item on or off by using
SELECT ̇ or ̈ button on the remote control or the projector
cabinet.
EXIT
OFF
ON
POWER
MAGNIFY PIC-MUTE
The on-screen slide bar will show you the amount of increase
or decrease.
Changes are stored until you adjust it again.
PAGE
UP
DOWN
MENU
ENTER
EXIT
EXIT ...................... Return to the previous menu.
6. Repeat steps 2-5 to adjust an additional item, or press the
MENU button to close the menu.
OFF
ON
POWER
MAGNIFY PIC-MUTE
PAGE
UP
DOWN
MENU
ENTER
33
EXIT
5. Using On-Screen Menu
· Menu Elements
Title
Slide bar
Highlight
Source
Off Timer remaining
time
Radio button
Solid triangle
Check mark
Tab
Thermometer symbol
Key symbol
Menu windows or dialog boxes typically have the following elements:
Title .......................................... Indicates the menu title.
Highlight ................................... Indicates the selected menu or item.
Source ...................................... Indicates the currently selected source.
Remaining countdown time ..... Indicates the remaining countdown time when the Off Timer is preset.
Solid triangle ............................ Indicates further choices are available. A highlighted triangle indicates the item is active.
Tab ........................................... Indicates a group of features in a dialog box. Selecting on any tab brings its page to the front.
Radio button ............................ Use this round button to select an option in a dialog box.
Check mark .............................. Indicates the item is selected.
Slide bar ................................... Indicates settings or the direction of adjustment.
Key symbol .............................. Indicates the Cabinet Button Lock is enabled.
Thermometer symbol ............... Indicates the lamp mode is forcibly set to Eco mode because the internal temperature is too
high.
34
5. Using On-Screen Menu
» List of Menu Items
Picture
Wall Color
Picture Management
Off, Blackboard, Light yellow, Light green, Light blue, Sky blue, Light rose, Pink
Presentation, Video, Movie, Graphic, sRGB
User
Base Setting
Presentation, Video, Movie, Graphic, sRGB
Gamma Correction Dynamic, Black Detail, Natural
Brightness R,G,B
Contrast R,G,B
Brightness
Contrast
Sharpness
Color
Hue
Image
Auto Keystone
Keystone
Keystone Save
Aspect Ratio
Cinema Position
Setup
Off Timer
Lamp Mode
Language
Menu Color Select
Menu Display Time
Background
Orientation
Beep
Advanced
Security
Cabinet Button
Fan Mode
Signal Select COMPUTER1*
COMPUTER2
Video
S-Video
Page2
On, Off
On, Off
Normal, Wide Zoom, Cinema, Native
Off, 0:30, 1:00, 2:00, 3:00, 4:00, 6:00, 8:00
Normal, Eco
Language-1 English, Deutsch, Français, Italiano, Español, Português, Nederlands
Language-2 Svenska, Norsk, Suomi, Cesky , Magyar, Polski, Türkçe
Language-3
,
,
,
,
,
, Dansk
Color, Monochrome
Manual, Auto 5 sec, Auto 15sec, Auto 45 sec
Blue, Black, Logo
Desktop Front, Ceiling Rear, Desktop Rear, Ceiling Front
On, Off
On, Off
Lock, Unlock
High, Auto
RGB/Component, RGB, Component, Scart
RGB/Component, RGB, Component
Auto, NTSC3.58, NTSC4.43, PAL, PAL-M, PAL-N, PAL60, SECAM
Auto, NTSC3.58, NTSC4.43, PAL, PAL-M, PAL-N, PAL60, SECAM
Power Management
On, Off
Noise Reduction
On, Off
Flicker Reduction
On, Off
Auto Adjust
Off, Normal, Fine
Horizontal
Vertical
Clock
Phase
Communication Speed 4800, 9600, 19200
* Only COMPUTER on VT47.
35
5. Using On-Screen Menu
Information
Page1
Page2
Default
Factory Default
Remaining Lamp Time, Lamp Hour Meter, Filter Usage, Projector Usage,
BIOS Version, Firmware Version, Data Version
Source Index, Horizontal Frequency, Vertical Frequency, Sync Polarity
Signal Type, Video Type, Sync Type, Interlace
Current Signal
All Data
Clear Filter Usage
Clear Lamp Hour Meter
NOTE: Some menu items are not available depending on the input source.
36
5. Using On-Screen Menu
¿ Menu Descriptions & Functions [Picture]
Using the Wall Color Correction [Wall Color]
This function allows for quick adaptive color correction in applications where the screen material is not white.
The following eight options are available.
• OFF
• Light yellow
• Light blue
• Light rose
• Blackboard
• Light green
• Sky blue
• Pink
Using Picture Management [Picture Management]
This option allows you to adjust neutral tint for yellow, cyan or magenta.
There are 5 factory presets optimized for various types of images, or you can set user adjustable settings.
Presentation .......... Recommended for making a presentation using a PowerPoint file
Video ..................... Recommended for regular picture such as TV program
Movie .................... Recommended for movies
Graphic .................. Recommended for graphics
sRGB ..................... Standard color values
User ...................... User adjustable
37
5. Using On-Screen Menu
NOTE: When “sRGB”, “Graphic”, “Video” or “Movie” is selected, the brightness decreases slightly when compared to “Presentation”. This is not a malfunction.
User Adjust (when using User)
When selecting user adjustable presetting (User), the submenu will be displayed.
You can customize each gamma or color. To do so, first select “User” and press the ENTER button, and then proceed
the following steps.
Selecting Base Setting [Base Setting]
This feature allows you to use white balance or gamma values as reference data to optimize for various types of
images. You can select one of the following five settings.
• Presentation
• Movie
• sRGB
• Video
• Graphic
Selecting Gamma Correction Mode [Gamma Correction]
Each mode is recommended for :
Dynamic ................ Creates a high-contrast picture
Black Detail ........... Emphasizes detail in dark areas of the picture
Natural .................. Natural reproduction of the picture
Adjusting White Balance [Brightness RGB/Contrast RGB]
This allows you to adjust the white balance. Brightness for each color (RGB) is used to adjust the black level of the
screen; Contrast for each color (RGB) to adjust the white level of the screen.
Adjusting Brightness, Contrast, Sharpness, Color and Hue
Brightness ............. Adjusts the brightness level or the back raster intensity.
Contrast ................ Adjusts the intensity of the image according to the incoming signal.
Sharpness ............. Controls the detail of the image for Video.
Color ..................... Increases or decreases the color saturation level (not valid for RGB).
Hue ........................ Varies the color level from +/– green to +/– blue. The red level is used as reference. This adjustment is only
valid for Video and Component inputs (not valid for RGB).
38
5. Using On-Screen Menu
´ Menu Descriptions & Functions [Image]
Enabling Auto Keystone [Auto Keystone]
This feature allows the projector to detect its tilt and correct vertical distortion automatically.
To turn on the Auto Keystone feature, select “On”.
Correcting Vertical Keystone Distortion Manually [Keystone]
You can correct vertical distortion manually from the menu when “Auto Keystone” is turned off.
You can save the changes using the Keystone Save feature when you turn off the projector.
Saving Vertical Keystone Correction [Keystone Save]
This option enables you to save your current keystone settings.
Saving your change once affects all sources. The changes are saved when the projector is off.
Selecting Aspect Ratio [ Aspect Ratio]
Aspect Ratio allows you to select the best Aspect mode to display your source image. You can also display the Aspect
Ratio menu by pressing the “ASPECT” button on the remote control.
Normal
Wide Zoom
Cinema
Standard
4:3 Aspect
Left and right
stretched
Left and right
stretched
Normal
Wide Zoom
Cinema
16:9 image displayed
in 4:3 mode
Left and right
stretched
Native
Left and right stretched to
display the true aspect
When 4:3 is selected from
the source (i.e. DVD player),
the following selections will
display:
Native
When 16:9 is selected from
the source (i.e. DVD player),
the following selections will
display:
Native (RGB only): Turns off the Advanced AccuBlend feature. The projector displays the current image in its true
resolution.
NOTE:
• While you are displaying an image at the projector’s native resolution or higher, “Native” is not available.
• You can adjust the image position for Cinema aspect. See “Cinema Position” for setting the image position.
Copyright
Please note that using this projector for the purpose of commercial gain or the attraction of public attention in a venue such as a
coffee shop or hotel and employing compression or expansion of the screen image with a " Aspect Ratio " setting may raise
concern about the infringement of copyrights which are protected by copyright law.
39
5. Using On-Screen Menu
Adjusting the Vertical Position of Image [Cinema Position] (for Cinema only)
This feature adjusts the vertical position of the image when viewing video with Cinema aspect ratio selected.
When “Cinema” is selected in “Aspect Ratio”, the image is displayed with black borders on the top and bottom.
You can adjust the vertical position between top and bottom.
NOTE: This option is available only when “Cinema” is selected in Aspect Ratio.
² Menu Descriptions & Functions [Setup]
Using Off Timer [Off Timer]
You can set the timer so that the projector turns itself off at the preset time.
1. Use the SELECT ̆ or ̄ button to select your desired time between 30 minutes and 8 hours: Off, 0:30,
1:00, 2:00, 3:00, 4:00, 6:00 and 8:00.
2. Press the ENTER button.
3. The Off Timer starts counting down remaining time.
4. The projector turns off after the countdown is complete.
NOTE:
• To cancel the preset time, select “Off” for the preset time or turn off the power.
• When the remaining time reaches 3 minutes before the projector is turned off, the “Projector will turn off in 3 minutes”
message will be displayed on the bottom of the screen.
Selecting Lamp Mode [Lamp Mode]
This feature enables you to select two brightness modes of the lamp:
Normal and Eco modes. The lamp life can be extended by using the Eco mode.
Normal Mode ........ This is the default setting (100% Brightness).
Eco Mode .............. Select this mode to increase the lamp life (80% Brightness).
NOTE: If the projector is overheated in Normal mode, there may be a case where the Lamp mode automatically changes to Eco
mode to protect the projector. When the projector is in Eco mode, the picture brightness decreases. When the projector comes
back to normal temperature, the Lamp mode returns to Normal mode.
NOTE: Thermometer symbol indicates the lamp mode is automatically set to Eco mode because the internal temperature is too
high.
40
5. Using On-Screen Menu
Selecting Menu Language [Language]
You can choose one of 21 languages for on-screen instructions.
Selecting Menu Color [Menu Color Select]
You can choose between two color modes for menu color: color and monochrome.
Selecting Menu Display Time [Menu Display Time]
This option allows you to select how long the projector waits after the last touch of a button to turn off the menu.
The preset choices are “Manual”, “Auto 5 sec”, “Auto 15 sec”, and “Auto 45 sec”. The “Auto 45 sec” is the factory
preset.
Selecting a Color or Logo for Background [Background]
Use this feature to display a black/ blue screen or logo when no signal is available.
Selecting Projector Orientation [Orientation]
This sets your image for your type of projection. The options are:
desktop front projection, ceiling rear projection, desktop rear projection, and ceiling front projection.
Enabling Key Sound and Error Sound [Beep]
This feature turns on or off the keypad sound or alarm when a button on the cabinet and the remote control is pressed
or an error occurs.
41
http://getMANUAL.com
5. Using On-Screen Menu
¶ Menu Descriptions & Functions [Advanced]
Security
A keyword can be set for your projector to avoid operation by an unauthorized user using the Menu. When a keyword
is set, turning on the projector will display the Keyword input screen. Unless the correct keyword is entered, the
projector cannot project an image.
To enable the Security function:
1. Select [Advanced] → [Security] and press the ̇ button to select “On”.
The [Keyword] screen will be displayed.
2. Type in a combination of the four SELECT buttons ̆̄̇̈ and press the ENTER button.
NOTE: A keyword must be four to 10 digits in length.
The [Confirm Keyword] screen will be displayed.
42
5. Using On-Screen Menu
3. Type in the same combination of SELECT buttons ̆̄̇̈ and press the ENTER button.
The confirmation screen will be displayed.
4. Select “Yes” and press the ENTER button.
The Security function has been enabled.
To disable the Security function:
1. Select [Advanced] → [Security] and press the ̈ button to select “Off”.
The Keyword confirmation screen will be displayed.
2. Type in your keyword and press the ENTER button.
When the correct keyword is entered, the Security function will be disabled.
When the Security function is enabled and the projector is turned on, the projector will display a blue
background.
To display an image at this time, press the MENU button to display the Keyword input screen.
Type in the correct keyword and press the ENTER button. The projector will display an image.
NOTE:
• The security disable mode is maintained until the main power is turned off (by setting the main power switch to “O” or
unplugging the power cable).
• If you forget your keyword, contact your dealer. Your dealer will provide you with your keyword in exchange for your request
code. Your request code is displayed in the Keyword Confirmation screen. In this example “K992-45L8-JNGJ-4XU9-1YATEEA2” is a request code.
43
5. Using On-Screen Menu
Disabling the Cabinet Buttons [Cabinet Button Lock]
This option turns on or off the Cabinet Button Lock function.
NOTE:
• This Cabinet Button Lock does not affect the remote control and the PC Control functions.
• When the cabinet buttons are unlocked, pressing and holding the EXIT button for about 10 seconds will change the setting to
enable.
• Key symbol indicates the Cabinet Button Lock is enabled.
Enabling High Speed Fan Mode [Fan Mode]
This option allows you to select two modes for fan speed: High speed mode and Auto mode.
High ...................... The built-in fans run at a fixed high speed.
Auto ...................... The built-in fans automatically run at a variable speed according to the internal temperature.
When you wish to cool down the temperature inside the projector quickly, select “High”.
NOTE: Select “High” if you continue to use the projector for consecutive days.
Selecting Signal Format [Signal Select]
[Computer]
Allows you to choose “Computer” for an RGB source such as a computer, or “Component” for a component video
source such as a DVD player. Normally select “RGB/Component” and the projector automatically detects a component signal. However there may be some component signals that the projector is unable to detect. If this is the
case, select “Component”. Select “Scart” in Computer 1 (Computer on VT47) for the European Scart signal.
[Video & S-Video System Select]
This feature enables you to select composite video standards manually. Normally select “Auto”.
When you select the video standard for Video and S-Video, select the video standard from the pull-down menu.
This must be done for Video and S-Video respectively.
44
5. Using On-Screen Menu
(Advanced Page 2)
Enabling Power Management [Power Management]
When this option is on and there is no input for five minutes or more, the projector will automatically turn itself off.
Turning On Noise Reduction [Noise Reduction] (not available for Video and S-Video signals)
Reduces video noise. Select “On” to enable the Noise Reduction feature.
Turning On Flicker Reduction [Flicker Reduction]
Reduces flicker which can occur in an interlaced signal. This feature is not available for RGB and HDTV signals.
NOTE: When the Flicker Reduction is ON, jagged lines can be visible depending on the signal. In that case, select OFF.
NOTE: This feature may not be available depending on your video equipment connected to the projector.
Setting Auto Adjust [Auto Adjust]
This feature sets the Auto Adjust mode so that the RGB image can be automatically or manually adjusted for noise
and stability. You can automatically make adjustment in two ways: Normal and Fine
Off ......................... The RGB image will not be automatically adjusted.
You can manually optimize the RGB image.
Normal .................. Default setting. The RGB image will be automatically adjusted. Normally select this option.
Fine ....................... Select this option if fine adjustment is needed. It takes more time to switch to the source than when “Normal” is selected.
Adjusting Position/Clock (when Auto Adjust is off)
This allows you to manually adjust the image horizontally and vertically, and adjust Clock and Phase.
[Horizontal/Vertical]
Adjusts the image location horizontally and vertically.
This adjustment is made automatically when the Auto Adjust is turned on.
[Clock] (available for RGB and HDTV signals only)
Use this item with the “Auto Adjust off” to fine tune the computer image or to remove any vertical banding that
might appear. This function adjusts the clock frequencies that eliminate the horizontal banding in the image. This
adjustment may be necessary when you connect your computer for the first time. This adjustment is made automatically when the Auto Adjust is turned on.
45
5. Using On-Screen Menu
[Phase] (available for RGB and HDTV signals only)
Use this item to adjust the clock phase or to reduce video noise, dot interference or cross talk. (This is evident
when part of your image appears to be shimmering.)
Use “Phase” only after the “Clock” is complete.
This adjustment is made automatically when the Auto Adjust is turned on.
Selecting Communication Speed [Communication Speed]
This feature sets the baud rate of the PC Control port (DIN 8 Pin). It supports data rates from 4800 to 19200 bps.
The default is 19200 bps.
Select the appropriate baud rate for your equipment to be connected (depending on the equipment, a lower baud rate
may be recommended for long cable runs).
º Menu Descriptions & Functions [Information]
Displays the status of the current signal, remaining lamp (%), lamp/filter/projector usage time (hours) and version
information. The Information has two pages. The Information included is as follows:
[Page 1]
Remaining Lamp Time (%)*
Lamp Hour Meter (H)
Filter Usage
Projector Usage
* The progress indicator shows the percentage of remaining bulb life. The value informs you of the amount of
lamp usage. When the remaining lamp time reaches 0, the Remaining Lamp Time bar indicator changes
from 0% to 100 Hours and starts counting down.
If the remaining lamp time reaches 0 hours, the projector will not turn on regardless of whether the lamp
mode is set to Normal or Eco.
BIOS Version
Firmware Version
Data Version
Lamp life(H)
Model
Replacement lamp
Normal
Eco
VT676/VT670/
VT470
2000
3000
VT75LP
VT575/VT47
3000
4000
VT70LP
46
5. Using On-Screen Menu
[Page 2]
Source Index
Horizontal Frequency
Vertical Frequency
Sync Polarity
Signal Type
Video Type
Sync Type
Interlace
¾ Menu Descriptions & Functions [Default]
Returning to Factory Default [Factory Default]
The Factory Default feature allows you to change adjustments and setting to the factory preset.
[Current Signal]
Resets the adjustments for the current signal to the factory preset levels.
The items that can be reset are: Brightness, Contrast, Color, Hue, Sharpness, Noise Reduction, Aspect Ratio,
Horizontal Position, Vertical Position, Clock, Phase and Picture Management.
[All Data]
Reset all the adjustments and settings for all the signals to the factory preset for source except the following:
Language, Security, Communication Speed, Remaining Lamp Time, Lamp Hour Meter, Filter Usage and Projector
Usage. To reset the lamp usage time, see “Clear Lamp Hour Meter” and “Clear Filter Usage”.
Resetting the Filter Usage Hours [Clear Filter Usage]
Resets the filter usage back to zero. Selecting this option displays submenu for a confirmation. Select “Yes” and press
the ENTER button.
Clearing Lamp Hour Meter [Clear Lamp Hour Meter]
Resets the lamp clock back to zero. Selecting this option displays submenu for a confirmation. Select “Yes” and press
the ENTER button.
NOTE: The projector will turn off and go into standby mode after 2100* hours (up to 3100* hours in Eco mode) of service.
If this happens, press the HELP button on the remote control for ten seconds to reset the lamp clock back to zero.
When the lamp time clock is reset to zero, the LAMP indicator goes out.
Do this only after replacing the lamp.
* VT575 and VT47: 3100 hours (up to 4100 hours in Eco mode).
47
6. Maintenance
This section describes the simple maintenance procedures you should follow to clean the filter and replace the lamp.
ᕡ Cleaning or Replacing the Filter
The air-filter sponge keeps dust and dirt from getting inside the projector and should be cleaned after every 100 hours
of operation (more often in dusty conditions). If the filter is dirty or clogged, your projector may overheat.
CAUTION
•
Turn off the projector, turn off the main power switch and unplug the projector before replacing the filter.
•
Only clean the outside of the filter cover with a vacuum cleaner.
•
Do not attempt to operate the projector without the filter cover.
To clean the air-filter:
FO
S
CU
ZO
OM
T
C
LE
E
S
P
M
LA
US
AT
ST
ER
W
PO
O
DE
VI
D
AN
ST
N/
O
BY
O
DE
VI
S-
1
RTE
PU
M
CO
2
RTE
PU
M
CO
TO
AU J.
AD
Vacuum the filter-through the filter cover.
To reset the filter usage time, from the menu, select [Default] → [Clear Filter Usage].
See also page 47 for resetting the filter usage time.
To replace the filter (sponge):
1. Remove the filter cover by pushing down on the catch of the cover until you feel it detach.
Catch
2. Gently peel off the filter (sponge) and replace it with the new one.
48
6. Maintenance
3. Reinstall the new filter cover.
NOTE: Do not wash the filter with soap and water. Soap and water will damage the filter membrane. Before replacing the filter,
remove dust and dirt from the projector cabinet. Keep out dust and dirt during filter replacement.
NOTE: When you replace the lamp, it is also wise to replace the filter. The filter comes in the same package with your replacement
lamp.
· Cleaning the Cabinet and the Lens
1. Turn off the projector before cleaning.
2. Clean the cabinet periodically with a damp cloth. If heavily soiled, use a mild detergent. Never use strong
detergents or solvents such as alcohol or thinner.
3. Use a blower or lens paper to clean the lens, and be careful not to scratch or mar the lens.
TO
AU J.
AD
S
CU
FO
S
E
LE
C
T
LA
M
P
ST
AT
US
PO
W
ER
O
VI
N/
DE
ST
O
AN
D
BY
S-
VI
DE
O
CO
M
PU
TE
R-
1
CO
M
PU
TE
R-
2
ZOOM
SELE
CT
LA
M
ST
P
AT
PO
US
W
ER
AN
O
ST
DE
N/
VI
O
D
BY
SDE
VI
O
CO
M
PU
TE
1
RCO
M
PU
TE
R2
OM
ZO
TO
AU J.
AD
IN
L/M
ON AU
O DIO
R
S
CU
AU
L/M
DIO
ON AU
O DIO
FO
VID
EO
S-V
IDE
O IN
CO
R
MP
AU
DIO
UT
ER
OU
T
CO
MP
UT
ER
1 IN
AU
DIO
OU
T
CO
PC
MP
UT
CO
NT
RO
L
ER
2 IN
AC
IN
49
6. Maintenance
» Replacing the Lamp
After your lamp has been operating for 2000* hours (up to 3000* hours in Eco mode) or longer, the LAMP indicator in
the cabinet will blink red and the message “The lamp has reached the end of its usable life. Please replace the
lamp.” will appear. Even though the lamp may still be working, replace it at 2000* (up to 3000* hours in Eco mode)
hours to maintain optimal projector performance. After replacing the lamp, be sure to clear the lamp hour meter. See
page 47.
CAUTION
•
DO NOT TOUCH THE LAMP immediately after it has been used. It will be extremely hot. Turn the projector off,
wait 30 seconds, turn off the main power switch and then disconnect the power cable. Allow at least one hour
for the lamp to cool before handling.
•
DO NOT REMOVE ANY SCREWS except two lamp case screws. You could receive an electric shock.
•
Do not break the glass on the lamp housing.
Keep finger prints off the glass surface on the lamp housing. Leaving finger prints in the glass surface might
cause an unwanted shadow and poor picture quality.
•
The projector will turn off and go into standby mode after 2100* (up to 3100* hours in Eco mode) hours of
service. If this happens, be sure to replace the lamp. If you continue to use the lamp after 2000* hours (up to
3000* hours in Eco mode) of use, the lamp bulb may shatter, and pieces of glass may be scattered in the lamp
case. Do not touch them as the pieces of glass may cause injury. If this happens, contact your NEC dealer for
lamp replacement.
*NOTE: Lamp life for VT575/VT47 is 3000 hours in Normal mode and 4000 hours in Eco mode.
The projector will turn off and go into standby mode after 3100 (up to 4100 hours in Eco mode) hours of service.
To replace the lamp:
Optional lamp and tools needed for replacement:
• Replacement lamp VT75LP (VT676/VT670/VT470) or VT70LP (VT575/VT47)
• Phillips screwdriver or equivalent
NOTE: The two lamp houses are slightly different in appearance.
The following explanation uses drawings for the lamp VT75LP.
1. Place the projector on a soft cloth and turn it over to access the lamp cover on the bottom.
2. Use a Philips screwdriver to push and release the tab.
Push up and remove the lamp cover.
Philips
screwdriver
Catch
50
6. Maintenance
3. Loosen the two screws securing the lamp housing until the phillips screwdriver goes into a freewheeling
condition. The two screws are not removable.
Remove the lamp housing by holding it.
Interlock
NOTE: There is an interlock on this case to prevent the risk of electrical shock. Do not attempt to circumvent this interlock.
4. Insert a new lamp housing until the lamp housing is plugged into the socket.
CAUTION
Do not use a lamp other than the NEC replacement lamp VT75LP (VT676/VT670/VT470) or VT70LP (VT575/
VT47).
Order this from your NEC dealer.
Secure it in place with the two screws.
Be sure to tighten the screws.
5. Reattach the lamp cover.
Slip the lamp cover back until it snaps into place.
51
http://getMANUAL.com
6. Maintenance
6. Connect the supplied power cable, turn on the Main Power switch and turn on the projector.
7. Finally, select the menu → [Default] → [Clear Lamp Hour Meter] to reset the lamp usage hours.
NOTE: When the lamp exceeds 2100* hours (up to 3100* hours in Eco mode) of service, the projector cannot turn on and the
menu is not displayed.
If this happens, press the HELP button on the remote control for ten seconds to reset the lamp clock back to zero.
When the lamp time clock is reset to zero, the LAMP indicator goes out.
* VT575 and VT47: 3100 hours (up to 4100 hours in Eco mode).
52
7. Appendix
ᕡ Troubleshooting
This section helps you resolve problems you may encounter while setting up or using the projector.
Indicator Messages
Power Indicator
Indicator Condition
Projector Condition
Off
Blinking light
Green
0.5 sec On,
0.5 sec Off
2.5 sec On,
0.5 sec Off
0.5 sec On,
0.5 sec Off
The main power is off
–
The projector is getting ready to turn on. Wait for a moment.
Green
Orange
Off Timer is enabled.
–
The projector is cooling down.
Wait for a moment.
The projector is turned on.
The projector is in Standby.
Orange
Steady light
Note
–
–
Status Indicator
Indicator Condition
Projector Condition
Off
Blinking light
Red
1 cycle (0.5 sec
2.5 sec Off)
2 cycle (0.5 sec
0.5 sec Off)
4 cycle (0.5 sec
0.5 sec Off)
6 cycle (0.5 sec
0.5 sec Off)
Green
Steady light
Orange
Note
Normal
–
On, Lamp cover error or lamp housing error Replace the lamp cover or lamp
housing correctly.
On, Temperature error
The projector is overheated. Move
the projector to a cooler location.
On, Fan error
Fans will not work correctly.
On, Lamp error
Lamp fails to light. Wait a full
minute and then turn on again.
Re-firing the lamp (The projector is cool- The projector is re-firing.
ing down.)
Wait for a moment.
Cabinet button is locked
You have pressed cabinet button
when Cabinet Button is locked.
Lamp Indicator
Indicator Condition
Off
Blinking light
Red
Steady light
Red
Green
Projector Condition
Normal
Lamp has reached its end of life. Lamp
replacement message will be displayed.
Lamp has been used beyond its limit. The
projector will not turn on until the lamp is
replaced.
Lamp mode is set to Eco mode
53
Note
–
Replace the lamp.
Replace the lamp.
–
7. Appendix
Common Problems & Solutions (See also " Power/Status/Lamp Indicator " on page 53.)
Problem
Check These Items
Does not turn on
• Check that the power cable is plugged in and that the power button on the projector cabinet or the remote
control is on. See pages 20 and 21.
• Ensure that the lamp cover is installed correctly. See page 51.
• Check to see if the projector has overheated or the lamp usage exceeds 2100* hours (up to 3100* hours : Eco
mode). If there is insufficient ventilation around the projector or if the room where you’re presenting is particularly warm, move the projector to a cooler location.
* VT575 and VT47: 3100 hours (up to 4100 hours in Eco mode).
• The lamp may fail to light. Wait a full minute and then turn on the power again.
• The lamp has reached the end of its usable life. Replace the lamp.
Will turn off
• Ensure that the Power Management is off. See page 45.
No picture
• Use the VIDEO, the S-VIDEO or the COMPUTER button on the remote control to select your source (Computer,
Video or S-Video). See page 23. If there is still no picture, press the button again.
• Ensure your cables are connected properly.
• Use menus to adjust the brightness and contrast. See page 38.
• Remove the lens cap.
• Reset the settings or adjustments to factory preset levels using the “Default” in the Menu. See page 47.
• Enter your registered keyword if the Security function is enabled. See page 42.
• When using with a notebook PC, be sure to connect between the projector and the notebook PC before turning
on the power to the notebook PC. In most cases signal cannot be output from RGB output unless the notebook
PC is turned on after connecting with the projector.
* If the screen goes blank while using your remote control, it may be the result of the computer's screensaver or power management software.
• See also the next page.
Picture suddenly
becomes dark
• When one of the following happens, the Lamp mode automatically changes from Normal to Eco.
* When there are no signals (blue or black screen) → To return to the Normal mode, select another available
source.
* When the image is muted using the PIC-MUTE button on the remote control → Press the PIC-MUTE button
again to return to the Normal mode.
* When the room where you' re presenting is particularly warm → Move the projector to a cooler location.
Color tone or hue is
unusual
• Check if an appropriate color is selected in " Wall Color " . If so, select an appropriate option. See page 37.
• Adjust " Hue " in " Picture " . See page 38.
Image isn’t square to
the screen
• Reposition the projector to improve its angle to the screen. See page 24.
• Use the Keystone correction function to correct the trapezoid distortion. See page 26.
Picture is blurred
• Adjust the focus. See page 25.
• Reposition the projector to improve its angle to the screen. See page 24.
• Ensure that the distance between the projector and screen is within the adjustment range of the lens. See
pages 11 for VT676/VT670/VT575/VT470 and 12 for VT47.
• Condensation may form on the lens if the projector is cold, brought into a warm place and is then turned on.
Should this happen, let the projector stand until there is no condensation on the lens.
Image is scrolling
vertically, horizontally
or both
• Use the VIDEO, the S-VIDEO or the COMPUTER button on the remote control to select your source (Video, SVideo or Computer). See page 23.
• Adjust the computer image manually with the Horizontal/Vertical in the “Advanced → Page 2”. See page 45.
Remote control does
not work
• Install new batteries.See page 10.
• Make sure there are no obstacles between you and the projector.
• Stand within 22 feet (7 m) of the projector. See page 10.
Indicator is lit or
blinking
• See the POWER/STATUS/LAMP Indicator on page 53.
Cross color in RGB
mode
• Press the AUTO ADJ. button on the projector cabinet or the remote control. See page 28.
• When “Off” is selected in Auto Adjust, adjust the computer image manually with Clock/Phase in “Advanced →
Page 2” in the menu. See pages 45 and 46.
For more information contact your dealer.
54
7. Appendix
If there is no picture, or the picture is not displayed correctly.
•
Power on process for the projector and the PC.
Be sure to connect the RGB cable between the projector and the computer before turning on the computer.
There are some notebook PCs, which do not output signal unless there is a projector or monitor connected first.
NOTE: You can check the horizontal frequency of the current signal in the projector’s menu under Information. If it reads
“0kHz”, this means there is no signal being output from the computer. See page 46 or go to next step.
•
Enabling the computer’s external display.
Displaying an image on the notebook PC’s screen does not necessarily mean it outputs a signal to the projector. When using a PC compatible laptop, a combination of function keys will enable/disable the external display.
Usually, the combination of the ‘Fn” key along with one of the 12 function keys gets the external display to come
on or off. For example, NEC laptops use Fn + F3, while Dell laptops use Fn + F8 key combinations to toggle
through external display selections.
•
Non-standard signal output from the computer
If the output signal from a notebook PC is not an industry standard, the projected image may not be displayed
correctly. Should this happen, deactivate the notebook PC’s LCD screen when the projector display is in use.
Each notebook PC has a different way of deactivate/reactivate the local LCD screens as described in the
previous step. Refer to your computer’s documentation for detailed information.
•
Image displayed is incorrect when using a Macintosh
When using a Macintosh with the projector, set the DIPswitch of the Mac adapter (not supplied with the projector) according to your resolution. After setting, restart your Macintosh for the changes to take affect.
For setting display modes other than those supported by your Macintosh and the projector, changing the DIP
switch on a Mac adapter may bounce an image slightly or may display nothing. Should this happen, set the DIP
switch to the 13” fixed mode and then restart your Macintosh. After that, restore the DIP switches to a
displayable mode and then restart the Macintosh again.
NOTE: A Video Adapter cable manufactured by Apple Computer is needed for a PowerBook which does not have a mini D-Sub
15-pin connector.
•
Mirroring on a PowerBook
* When using the projector with a Macintosh PowerBook, output may not be set to 1024 x 768 unless “mirroring” is off on your PowerBook. Refer to owner’s manual supplied with your Macintosh computer for mirroring.
•
Folders or icons are hidden on the Macintosh screen
Folders or icons may not be seen on the screen. Should this happen, select [View] → [Arrange] from the Apple
menu and arrange icons.
55
7. Appendix
ᕢ Specifications
This section provides technical information about the VT676/VT670/VT575/VT470/VT47 Projector's performance.
Model Number
Optical
LCD Panel
Resolution
Lens
Lamp
Image Size (Diagonal)
Projection Distance
Projection Angle
Keystone Correction
Electrical
Inputs
Outputs
Video Compatibility
Scan Rate
Video Bandwidth
Color Reproduction
Horizontal Resolution
External Control
VT676/VT670/VT575/VT470/VT47
0.7 " p-Si TFT active-matrix (with Micro Lens Array on VT676, VT670 and
VT575 only)
VT676/VT670/VT575: 1024 867 ןpixels* native, up to UXGA with Advanced AccuBlend
VT470: 800 006 ןpixels* native, up to UXGA with Advanced AccuBlend
VT47: 800 006 ןpixels* native, up to SXGA with Advanced AccuBlend
VT676/VT670/VT575/VT470: Manual zoom and manual focus
F1.7 - 2.0 f=21.6 - 25.9 mm
VT47: Digital zoom and manual focus
F2.0 f=17.5 mm
VT676 : 190W DC lamp (150W Eco mode)
VT670/VT470: 180W DC lamp (150W Eco mode)
VT575/VT47: 130W DC lamp (110W Eco mode)
VT676/VT670/VT575/VT470: 21 - 300 inches / 0.5 - 7.6 m
VT47: 25 - 300 inches / 0.6 - 7.6 m
VT676/VT670/VT575/VT470: 2.4 - 35.89 ft / 0.73 - 10.9 m
VT47: 1.9 - 23.92 ft / 0.58 - 7.3 m
VT676/VT670/VT575/VT470: Tele: 9.5° - 9.9°/ Wide: 11.5° - 12.0°
VT47: 14.0° - 14.6°
+/- 30° Vertical (auto)
VT676/VT670/VT575/VT470: 2 RGB/Component (D-Sub 15 Pin),
1 S-Video (DIN 4 Pin), 1 Video (RCA), 2 (L/R) RCA Audio,
1 Stereo Mini Audio, 1 PC Control (DIN 8 Pin)
VT47: 1 RGB/Component (D-Sub 15 Pin), 1 S-Video (DIN 4 Pin),
1 Video (RCA), 1 (L/R) RCA Audio, 1 Stereo Mini Audio,
1 PC Control (DIN 8 Pin)
1 RGB (D-Sub 15 Pin), 1 Stereo Mini Audio (not available on VT47)
NTSC, NTSC4.43, PAL, PAL-60, PAL-N, PAL-M, SECAM,
HDTV: 1080i, 1080i/50Hz, 720p, 576p, 480p, 480i/60Hz
Horizontal: 15 kHz to 100 kHz (RGB: 24 kHz or over)
Vertical: 50 Hz to 120 Hz
RGB: 80 MHz (-3dB)
16.7 million colors simultaneously, Full color
NTSC / NTSC4.43/PAL/PAL-M/PAL-N/PAL60: 540 TV lines
SECAM: 300 TV lines
YCbCr: 800 TV lines
RGB: VT676/VT670/VT575: 1024 dots (H) 867ןdots (V),
VT470/VT47: 800 dots (H) 006ןdots (V)
RS232, IR
* Effective pixels are more than 99.99%.
56
7. Appendix
Sync Compatibility
Built-in Speaker
Power Requirement
Input Current
Power Consumption
Separate Sync / Composite Sync / Sync on G
1W (monaural)
100 - 240V AC, 50 / 60 Hz
VT676/VT670/VT470: 2.7 - 1.4A
VT575/VT47: 2.1 - 1.2A
VT676/VT670/VT470: 8W in Standby mode /
250W in Lamp Normal mode / 200W in Lamp Eco mode
VT575/VT47: 8W in Standby mode /
190W in Lamp Normal mode / 155W in Lamp Eco mode
Mechanical
Installation Orientation
Dimensions
Desktop/Front, Desktop/Rear, Ceiling/Front, Ceiling/Rear
11.6 " (W)( " 7.3ןH)( " 2.01ןD)
294mm (W)39ןmm (H)062ןmm (D)
(not including protrusions)
Net Weight
6.5 lbs / 2.9 kg
Environmental Considerations Operational Temperatures : 41° to 95°F (5° to 35°C),
20% to 80% humidity (non-condensing)
Storage Temperatures : 14° to 122°F (-10° to 50°C),
20% to 80% humidity (non-condensing)
Regulations
For United States:
UL Approved (UL 60950)
Meets FCC Class B requirements
For Canada:
UL Approved (CSA 60950)
Meets DOC Canada Class B requirements
For Australia/New Zealand:
Meets AS/NZS CISPR.22 Class B
For Europe:
Meets EMC Directive (EN55022, EN55024, EN61000-3-2, EN61000-3-3)
Meets Low Voltage Directive (EN60950, TUV GS Approved)
For additional information visit:
US : http://www.necvisualsystems.com
Europe : http://www.neceurope.com/
Global : http://www.nec-pj.com/
The specifications are subject to change without notice.
57
58
Unit: mm (inch)
64.6 (2.5)
112.5 (4.4)
Lens center
Lens center
71.5 (2.8)
294 (11.6)
FOCUS
20.3 (0.8)
ZOOM
260 (10.2)
LAMP
STATUS
POWER
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
COMPUTER-1 COMPUTER-2
SELECT
ON/STAND BY
AUTO
ADJ.
VIDEO IN
COMPUTER 1 IN
L/MONO AUDIO R
S-VIDEO IN L/MONO AUDIO R
AUDIO OUT
AUDIO
COMPUTER 2 IN
PC CONTROL
MONITOR OUT
AC IN
VT676/VT670/VT575/VT470
ᕣ Cabinet Dimensions
7. Appendix
59
Unit: mm (inch)
64.6 (2.5)
112.5 (4.4)
Lens center
Lens center
71.5 (2.8)
294 (11.6)
FOCUS
20.3 (0.8)
ZOOM
ZOOM
260 (10.2)
LAMP
STATUS
POWER
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
COMPUTER
SELECT
ON/STAND BY
AUTO
ADJ.
VIDEO IN
AUDIO
L/MONO AUDIO R
COMPUTER IN
S-VIDEO IN
MONITOR OUT
PC CONTROL
AC IN
VT47
7. Appendix
7. Appendix
ᕤ Pin Assignments of D-Sub COMPUTER Input Connector
Mini D-Sub 15 Pin Connector
Pin No.
5
4 3 2 1
10 9 8 7 6
15 14 13 12 11
Signal Level
Video signal : 0.7Vp-p (Analog)
Sync signal : TTL level
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
RGB Signal (Analog)
YCbCr Signal
Red
Green or Sync on Green
Blue
Ground
Ground
Red Ground
Green Ground
Blue Ground
No Connection
Sync Signal Ground
SCART Sync
Bi-directional DATA (SDA)*
Horizontal Sync or Composite Sync
Vertical Sync
Data Clock*
Cr
Y
Cb
Cr Ground
Y Ground
Cb Ground
* Only COMPUTER 1 input connector supported on VT676/VT670/VT575/VT470.
60
7. Appendix
ᕥ Compatible Input Signal List
Signal
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#*
#*
#*
#*
NTSC
PAL
PAL60
SECAM
VESA
IBM
MAC
MAC
MAC
VESA
VESA
IBM
VESA
IBM
VESA
IBM
IBM
VESA
VESA
VESA
VESA
VESA
MAC
VESA
VESA
VESA
MAC
VESA
VESA
VESA
MAC
SUN
SGI
VESA
VESA
MAC
HP
SUN
VESA
VESA
SXGA+
HDTV (1080p)
SDTV(576i)(625i)
SDTV(576p)(625p)
HDTV (1080i)(1125i)
HDTV (1080i)(1125i)
HDTV (720p)(750p)
SDTV (480p)(525p)
VESA
VESA
VESA
VESA
DVD YCbCr
DVD YCbCr
Resolution
( Dots )
–
–
–
–
640 084 ן
640 084 ן
640 084 ן
640 084 ן
640 084 ן
640 084 ן
640 084 ן
640 084 ן
640 084 ן
720 053 ן
720 004 ן
720 053 ן
720 004 ן
800 006 ן
800 006 ן
800 006 ן
800 006 ן
800 006 ן
832 426 ן
1024 867 ן
1024 867 ן
1024 867 ן
1024 867 ן
1024 867 ן
1024 867 ן
1152 468 ן
1152 078 ן
1152 009 ן
1152 009 ן
1280 069 ן
1280 4201 ן
1280 4201 ן
1280 4201 ן
1280 4201 ן
1280 4201 ן
1280 4201 ן
1400 0501 ן
1920 0801 ן
–
–
1920 0801 ן
1920 0801 ן
1280 027 ן
–
1600 0021 ן
1600 0021 ן
1600 0021 ן
1600 0021 ן
–
–
Frequency H.
( kHz )
15.734
15.625
15.734
15.625
31.47
31.47
31.47
34.97
35
37.86
37.5
39.375
43.269
31.469
37.927
39.44
39.44
35.16
37.879
48.077
46.88
53.674
49.725
35.5
48.363
56.476
60.241
60.023
68.677
67.5
68.681
61.796
71.736
60
63.981
69.89
78.125
81.13
79.976
91.146
–
67.5
15.6
31.5
33.75
28.125
45
31.47
75.0
81.25
87.5
93.75
15.734
15.625
Refresh Rate
( Hz )
60
50
60
50
59.94
60
60
66.67
66.67
72.81
75
75
85.01
70.09
85.04
87.85
87.85
56.25
60.32
72.19
75
85.06
74.55
43 Interlaced
60
70.07
74.93
75.03
85
75
75.06
65.95
76.05
60
60.02
65.18
72.01
76.11
75.03
85.02
–
60 Progressive
50
50
60 Interlace
50 Interlace
60 Progressive
59.94 Progressive
60
65
70
75
59.94 Interlaced
50 Interlaced
# : Images in above flagged with # are compressed with Advanced AccuBlend on VT676/VT670/
VT575.
@ : Images in above flagged with @ are compressed with Advanced AccuBlend on VT470/VT47.
* : Images in above flagged with * are not supported on VT47.
NOTE: Some composite sync signals may not be displayed correctly.
Signals other than those specified in the table above may not be displayed correctly. If this should happen, change
the refresh rate or resolution on your PC. Refer to Display Properties help section of your PC for procedures.
UXGA (1600 )0021ןis supported for separate sync signal only.
61
http://getMANUAL.com
7. Appendix
ᕦ PC Control Codes and Cable Connection
PC Control Codes (VT676/VT670/VT575/VT470)
Function
Code Data
POWER ON
02H
00H
00H
00H
00H
02H
POWER OFF
02H
01H
00H
00H
00H
03H
INPUT SELECT COMPUTER 1
02H
03H
00H
00H
02H
01H
01H
09H
INPUT SELECT COMPUTER 2
02H
03H
00H
00H
02H
01H
02H
0AH
INPUT SELECT VIDEO
02H
03H
00H
00H
02H
01H
06H
0EH
INPUT SELECT S-VIDEO
02H
03H
00H
00H
02H
01H
0BH
13H
PICTURE MUTE ON
02H
10H
00H
00H
00H
12H
PICTURE MUTE OFF
02H
11H
00H
00H
00H
13H
SOUND MUTE ON
02H
12H
00H
00H
00H
14H
SOUND MUTE OFF
02H
13H
00H
00H
00H
15H
PC Control Codes (VT47)
Function
Code Data
POWER ON
02H
00H
00H
00H
00H
02H
POWER OFF
02H
01H
00H
00H
00H
03H
INPUT SELECT COMPUTER
02H
03H
00H
00H
02H
01H
01H
09H
INPUT SELECT VIDEO
02H
03H
00H
00H
02H
01H
06H
0EH
INPUT SELECT S-VIDEO
02H
03H
00H
00H
02H
01H
0BH
13H
PICTURE MUTE ON
02H
10H
00H
00H
00H
12H
PICTURE MUTE OFF
02H
11H
00H
00H
00H
13H
SOUND MUTE ON
02H
12H
00H
00H
00H
14H
SOUND MUTE OFF
02H
13H
00H
00H
00H
15H
NOTE: Contact your local dealer for a full list of the PC Contorol Codes if needed.
Cable Connection
Communication Protocol
Baud rate ........................................ 19200 bps
Data length ..................................... 8 bits
Parity .............................................. No parity
Stop bit .......................................... One bit
X on/off .......................................... None
Communications procedure ........... Full duplex
NOTE: Depending on the equipment, a lower baud rate may be recommended for long cable runs.
62
7. Appendix
PC Control Connector (DIN-8P)
To RxD of PC
8
5
4
2
To GND of PC
6
7
3
1
To TxD of PC
NOTE: Pins 2, 3, 5, 6 and 8 are used inside the projector.
63
7. Appendix
¶ Optional Presentation Remote Control Kit (PR52KIT)
The PR52KIT is an optional remote control kit for operating your NEC projector and performing your computer mouse
operations.
Package List
• RD-408E remote control unit ....... 1
• Mouse receiver ............................ 1
• AAA batteries ................... 2
• User's manual .................. 1
Part Names and Functions of the Remote Control
1
3
5
2
OFF
ON
4
7
9
POWER
MAGNIFY
LASER
PAGE
UP
POINTER
6
8
10
15
16
18
19
22
24
25
27
29
DOWN
11
MEN U
PICTURE
SOURCE
VIEWER
ASPECT
AUTO ADJ.
SLIDE
17
20
PIC-MUTE
HELP
VOLUME
FOCUS
2. Remote Jack
Not available on this model.
13
EN T E R
E XI T
12
1. Infrared Transmitter/Laser Pointer
Transmits an infrared signal when any button other
than LASER is pressed.
Direct the remote control toward the remote sensor
on the projector cabinet.
Beams a laser light when the Laser button is pressed.
CAUTION:
* Do not look into the laser pointer while it is on.
* Do not point the laser beam at a person.
R-C LIC K
FREEZE
3. LED
Flashes when any button is pressed.
4. POWER ON Button
When the main power is on, you can use this button
to turn your projector on.
NOTE: To turn on the projector, press and hold the
POWER ON button for a minimum of two seconds.
21
23
26
ZOOM
5. POWER OFF Button
You can use this button to turn your projector off.
NOTE: To turn off the projector, press the POWER OFF
button twice.
3D REFORM
28
PJ OFF MOUSE
6. MAGNIFY (+)(–) Buttons
Use these buttons to adjust the image size.
The image can be magnified about the center of the
screen up to 400%.
14
7. LASER Button
Press and hold this button to activate the laser pointer.
When lit, you can use the laser to draw your audience's
attention to a red dot that you can place on any object.
64
7. Appendix
8. POINTER Button
Not available on this model.
18. ASPECT Button
Press this button to display the Aspect Ratio select
screen.
9. PAGE UP/DOWN Buttons*
Use these buttons to operate your computer with the
supplied remote mouse receiver. You can use these
buttons to scroll the viewing area of the window or to
move to the previous or next slide in PowerPoint on
your computer.
19. AUTO ADJ. Button
Use this button to adjust an RGB source for an optimal picture.
20. VIEWER Button
Not available on this model.
10. MENU Button
Displays the menu for various settings and adjustments.
21. SLIDE +/- Buttons
Not available on this model.
11. Mouse Button
In Mouse mode*, this button works as your computer
mouse.
In Projector mode, this button is used for projector’s
menu operation and moving the magnified image.
22. PIC-MUTE Button
This button turns off the image and sound for a short
period of time. Press again to restore the image and
sound.
23. HELP Button
Provides the Information screen.
12. ENTER Button
Executes your menu selection and activates items selected from the menu.
24. VOLUME +/– Buttons
Press (+) to increase the volume and (–) to decrease
it.
13. EXIT Button
Returns to the previous menu.
While you are in the main menu, pressing this button
will close the menu.
25. FOCUS +/- Buttons
Not available on this model.
14. L-CLICK Button*
Works as the mouse left button when the supplied
remote mouse receiver is connected with your computer.
26. ZOOM +/- Buttons
Use to finely adjust the image on the screen. (VT47
only)
27. FREEZE Button
This button will freeze a picture. Press again to resume motion.
15. R-CLICK Button*
Works as the mouse right button when the supplied
remote mouse receiver is connected with your computer.
28. 3D REFORM Button
Not available on this model.
16. PICTURE Button
Press this button to display the Picture window. Each
time this button is pressed, the option will be changed:
Wall Color → Picture Management → Brightness →
Contrast → Sharpness → Color → Hue
29. PJ ̇ OFF ̈ MOUSE Slide Switch
Use to switch mouse button operation modes between
Mouse and Projector. Setting to OFF will disable all
the buttons on the remote control.
17. SOURCE Button
Use this button to select a video source such as a
PC, VCR or DVD player.
Press and release this button quickly to display the
Source List.
Each time this button is pressed for a minimum of
ONE second, the input source will change.
If no input signal is present, the input will be skipped.
*NOTE: The PAGE UP/DOWN, L-CLICK, R-CLICK and MOUSE
(as computer mouse) buttons are available only when the PJ
̇ OFF ̈ MOUSE Slide Switch is set to MOUSE.
65
7. Appendix
Battery Installation
1 Remove the battery cover.
2 Remove both old batteries and
NOTE: Do not pull the battery
cover by force. Doing so can
result in it coming off.
install new ones (AAA). Ensure
that you have the batteries' polarity (+/ –) aligned correctly.
3 Slip the cover back over the batteries until it snaps into place.
NOTE: Do not mix different types of
batteries or new and old batteries.
2
1
1
2
Operating Range for Wireless Remote Control
Remote control
Remote sensor on projector cabinet
7m/22 feet
30°
30°
30°
30°
7m/22 feet
• The infrared signal operates by line-of-sight up to a distance of about 22 feet/7 m and within a 60-degree angle of
the remote sensor on the projector cabinet.
• The projector will not respond if there are objects between the remote control and the sensor, or if strong light falls
on the sensor.
Weak batteries will also prevent the remote control from properly operating the projector.
Remote Control Precautions
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Handle the remote control carefully.
If the remote control gets wet, wipe it dry immediately.
Avoid excessive heat and humidity.
If you will not be using the remote control for a long time, remove the batteries.
Do not place the batteries upside down.
Do not use new and old batteries together, or use different types of batteries together.
Dispose of used batteries according to your local regulations.
66
7. Appendix
Using the Laser Pointer
You can use the laser to draw your audience's attention to a red dot that you can place on any object.
CAUTION:
• Do not look into the laser pointer while it is on.
• Do not point the laser beam at a person.
• Do not allow children to use the laser pointer.
Press and hold the LASER button to activate the laser pointer.
US
FOC
ZOOM
R
SE
LA
AC
IN
To disable the laser pointer, set the function switch to “Off”.
Decide whether to enable or disable laser, then set the switch as necessary using the tip of a thin ball-point pen. On
this model, the other selector switch is not used.
ON
OFF
Laser enable/disable
switch
Not used
On: Enabled (the laser lights when the LASER button is pressed) [Factory default]
Off: Disabled (the laser does not light even when the LASER button is pressed)
Disable the laser when using in an environment in which the unit is accessible to children.
Using Remote Mouse Receiver
See page 31.
67
7. Appendix
º Troubleshooting Check List
Before contacting your dealer or service personnel, check the following list to be sure repairs are needed also by
referring to the “Troubleshooting” section in your user’s manual. This checklist below will help us solve your problem
more efficiently.
* Print the following pages.
Frequency of occurrence Ⅺ always Ⅺ sometimes (How often?_____________________) Ⅺ other (__________________)
Power
No power (POWER indicator does not light green) See also “Status Indicator (STATUS)”.
Power cable's plug is fully inserted into the wall outlet.
Main power switch is pressed to the ON position.
Lamp cover is installed correctly .
Lamp Hour Meter (lamp operation hours) was cleared after
lamp replacement.
No power even though you press and hold the POWER button
for a minimum of 2 seconds.
Shut down during operation.
Power cable's plug is fully inserted into the wall outlet.
Lamp cover is installed correctly .
Power Management is turned off (only models with the Power
Management function).
Sleep Timer is turned off (only models with the Sleep Timer
function ).
Video and Audio
No image is displayed from your PC or video equipment to the
projector.
Still no image even though you connect the projector to the PC
first, then start the PC.
Enabling your notebook PC’s signal output to the projector.
• A combination of function keys will enable/disable the external display. Usually, the combination of the “Fn” key along
with one of the 12 function keys turns the external display
on or off.
No image (blue background, logo, no display).
Still no image even though you press the AUTO ADJUST button.
Still no image even though you carry out “Reset” in the
projector’s menu.
Signal cable's plug is fully inserted into the input connector
A message appears on the screen.
( _____________________________________________ )
The source connected to the projector is active and available.
Still no image even though you adjust the brightness and/or
the contrast.
Input source's resolution and frequency are supported by the
projector.
Parts of the image are lost.
Still unchanged even though you press the AUTO ADJUST button.
Still unchanged even though you carry out “Reset” in the
projector’s menu.
Image is shifted in the vertical or horizontal direction.
Horizontal and vertical positions are correctly adjusted on a
computer signal.
Input source's resolution and frequency are supported by the
projector.
Some pixels are lost.
Image is too dark.
Remains unchanged even though you adjust the brightness
and/or the contrast.
Image is distorted.
Image appears to be trapezoidal (unchanged even though you
carry out the “Keystone " or “3D Reform” adjustment).
No sound.
Audio cable is correctly connected to the audio input of the
projector.
Still unchanged even though you adjusted the volume level.
AUDIO OUT is connected to your audio equipment (only models with the AUDIO OUT connector).
Image is flickering.
Still unchanged even though you press the AUTO ADJUST button.
Still unchanged even though you carry out “Reset” in the
projector’s menu.
Image shows flickering or color drift on a computer signal.
Image appears blurry or out of focus.
Still unchanged even though you checked the signal’s resolution on PC and changed it to projector’s native resolution.
Still unchanged even though you adjusted the focus.
Other
Remote control does not work.
No obstacles between the sensor of the projector and the remote control.
Projector is placed near a fluorescent light that can disturb the
infrared remote controls.
One or more remote sensors are enabled (only models with
the Remote Sensor Selection function).
Batteries are new and are not reversed in installation.
If present on the remote control, projector selector switch is
not used.
Buttons on the projector cabinet do not work ( only models with
the Key Lock function).
Cabinet Button Lock is not turned on or is disabled in the menu.
Still unchanged even though you press and hold the EXIT button for a minimum of 10 seconds.
68
7. Appendix
In the space below please describe your problem in detail.
Information on application and environment where your projector is used
Installation environment
Projector
Model number:
Screen size:
Serial No.:
Screen type:
Ⅺ White matte Ⅺ Beads Ⅺ Polarization
Ⅺ Wide angle Ⅺ High contrast
Date of purchase:
Throw distance:
Lamp operating time (hours):
Lamp Mode:
inch
Ⅺ Normal Ⅺ Eco
Orientation:
feet/inch/m
Ⅺ Ceiling mount Ⅺ Desktop
Power outlet connection:
Information on input signal:
Horizontal synch frequency [
] kHz
Ⅺ Connected directly to wall outlet
Vertical synch frequency
[
] Hz
Synch polarity
H Ⅺ (+) Ⅺ (–)
Ⅺ Connected to power cord extender or other (the number of connected equipment______________)
Ⅺ Connected to a power cord reel or other (the number
of connected equipment______________)
V Ⅺ (+) Ⅺ (–)
Synch type
Ⅺ Separate Ⅺ Composite
Ⅺ Sync on Green
Computer
STATUS Indicator:
Steady light
Ⅺ Orange Ⅺ Green
Manufacturer:
Flashing light
[
Model number:
] cycles
Remote control model number:
Notebook PC Ⅺ / Desktop Ⅺ
Native resolution:
Refresh rate:
Video adapter:
Projector
Other:
PC
DVD player
Video equipment
Signal cable
VCR, DVD player, Video camera, Video game or other
NEC standard or other manufacturer’s cable?
Model number:
Length:
inch/m
Manufacturer:
Distribution amplifier
Model number:
Model number:
Switcher
Model number:
Adapter
Model number:
69
7. Appendix
¾ TravelCare Guide
5) Problems or damage caused by use in hot or humid places, in
vehicles, boats or ships, etc.
TravelCare - a service for international travelers
6) Problems or damage caused by expendable supplies or devices
connected to the product other than those designated by NEC.
This product is eligible for " TravelCare " , NEC's unique international warranty.
Please note that TravelCare coverage differs in part from coverage under the warranty included with the product.
7) Problems caused by natural consumption, wear or deterioration
of parts under normal usage conditions.
8) Problems or damage to lamps and other expendable supplies,
included parts or optional parts.
Services offered with TravelCare
9) Other conditions stipulated in the warranty included with the product also apply.
This warranty allows customers to receive service on their product at
the NEC and NEC-designated service stations in the countries listed
herein when temporarily traveling internationally for business or pleasure.
For details on services offered by the different service stations, please
refer to the " List of TravelCare Outlets " below.
NOTE: The product can be used overseas with voltages of 100 to 120V and 200
to 240V by using a power cable suited for the standards and power source voltage of the country in which the product is being used.
List of TravelCare Outlets
1 Repair services
The product will be repaired and delivered within 10 business days,
not including shipping time.
During the term of warranty, the cost of maintenance parts, labor
costs for repairs and shipping costs within the service station's coverage area are covered by the warranty.
This list applies as of December 1, 2004.
For the most up-to-date information, please refer to the websites of the
service stations in the various countries on the List of TravelCare Outlets or to the NEC website at http://www.nec-pj.com.
In Europe
NEC Europe, Ltd. / European Technical Centre
Address:
Unit G, Stafford Park 12, Telford TF3 3BJ, U.K.
Telephone:
+44 1952 237000
Fax Line:
+44 1952 237006
Email Address:
AFR@uk.neceur.com
WEB Address:
http://www.neceur.com
2 Replacement product rental service
If the customer desires, he or she can rent a replacement product
while the original product is being repaired.
Fee: US$200 for 12 days
This fee must be paid at the local service station in cash or credit
card.
The $200 rental fee is non-refundable even if the customer rents it
less than 12 days before returning.
The replacement product will be delivered within 3 business days.
If the customer did not return the replacement product within 12 days,
the customer will be charged the price of the unit.
If the customer returned the replacement product in a faulty or damaged condition, the repair cost will be charged to the customer.
Note that this service is not offered in all countries and regions. Please
refer to the " List of TravelCare Outlets " .
In addition, this replacement product rental service is not offered after the product's warranty has expired.
(Regions Covered)
EU:
Austria*, Belgium*, Denmark*, Finland*, France*, Germany*,
Greece*, Ireland*, Italy*, Luxembourg*, The Netherlands*,
Portugal*, Spain*, Sweden* and the United Kingdom*
EEA:
Norway*, Iceland and Liechtenstein
In North America
NEC Solutions (America), Inc.
Address:
1250 N. Arlington Heights Road,
Itasca, Illinois 60143, U.S.A.
Telephone:
+1 800 836 0655
Fax Line:
+1 800 356 2415
Email Address: vsd.tech-support@necsam.com
WEB Address: http://www.necvisualsystems.com
Term of warranty
1
a. Upon presentation of the warranty or receipt received upon purchase:
(Regions Covered)
U.S.A. *, Canada*
Valid for the term indicated on the warranty or the normal term of
warranty for the country of purchase.
In Oceania
NEC Australia Pty., Ltd.
Address: New South Wales;
184 Milperra Road, Reversby 2212
Victoria;
480 Princess Hwy Noble Park 3174
South Australia;
84A Richmond Road, Keswick 5035
Queensland;
116 Ipswich Road, Woollongabba 4102
Western Australia;
45 Sarich Court Osborne Park 6017
Telephone:
131 632 (from domestic)
+61 8 8375 5706 (from overseas)
Fax Line:
+61 8 8375 5757
Email Address: lee.gramola@nec.com.au
WEB Address: http://www.nec.com.au
b. When only the product is brought in:
Valid for a period of within 14 months of the date of manufacture
indicated by the serial number attached to the product.
2 When a product whose term of warranty is expired is brought in:
Repairs will be offered for a fee. In this case the customer is not
eligible for the replacement product rental service.
3 In the following cases, repairs may be charged, even if the product's
warranty is still in effect:
1) If the term of warranty, model name, serial number and name of
the store of purchase are not indicated on the warranty or have
been altered.
2) Problems or damage caused by dropping or shocks during shipment or movement by the customer or by improper handling by
the customers.
3) Problems or damage caused by improper usage or unwarrantable alterations or repairs by the customer.
(Regions Covered)
Australia*, New Zealand
4) Problems or damage caused by fire, salt damage, gas damage,
earthquakes, lightning damage, storm or flood damage or other
natural disasters or such external factors as dust, cigarette
smoke, abnormal voltage, etc.
70
7. Appendix
In Asia and Middle East
NEC Viewtechnology, Ltd.
Address:
686-1, Nishioi, Oi-Machi, Ashigarakami-Gun,
Kanagawa 258-0017, Japan
Telephone:
+81 465 85 2369
Fax Line:
+81 465 85 2393
Email Address:
support_pjweb@nevt.nec.co.jp
WEB Address:
http://www.nec-pj.com
Lenso Communication Co., Ltd.
Address:
292 Lenso House 4, 1st Floor, Srinakarin Road,
Huamark, Bangkapi, Bangkok 10240, Thailand
Telephone:
+66 2 375 2425
Fax Line:
+66 2 375 2434
Email Address:
pattara@lenso.com
WEB Address:
http://www.lenso.com
(Regions Covered)
Thailand
(Regions Covered)
Japan*
NEC Hong Kong Ltd.
Address:
Telephone:
Fax Line:
Email Address:
WEB Address:
ABBA Electronics L.L.C.
Address:
Tariq Bin Ziyad Road, P.O.Box 327, Dubai,
United Arab Emirates
Telephone:
+971 4 371800
Fax Line:
+971 4 364283
Email Address:
ABBA@emirates.net.ae
11th Floor, Tower B, New Mandarin Plaza, 14
Science Museum Road,
Tsim Sha Tsui East, Kowloon, Hong Kong
+852 2369 0335
+852 2795 6618
esmond_au@nechk.nec.com.hk
http://www.nec.com.hk
(Regions Covered)
United Arab Emirates
(Regions Covered)
Hong Kong
NEC Taiwan Ltd.
Address:
Telephone:
Fax Line:
Email Address:
WEB Address:
Samir Photographic Supplies
Address:
P.O.Box 599, Jeddah 21421, Saudi Arabia
Telephone:
+966 2 6828219
Fax Line:
+966 2 6830820
Email Address:
vartkes@samir-photo.com
7F, No.167, SEC.2, Nan King East Road, Taipei,
Taiwan, R.O.C.
+886 2 8500 1734
+886 2 8500 1420
nickliao@nec.com.tw
http://www.nec.com.tw
(Regions Covered)
Saudi Arabia
NOTE: In countries designated with an asterisk(*), replacement product rental
service are offered.
(Regions Covered)
Taiwan
NEC Solutions Asia Pacific Pte. Ltd
Address:
401 Commonwealth Drive, #07-02, Haw Par
Technocentre, Singapore 149598
Telephone:
+65 6 273 8333
Fax Line:
+65 6 274 2226
Email Address:
tehgh@rsc.ap.nec.com.sg
WEB Address:
http://www.nec.com.sg/ap
(Regions Covered)
Singapore
NEC Systems Integration Malaysia Sdn Bhd
Ground Floor, Menara TA One, 22, Jalan P. Ramlee,
Address:
50250 Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia
Telephone:
+6 03 2164 1199
Fax Line:
+6 03 2160 3900
Email Address:
necare@nsm.nec.co.jp
WEB Address:
http://www.necmalaysia.com.my
(Regions Covered)
Malaysia
Tele Service Co., Ltd.
Address:
2nd Fl., Ire B/D. #2, 4Ga, Yangpyeng-Dong,
Youngdeungpo-Gu, Seoul, Korea 150-967
Telephone:
+82 2 2163 4193
Fax Line:
+82 2 2163 4196
Email Address:
moneybear@hyosung.com
(Regions Covered)
South Korea
71
http://getMANUAL.com
7. Appendix
Date:
/
/
P-1/
,
,
TO: NEC or NEC's Authorized Service Station:
FM:
(Company & Name with signature)
Dear Sir (s),
I would like to apply your TravelCare Service Program based on attached registration and qualification sheet and agree with your
following conditions, and also the Service fee will be charged to my credit card account, if I don't return the Loan units within the
specified period. I also confirm following information is correct. Regards.
Application Sheet for TravelCare Service Program
Country,
product purchased :
User's Company Name :
User's Company Address :
Phone No., Fax No. :
User's Name :
User's Address :
Phone No., Fax No. :
Local Contact office :
Local Contact office Address :
Phone No., Fax No. :
User's Model Name :
Date of Purchase :
Serial No. on cabinet :
Problem of units per User :
Required Service :
(1) Repair and Return
(2) Loan unit
(1) Credit Card
(2) Travelers Cheque
Requested period of Loan unit :
Payment method :
In Case of Credit Card :
Card No. w/Valid Date :
72
(3) Cash
7. Appendix
5. Loan Service Charges and Conditions:
Upon acceptance of this NEC Projector, Customer agrees to assume
liability for this loan unit.
Condition of your TravelCare Service Program
Enduser is requested to understand following condition of TravelCare
Service Program and complete the necessary information on the application sheet.
The current cost of use of this loan unit is $200.00 USD for 12 calendar
days.
If Customer does not return the unit within the 12 calendar days, Customer will be charged the next highest cost up to and including the full
list price to Credit Cards, which price will be informed by NEC Authorized Service Stations. Please see the attached listing of contacts for
each country to arrange for pickup of the loan unit.
1. Service Options:
There are 3 types of " Service " available. Enduser has to understand
following condition and is required to fill in the Application Sheet.
1) Repair and Return:
The 'Faulty unit' is sent or collected from the customer. It is repaired
and returned within 10 days to the customer, excluding transport time.
If you return to their country of origin with the loan unit, you will be
charged additional freight to return the unit to the loaning country.
There may have a case, repair and return can't be done by NEC
Authorized Service Station, because of shortage of spare parts due
to same model is not sold in the territory.
Thank you for your understanding of this program.
2) Repair and Return with Loan: (This service is limited to some Service Stations)
This service is offered to the Enduser, who cannot wait until their unit
is repaired.
The customer can borrow a unit for $200 up to 12 days. Customer
then sends in inoperable unit to nearest NEC Authorized Service
Station for service. In order to prevent collection problem, Enduser is
required to fill in Application Sheet.
Enduser needs to confirm the availability of the Service to NEC Authorized Service Stations.
3) Loan Only:
For this service, NEC Authorized Service Station supplies the customer with a loan unit for US$200 up to 12 days. Customer keeps the
inoperable unit and when customer returns home, customer arranges
to have the projector serviced in the home country.
2. Warranty Exclusions:
This program does not apply if the Projector's serial number has been
defaced, modified or removed.
If, in the judgement of NEC Authorized Service Station or its agent the
defects or failures result from any cause other than fair wear and tear or
NEC neglect, or fault including the following without limitation:
1) Accidents, transportation, neglect, misuse, abuse, water, dust, smoke
or default of or by the Customer its employees or agents or any third
party;
2) Failure or fluctuation of electrical power, electrical circuitry, air conditioning, humidity control or other environmental conditions such as
use it in smoking area;
3) Any fault in the attachments or associated products or components
(whether or not supplied by NEC or its agents which do not form part
of the Product covered by this warranty);
4) Any act of God, fire, flood, war, act of violence or any similar occurrence;
5) Any attempt by any person other than any person authorized by NEC
to adjust, modify, repair, install or service the product.
6) Any Cross-border charges such as, duty, insurance, tax etc.
3. Charges for Warranty Exclusions and Out of Warranty Case:
In case faulty unit is under warranty exclusions case or under Out of
Warranty period, NEC Authorized Service Station will Inform estimation
of actual service cost to the Enduser with reason.
4. Dead on Arrival (DOA):
Enduser must take this issue up with their original supplier in the country of purchase.
NEC Authorized Service Station will repair the DOA unit as a Warranty
repair, but will not exchange DOA unit with new units.
Ver. 3 03/05
73
7N8P4372
Printed in Japan
Printed on recycled paper
© NEC Viewtechnology, Ltd. 2004-2005
Ver. 2 03/05
VT47
ᕡ Connect the supplied 15pin-15pin signal cable.
For older Macintosh computers, use a commercially available pin adapter to connect to
your Macintosh’s video port.
ᕢ Connect the supplied power cable.
VT676/VT670/VT575/VT470
COMPUTER IN
VIDEO IN
L/MONO
AUDIO
R
AUDIO
COMPUTER 1 IN
COMPUTER IN
S-VIDEO IN
MONITOR OUT
COMPUTER 2 IN
ᕡ Schließen Sie das mitgelieferte 15polige Signalkabel an.
Verwenden Sie für ältere Macintosh-Computer einen handelsüblichen Stiftadapter für den
Anschluss an Ihren Macintosh-Videoport.
ᕢ Schließen Sie das mitgelieferte Netzkabel an.
PC CONTROL
VIDEO IN
L/MONO
AUDIO
S-VIDEO IN
L/MONO
AUDIO
R
COMPUTER 1 IN
R
AUDIO OUT
AUDIO
COMPUTER 2 IN
PC CONTROL
MONITOR OUT
AC IN
ᕡ
ᕢ
Power cable (supplied)
Netzkabel (Lieferumfang)
Câble d'alimentation (fourni)
Cavo d´alimentazione (in dotazione)
Cable de alimentación (suministrado)
Nätkabel (medföljer)
RGB signal cable (supplied)
RGB-Signalkabel (Lieferumfang)
Câble de signal RGB (fourni)
Cavo dei segnali RGB (in dotazione)
Cable de señal RGB (suministrado)
RGB-signalkabel (medföljer)
ᕡ Connecter le câble de signal 15 broches-15 broches fourni.
Pour les ordinateurs Macintosh anciens, utiliser un adaptateur à broche disponible dans
le commerce pour connecter au port vidéo du Macintosh.
ᕢ Connecter le câble d'alimentation fourni.
ᕡ Collegate il cavo dei segnali 15 pin – 15 pin in dotazione.
Per i computer Macintosh di vecchia data, usate un adattatore venduto separatamente
per collegare la porta video del Macintosh.
ᕢ Collegate il cavo d´alimentazione in dotazione.
ᕡ Conecte el cable de señal de 15-15 contactos suministrado.
Para ordenadores Macintosh más antiguos, utilice un adaptador de contactos (disponible
en el comercio) para realizar la conexión al puerto de vídeo del ordenador Macintosh.
ᕢ Conecte el cable de alimentación suministrado.
ᕡ Anslut den medlevererade 15P-15P-signalkabeln.
För äldre Macintosh-datorer krävs det en särskild stiftadapter (säljs separat) för
anslutning till din Macintoshs videoport.
ᕢ Anslut den medlevererade nätkabeln.
Mini D-SUB 15 pin connector
15poliger Mini D-Sub Anschluss
Connecteur Mini D-Sub à 15 broches
Connettore mini D-SUB a 15 pin
Conector Mini D-Sub de 15 contactos
15-polig Mini D-Sub-kontakt
If you encounter problems while setting up or using the projector, see
" Troubleshooting " in the user's manual on the supplied CD-ROM or the
Important Information.
Se avete qualunque problema durante la messa a punto o nell’utilizzo
del proiettore, consultate “Localizzazione dei guasti” nel manuale delle
istruzioni nel CD-ROM fornito oppure le Informazioni Importanti.
Falls Sie beim Aufstellen oder bei der Verwendung des Projektors
irgendwelche Probleme haben sollten, lesen Sie bitte den Abschnitt
“Fehlersuche” im Benutzerhandbuch auf der im Lieferumfang
enthaltenen CD-ROM oder den Abschnitt Wichtige Informationen.
En cas de problèmes lors de l’installation ou de l’utilisation du
projecteur, voir la section “Dépistage des pannes” dans le manuel de
l’utilisateur sur le CD-ROM fourni ou les Informations Importantes.
Si se le presenta algún problema mientras configura o utiliza el
proyector, consulte “Detección de fallos” en el manual del usuario en el
CD-ROM suministrado o información importante.
Se “Felsökning” i bruksanvisningen på den medföljande CD-ROMskivan eller Viktig information, om du skulle få några problem då du
ställer in eller använder projektorn.
LAMP
STATUS
FO
CU
S
LAMP
POWER
OFF
STATUS
ON
OM
POWER
ZO
POWER
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
MAGNIFY PIC-MUTE
PAGE
UP
SELECT
DOWN
AC
IN
ON/STAND BY
MENU
Turn on the main power switch.
To turn on the main power to the projector, press the Main Power switch to the on
position ( I ).
The projector will go into its standby mode and the power indicator will glow orange.
Turn on the projector.
To turn on the power to the projector, press and hold the ON/STAND BY button on the
projector cabinet or the POWER ON button on the remote control for a minimum of 2
seconds.
Schalten Sie den Hauptnetzschalter ein.
Drücken Sie zum Einschalten der Hauptstromversorgung zum Projektor den
Hauptnetzschalter in Ein-Position ( I ).
Der Projektor schaltet sich in seinen Standby-Modus und die Netzanzeige leuchtet
orange.
Schalten Sie den Projektor ein.
Drücken und halten Sie zum Einschalten des Projektors die ON/STAND BY-Taste am
Projektorgehäuse oder die POWER ON-Taste auf der Fernbedienung mindestens 2
Sekunden lang gedrückt.
Enfoncer l'interrupteur d'alimentation général.
Pour mettre le projecteur sous tension, enfoncer l'interrupteur d'alimentation en
position marche ( I ).
Le projecteur se met dans son mode veille et l'indicateur d'alimentation s'allume en
orange.
Allumer le projecteur.
Pour allumer le projecteur, appuyer sur la touche ON/STAND BY du coffret du projecteur
ou sur la touche POWER ON de la télécommande et la maintenir enfoncée pendant au
moins 2 secondes.
Accendete l´interruttore principale.
Per accendere la corrente principale del proiettore, premete l´interruttore principale
nella posizione di accensione ( I ).
Il proiettore passerà al modo di attesa e l'indicatore di corrente si accenderà in
arancione.
Accensione del proiettore.
Per accendere la corrente del proiettore, premete e mantenete premuto il tasto ON/
STAND BY sull´involucro del proiettore o il tasto POWER ON del telecomando,
mantenendolo premuto per almeno 2 secondi.
Active el interruptor de alimentación principal.
Para conectar la alimentación principal del proyector, pulse el interruptor de
alimentación principal de modo que quede en la posición de activado ( I ).
El proyector entrará en modo de espera y el indicador de potencia se iluminará en
naranja.
Slå på huvudströmbrytaren.
För att slå på strömmen till projektorn, ställ huvudströmbrytaren i På-läget ( I ).
Projektorn ställs i Standby-läget och strömindikatorn lyser orange.
Encienda el proyector.
Para conectar la alimentación del proyector, pulse el botón ON/STAND BY en la cubierta
del proyector o el botón POWER ON en el mando a distancia durante al menos 2
segundos.
Slå på strömmen till projektorn.
Tryck på ON/STAND BY-tangenten på projektorhöljet eller POWER ON-tangenten på
fjärrkontrollen intryckt i minst 2 sekunder för att slå på strömmen till projektorn.
SE
LE
CT
LA
ST
COMPUTER AUTO ADJ.
MP
R-CLICK
VIDEO
AT
US
PO
W
ER
VI
ON
/S
DE
O
TA
ND
BY
VI
S-
DE
O
CO
MP
UT
ER
-1
CO
MP
UT
ER
-2
TO
AU J.
AD
1
L-CLICK
MOUSE
2
1
ZO
-1
ER
UT
MP
CO
-2
ER
UT
MP
CO
Adjustable Tilt Foot
Einstellbarer Kippfuß
Pied à inclinaison réglable
Piede d’inclinazione regolabile
Pata de inclinación ajustable
Justerbar lutningsfot
BY
US
AT
ST
ER
W
PO
MP
LA
CT
LE
SE
4
3
FO
S
CU
OM
ZO
Auswählen einer Quelle.
Schalten Sie den Computer ein. Drücken Sie die COMPUTER 1- oder COMPUTER 2Taste auf der Fernbedienung. (Ein COMPUTER-Port am VT47)
HINWEIS: Automatische Optimierung des RGB-Bildes.
Drücken Sie die AUTO ADJ.-Taste, um ein RGB-Bild automatisch zu optimieren.
Adjustable Tilt Foot lever
Einstellbare Kippfußtaste
Touche du pied à inclinaison réglable
Tasto del piede di inclinazione regolabile
Botón de pata de inclinación ajustable
Justerbar lutningsfottangent
O
DE
VI
S-
Selecting a Source.
Turn on the computer. Press the COMPUTER 1 or COMPUTER 2 button on the remote
control. (One COMPUTER port on VT47)
NOTE: Optimizing RGB image automatically.
Press the AUTO ADJ. button to optimize an RGB image automatically.
2
O
DE
VI
HELP
FREEZE
S
CU
ASPECT
PICTURE
FO
2
VOLUME
OM
Adjustable Tilt Foot lever
Einstellbare Kippfußtaste
Touche du pied à inclinaison réglable
Tasto del piede di inclinazione regolabile
Botón de pata de inclinación ajustable
Justerbar lutningsfottangent
ND
TA
/S
ON
S-VIDEO
Sélectionner une source.
Mettre l'ordinateur en marche. Presser la touche COMPUTER 1 ou COMPUTER 2 de la
télécommande. (Un port COMPUTER sur le VT47)
REMARQUE: Optimiser automatiquement une image RGB.
Presser la touche AUTO ADJ. pour optimiser automatiquement l’image RGB.
Selezione di una fonte.
Accendete il computer. Premete il tasto COMPUTER 1 o COMPUTER 2 sul telecomando.
(una porta COMPUTER sul modello VT47)
NOTA: Ottimizzazione automatica dell’immagine RGB.
Premere il tasto AUTO ADJ. per ottimizzare automaticamente un’immagine RGB.
Selección de una fuente.
Encienda el ordenador. Pulse el botón COMPUTER 1 o COMPUTER 2 en el mando a
distancia. (un puerto COMPUTER en el VT47)
NOTA: Optimización automática de la imagen RGB.
Pulse el botón AUTO ADJ. para optimizar automáticamente la imagen RGB.
Välja en källa.
Slå på datorn. Tryck på COMPUTER 1- eller COMPUTER 2-tangenten på fjärrkontrollen.
(En COMPUTER-port på VT47)
OBSERVERA: Automatisk optimering av RGB-bilder.
Tryck på AUTO ADJ.-tangenten för att optimera en RGB-bild automatiskt.
4
Adjust the Tilt Foot.
Push up and hold the Adjustable Tilt Foot Button on the front of the projector to extend the
adjustable tilt feet (maximum height).
Einstellung des Kippfußes.
Halten Sie die einstellbare Kippfußtaste an der Vorderseite des Projektors gedrückt, um die
einstellbaren Kippfüße auszufahren (maximale Höhe).
Régler le pied de réglage de l’inclinaison.
Pousser vers le haut et maintenir le bouton de réglage de l’inclinaison à l’avant du projecteur
pour augmenter la hauteur du pied de réglage (hauteur maximale).
Regolate il piedino d’inclinazione.
Alzate e tenete il tasto del piedino d’inclinazione regolabile sulla parte anteriore del
proiettore per aprire i piedi inclinabili e regolabili (altezza massima).
Ajuste de las patas de inclinación.
Presione hacia arriba (y manténgalo en dicha posición) el botón de las patas de inclinación,
situado en la parte delantera del proyector, para extender las patas ajustables (altura máxima).
Justera lutningen med foten.
Tryck upp och håll justerfotsknappen på projektorns framsida för att förlänga justerfötterna
(maxhöjd).
Zoom lever
Leva per lo zoom
Zoom-Hebel
Palanca de zoom
Levier de zoom Zoomspak
VT676/VT670/VT575/VT470
S
CU
FO
ZOOM
Correcting Keystone Distortion [Keystone]
● Auto Keystone Correction (Vertical)
The Auto Keystone correction feature will correct the vertical distortion of a projected
image on the screen.
No special operation required. Just put the projector on a flat surface.
C
FO
VT47
US
S
CU
FO
ZOO
M
FOC
US
FOC
US
ZOOM
ZOOM
AC
AC
IN
IN
Digital ZOOM button
Tasto Digital ZOOM
Digital-ZOOM-Taste
Botón Digital ZOOM
Touche du ZOOM numérique Knappen för digital ZOOM
Focus ring
Anello di messa a fuoco
Fokussierring
Aro de enfoque
Anneau de l’objectif Fokusring
Adjusting the image size and the focus.
Zoom: Use the Zoom lever to finely adjust the image size on the screen. On VT47, use the
Digital ZOOM button on the projector cabinet.
Focus: Use the Focus ring to obtain the best focus.
Stellen Sie die Bildgröße und den Fokus ein.
Zoom: Führen Sie die Feineinstellung der Bildgröße auf dem Projektionsschirm mit dem
Zoom-Hebel aus. Verwenden Sie beim VT47 die Digital-ZOOM-Taste am Projektorgehäuse.
Fokus: Verwenden Sie den Fokussierring zum Erzielen der besten Fokusleistung.
Régler la taille de l'image et effectuer la mise au point optique de l'objectif.
Zoom: Utiliser le levier de Zoom pour régler finement la taille de l’image à l’écran. Sur le
VT47, utiliser la touche du ZOOM numérique du projecteur.
Mise au point optique: Utiliser la bague de mise au point optique pour obtenir l’image la
plus nette à l’écran.
Regolate la dimensione dell'immagine e la messa a fuoco.
Zoom: Usate la leva dello Zoom per regolare con precisione il formato dell’immagine sullo
schermo. Sul VT47, utilizzare il tasto Digital ZOOM sull’armadietto del proiettore.
Fuoco: Usate l’anello di messa a fuoco per ottenere la migliore messa a fuoco.
Ajuste el tamaño y enfoque de la imagen.
Zoom: Utilice la palanca de Zoom para ajustar con precisión el tamaño de la imagen en la
pantalla. En el VT47, utilice el botón Digital ZOOM en la caja del proyector.
Enfoque: Utilice el aro de enfoque para lograr el mejor enfoque.
Justera bildstorlek och fokus.
Zoom: Använd Zoomspaken för att finjustera bildstorleken på duken. Använd knappen för
digital ZOOM på projektorhöljet till VT47.
Fokus: Använd Fokusringen för att fokusera.
Korrigieren der Trapezverzerrung [Trapez]
● Automatische Trapezkorrektur (Vertikal)
Die automatische Trapezkorrektur-Funktion korrigiert die vertikale Verzerrung eines
projizierten Bildes auf dem Projektionsschirm.
Es ist keine besondere Bedienung erforderlich. Stellen Sie den Projektor einfach auf eine
ebene Fläche.
Correction de la déformation trapézoïdale [Keystone]
● Correction de la déformation trapézoïdale automatique (Vertical)
La fonction de correction automatique de la déformation trapézoïdale corrige la
déformation verticale de l’image projetée à l’écran.
Aucune opération spéciale est nécessaire. Il suffit juste de placer le projecteur sur une
surface plane.
Correzione della deformazione trapezoidale [Chiave]
● Correzione automatica della deformazione trapezoidale (Verticale)
La funzione di correzione automatica della deformazione trapezoidale serve per
correggere la deformazione Verticalee dell’immagine proiettata sullo schermo.
Nessun operazione particolare è richiesta. Mettete semplicemente il proiettore su una
superficie piana.
Corrección de la distorsión trapezoidal [Keystone]
● Corrección automática de la distorsión trapezoidal (Vertical)
La función de corrección automática de la distorsión trapezoidal permite corregir la
distorsión vertical de la imagen proyectada en la pantalla.
No es necesario realizar ninguna operación especial. Simplemente instale el proyector
sobre una superficie plana.
Korrigera den keystonedistorsionen [Keystone]
● Automatisk keystonekorrigering (Vertikal)
Med funktionen för automatisk keystonekorrigering korrigeras lätt den vertikala
distorsionen för den projicerade bilden på duken.
Du behöver inte utföra någon speciell åtgärd. Placera bara projektorn på en plant
underlag.
PRINTED WITH
SOY INK
TM
Portable Projector
VT676/VT670/
VT575/VT470/VT47
Important Information
What's in the Box?
ST
FO
S
CU
ZO
OM
T
C
LE
SE
LA
MP
AT
US
PO
W
ER
VI
ON
/S
DE
O
TA
ND
BY
S-
VI
DE
O
CO
MP
UT
ER
-1
CO
MP
UT
ER
-2
TO
AU J.
AD
Make sure your box contains everything listed. If any pieces are missing, contact your dealer.
Please save the original box and packing materials if you ever need to ship your projector.
(24BS7423)
(24F40111)
FF
O
N
O
ER
W
PO
UTE
C-M
PI
Y
NIF
AG
M
E
G
PA
UP
U
EN
M
DO
W
N
EN
TE
R
CK
CLI
LIT
EX
RCL
IC
DEO
VI
S-
K
TO
E
M
LU
VO
USE R AU
O
M
TE
PU
M
CO 1
DEO
VI
AD
2
J.
CT
PE
AS
P
HEL
RE
CTU
PI
ZE
EE
FR
(US: VT676/VT670/VT470: 7N080213)
(US: VT575/VT47: 7N080212)
(EU: VT676G/VT670G/VT470G: 7N080007)
(EU: VT575G/VT47G: 7N080005)
(7N520032)
(7N900522)
k
ic
Qu tup
Se ide
Gu
nt
rta ion
po at
Im orm
f
In
For North America only
Registration card
Limited warranty
For Europe only
Guarantee policy
For VT676, VT670 and VT470 only
(24H51611)
(7N900561)
(24F39671)
(24N07502)
English
ᕡ How to Use the Supplied User Documents
Three user documents are included with the projector.
Important Information
•
First read Important Information. It covers information about projector safety, cautions, lamp replacement,
troubleshooting and other key specifications.
Quick Setup Guide
•
The Quick Setup Guide provides initial setup and usage information regarding source connection, turning on
the power, selecting a source and other basic operating instructions.
User's Manual on CD-ROM
•
The complete user's manual is supplied on the CD-ROM in PDF (Portable Document Format) and provides
detailed product and usage information for your NEC projector.
The manual is available in six languages (English, German, French, Italian, Spanish and Swedish).
To view or print the PDF files Adobe Acrobat Reader™ or Adobe Reader™ is required.
NOTE: Adobe Acrobat Reader or Adobe Reader can be downloaded from Adobe’s website.
Visit http://www.adobe.com and obtain the current version for your OS.
•
To view the user's manual (PDF)
[Windows]
1. Place the supplied CD-ROM in your computer's CD-ROM drive.
2. Double-click the [My Computer] icon on the Windows desktop.
3. Double-click the [NECPJ-UM] CD-ROM icon.
4. Double-click [start_menu.pdf].
• Adobe Acrobat Reader or Adobe Reader will start and allow you to view the Start Menu.
5. Click [User's Manual].
The Index menu will be displayed.
6. Click the chapter title you want to view.
[Macintosh]
1. Place the supplied CD-ROM in your Macintosh's CD-ROM drive.
2. Double-click the [NECPJ-UM] CD-ROM icon on your Macintosh' Desktop.
3. Double-click [start_menu.pdf].
• Adobe Acrobat Reader or Adobe Reader will start and allow you to view the Start Menu.
4. Click [User's Manual].
The Index menu will be displayed.
5. Click the chapter title you want to view.
•
To copy the User's Manual (PDF) to your computer:
The user's manuals on the supplied CD-ROM can be copied to your computer hard drive.
Select your language version of [vt70s_index_*.pdf] and [vt70s_manual_*.pdf] from the [manual] folder on the
supplied CD-ROM and copy them to your computer hard drive.
© NEC Viewtechnology, Ltd. 2004-2005
See the User’s manual (PDF format)
on the supplied CD-ROM for detailed
information.
E-1
ᕢ Safety Cautions
Precautions
Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC VT676/VT670/VT575/VT470/VT47 Projector and keep the
manual handy for future reference. Your serial number is located on the bottom of your projector. Record it here:
CAUTION
To turn off main power, be sure to remove the plug from power outlet.
The power outlet socket should be installed as near to the equipment as possible, and should be easily
accessible.
CAUTION
TO PREVENT SHOCK, DO NOT OPEN THE CABINET.
NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED NEC SERVICE PERSONNEL.
This symbol warns the user that uninsulated voltage within the unit may be sufficient to cause electrical
shock. Therefore, it is dangerous to make any kind of contact with any part inside of the unit.
This symbol alerts the user that important information concerning the operation and maintenance of this
unit has been provided.
The information should be read carefully to avoid problems.
WARNING: TO PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
DO NOT USE THIS UNIT’S PLUG WITH AN EXTENSION CORD OR IN AN OUTLET UNLESS ALL THE PRONGS
CAN BE FULLY INSERTED.
DO NOT OPEN THE CABINET. THERE ARE HIGH-VOLTAGE COMPONENTS INSIDE. ALL SERVICING MUST
BE DONE BY QUALIFIED NEC SERVICE PERSONNEL.
DOC Compliance Notice (for Canada only)
This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.
Acoustic Noise Information Ordinance-3. GSGV (for Germany only):
The sound pressure level is less than 70 dB (A) according to ISO 3744 or ISO 7779.
CAUTION
Avoid displaying stationary images for a prolonged period of time.
Doing so can result in these images being temporarily sustained on the surface of the LCD panel.
If this should happen, continue to use your projector. The static background from previous images will
disappear.
CAUTION
Do not put the projector on its side when the lamp is turned on.
Doing so may cause damage to the projector.
WARNING TO CALIFORNIA RESIDENTS:
Handling the cables supplied with this product, will expose you to lead, a chemical known to the State of California
to cause birth defects or other reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling.
E-2
RF Interference (for USA only)
WARNING
The Federal Communications Commission does not allow any modifications or changes to the unit EXCEPT those
specified by NEC Solutions (America), Inc. in this manual. Failure to comply with this government regulation could
void your right to operate this equipment. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by
turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the
following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio / TV technician for help.
For UK only: In UK, a BS approved power cable with moulded plug has a Black (five Amps) fuse installed for use with
this equipment. If a power cable is not supplied with this equipment please contact your supplier.
Important Safeguards
These safety instructions are to ensure the long life of your projector and to prevent fire and shock. Please read them
carefully and heed all warnings.
Installation
1. For best results, use your projector in a darkened room.
2. Place the projector on a flat, level surface in a dry area away from dust and moisture.
3. Do not place your projector in direct sunlight, near heaters or heat radiating appliances.
4. Exposure to direct sunlight, smoke or steam can harm internal components.
5. Handle your projector carefully. Dropping or jarring can damage internal components.
6. Do not place heavy objects on top of the projector.
7. If you wish to have the projector installed on the ceiling:
a. Do not attempt to install the projector yourself.
b. The projector must be installed by qualified technicians in order to ensure proper operation and reduce the
risk of bodily injury.
c. In addition, the ceiling must be strong enough to support the projector and the installation must be in accordance with any local building codes.
d. Please consult your dealer for more information.
Place the projector in a horizontal position
The tilt angle of the projector should not exceed 10 degrees, nor should the projector be installed in any way other than
the desktop and ceiling mount, otherwise lamp life could decrease dramatically.
10˚
E-3
Fire and Shock Precautions
1. Ensure that there is sufficient ventilation and that vents are unobstructed to prevent the build-up of heat inside
your projector. Allow at least 4 inches (10 cm) of space between your projector and a wall.
2. Prevent foreign objects such as paper clips and bits of paper from falling into your projector.
Do not attempt to retrieve any objects that might fall into your projector. Do not insert any metal objects such as
a wire or screwdriver into your projector. If something should fall into your projector, disconnect it immediately
and have the object removed by a qualified NEC service personnel.
3. Do not place any liquids on top of your projector.
4. Do not look into the lens while the projector is on. Serious damage to your eyes could result.
5. Keep any items such as magnifying glass out of the light path of the projector. The light being projected from the
lens is extensive, therefore any kind of abnormal objects that can redirect light coming out of the lens, can
cause unpredictable outcome such as fire or injury to the eyes.
6. Do not cover the lens with the supplied lens cap or equivalent while the projector is on. Doing so can lead to
melting of the cap and possibly burning your hands due to the heat emitted from the light output.
7. Do not place any objects, which are easily affected by heat, in front of the projector lens or a projector exhaust
vent.
Doing so could lead to the object melting or getting your hands burned from the heat that is emitted from the
light output and exhaust.
8. The projector is designed to operate on a power supply of 100-240V AC 50/60 Hz. Ensure that your power
supply fits this requirement before attempting to use your projector.
9. Handle the power cable carefully and avoid excessive bending.
A damaged cord can cause electric shock or fire.
10. If the projector is not to be used for an extended period of time, disconnect the plug from the power outlet.
11. Do not touch the power plug during a thunderstorm. Doing so can cause electrical shock or fire.
12. Do not handle the power plug with wet hands.
CAUTION
• Do not try to touch the ventilation outlet on the left side (when seen from the front) as it can become heated
while the projector is turned on.
• Do no use the tilt-foot for purposes other than originally intended. Misuses such as gripping the tilt-foot or
hanging on the wall can cause damage to the projector.
• When carrying the projector by the carrying handle, make sure the two screws that attach the carrying handle
to the projector cabinet are tight. (VT676/VT670/VT470 only)
Insufficient tightening of the two screws could result in the projector falling and causing injury.
• Do not send the projector in the soft carrying case by parcel delivery service or cargo shipment. The projector
inside the soft carrying case could be damaged.
• Select [High] in Fan mode if you continue to use the projector for consecutive days. (From the menu, select
[Advanced] → [Fan Mode] → [High].)
• Do not unplug the power cable from the wall outlet under any one of the following circumstances.
Doing so can cause damage to the projector:
* While the Hour Glass icon appears.
* While the cooling fans are running. (The cooling fans continue to work for 30 seconds after the projector is
turned off).
E-4
http://getMANUAL.com
Lamp Replacement
•
To replace the lamp, follow all instructions provided on page E-8.
•
Be sure to replace the lamp when the message “The lamp has reached the end of its usable life. Please
replace the lamp.” appears. If you continue to use the lamp after the lamp has reached the end of its usable
life, the lamp bulb may shatter, and pieces of glass may be scattered in the lamp case. Do not touch them as the
pieces of glass may cause injury.
If this happens, contact your NEC dealer for lamp replacement.
•
Allow a minimum of 30 seconds to elapse after turning off the projector. Then turn off the main power switch,
disconnect the power cable and allow 60 minutes to cool the projector before replacing the lamp.
E-5
ᕣ Cleaning or Replacing the Filter
The air-filter sponge keeps dust and dirt from getting inside the projector and should be cleaned after every 100 hours
of operation (more often in dusty conditions). If the filter is dirty or clogged, your projector may overheat.
CAUTION
•
Turn off the projector, turn off the main power switch and unplug the projector before replacing the filter.
•
Only clean the outside of the filter cover with a vacuum cleaner.
•
Do not attempt to operate the projector without the filter cover.
To clean the air-filter:
FO
S
CU
ZO
OM
T
C
LE
SE
MP
LA
US
AT
ST
ER
W
PO
O
DE
VI
ND
TA
/S
ON
BY
O
DE
VI
S-
-1
ER
UT
MP
CO
-2
ER
UT
MP
CO
TO
AU J.
AD
Vacuum the filter-through the filter cover.
To reset the filter usage time, from the menu, select [Default] → [Clear Filter Usage].
See also page 47 (User’s Manual) for resetting the filter usage time.
To replace the filter (sponge):
1. Remove the filter cover by pushing down on the catch of the cover until you feel it detach.
Catch
2. Gently peel off the filter (sponge) and replace it with the new one.
E-6
3. Reinstall the new filter cover.
NOTE: Do not wash the filter with soap and water. Soap and water will damage the filter membrane. Before replacing the filter,
remove dust and dirt from the projector cabinet. Keep out dust and dirt during filter replacement.
NOTE: When you replace the lamp, it is also wise to replace the filter. The filter comes in the same package with your replacement
lamp.
ᕤ Cleaning the Cabinet and the Lens
1. Turn off the projector before cleaning.
2. Clean the cabinet periodically with a damp cloth. If heavily soiled, use a mild detergent. Never use strong
detergents or solvents such as alcohol or thinner.
3. Use a blower or lens paper to clean the lens, and be careful not to scratch or mar the lens.
CU
FO
TO
AU J.
AD
S
M
T
C
LE
SE
MP
LA
US
AT
ST
ER
W
PO
O
DE
VI
ND
TA
/S
ON
BY
S-
DE
VI
O
-1
ER
UT
MP
CO
-2
ER
UT
MP
CO
ZOO
SEL
ECT
US
AT
ST
ER
W
PO
MP
LA
O
DE
VI
ND
TA
/S
ON
BY
O
DE
VI
S-1
ER
UT
MP
CO
-2
ER
UT
MP
CO
ZO
IN
L/M
ONO AU
DIO
R
O IN
AU
L/M
ONO AU
S
CU
IDE
DIO
FO
EO
OM
TO
AU J.
AD
VID
S-V
DIO
CO
R
AU
DIO
OU
MP
UTE
R1
IN
T
CO
AU
MP
UTE
R
OU
DIO
CO
T
PC
CO
NTR
OL
MP
UTE
R2
IN
AC
IN
E-7
ᕥ Replacing the Lamp
After your lamp has been operating for 2000* hours (up to 3000* hours in Eco mode) or longer, the LAMP indicator in
the cabinet will blink red and the message “The lamp has reached the end of its usable life. Please replace the
lamp.” will appear. Even though the lamp may still be working, replace it at 2000* (up to 3000* hours in Eco mode)
hours to maintain optimal projector performance. After replacing the lamp, be sure to clear the lamp hour meter. See
page 47 (User’s Manual).
CAUTION
•
DO NOT TOUCH THE LAMP immediately after it has been used. It will be extremely hot. Turn the projector off,
wait 30 seconds, turn off the main power switch and then disconnect the power cable. Allow at least one hour
for the lamp to cool before handling.
•
DO NOT REMOVE ANY SCREWS except two lamp case screws. You could receive an electric shock.
•
Do not break the glass on the lamp housing.
Keep finger prints off the glass surface on the lamp housing. Leaving finger prints in the glass surface might
cause an unwanted shadow and poor picture quality.
•
The projector will turn off and go into standby mode after 2100* (up to 3100* hours in Eco mode) hours of
service. If this happens, be sure to replace the lamp. If you continue to use the lamp after 2000* hours (up to
3000* hours in Eco mode) of use, the lamp bulb may shatter, and pieces of glass may be scattered in the lamp
case. Do not touch them as the pieces of glass may cause injury. If this happens, contact your NEC dealer for
lamp replacement.
*NOTE: Lamp life for VT575/VT47 is 3000 hours in Normal mode and 4000 hours in Eco mode.
The projector will turn off and go into standby mode after 3100 (up to 4100 hours in Eco mode) hours of service.
To replace the lamp:
Optional lamp and tools needed for replacement:
• Replacement lamp VT75LP (VT676/VT670/VT470) or VT70LP (VT575/VT47)
• Phillips screwdriver or equivalent
NOTE: The two lamp houses are slightly different in appearance.
The following explanation uses drawings for the lamp VT75LP.
1. Place the projector on a soft cloth and turn it over to access the lamp cover on the bottom.
2. Use a Philips screwdriver to push and release the tab.
Push up and remove the lamp cover.
Philips
screwdriver
Catch
E-8
3. Loosen the two screws securing the lamp housing until the phillips screwdriver goes into a freewheeling
condition. The two screws are not removable.
Remove the lamp housing by holding it.
Interlock
NOTE: There is an interlock on this case to prevent the risk of electrical shock. Do not attempt to circumvent this interlock.
4. Insert a new lamp housing until the lamp housing is plugged into the socket.
CAUTION
Do not use a lamp other than the NEC replacement lamp VT75LP (VT676/VT670/VT470) or VT70LP (VT575/
VT47).
Order this from your NEC dealer.
Secure it in place with the two screws.
Be sure to tighten the screws.
5. Reattach the lamp cover.
Slip the lamp cover back until it snaps into place.
6. Connect the supplied power cable, turn on the Main Power switch and turn on the projector.
7. Finally, select the menu → [Default] → [Clear Lamp Hour Meter] to reset the lamp usage hours.
NOTE: When the lamp exceeds 2100* hours (up to 3100* hours in Eco mode) of service, the projector cannot turn on and the
menu is not displayed.
If this happens, press the HELP button on the remote control for ten seconds to reset the lamp clock back to zero.
When the lamp time clock is reset to zero, the LAMP indicator goes out.
* VT575 and VT47: 3100 hours (up to 4100 hours in Eco mode).
E-9
ᕦ Troubleshooting
This section helps you resolve problems you may encounter while setting up or using the projector.
Indicator Messages
Power Indicator
Indicator Condition
Projector Condition
The main power is off
Off
Note
–
0.5 sec On,
0.5 sec Off
The projector is getting ready to turn on. Wait for a moment.
2.5 sec On,
Off Timer is enabled.
–
The projector is cooling down.
Wait for a moment.
Green
The projector is turned on.
–
Orange
Blinking light
The projector is in Standby.
–
Green
0.5 sec Off
0.5 sec On,
0.5 sec Off
Orange
Steady light
Status Indicator
Indicator Condition
Off
Blinking light
Red
Projector Condition
Note
–
Normal
1 cycle (0.5 sec On, Lamp cover error or lamp housing error Replace the lamp cover or lamp
2.5 sec Off)
2 cycle (0.5 sec On, Temperature error
0.5 sec Off)
housing correctly.
4 cycle (0.5 sec On, Fan error
0.5 sec Off)
Fans will not work correctly.
6 cycle (0.5 sec On, Lamp error
0.5 sec Off)
Lamp fails to light. Wait a full
minute and then turn on again.
The projector is overheated. Move
the projector to a cooler location.
Green
Steady light
Re-firing the lamp (The projector is cool- The projector is re-firing.
Orange
ing down.)
Cabinet button is locked
Wait for a moment.
You have pressed cabinet button
when Cabinet Button is locked.
Lamp Indicator
Indicator Condition
Off
Projector Condition
Normal
Note
–
Blinking light
Red
Lamp has reached its end of life. Lamp Replace the lamp.
Steady light
Red
replacement message will be displayed.
Lamp has been used beyond its limit. The Replace the lamp.
projector will not turn on until the lamp is
replaced.
Green
Lamp mode is set to Eco mode
E-10
–
Common Problems & Solutions (See also " Power/Status/Lamp Indicator " on page E-10.)
(The numbers in the table refer to pages in the User’s Manual)
Problem
Check These Items
Does not turn on
• Check that the power cable is plugged in and that the power button on the projector cabinet or the remote
control is on. See pages 20 and 21.
• Ensure that the lamp cover is installed correctly. See page 51.
• Check to see if the projector has overheated or the lamp usage exceeds 2100* hours (up to 3100* hours : Eco
mode). If there is insufficient ventilation around the projector or if the room where you’re presenting is particularly warm, move the projector to a cooler location.
* VT575 and VT47: 3100 hours (up to 4100 hours in Eco mode).
• The lamp may fail to light. Wait a full minute and then turn on the power again.
• The lamp has reached the end of its usable life. Replace the lamp.
Will turn off
• Ensure that the Power Management is off. See page 45.
No picture
• Use the VIDEO, the S-VIDEO or the COMPUTER button on the remote control to select your source (Computer,
Video or S-Video). See page 23. If there is still no picture, press the button again.
• Ensure your cables are connected properly.
• Use menus to adjust the brightness and contrast. See page 38.
• Remove the lens cap.
• Reset the settings or adjustments to factory preset levels using the “Default” in the Menu. See page 47.
• Enter your registered keyword if the Security function is enabled. See page 42.
• When using with a notebook PC, be sure to connect between the projector and the notebook PC before turning
on the power to the notebook PC. In most cases signal cannot be output from RGB output unless the notebook
PC is turned on after connecting with the projector.
* If the screen goes blank while using your remote control, it may be the result of the computer's screensaver or power management software.
• See also the next page.
Picture suddenly
becomes dark
• When one of the following happens, the Lamp mode automatically changes from Normal to Eco.
* When there are no signals (blue or black screen) → To return to the Normal mode, select another available
source.
* When the image is muted using the PIC-MUTE button on the remote control → Press the PIC-MUTE button
again to return to the Normal mode.
* When the room where you' re presenting is particularly warm → Move the projector to a cooler location.
Color tone or hue is
unusual
• Check if an appropriate color is selected in " Wall Color " . If so, select an appropriate option. See page 37.
• Adjust " Hue " in " Picture " . See page 38.
Image isn’t square to
the screen
• Reposition the projector to improve its angle to the screen. See page 24.
• Use the Keystone correction function to correct the trapezoid distortion. See page 26.
Picture is blurred
• Adjust the focus. See page 25.
• Reposition the projector to improve its angle to the screen. See page 24.
• Ensure that the distance between the projector and screen is within the adjustment range of the lens. See
pages 11 for VT676/VT670/VT575/VT470 and 12 for VT47.
• Condensation may form on the lens if the projector is cold, brought into a warm place and is then turned on.
Should this happen, let the projector stand until there is no condensation on the lens.
Image is scrolling
vertically, horizontally
or both
• Use the VIDEO, the S-VIDEO or the COMPUTER button on the remote control to select your source (Video, SVideo or Computer). See page 23.
• Adjust the computer image manually with the Horizontal/Vertical in the “Advanced → Page 2”. See page 45.
Remote control does
not work
• Install new batteries.See page 10.
• Make sure there are no obstacles between you and the projector.
• Stand within 22 feet (7 m) of the projector. See page 10.
Indicator is lit or
blinking
• See the POWER/STATUS/LAMP Indicator on page 53.
Cross color in RGB
mode
• Press the AUTO ADJ. button on the projector cabinet or the remote control. See page 28.
• When “Off” is selected in Auto Adjust, adjust the computer image manually with Clock/Phase in “Advanced →
Page 2” in the menu. See pages 45 and 46.
For more information contact your dealer.
E-11
If there is no picture, or the picture is not displayed correctly.
•
Power on process for the projector and the PC.
Be sure to connect the RGB cable between the projector and the computer before turning on the computer.
There are some notebook PCs, which do not output signal unless there is a projector or monitor connected first.
NOTE: You can check the horizontal frequency of the current signal in the projector’s menu under Information. If it reads
“0kHz”, this means there is no signal being output from the computer. See page 46 (User’s Manual) or go to next step.
•
Enabling the computer’s external display.
Displaying an image on the notebook PC’s screen does not necessarily mean it outputs a signal to the projector. When using a PC compatible laptop, a combination of function keys will enable/disable the external display.
Usually, the combination of the ‘Fn” key along with one of the 12 function keys gets the external display to come
on or off. For example, NEC laptops use Fn + F3, while Dell laptops use Fn + F8 key combinations to toggle
through external display selections.
•
Non-standard signal output from the computer
If the output signal from a notebook PC is not an industry standard, the projected image may not be displayed
correctly. Should this happen, deactivate the notebook PC’s LCD screen when the projector display is in use.
Each notebook PC has a different way of deactivate/reactivate the local LCD screens as described in the
previous step. Refer to your computer’s documentation for detailed information.
•
Image displayed is incorrect when using a Macintosh
When using a Macintosh with the projector, set the DIPswitch of the Mac adapter (not supplied with the projector) according to your resolution. After setting, restart your Macintosh for the changes to take affect.
For setting display modes other than those supported by your Macintosh and the projector, changing the DIP
switch on a Mac adapter may bounce an image slightly or may display nothing. Should this happen, set the DIP
switch to the 13” fixed mode and then restart your Macintosh. After that, restore the DIP switches to a
displayable mode and then restart the Macintosh again.
NOTE: A Video Adapter cable manufactured by Apple Computer is needed for a PowerBook which does not have a mini D-Sub
15-pin connector.
•
Mirroring on a PowerBook
* When using the projector with a Macintosh PowerBook, output may not be set to 1024 x 768 unless “mirroring” is off on your PowerBook. Refer to owner’s manual supplied with your Macintosh computer for mirroring.
•
Folders or icons are hidden on the Macintosh screen
Folders or icons may not be seen on the screen. Should this happen, select [View] → [Arrange] from the Apple
menu and arrange icons.
E-12
Portable Projector
VT37
User’s Manual
Important Information
Safety Cautions
Precautions
Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC VT37 Projector and keep the manual handy for future
reference. Your serial number is located on the bottom of your projector. Record it here:
CAUTION
To turn off main power, be sure to remove the plug from power outlet.
The power outlet socket should be installed as near to the equipment as possible, and should be easily
accessible.
CAUTION
TO PREVENT SHOCK, DO NOT OPEN THE CABINET.
NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED NEC SERVICE PERSONNEL.
This symbol warns the user that uninsulated voltage within the unit may be sufficient to cause electrical
shock. Therefore, it is dangerous to make any kind of contact with any part inside of the unit.
This symbol alerts the user that important information concerning the operation and maintenance of this
unit has been provided.
The information should be read carefully to avoid problems.
WARNING: TO PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
DO NOT USE THIS UNIT’S PLUG WITH AN EXTENSION CORD OR IN AN OUTLET UNLESS ALL THE PRONGS
CAN BE FULLY INSERTED.
DO NOT OPEN THE CABINET. THERE ARE HIGH-VOLTAGE COMPONENTS INSIDE. ALL SERVICING MUST
BE DONE BY QUALIFIED NEC SERVICE PERSONNEL.
DOC Compliance Notice (for Canada only)
This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.
Acoustic Noise Information Ordinance-3. GSGV (for Germany only):
The sound pressure level is less than 70 dB (A) according to ISO 3744 or ISO 7779.
CAUTION
Avoid displaying stationary images for a prolonged period of time.
Doing so can result in these images being temporarily sustained on the surface of the LCD panel.
If this should happen, continue to use your projector. The static background from previous images will
disappear.
CAUTION
Do not put the projector on its side when the lamp is turned on.
Doing so may cause damage to the projector.
WARNING TO CALIFORNIA RESIDENTS:
Handling the cables supplied with this product, will expose you to lead, a chemical known to the State of California
to cause birth defects or other reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling.
© NEC Viewtechnology, Ltd. 2005
i
http://getMANUAL.com
Important Information
RF Interference (for USA only)
WARNING
The Federal Communications Commission does not allow any modifications or changes to the unit EXCEPT those
specified by NEC Solutions (America), Inc. in this manual. Failure to comply with this government regulation could
void your right to operate this equipment. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by
turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the
following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio / TV technician for help.
For UK only: In UK, a BS approved power cable with moulded plug has a Black (five Amps) fuse installed for use with
this equipment. If a power cable is not supplied with this equipment please contact your supplier.
Important Safeguards
These safety instructions are to ensure the long life of your projector and to prevent fire and shock. Please read them
carefully and heed all warnings.
Installation
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
For best results, use your projector in a darkened room.
Place the projector on a flat, level surface in a dry area away from dust and moisture.
Do not place your projector in direct sunlight, near heaters or heat radiating appliances.
Exposure to direct sunlight, smoke or steam can harm internal components.
Handle your projector carefully. Dropping or jarring can damage internal components.
Do not place heavy objects on top of the projector.
If you wish to have the projector installed on the ceiling:
a. Do not attempt to install the projector yourself.
b. The projector must be installed by qualified technicians in order to ensure proper operation and reduce the
risk of bodily injury.
c. In addition, the ceiling must be strong enough to support the projector and the installation must be in accordance with any local building codes.
d. Please consult your dealer for more information.
Place the projector in a horizontal position
The tilt angle of the projector should not exceed 10 degrees, nor should the projector be installed in any way other than
the desktop and ceiling mount, otherwise lamp life could decrease dramatically.
10˚
ii
Important Information
Fire and Shock Precautions
1. Ensure that there is sufficient ventilation and that vents are unobstructed to prevent the build-up of heat inside
your projector. Allow at least 4 inches (10 cm) of space between your projector and a wall.
2. Prevent foreign objects such as paper clips and bits of paper from falling into your projector.
Do not attempt to retrieve any objects that might fall into your projector. Do not insert any metal objects such as
a wire or screwdriver into your projector. If something should fall into your projector, disconnect it immediately
and have the object removed by a qualified NEC service personnel.
3. Do not place any liquids on top of your projector.
4. Do not look into the lens while the projector is on. Serious damage to your eyes could result.
5. Keep any items such as magnifying glass out of the light path of the projector. The light being projected from the
lens is extensive, therefore any kind of abnormal objects that can redirect light coming out of the lens, can
cause unpredictable outcome such as fire or injury to the eyes.
6. Do not cover the lens with the supplied lens cap or equivalent while the projector is on. Doing so can lead to
melting of the cap and possibly burning your hands due to the heat emitted from the light output.
7. Do not place any objects, which are easily affected by heat, in front of the projector lens or a projector exhaust
vent.
Doing so could lead to the object melting or getting your hands burned from the heat that is emitted from the
light output and exhaust.
8. The projector is designed to operate on a power supply of 100-240V AC 50/60 Hz. Ensure that your power
supply fits this requirement before attempting to use your projector.
9. Handle the power cable carefully and avoid excessive bending.
A damaged cord can cause electric shock or fire.
10. If the projector is not to be used for an extended period of time, disconnect the plug from the power outlet.
11. Do not touch the power plug during a thunderstorm. Doing so can cause electrical shock or fire.
12. Do not handle the power plug with wet hands.
CAUTION
• Do not try to touch the ventilation outlet on the left side (when seen from the front) as it can become heated
while the projector is turned on.
• Do no use the tilt-foot for purposes other than originally intended. Misuses such as gripping the tilt-foot or
hanging on the wall can cause damage to the projector.
• Do not send the projector in the soft case by parcel delivery service or cargo shipment. The projector inside
the soft case could be damaged.
• Select [High] in Fan mode if you continue to use the projector for consecutive days. (From the menu, select
[Advanced] → [Fan Mode] → [High].)
• Do not unplug the power cable from the wall outlet under any one of the following circumstances.
Doing so can cause damage to the projector:
* While the Hour Glass icon appears.
* While the cooling fans are running. (The cooling fans continue to work for 30 seconds after the projector is
turned off).
iii
Important Information
Lamp Replacement
•
To replace the lamp, follow all instructions provided on page 46.
•
Be sure to replace the lamp when the message “The lamp has reached the end of its usable life. Please
replace the lamp.” appears. If you continue to use the lamp after the lamp has reached the end of its usable
life, the lamp bulb may shatter, and pieces of glass may be scattered in the lamp case. Do not touch them as the
pieces of glass may cause injury.
If this happens, contact your NEC dealer for lamp replacement.
•
Allow a minimum of 30 seconds to elapse after turning off the projector. Then turn off the main power switch,
disconnect the power cable and allow 60 minutes to cool the projector before replacing the lamp.
iv
Table of Contents
Important Information ........................................................................... i
1. Introduction ...................................................................................... 1
ᕡ What's in the Box? ........................................................................................................ 1
ᕢ Introduction to the Projector ......................................................................................... 2
ᕣ Part Names of the Projector ......................................................................................... 4
Top Features ........................................................................................................... 6
Terminal Panel Features ......................................................................................... 7
ᕤ Part Names of the Remote Control .............................................................................. 8
Battery Installation ................................................................................................ 10
Remote Control Precautions ................................................................................. 10
Operating Range for Wireless Remote Control ..................................................... 10
2. Installation and Connections ....................................................... 11
ᕡ Setting Up the Screen and the Projector .................................................................... 11
Selecting a Location .............................................................................................. 11
Throw Distance and Screen Size .......................................................................... 12
ᕢ Making Connections ................................................................................................... 14
Enabling the computer’s external display .............................................................. 14
Connecting Your PC or Macintosh Computer ........................................................ 14
To connect SCART output (RGB) ......................................................................... 15
Connecting Your DVD Player with Component Output .......................................... 16
Connecting Your VCR or Laser Disc Player .......................................................... 17
Connecting the Supplied Power Cable ................................................................. 18
3. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)...................................... 19
ᕡ Turning on the Projector ............................................................................................. 19
Note on Startup Screen (Menu Language Select screen) .................................... 20
ᕢ Selecting a Source ..................................................................................................... 21
ᕣ Adjusting the Picture Size and Position ...................................................................... 22
ᕤ Correcting Keystone Distortion ................................................................................... 24
ᕥ Optimizing RGB Picture Automatically ....................................................................... 25
ᕦ Turning Up or Down Volume ....................................................................................... 25
ᕧ Turning off the Projector ............................................................................................. 26
ᕨ After Use ..................................................................................................................... 26
v
Table of Contents
4. Convenient Features ...................................................................... 27
ᕡ Turning Off the Image and Sound ............................................................................... 27
ᕢ Freezing a Picture....................................................................................................... 27
ᕣ Enlarging and Moving a Picture .................................................................................. 27
5. Using On-Screen Menu ................................................................. 28
ᕡ Using the Menus ......................................................................................................... 28
ᕢ Menu Elements ........................................................................................................... 30
ᕣ List of Menu Items ...................................................................................................... 31
ᕤ Menu Descriptions & Functions [Picture].................................................................... 33
ᕥ Menu Descriptions & Functions [Image] ..................................................................... 35
ᕦ Menu Descriptions & Functions [Setup] ..................................................................... 36
ᕧ Menu Descriptions & Functions [Advanced] ............................................................... 38
ᕨ Menu Descriptions & Functions [Information] ............................................................. 42
ᕩ Menu Descriptions & Functions [Default] ................................................................... 43
6. Maintenance .................................................................................... 44
ᕡ Cleaning or Replacing the Filter ................................................................................ 44
ᕢ Cleaning the Cabinet and the Lens ........................................................................... 45
ᕣ Replacing the Lamp ................................................................................................... 46
7. Appendix ........................................................................................... 49
ᕡ
ᕢ
ᕣ
ᕤ
ᕥ
ᕦ
ᕧ
ᕨ
¾
Troubleshooting ......................................................................................................... 49
Specifications ............................................................................................................ 52
Cabinet Dimensions .................................................................................................. 54
Pin Assignments of D-Sub COMPUTER Input Connector ........................................ 55
Compatible Input Signal List ...................................................................................... 56
PC Control Codes and Cable Connection ................................................................. 57
Optional Presentation Remote Control Kit (PR52KIT) ............................................... 58
Troubleshooting Check List ........................................................................................ 63
TravelCare .................................................................................................................. 65
vi
1. Introduction
ᕡ What's in the Box?
Make sure your box contains everything listed. If any pieces are missing, contact your dealer.
Please save the original box and packing materials if you ever need to ship your projector.
FO
S
CU
OM
ZO
T
C
LE
E
S
LA
M
P
ST
AT
US
PO
W
ER
O
VI
N/
DE
ST
O
AN
D
BY
S-
VI
DE
O
CO
M
PU
TE
R
TO
AU J.
AD
Projector
Lens cap
(24F40111)
Soft case
(24BS7423)
FF
O
N
O
E
G
PA
ER
UP
W
E
PO
UT
-M
PIC
Y
NIF
AG
M
U
EN
M
DO
W
N
R
TE
EN
CK
CLI
LIT
EX
M
AD
2
E
M
LU
VO
CK
1
LI
PU
R-C
CO
EO
ID
S-V
TO
E
US R AU
O
M
TE
EO
VID
J.
CT
PE
AS
LP
HE
RE
TU
PIC
ZE
EE
FR
RGB/VGA signal cable
(7N520032)
Power cable
(US: 7N080212)
(EU: 7N080005)
Remote control
(7N900522)
Batteries (AAA)2ן
k
ic
Qu tup
Se ide
Gu
nt
rta ion
po at
Im orm
f
In
For North America only
Registration card
Limited warranty
Quick Setup Guide
Important Information
CD-ROM
User’s manual
For Europe only
Guarantee policy
1
1. Introduction
ᕢ Introduction to the Projector
This section introduces you to your new VT37 Projector and describes the features and controls.
Congratulations on Your Purchase of The VT37 Projector
The VT37 is one of the very best projectors available today. The VT37 enables you to project precise images up to 300
inches across (measured diagonally) from your PC or Macintosh computer (desktop or notebook), VCR, DVD player,
document camera, or a laser disc player.
You can use the projector on a tabletop or cart, you can use the projector to project images from behind the screen,
and the projector can be permanently mounted on a ceiling*1. The remote control can be used wirelessly.
*1 Do not attempt to mount the projector on a ceiling yourself.
The projector must be installed by qualified technicians in order to ensure proper operation and reduce the
risk of bodily injury.
In addition, the ceiling must be strong enough to support the projector and the installation must be in
accordance with any local building codes. Please consult your dealer for more information.
Features you'll enjoy:
•
Built-in Wall Color Correction presets provide for adaptive color correction when projecting onto non-white
screen material
•
Quick Start & Quick Shutoff
The quick start & quick shutoff function means you can set up or put away the projector without delay.
Nine seconds after turning on the power, the projector is ready to display PC or video images.
When you're finished, the fans stop in 30 seconds after turning off the power, so you can put away the projector
quickly after the conference or class.
•
Keystone correction allows you to correct trapezoidal distortion so that the image is square
•
Low level operation noise
•
Short focal length lens
•
130W lamp (110W Eco mode)
•
Direct keys for source selection
•
New Color Management system
•
New menu design improves operation
•
Safety protect by Security function
Security feature prevents the projector from being used by unauthorized individuals.
Keyword prevents unauthorized individuals from changing projector settings or adjustments.
•
NEC’s exclusive Advanced AccuBlend intelligent pixel blending technology - an extremely accurate image
compression technology - offers a crisp image with UXGA (1600 )0021ןresolution*2
•
Supports most IBM VGA, SVGA, XGA , SXGA/UXGA(with Advanced AccuBlend)*2, Macintosh, component
signal (YCbCr/ YPbPr) or any other RGB signals within a horizontal frequency range of 24 to 100 kHz and a
vertical frequency range of 50 to 120 Hz. This includes NTSC, PAL, PAL-N, PAL-M, PAL60, SECAM and
NTSC4.43 standard video signals
*2 An SXGA (1280 )4201ןand XGA (1024 )867ןimages are displayed with NEC’s Advanced AccuBlend.
2
1. Introduction
NOTE: Composite video standards are as follows:
NTSC: U.S. TV standard for video in U.S. and Canada.
PAL: TV standard used in Western Europe.
PAL-N: TV standard used in Argentine, Paraguay and Uruguay.
PAL-M: TV standard used in Brazil.
PAL60: TV standard used for NTSC playback on PAL TVs.
SECAM: TV standard used in France and Eastern Europe.
NTSC4.43: TV standard used in Middle East countries.
•
You can control the projector with a PC or control system using the PC Control port.
•
The contemporary cabinet design is light, compact, easy to carry, and complements any office, boardroom or
auditorium.
About this user's manual
The fastest way to get started is to take your time and do everything right the first time. Take a few minutes now to
review the user's manual. This may save you time later on. At the beginning of each section of the manual you'll find an
overview. If the section doesn't apply, you can skip it.
•
IBM is a trademark or registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.
•
Mac and PowerBook are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
•
Windows, Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows XP or Windows 2000 are trademarks or registered trademarks
of Microsoft Corporation.
•
Other product and company names mentioned in this user’s manual may be the trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective holders.
3
1. Introduction
ᕣ Part Names of the Projector
Front/Top
Controls
(See page 6)
TO
AU J.
AD
Digital Zoom Button
(See page 23)
S
E
LE
C
T
P
M
LA
P
S
TU
STA ER
W
O
EO
VID
D
N
TA
/S
N
O
BY
EO
ID
S-V
R
TE
PU
M
O
C
Ventilation (inlet) / Filter Cover
(See page 44)
OM
ZO
Focus Ring
(See page 23)
FO
S
CU
Remote sensor
(See page 10)
Built-in Security Slot (
)*
Ventilation (inlet)
Lens
Adjustable Tilt Foot Lever
(See page 22)
Lens Cap
Adjustable Tilt Foot
(See page 22)
*
This security slot supports the MicroSaver ® Security System. MicroSaver ® is a registered trademark of
Kensington Microware Inc. The logo is trademarked and owned by Kensington Microware Inc.
Rear
C
FO
US
ZOOM
SELE
CT
LA
M
P
STA
S
PO
TU
W
ER
N
VID
O
TA
EO
/S
N
D
BY
S-V
ID
EO
C
O
M
PU
TE
R
TO
AU J.
AD
Monaural Speaker
(1W)
VID
EO
IN
L/M
S-VID
EO
ON
O
AU
DIO
R
IN
AU
DIO
CO
MP
UT
ER
IN
PC
CO
NT
RO
L
AC
Ventilation (outlet)
Heated air is exhausted from here.
IN
AC Input
Connect the supplied power cable's two-pin plug here, and
plug the other end into an active wall outlet. (See page 18)
Terminal Panel
(See page 7)
Main Power Switch
When you plug the supplied power cable into an active wall outlet
and turn on the Main Power, the POWER indicator turns orange
and the projector is in standby mode.
(See page 19)
4
1. Introduction
Bottom
Lamp Cover
(See page 46)
Adjustable Tilt Foot
(See page 22)
Adjustable Tilt Foot Lever
(See page 22)
Adjustable Tilt Foot Lever
(See page 22)
5
http://getMANUAL.com
1. Introduction
Top Features
11 10 2 3 4
9
LAMP
STATUS
POWER
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
COMPUTER
SELECT
ON/STAND BY
AUTO
ADJ.
12
13
1
5
678
7. COMPUTER Button
Press this button to select an RGB source from computer or component equipment connected to your
COMPUTER port.
1. POWER Button (ON / STAND BY) ( )
Use this button to turn the power on and off when the
main power is supplied and the projector is in standby
mode.
To turn on the projector, press and hold this button for
a minimum of two seconds. To turn off the projector,
press this button twice.
8. AUTO ADJ. Button
Use this button to adjust an RGB source for an optimal picture (See page 25).
2. POWER Indicator
When this indicator is green, the projector is on; when
this indicator is orange, it is in standby mode. See the
Power Indicator section on page 49 for more details.
9. Source Indicators
When one of the COMPUTER, VIDEO or S-VIDEO
input is selected, the corresponding source indicator
lights.
3. STATUS Indicator
If this light blinks red rapidly, it indicates that an error
has occurred, the lamp cover is not attached properly
or the projector has overheated. If this light remains
orange, it indicates that you have pressed a cabinet
key while the Cabinet Button Lock is enabled. See the
Status Indicator section on page 49 for more details.
10. MENU Button
Displays the menu.
11. SELECT ̆̄̇̈ / Volume Buttons
̆̄ : Use these buttons to select the menu of the
item you wish to adjust.
̇̈ : Use these buttons to change the level of a selected menu item. A press of the ̈ button executes the selection. When no menus appear,
these buttons work as a volume control.
4. LAMP Indicator
If this light blinks red rapidly, it's warning you that the
lamp has reached the end of its usable life. After this
light appears, replace the lamp as soon as possible
(See page 46). If this is lit green continually, it indicates that the lamp mode is set to Eco. See the Lamp
Indicator section on page 49 for more details.
12. ENTER Button
Executes your menu selection and activates items
selected from the menu.
13. EXIT Button
Pressing this button will return to the previous menu.
While you are in the main menu, pressing this button
will close the menu.
5. VIDEO Button
Press this button to select a video source from a VCR,
DVD player, laser disc player or document camera.
6. S-VIDEO Button
Press this button to select an S-Video source from a
VCR, DVD player, laser disc player or document camera.
6
1. Introduction
Terminal Panel Features
3
VIDEO IN
L/MONO AUDIO R
1
AUDIO
COMPUTER IN
S-VIDEO IN
PC CONTROL
2
4
1. COMPUTER IN / Component Input Connector (Mini
D-Sub 15 Pin)
3. VIDEO IN Connector (RCA)
Connect a VCR, DVD player, laser disc player, or document camera here to project video.
Connect your computer or other analog RGB equipment such as IBM compatible or Macintosh computers. Use the supplied RGB cable to connect to your
computer. This also serves as a component input connector that allows you to connect a component video
output of component equipment such as a DVD player.
This connector also supports SCART output signal.
See page 15 for more details.
VIDEO AUDIO Input Jacks L/R (RCA)
These are your left and right channel audio inputs for
stereo sound from a Video source.
NOTE: The VIDEO AUDIO inputs can also be used as SVIDEO AUDIO inputs.
COMPUTER AUDIO Input Mini Jack (Stereo Mini)
4. PC CONTROL Port (DIN 8 Pin)
This is where you connect the audio output from your
computer or DVD player when connected to the COMPUTER input. A commercially available audio cable is
required.
Use this port to connect a PC or control system. This
enables you to control the projector using serial communication protocol. If you are writing your own program, typical PC control codes are on page 57.
2. S-VIDEO IN Connector (Mini DIN 4 Pin)
Here is where you connect the S-Video input from an
external source like a VCR.
NOTE: S-Video provides more vivid color and higher
resolution than the traditional composite video format.
7
1. Introduction
ᕤ Part Names of the Remote Control
1
OFF
3
6. PAGE UP/DOWN Button
Not available on this model.
2
7. MENU Button
Displays the menu for various settings and adjustments.
ON
POWER
MAGNIFY PIC-MUTE
PAGE
UP
4
6
8. SELECT ̆̄̇̈ Button
̆̄ : Use these buttons to select the menu of the
item you wish to adjust.
̇̈ : Use these buttons to change the level of a selected menu item. A press of the ̈ button executes the selection.
When an image is magnified, the SELECT ̆̄̇̈
button moves the image. See page 27.
DOWN
7
5
MENU
8
9
ENTER
EXIT
L-CLICK
11
17
12
COMPUTER AUTO ADJ.
1
S-VIDEO
2
VOLUME
9. ENTER Button
Use this button to enter your menu selection. It works
the same way as the ENTER button on the cabinet.
See page 6.
R-CLICK
MOUSE
VIDEO
13
14
10
ASPECT
HELP
PICTURE
16
15
18
20
10. EXIT Button
It works the same way as the EXIT button on the cabinet. See page 6.
FREEZE
21
19
11. MOUSE L-CLICK Button
Not available on this model.
12. MOUSE R-CLICK Button
Not available on this model.
1. Infrared Transmitter
Direct the remote control toward the remote sensor
on the projector cabinet.
13. VIDEO Button
Press this button to select a video source from a VCR,
DVD player, laser disc player or document camera.
2. POWER ON Button
When the main power is on, you can use this button
to turn your projector on.
14. S-VIDEO Button
Press this button to select an S-Video source from a
VCR.
NOTE: To turn on the projector, press and hold the POWER
ON button for a minimum of two seconds.
15. COMPUTER 1 Button
Press this button to select COMPUTER (or Component) input.
3. POWER OFF Button
You can use this button to turn your projector off.
COMPUTER 2 Button
Not available on this model.
NOTE: To turn off the projector, press the POWER OFF
button twice.
4. MAGNIFY (+) (–) Button
Use this button to adjust the image size up to 400%.
The image is magnified about the center of the screen.
See page 27.
16. AUTO ADJ. Button
Use this button to adjust an RGB source for an optimal picture.
See page 25.
5. PIC-MUTE Button
This button turns off the image and sound for a short
period of time. Press again to restore the image and
sound.
17. VOLUME (+)(–) Button
Press (+) to increase the volume and (–) to decrease
it.
8
1. Introduction
1
OFF
3
ON
2
POWER
MAGNIFY PIC-MUTE
PAGE
UP
4
6
DOWN
7
5
MENU
8
9
ENTER
EXIT
L-CLICK
11
13
14
12
COMPUTER AUTO ADJ.
1
S-VIDEO
2
VOLUME
17
R-CLICK
MOUSE
VIDEO
10
ASPECT
HELP
PICTURE
16
15
18
20
FREEZE
21
19
18. ASPECT Button
Press this button once to display the Aspect Ratio
select menu. Keep pressing will change aspect ratios.
See page 35.
19. PICTURE Button
Press this button to display the Picture adjustment
menu to adjust Wall Color, Picture Management,
Brightness, Contrast, Sharpness, Color and Hue. See
pages 33 to 34.
20. HELP Button
Provides the information on the current signal and projector settings. See page 42.
21. FREEZE Button
This button will freeze a picture. Press again to resume motion.
9
1. Introduction
Battery Installation
1 Press firmly and slide the
2 Remove both old batteries and
3 Slip the cover back over the bat-
install new ones (AAA). Ensure
that you have the batteries' polarity (+/–) aligned correctly.
teries until it snaps into place. Do
not mix different types of batteries or new and old batteries.
battery cover off.
Remote Control Precautions
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Handle the remote control carefully.
If the remote control gets wet, wipe it dry immediately.
Avoid excessive heat and humidity.
If you will not be using the remote control for a long time, remove the batteries.
Do not place the batteries upside down.
Do not use new and old batteries together, or use different types of batteries together.
Dispose of used batteries according to your local regulations.
Operating Range for Wireless Remote Control
Remote sensor on projector cabinet
7m/22 feet
Remote control
30°
30°
• The infrared signal operates by line-of-sight up to a distance of about 22 feet/7 m and within a 60-degree angle of
the remote sensor on the projector cabinet.
• The projector will not respond if there are objects between the remote control and the sensor, or if strong light falls
on the sensor. Weak batteries will also prevent the remote control from properly operating the projector.
10
2. Installation and Connections
This section describes how to set up your projector and how to connect video and audio sources.
Your projector is simple to set up and use.
But before you get started, you must first:
1
z Set up a screen and the projector.
x Connect your computer or video equipment to the projector. See pages 14 to
17.
c Connect the supplied power cable. See
page 18.
3
2
To the wall outlet.
NOTE: Ensure that the power cable and any
other cables are disconnected before moving
the projector. When moving the projector or
when it is not in use, cover the lens with the
lens cap.
ᕡ Setting Up the Screen and the Projector
Selecting a Location
The further your projector is from the screen or wall, the larger the image. The minimum size the image can be is
approximately 25 " (0.64 m) measured diagonally when the projector is roughly 23 inches (0.6 m) from the wall or
screen. The largest the image can be is 300 " (7.6 m) when the projector is about 287 inches (7.3 m) from the wall or
screen. Use the drawing below as a guide.
Screen Size (Unit: cm/inch)
609.6(W)(2.754ןH) / 240(W)(081ןH)
30
0 "
Screen Size
487.7(W)(8.563ןH) / 192(W)(441ןH)
24
0 "
406.4(W)(8.403ןH) / 160(W)(021ןH)
20
0 "
18
0 "
365.8(W)(3.472ןH) / 144(W)(801ןH)
304.8(W)(6.822ןH) / 120(W)(09ןH)
15
0 "
243.8(W)(9.281ןH) / 96(W)(27ןH)
12
203.2(W)(4.251ןH) / 80(W)(06ןH)
80
121.9(W)(4.19ןH) / 48(W)(63ןH)
60
81.3(W)(0.16ןH) / 32(W)(42ןH)
40
50.8(W)(1.83ןH) / 20(W)(51ןH)
0 "
0 "
10
162.6(W)(9.121ןH) / 64(W)(84ןH)
25
"
"
"
)
ch
/in
4/
1. 56
9/
2. 76
4/
2. 95
9/
1
3. 14
6/
1
4. 43
4/
17
4. 2
9/
1
5. 91
8/
D
22
is
ta
nc 7.3 9
e
/
(U 28
7
n
it:
m
1.
IN
1.
0.
23 6/
AC
0/
37
"
Lens center
NOTE: Digital Zoom can cause result in a blurry image because zooming is made electronically.
11
2. Installation and Connections
Throw Distance and Screen Size
The following shows the proper relative positions of the projector and screen. Refer to the table to determine the
position of installation.
Distance Chart
Screen Width
Screen Diagonal
Screen center
Screen Height
(B)
Screen Bottom
(D)
Lens Center
Throw Angle (Ͱ)
Throw Distance (C)
AC IN
Diagonal
inch
25
30
40
60
72
80
84
90
100
120
150
180
200
210
240
270
300
Screen Size
Width
inch
20
24
32
48
58
64
67
72
80
96
120
144
160
168
192
216
240
Height
inch
15
18
24
36
43
48
50
54
60
72
90
108
120
126
144
162
180
B
C
inch
6
7
10
14
17
19
20
22
24
29
36
43
48
50
57
65
72
inch
23
28
37
56
68
76
80
85
95
114
143
172
191
201
229
258
287
D
α
Diagonal
mm
635
762
1016
1524
1829
2032
2134
2286
2540
3048
3810
4572
5080
5334
6096
6858
7620
inch degree
-2
14.6
-2
14.5
-2
14.4
-4
14.2
-4
14.2
-5
14.2
-5
14.2
-6
14.1
-6
14.1
-7
14.1
-9
14.1
-11
14.1
-12
14.0
-13
14.0
-15
14.0
-17
14.0
-18
14.0
Screen Size
Width
mm
508
610
813
1219
1463
1626
1707
1829
2032
2438
3048
3658
4064
4267
4877
5486
6096
Height
mm
381
457
610
914
1097
1219
1280
1372
1524
1829
2286
2743
3048
3200
3658
4115
4572
B
C
mm
150
180
240
360
440
490
510
550
610
730
910
1090
1210
1270
1460
1640
1820
mm
580
700
950
1440
1730
1920
2020
2170
2410
2900
3630
4360
4850
5100
5830
6560
7290
D
α
mm degree
-40
14.6
-50
14.5
-60
14.4
-90
14.2
-110
14.2
-120
14.2
-130
14.2
-140
14.1
-160
14.1
-190
14.1
-230
14.1
-280
14.1
-310
14.0
-330
14.0
-370
14.0
-420
14.0
-470
14.0
B = Vertical distance between lens center and screen center
C = Throw distance
D = Vertical distance between lens center and bottom of screen (top of screen for ceiling
application)
α = Throw angle
NOTE: Distances may vary +/-5%.
12
2. Installation and Connections
• Ensure that you have adequate ventilation around your
projector so heat can dissipate. Do not cover the vents
on the side or the front of the projector.
WARNING
* Installing your projector on the ceiling must be done
by a qualified technician. Contact your NEC dealer for
more information.
* Do not attempt to install the projector yourself.
• Only use your projector on a solid, level surface. If the
projector falls to the ground, you can be injured and
the projector severely damaged.
• Do not use the projector where temperatures vary
greatly. The projector must be used at temperatures
between 41˚F (5˚C) and 95˚F (35˚C).
• Do not expose the projector to moisture, dust, or
smoke. This will harm the screen image.
Reflecting the Image
Using a mirror to reflect your projector's image enables
you to enjoy a much larger image. Contact your NEC
dealer if you need a mirror system. If you're using a mirror system and your image is inverted, use the MENU
and SELECT buttons on your projector cabinet or your
remote control to correct the orientation. See page 37.
13
2. Installation and Connections
ᕢ Making Connections
NOTE: When using with a notebook PC, be sure to connect between the projector and the notebook PC before turning on the
power to the notebook PC. In most cases signal cannot be output from RGB output unless the notebook PC is turned on after
connecting with the projector.
* If the screen goes blank while using your remote control, it may be the result of the computer's screen-saver or power
management software.
Enabling the computer’s external display
Displaying an image on the notebook PC’s screen does not necessarily mean it outputs a signal to the projector.
When using a PC compatible laptop, a combination of function keys will enable/disable the external display.
Usually, the combination of the ‘Fn” key along with one of the 12 function keys gets the external display to come on
or off. For example, NEC laptops use Fn + F3, while Dell laptops use Fn + F8 key combinations to toggle through
external display selections.
Connecting Your PC or Macintosh Computer
NOTE: The COMPUTER connector supports Plug & Play (DDC2).
AUDIO
VIDEO IN
L/MONO
AUDIO
R
COMPUTER IN
AUDIO
COMPUTER IN
S-VIDEO IN
PC CONTROL
AC IN
RGB/VGA signal cable (supplied)
To mini D-Sub 15-pin connector on the projector. It
is recommended that you use a commercially
available distribution amplifier if connecting a
signal cable longer than the supplied one.
Audio cable
(not supplied)
PHONE
NOTE: For older Macintosh, use a
commercially available pin adapter
(not supplied) to connect to your
Mac's video port.
IBM PC or Compatibles (Desktop type)
or Macintosh (Desktop type)
PHONE
IBM VGA or Compatibles (Notebook
type) or Macintosh (Notebook type)
Connecting your PC or Macintosh computer to your projector will enable you to project your computer's screen image
for an impressive presentation.
To connect to a PC or Macintosh, simply:
1. Turn off the power to your projector and computer.
2. Use the supplied RGB/VGA signal cable to connect your PC or Macintosh to the projector.
3. Connect the supplied power cable. See page 18.
4. Turn on the projector and the computer.
5. If the projector goes blank after a period of inactivity, it may be caused by a screen saver installed on the computer
you've connected to the projector.
14
2. Installation and Connections
NOTE: The projector is not compatible with video decoded outputs of either the NEC ISS-6020 and ISS-6010 switchers.
NOTE: An image may not be displayed correctly when a Video or S-Video source is played back via a commercially available scan
converter.
This is because the projector will process a video signal as a computer signal at the default setting. In that case, do the following.
* When an image is displayed with the lower and upper black portion of the screen or a dark image is not displayed correctly:
Project an image to fill the screen and then press the AUTO ADJ button on the remote control or the projector cabinet.
To connect SCART output (RGB)
Projector
COMPUTER IN
VIDEO IN
Video equipment such as DVD player
L/MONO
AUDIO
R
AUDIO
COMPUTER IN
S-VIDEO IN
PC CONTROL
Female
AC IN
ADP-SC1
Commercially available SCART cable
Before connections: An exclusive SCART adapter (ADP-SC1) and a commercially available SCART cable are required for this connection.
NOTE: Audio signal is not available for this connection.
1. Turn off the power to the projector and your video equipment.
2. Use the NEC ADP-SC1 SCART adapter and a commercially available SCART cable to connect the RGB input of
your projector and a SCART output (RGB) of your video equipment.
3. Connect the supplied power cable. See page 18.
4. Turn on the power to the projector and your video equipment.
5. Use the COMPUTER button on the projector cabinet to select the COMPUTER input.
6. Press the MENU button on the projector cabinet to display the menu.
7. From the menu, select [Advanced] → [Signal Select] → [Computer] → [Scart].
SCART is a standard European audio-visual connector for TVs, VCRs and DVD players. It is also referred to as
Euro-connector.
NOTE: The ADP-SC1 SCART adapter is obtainable from your NEC dealer in Europe. Contact your NEC dealer in Europe for more
information.
15
http://getMANUAL.com
2. Installation and Connections
Connecting Your DVD Player with Component Output
AUDIO
VIDEO IN
L/MONO
AUDIO
R
COMPUTER IN
AUDIO
COMPUTER IN
S-VIDEO IN
PC CONTROL
AC IN
Optional 15-pin - to - RCA (female)
3ןcable (ADP-CV1)
Audio Equipment
Component video RCA3ן
cable (not supplied)
AUDIO IN
L
R
DVD player
L
R
AUDIO OUT
Y
Cb
Cr
Component
Audio cable (not supplied)
You can connect your projector to a DVD player with component output or Video output. To do so, simply:
1. Turn off the power to your projector and DVD player.
2. If your DVD player has the component video (Y,Cb,Cr) output, use a commercially available component video cable
(RCA )3ןand the optional 15-pin-to-RCA (female) 3ןcable to connect your DVD player to the COMPUTER IN
connector on the projector.
For a DVD player without component video (Y,Cb,Cr) output, use common RCA cables (not provided) to connect a
composite VIDEO output of the DVD player to the Video Input of the projector.
3. Connect the supplied power cable. See page 18.
4. Turn on the projector and DVD player.
A component signal will be automatically displayed. If not, from the menu, select [Advanced] → [Signal Select] →
[Computer], and then place a check mark in the Component radio button.
NOTE: Refer to your DVD player's owner's manual for more information about your DVD player's video output requirements.
16
2. Installation and Connections
Connecting Your VCR or Laser Disc Player
VIDEO IN
AUDIO
VIDEO IN
L/MONO
AUDIO
R
AUDIO
COMPUTER IN
S-VIDEO IN
PC CONTROL
S-VIDEO IN
AC IN
S-Video cable (not supplied)
Video cable (not supplied)
Audio equipment
VCR/ Laser disc player
L
R
AUDIO OUT
VIDEO S-VIDEO
AUDIO IN
VIDEO OUT
L
R
Audio cable (not supplied)
Use an RCA or S-Video cable (not provided) to connect the video and use RCA cables (not provided) to connect
the audio from your VCR, laser disc player or document camera to your projector.
To make these connections, simply:
1. Turn off the power to the projector and VCR, laser disc player or document camera.
2. Connect one end of an RCA cable to the video output (or one end of an S-Video cable to the S-Video output
connector) on the back of your VCR or laser disc player, connect the other end to the appropriate video input
on your projector. Connect one end of a pair RCA cables (not supplied) to the audio output on the back of your
VCR or laser disc player, connect the other end to your audio equipment or to the appropriate audio input on
the projector.
Be careful to keep the right and left channel connections correct for stereo sound.
NOTE: The AUDIO IN L/MONO and R jacks (RCA) are shared between the Video and S-Video inputs.
3. Connect the supplied power cable. See page 18.
4. Turn on the projector and the VCR or laser disc player.
NOTE: Refer to your VCR or laser disc player owner's manual for more information about your equipment's video output
requirements.
NOTE: An image may not be displayed correctly when a Video or S-Video source is played back in fast-forward or fast-rewind via
a scan converter.
17
2. Installation and Connections
Connecting the Supplied Power Cable
Connect the supplied power cable to the projector.
First connect the supplied power cable's two-pin plug to the AC IN of the projector, and then connect the other plug of
the supplied power cable in the wall outlet.
C
FO
US
ZOOM
SELE
CT
LA
M
P
ST
AT
U
S
PO
W
ER
N
VID
O
TA
EO
/S
N
D
BY
S-V
ID
EO
C
O
M
PU
TE
R
TO
AU DJ.
A
VIDE
S-VI
O IN
L/M
ON AU
O DI
O
DE
O IN
R
AU
DIO
CO
MPU
TE
R IN
PC
CO
NT
RO
L
AC
IN
To wall outlet ←
Make sure that the prongs are fully inserted into
both the AC IN and the wall outlet.
CAUTION:
Do not unplug the power cable from the wall outlet under any one of the following circumstances.
Doing so can cause damage to the projector:
• While the Hour Glass icon appears.
• While the cooling fans are running. The cooling fans continue to work for 30 seconds after the projector is
turned off.
18
3. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
This section describes how to turn on the projector and to project a picture onto the screen.
ᕡ Turning on the Projector
NOTE:
• The projector has two power switches: a main power switch and a POWER (ON/STAND BY) button (POWER ON and OFF on the
remote control).
• When plugging in or unplugging the supplied power cable, make sure that the main power switch is pushed to the off (⅜)
position. Failure to do so may cause damage to the projector.
LAMP
FO
CU
S
STATUS
POWER
ZO
OM
1. To turn on the main power to the projector, press the
Main Power switch to the on position ( I ).
•
The POWER indicator will light orange.
See the Power Indicator section on page 49 for more
details.
AC
2. Press the POWER (ON/STAND BY) button on the
projector cabinet or the POWER ON button on the
remote control for a minimum of 2 seconds. The
POWER indicator will turn to green and the projector
will become ready to use.
IN
LAMP
STATUS
POWER
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
COMPUTER
SELECT
ON/STAND BY
AUTO
ADJ.
After you turn on your projector, ensure that the
computer or video source is turned on and that your
lens cap is removed.
OFF
ON
POWER
MAGNIFY PIC-MUTE
NOTE: When no signal is available, a blue, black or logo screen is
displayed.
When the projector displays a blue or a black screen (not logo),
the Eco mode will be automatically selected in " Lamp Mode. "
NOTE: If you turn on the projector immediately after the lamp is
turned off or when the temperature is high, the fans runs without
displaying an image for some time and then the projector will
display the image.
PAGE
UP
DOWN
MENU
Standby
Blinking
Power On
LAMP
LAMP
LAMP
STATUS
STATUS
STATUS
POWER
POWER
POWER
Steady orange light
Blinking green
light
See page 49 for more details.
19
Steady green
light
3. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
Note on Startup screen (Menu Language Select screen)
When you first turn on the projector, you will get the Startup menu. This menu gives you the opportunity to select one
of the 8 menu languages.
To select a menu language, follow these steps:
1. Use the SELECT ̆ or ̄ button to select one of the 8
languages for the menu.
LAMP
STATUS
POWER
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
COMPUTER
SELECT
ON/STAND BY
AUTO
ADJ.
OFF
ON
POWER
MAGNIFY PIC-MUTE
PAGE
UP
DOWN
MENU
ENTER
EXIT
LAMP
STATUS
POWER
2. Press the ENTER button to execute the selection.
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
COMPUTER
SELECT
ON/STAND BY
AUTO
ADJ.
After this has been done, you can proceed to the menu operation.
If you want, you can select the menu language later. See " Language " on pages 31 and 37.
OFF
ON
POWER
MAGNIFY PIC-MUTE
PAGE
UP
DOWN
MENU
ENTER
EXIT
NOTE: Immediately after turning on the projector, screen flicker may occur. This is not a fault. Wait 3 to 5 minutes until the lamp
lighting is stabilized.
When the Lamp mode is set to Eco, the LAMP indicator will light green.
If one of the following things happens, the projector will not turn on.
• If the internal temperature of the projector is too high, the projector detects abnormal high temperature. In this
condition the projector will not turn on to protect the internal system. If this happens, wait for the projector's internal
components to cool down.
• When the lamp reaches its end of usable life, the projector will not turn on. If this happens, replace the lamp.
• If the lamp fails to light, and if the STATUS indicator flashes on and off in a cycle of six times, wait a full minute and
then turn on the power.
20
3. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
ᕢ Selecting a Source
Selecting the computer or video source
NOTE: Turn on the computer or VCR connected to the projector.
Using the cabinet buttons
LAMP
Press any one of the COMPUTER, VIDEO and S-VIDEO buttons.
The corresponding indicator will light green.
STATUS
POWER
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
COMPUTER
SELECT
ON/STAND BY
AUTO
ADJ.
Using the Remote Control
Press any one of the COMPUTER 1, VIDEO or S-VIDEO buttons.
L-CLICK
R-CLICK
VIDEO
COMPUTER AUTO ADJ.
MOUSE
1
S-VIDEO
2
VOLUME
HELP
PICTURE
21
ASPECT
FREEZE
3. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
ᕣ Adjusting the Picture Size and Position
Place your projector on a flat level surface and ensure that the projector is
square to the screen.
Lift the front edge of the projector to center the image vertically.
* If the projected image does not appear square to the screen then use the
Keystone feature for proper adjustment. See page 24.
Move the projector left to center the image horizontally on the screen.
Adjust the Tilt Foot
1. Lift the front edge of the projector.
CT
LE
SE
LA
MP
ST
AT
US
PO
W
ER
VI
ON
/S
DE
O
TA
ND
BY
S-
VI
DE
O
CO
MP
UT
ER
TO
AU J.
AD
1
2. Push up the Adjustable Tilt Foot Levers on the right and left sides
of the projector to extend the adjustable tilt feet (maximum height).
FO
S
CU
ZO
OM
2
Adjustable Tilt
Foot Lever
2
Adjustable Tilt Foot
Adjustable Tilt
Foot Lever
ER
UT
MP
CO
O
DE
VI
TA
ND
BY
S-
ST
LA
MP
AT
US
PO
W
ER
VI
ON
/S
DE
O
SE
LE
CT
4
ZO
OM
3
FO
S
CU
4. Lower the front of the projector to the desired height and release
the Adjustable Tilt Foot Lever to lock the Adjustable tilt foot. There
is approximately 10 degrees of up and down adjustment for the
front of the projector.
TO
AU J.
AD
3. Push down the Adjustable Tilt Foot Levers.
CAUTION
Do not use the tilt-foot for purposes other than originally intended. Misuses
such as gripping the tilt-foot or hanging on the wall can cause damage to the
projector.
22
4
3. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
Zoom
Use the Digital ZOOM button on the projector cabinet to
electronically enlarge or reduce the image size.
C
FO
US
NOTE: Digital Zoom can cause result in a blurry image because
zooming is made electronically.
ZOO
M
Focus
Use the FOCUS ring to obtain the best focus.
C
FO
US
ZOO
23
M
3. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
ᕤ Correcting Keystone Distortion
This feature corrects the keystone (trapezoidal) distortion to make the top of the screen longer or shorter to be the
same as the bottom.
Note that the vertical keystone angle can be corrected between 30 degrees upward and 30 degrees downward of
projector tilt from level.
NOTE: Keystone correction angle could be less than 30 degrees depending on some kinds of signal and aspect ratios.
To do so:
1. Press the MENU button.
The menu will be displayed.
2. Use the SELECT ̄ button to select
“Image” and then press the SELECT ̈
button. The “Keystone” will be displayed.
3. Correct the vertical distortion.
Use the SELECT ̇ or ̈ button to correct
the vertical keystone distortion.
NOTE: The Keystone Correction feature can cause
an image to be slightly blurred because the
correction is made electronically.
4. Press the MENU button to close the menu.
NOTE: You can save the changes using the
Keystone Save feature when you turn off the
projector. See page 35.
24
3. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
ᕥ Optimizing RGB Picture Automatically
Adjusting the Image Using Auto Adjust
Optimizing an RGB image automatically.
Press the AUTO ADJ. button to optimize an RGB image automatically.
[Poor picture]
L-CLICK
S-VIDEO
R-CLICK
VIDEO
VIDEO
COMPUTER AUTO ADJ.
COMPUTER
MOUSE
1
S-VIDEO
2
AUTO
ADJ.
VOLUME
ASPECT
HELP
PICTURE
FREEZE
[Normal picture]
Press the AUTO ADJ. button to fine-tune the computer image or to remove any vertical banding that might appear and
to reduce video noise, dot interference or cross talk (this is evident when part of your image appears to be shimmering). This function adjusts the clock frequencies that eliminate the horizontal banding in the image. This function also
adjusts the clock phase to reduce video noise, dot interference or cross talk. (This is evident when part of your image
appears to be shimmering.)
This adjustment may be necessary when you connect your computer for the first time.
NOTE:
Some signals may not be displayed correctly or take time.
• The Auto Adjust function does not work for component and video signal.
• If the Auto Adjust operation cannot optimize the RGB signal, try to adjust Horizontal/Vertical Position Clock and Phase
manually. See pages 41 and 42.
ᕦ Turning Up or Down Volume
L-CLICK
R-CLICK
VIDEO
COMPUTER AUTO ADJ.
MOUSE
1
S-VIDEO
Increase volume
2
VOLUME
ASPECT
HELP
PICTURE
FREEZE
Decrease volume
25
http://getMANUAL.com
3. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
ᕧ Turning off the Projector
To turn off the projector:
LAMP
STATUS
First, press the POWER (ON/STAND BY) button on the
projector cabinet or the POWER OFF button on the remote control. The “Power Off / Are you sure?” message
will appear.
POWER
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
COMPUTER
SELECT
ON/STAND BY
AUTO
ADJ.
OFF
ON
POWER
MAGNIFY PIC-MUTE
PAGE
UP
DOWN
MENU
Secondly, press the ENTER button or press the POWER
(ON/STAND BY) or the POWER OFF button again.
The power indicator will glow orange. After the projector
turns off, the cooling fans keep operating for 30 seconds
(Cooling-off time).
Immediately after turning on the projector and displaying
an image, you cannot turn off the projector for 60 seconds.
Finally, turn off the Main Power switch. The power indicator will go out.
ENTER
Power On
Fan running
Standby
LAMP
LAMP
LAMP
STATUS
STATUS
STATUS
POWER
POWER
POWER
ᕨ After Use
Preparation: Make sure that the projector is turned off.
1. Unplug the power cable.
2. Disconnect any other cables.
3. Retract adjustable tilt feet if extended.
4. Cover the lens with the lens cap.
5. Put the projector and its accessories in the supplied soft case.
Steady orange
light
ZO
OM
CAUTION
Do not unplug the power cable from the wall outlet or do not turn off
the main power under any one of the following circumstances. Doing
so can cause damage to the projector:
• While the Hour Glass icon appears.
• While the cooling fans are running. (The cooling fans continue to
work for 30 seconds after the projector is turned off)
Blinking
orange light
FO
CU
S
Steady green light
26
EXIT
AC
IN
4. Convenient Features
³ Turning off the Image and Sound
Press the PIC-MUTE button to turn off the image and sound for a short
period of time. Press again to restore the image and sound.
OFF
ON
POWER
MAGNIFY PIC-MUTE
PAGE
UP
DOWN
MENU
ENTER
VIDEO
· Freezing a Picture
Press the FREEZE button to freeze a picture. Press again to resume
motion.
EXIT
COMPUTER AUTO ADJ.
1
S-VIDEO
2
VOLUME
ASPECT
HELP
PICTURE
FREEZE
ᕣ Enlarging and Moving a Picture
You can enlarge the picture up to 400 percent.
To do so:
1. Press the MAGNIFY (+) button to magnify the picture.
To move the magnified image, use the SELECT button.
OFF
ON
POWER
MAGNIFY PIC-MUTE
PAGE
UP
DOWN
MENU
ENTER
EXIT
OFF
ON
POWER
MAGNIFY PIC-MUTE
PAGE
UP
DOWN
MENU
ENTER
EXIT
2. Return the image to the original size.
OFF
ON
POWER
MAGNIFY PIC-MUTE
PAGE
UP
DOWN
MENU
ENTER
27
EXIT
5. Using On-Screen Menu
ᕡ Using the Menus
NOTE: The on-screen menu may not be displayed correctly while interlaced motion video image is projected.
1. Press the MENU button on the remote control or projector cabinet to display the Menu.
OFF
ON
POWER
MAGNIFY PIC-MUTE
PAGE
UP
DOWN
MENU
ENTER
EXIT
2. Press the SELECT ̆ or ̄ button on the remote control or the projector cabinet to highlight the menu for
the item you want to adjust or set.
OFF
ON
POWER
MAGNIFY PIC-MUTE
PAGE
UP
DOWN
MENU
ENTER
EXIT
3. Press the SELECT ̈ button or the ENTER button on the remote control or the projector cabinet to select
a submenu or item.
OFF
ON
POWER
MAGNIFY PIC-MUTE
PAGE
UP
DOWN
MENU
ENTER
28
EXIT
5. Using On-Screen Menu
4. Use the SELECT ̆ or ̄ button on the remote control or the projector cabinet to select the item you want
to adjust or set.
OFF
ON
POWER
MAGNIFY PIC-MUTE
PAGE
UP
DOWN
MENU
ENTER
5. Adjust the level or turn the selected item on or off by using
SELECT ̇ or ̈ button on the remote control or the projector
cabinet.
EXIT
OFF
ON
POWER
MAGNIFY PIC-MUTE
The on-screen slide bar will show you the amount of increase
or decrease.
Changes are stored until you adjust it again.
PAGE
UP
DOWN
MENU
ENTER
EXIT
EXIT ...................... Return to the previous menu.
6. Repeat steps 2-5 to adjust an additional item, or press the
MENU button to close the menu.
OFF
ON
POWER
MAGNIFY PIC-MUTE
PAGE
UP
DOWN
MENU
ENTER
29
EXIT
5. Using On-Screen Menu
· Menu Elements
Title
Slide bar
Highlight
Source
Off Timer remaining
time
Radio button
Solid triangle
Check mark
Tab
Thermometer symbol
Key symbol
Menu windows or dialog boxes typically have the following elements:
Title .......................................... Indicates the menu title.
Highlight ................................... Indicates the selected menu or item.
Source ...................................... Indicates the currently selected source.
Remaining countdown time ..... Indicates the remaining countdown time when the Off Timer is preset.
Solid triangle ............................ Indicates further choices are available. A highlighted triangle indicates the item is active.
Tab ........................................... Indicates a group of features in a dialog box. Selecting on any tab brings its page to the front.
Radio button ............................ Use this round button to select an option in a dialog box.
Check mark .............................. Indicates the item is selected.
Slide bar ................................... Indicates settings or the direction of adjustment.
Key symbol .............................. Indicates the Cabinet Button Lock is enabled.
Thermometer symbol ............... Indicates the lamp mode is forcibly set to Eco mode because the internal temperature is too
high.
30
5. Using On-Screen Menu
» List of Menu Items
Picture
Wall Color
Picture Management
Off, Blackboard, Light yellow, Light green, Light blue, Sky blue, Light rose, Pink
Presentation, Video, Movie, Graphic, sRGB
User
Base Setting
Presentation, Video, Movie, Graphic, sRGB
Gamma Correction Dynamic, Black Detail, Natural
Brightness R,G,B
Contrast R,G,B
Brightness
Contrast
Sharpness
Color
Hue
Image
Keystone
Keystone Save
Aspect Ratio
Cinema Position
Setup
Off Timer
Lamp Mode
Language
Menu Color Select
Menu Display Time
Background
Orientation
Beep
Advanced
Security
Cabinet Button
Fan Mode
Signal Select Computer
Video
S-Video
Page2
On, Off
Normal, Wide Zoom, Cinema, Native
Off, 0:30, 1:00, 2:00, 3:00, 4:00, 6:00, 8:00
Normal, Eco
Language-1 English, Deutsch, Français, Italiano, Español, Português, Nederlands
Language-2 Svenska, Norsk, Suomi, Cesky , Magyar, Polski, Türkçe
Language-3
,
,
,
,
,
, Dansk
Color, Monochrome
Manual, Auto 5 sec, Auto 15sec, Auto 45 sec
Blue, Black, Logo
Desktop Front, Ceiling Rear, Desktop Rear, Ceiling Front
On, Off
On, Off
Lock, Unlock
High, Auto
RGB/Component, RGB, Component, Scart
Auto, NTSC3.58, NTSC4.43, PAL, PAL-M, PAL-N, PAL60, SECAM
Auto, NTSC3.58, NTSC4.43, PAL, PAL-M, PAL-N, PAL60, SECAM
Power Management
On, Off
Noise Reduction
On, Off
Flicker Reduction
On, Off
Auto Adjust
Off, Normal, Fine
Horizontal
Vertical
Clock
Phase
Communication Speed 4800, 9600, 19200
31
5. Using On-Screen Menu
Information
Page1
Page2
Default
Factory Default
Remaining Lamp Time, Lamp Hour Meter, Filter Usage, Projector Usage,
BIOS Version, Firmware Version, Data Version
Source Index, Horizontal Frequency, Vertical Frequency, Sync Polarity
Signal Type, Video Type, Sync Type, Interlace
Current Signal
All Data
Clear Filter Usage
Clear Lamp Hour Meter
NOTE: Some menu items are not available depending on the input source.
32
5. Using On-Screen Menu
¿ Menu Descriptions & Functions [Picture]
Using the Wall Color Correction [Wall Color]
This function allows for quick adaptive color correction in applications where the screen material is not white.
The following eight options are available.
• OFF
• Light yellow
• Light blue
• Light rose
• Blackboard
• Light green
• Sky blue
• Pink
Using Picture Management [Picture Management]
This option allows you to adjust neutral tint for yellow, cyan or magenta.
There are 5 factory presets optimized for various types of images, or you can set user adjustable settings.
Presentation .......... Recommended for making a presentation using a PowerPoint file
Video ..................... Recommended for regular picture such as TV program
Movie .................... Recommended for movies
Graphic .................. Recommended for graphics
sRGB ..................... Standard color values
User ...................... User adjustable
33
5. Using On-Screen Menu
NOTE: When “sRGB”, “Graphic”, “Video” or “Movie” is selected, the brightness decreases slightly when compared to “Presentation”. This is not a malfunction.
User Adjust (when using User)
When selecting user adjustable presetting (User), the submenu will be displayed.
You can customize each gamma or color. To do so, first select “User” and press the ENTER button, and then proceed
the following steps.
Selecting Base Setting [Base Setting]
This feature allows you to use white balance or gamma values as reference data to optimize for various types of
images. You can select one of the following five settings.
• Presentation
• Movie
• sRGB
• Video
• Graphic
Selecting Gamma Correction Mode [Gamma Correction]
Each mode is recommended for :
Dynamic ................ Creates a high-contrast picture
Black Detail ........... Emphasizes detail in dark areas of the picture
Natural .................. Natural reproduction of the picture
Adjusting White Balance [Brightness RGB/Contrast RGB]
This allows you to adjust the white balance. Brightness for each color (RGB) is used to adjust the black level of the
screen; Contrast for each color (RGB) to adjust the white level of the screen.
Adjusting Brightness, Contrast, Sharpness, Color and Hue
Brightness ............. Adjusts the brightness level or the back raster intensity.
Contrast ................ Adjusts the intensity of the image according to the incoming signal.
Sharpness ............. Controls the detail of the image for Video.
Color ..................... Increases or decreases the color saturation level (not valid for RGB).
Hue ........................ Varies the color level from +/– green to +/– blue. The red level is used as reference. This adjustment is only
valid for Video and Component inputs (not valid for RGB).
34
5. Using On-Screen Menu
´ Menu Descriptions & Functions [Image]
Correcting Vertical Keystone Distortion [Keystone]
This feature corrects the keystone (trapezoidal) distortion to make the top of the screen longer or shorter to be the
same as the bottom. See page 24.
You can save the changes using the Keystone Save feature when you turn off the projector.
Saving Vertical Keystone Correction [Keystone Save]
This option enables you to save your current keystone settings.
Saving your change once affects all sources. The changes are saved when the projector is off.
Selecting Aspect Ratio [ Aspect Ratio]
Aspect Ratio allows you to select the best Aspect mode to display your source image. You can also display the Aspect
Ratio menu by pressing the “ASPECT” button on the remote control.
Normal
Wide Zoom
Cinema
Standard
4:3 Aspect
Left and right
stretched
Left and right
stretched
Normal
Wide Zoom
Cinema
16:9 image displayed
in 4:3 mode
Left and right
stretched
Left and right stretched to
display the true aspect
Native
When 4:3 is selected from
the source (i.e. DVD player),
the following selections will
display:
Native
When 16:9 is selected from
the source (i.e. DVD player),
the following selections will
display:
Native (RGB only): Turns off the Advanced AccuBlend feature. The projector displays the current image in its true
resolution.
NOTE:
• While you are displaying an image at the projector’s native resolution or higher, “Native” is not available.
• You can adjust the image position for Cinema aspect. See “Cinema Position” for setting the image position.
Copyright
Please note that using this projector for the purpose of commercial gain or the attraction of public attention in a venue such as a
coffee shop or hotel and employing compression or expansion of the screen image with a " Aspect Ratio " setting may raise
concern about the infringement of copyrights which are protected by copyright law.
35
http://getMANUAL.com
5. Using On-Screen Menu
Adjusting the Vertical Position of Image [Cinema Position] (for Cinema only)
This feature adjusts the vertical position of the image when viewing video with Cinema aspect ratio selected.
When “Cinema” is selected in “Aspect Ratio”, the image is displayed with black borders on the top and bottom.
You can adjust the vertical position between top and bottom.
NOTE: This option is available only when “Cinema” is selected in Aspect Ratio.
² Menu Descriptions & Functions [Setup]
Using Off Timer [Off Timer]
You can set the timer so that the projector turns itself off at the preset time.
1. Use the SELECT ̆ or ̄ button to select your desired time between 30 minutes and 8 hours: Off, 0:30,
1:00, 2:00, 3:00, 4:00, 6:00 and 8:00.
2. Press the ENTER button.
3. The Off Timer starts counting down remaining time.
4. The projector turns off after the countdown is complete.
NOTE:
• To cancel the preset time, select “Off” for the preset time or turn off the power.
• When the remaining time reaches 3 minutes before the projector is turned off, the “Projector will turn off in 3 minutes”
message will be displayed on the bottom of the screen.
Selecting Lamp Mode [Lamp Mode]
This feature enables you to select two brightness modes of the lamp:
Normal and Eco modes. The lamp life can be extended by using the Eco mode.
Normal Mode ........ This is the default setting (100% Brightness).
Eco Mode .............. Select this mode to increase the lamp life (80% Brightness).
NOTE: If the projector is overheated in Normal mode, there may be a case where the Lamp mode automatically changes to Eco
mode to protect the projector. When the projector is in Eco mode, the picture brightness decreases. When the projector comes
back to normal temperature, the Lamp mode returns to Normal mode.
NOTE: Thermometer symbol indicates the lamp mode is automatically set to Eco mode because the internal temperature is too
high.
36
5. Using On-Screen Menu
Selecting Menu Language [Language]
You can choose one of 21 languages for on-screen instructions.
Selecting Menu Color [Menu Color Select]
You can choose between two color modes for menu color: color and monochrome.
Selecting Menu Display Time [Menu Display Time]
This option allows you to select how long the projector waits after the last touch of a button to turn off the menu.
The preset choices are “Manual”, “Auto 5 sec”, “Auto 15 sec”, and “Auto 45 sec”. The “Auto 45 sec” is the factory
preset.
Selecting a Color or Logo for Background [Background]
Use this feature to display a black/ blue screen or logo when no signal is available.
Selecting Projector Orientation [Orientation]
This sets your image for your type of projection. The options are:
desktop front projection, ceiling rear projection, desktop rear projection, and ceiling front projection.
Enabling Key Sound and Error Sound [Beep]
This feature turns on or off the keypad sound or alarm when a button on the cabinet and the remote control is pressed
or an error occurs.
37
5. Using On-Screen Menu
¶ Menu Descriptions & Functions [Advanced]
Security
A keyword can be set for your projector to avoid operation by an unauthorized user using the Menu. When a keyword
is set, turning on the projector will display the Keyword input screen. Unless the correct keyword is entered, the
projector cannot project an image.
To enable the Security function:
1. Select [Advanced] → [Security] and press the ̇ button to select “On”.
The [Keyword] screen will be displayed.
2. Type in a combination of the four SELECT buttons ̆̄̇̈ and press the ENTER button.
NOTE: A keyword must be four to 10 digits in length.
The [Confirm Keyword] screen will be displayed.
38
5. Using On-Screen Menu
3. Type in the same combination of SELECT buttons ̆̄̇̈ and press the ENTER button.
The confirmation screen will be displayed.
4. Select “Yes” and press the ENTER button.
The Security function has been enabled.
To disable the Security function:
1. Select [Advanced] → [Security] and press the ̈ button to select “Off”.
The Keyword confirmation screen will be displayed.
2. Type in your keyword and press the ENTER button.
When the correct keyword is entered, the Security function will be disabled.
When the Security function is enabled and the projector is turned on, the projector will display a blue
background.
To display an image at this time, press the MENU button to display the Keyword input screen.
Type in the correct keyword and press the ENTER button. The projector will display an image.
NOTE:
• The security disable mode is maintained until the main power is turned off (by setting the main power switch to “O” or
unplugging the power cable).
• If you forget your keyword, contact your dealer. Your dealer will provide you with your keyword in exchange for your request
code. Your request code is displayed in the Keyword Confirmation screen. In this example “K992-45L8-JNGJ-4XU9-1YATEEA2” is a request code.
39
5. Using On-Screen Menu
Disabling the Cabinet Buttons [Cabinet Button Lock]
This option turns on or off the Cabinet Button Lock function.
NOTE:
• This Cabinet Button Lock does not affect the remote control and the PC Control functions.
• When the cabinet buttons are unlocked, pressing and holding the EXIT button for about 10 seconds will change the setting to
enable.
• Key symbol indicates the Cabinet Button Lock is enabled.
Enabling High Speed Fan Mode [Fan Mode]
This option allows you to select two modes for fan speed: High speed mode and Auto mode.
High ...................... The built-in fans run at a fixed high speed.
Auto ...................... The built-in fans automatically run at a variable speed according to the internal temperature.
When you wish to cool down the temperature inside the projector quickly, select “High”.
NOTE: Select “High” if you continue to use the projector for consecutive days.
Selecting Signal Format [Signal Select]
[Computer]
Allows you to choose “Computer” for an RGB source such as a computer, or “Component” for a component video
source such as a DVD player. Normally select “RGB/Component” and the projector automatically detects a component signal. However there may be some component signals that the projector is unable to detect. If this is the
case, select “Component”. Select “Scart” in Computer for the European Scart signal.
[Video & S-Video System Select]
This feature enables you to select composite video standards manually. Normally select “Auto”.
When you select the video standard for Video and S-Video, select the video standard from the pull-down menu.
This must be done for Video and S-Video respectively.
40
5. Using On-Screen Menu
(Advanced Page 2)
Enabling Power Management [Power Management]
When this option is on and there is no input for five minutes or more, the projector will automatically turn itself off.
Turning On Noise Reduction [Noise Reduction] (not available for Video and S-Video signals)
Reduces video noise. Select “On” to enable the Noise Reduction feature.
Turning On Flicker Reduction [Flicker Reduction]
Reduces flicker which can occur in an interlaced signal. This feature is not available for RGB and HDTV signals.
NOTE: When the Flicker Reduction is ON, jagged lines can be visible depending on the signal. In that case, select OFF.
NOTE: This feature may not be available depending on your video equipment connected to the projector.
Setting Auto Adjust [Auto Adjust]
This feature sets the Auto Adjust mode so that the RGB image can be automatically or manually adjusted for noise
and stability. You can automatically make adjustment in two ways: Normal and Fine
Off ......................... The RGB image will not be automatically adjusted.
You can manually optimize the RGB image.
Normal .................. Default setting. The RGB image will be automatically adjusted. Normally select this option.
Fine ....................... Select this option if fine adjustment is needed. It takes more time to switch to the source than when “Normal” is selected.
Adjusting Position/Clock (when Auto Adjust is off)
This allows you to manually adjust the image horizontally and vertically, and adjust Clock and Phase.
[Horizontal/Vertical]
Adjusts the image location horizontally and vertically.
This adjustment is made automatically when the Auto Adjust is turned on.
[Clock] (available for RGB and HDTV signals only)
Use this item with the “Auto Adjust off” to fine tune the computer image or to remove any vertical banding that
might appear. This function adjusts the clock frequencies that eliminate the horizontal banding in the image. This
adjustment may be necessary when you connect your computer for the first time. This adjustment is made automatically when the Auto Adjust is turned on.
41
5. Using On-Screen Menu
[Phase] (available for RGB and HDTV signals only)
Use this item to adjust the clock phase or to reduce video noise, dot interference or cross talk. (This is evident
when part of your image appears to be shimmering.)
Use “Phase” only after the “Clock” is complete.
This adjustment is made automatically when the Auto Adjust is turned on.
Selecting Communication Speed [Communication Speed]
This feature sets the baud rate of the PC Control port (DIN 8 Pin). It supports data rates from 4800 to 19200 bps.
The default is 19200 bps.
Select the appropriate baud rate for your equipment to be connected (depending on the equipment, a lower baud rate
may be recommended for long cable runs).
º Menu Descriptions & Functions [Information]
Displays the status of the current signal, remaining lamp (%), lamp/filter/projector usage time (hours) and version
information. The Information has two pages. The Information included is as follows:
[Page 1]
Remaining Lamp Time (%)*
Lamp Hour Meter (H)
Filter Usage
Projector Usage
* The progress indicator shows the percentage of remaining bulb life. The value informs you of the amount of
lamp usage. When the remaining lamp time reaches 0, the Remaining Lamp Time bar indicator changes
from 0% to 100 Hours and starts counting down.
If the remaining lamp time reaches 0 hours, the projector will not turn on regardless of whether the lamp
mode is set to Normal or Eco.
BIOS Version
Firmware Version
Data Version
[Page 2]
Source Index
Horizontal Frequency
Vertical Frequency
Sync Polarity
Signal Type
Video Type
Sync Type
Interlace
42
5. Using On-Screen Menu
¾ Menu Descriptions & Functions [Default]
Returning to Factory Default [Factory Default]
The Factory Default feature allows you to change adjustments and setting to the factory preset.
[Current Signal]
Resets the adjustments for the current signal to the factory preset levels.
The items that can be reset are: Brightness, Contrast, Color, Hue, Sharpness, Noise Reduction, Aspect Ratio,
Horizontal Position, Vertical Position, Clock, Phase and Picture Management.
[All Data]
Reset all the adjustments and settings for all the signals to the factory preset for source except the following:
Language, Security, Communication Speed, Remaining Lamp Time, Lamp Hour Meter, Filter Usage and Projector
Usage. To reset the lamp usage time, see “Clear Lamp Hour Meter” and “Clear Filter Usage”.
Resetting the Filter Usage Hours [Clear Filter Usage]
Resets the filter usage back to zero. Selecting this option displays submenu for a confirmation. Select “Yes” and press
the ENTER button.
Clearing Lamp Hour Meter [Clear Lamp Hour Meter]
Resets the lamp clock back to zero. Selecting this option displays submenu for a confirmation. Select “Yes” and press
the ENTER button.
NOTE: The projector will turn off and go into standby mode after 3100 hours (up to 4100 hours in Eco mode) of service.
If this happens, press the HELP button on the remote control for ten seconds to reset the lamp clock back to zero.
When the lamp time clock is reset to zero, the LAMP indicator goes out.
Do this only after replacing the lamp.
43
6. Maintenance
This section describes the simple maintenance procedures you should follow to clean the filter and replace the lamp.
ᕡ Cleaning or Replacing the Filter
The air-filter sponge keeps dust and dirt from getting inside the projector and should be cleaned after every 100 hours
of operation (more often in dusty conditions). If the filter is dirty or clogged, your projector may overheat.
CAUTION
•
Turn off the projector, turn off the main power switch and unplug the projector before replacing the filter.
•
Only clean the outside of the filter cover with a vacuum cleaner.
•
Do not attempt to operate the projector without the filter cover.
To clean the air-filter:
FO
S
CU
ZO
OM
S
E
LE
C
T
LA
M
P
ST
AT
US
PO
W
ER
O
VI
N/
DE
ST
O
AN
D
BY
S-
VI
DE
O
CO
M
PU
TE
R
TO
AU J.
AD
Vacuum the filter-through the filter cover.
To reset the filter usage time, from the menu, select [Default] → [Clear Filter Usage].
See also page 43 for resetting the filter usage time.
To replace the filter (sponge):
1. Remove the filter cover by pushing down on the catch of the cover until you feel it detach.
Catch
2. Gently peel off the filter (sponge) and replace it with the new one.
44
6. Maintenance
3. Reinstall the new filter cover.
NOTE: Do not wash the filter with soap and water. Soap and water will damage the filter membrane. Before replacing the filter,
remove dust and dirt from the projector cabinet. Keep out dust and dirt during filter replacement.
NOTE: When you replace the lamp, it is also wise to replace the filter. The filter comes in the same package with your replacement
lamp.
· Cleaning the Cabinet and the Lens
1. Turn off the projector before cleaning.
2. Clean the cabinet periodically with a damp cloth. If heavily soiled, use a mild detergent. Never use strong
detergents or solvents such as alcohol or thinner.
3. Use a blower or lens paper to clean the lens, and be careful not to scratch or mar the lens.
C
FO
TO
AU J.
AD
US
S
E
LE
C
T
P
M
LA
US
AT
ST
ER
W
PO
O
DE
VI
D
AN
ST
N/
O
BY
O
DE
VI
S-
R
TE
PU
M
CO
ZOOM
SELE
CT
US
AT
ST
ER
W
PO
P
M
LA
O
DE
VI
D
AN
ST
N/
O
BY
O
DE
VI
SR
TE
PU
M
CO
OM
ZO
TO
AU J.
AD
IN
L/M
ON
O
O IN
AU
DIO
R
AU
DIO
S
CU
EO
IDE
FO
VID
S-V
CO
MP
UT
ER
IN
PC
CO
NT
RO
L
AC
IN
45
http://getMANUAL.com
6. Maintenance
» Replacing the Lamp
After your lamp has been operating for 3000 hours (up to 4000 hours in Eco mode) or longer, the LAMP indicator in the
cabinet will blink red and the message “The lamp has reached the end of its usable life. Please replace the lamp.”
will appear. Even though the lamp may still be working, replace it at 3000 (up to 4000 hours in Eco mode) hours to
maintain optimal projector performance. After replacing the lamp, be sure to clear the lamp hour meter. See page 43.
CAUTION
•
DO NOT TOUCH THE LAMP immediately after it has been used. It will be extremely hot. Turn the projector off,
wait 30 seconds, turn off the main power switch and then disconnect the power cable. Allow at least one hour
for the lamp to cool before handling.
•
DO NOT REMOVE ANY SCREWS except two lamp case screws. You could receive an electric shock.
•
Do not break the glass on the lamp housing.
Keep finger prints off the glass surface on the lamp housing. Leaving finger prints in the glass surface might
cause an unwanted shadow and poor picture quality.
•
The projector will turn off and go into standby mode after 3100 (up to 4100 hours in Eco mode) hours of service.
If this happens, be sure to replace the lamp. If you continue to use the lamp after 3000 hours (up to 4000 hours
in Eco mode) of use, the lamp bulb may shatter, and pieces of glass may be scattered in the lamp case. Do not
touch them as the pieces of glass may cause injury. If this happens, contact your NEC dealer for lamp replacement.
To replace the lamp:
Optional lamp and tools needed for replacement:
• Replacement lamp VT70LP
• Phillips screwdriver or equivalent
1. Place the projector on a soft cloth and turn it over to access the lamp cover on the bottom.
2. Use a Philips screwdriver to push and release the tab.
Push up and remove the lamp cover.
Philips
screwdriver
Catch
46
6. Maintenance
3. Loosen the two screws securing the lamp housing until the phillips screwdriver goes into a freewheeling
condition. The two screws are not removable.
Remove the lamp housing by holding it.
Interlock
NOTE: There is an interlock on this case to prevent the risk of electrical shock. Do not attempt to circumvent this interlock.
4. Insert a new lamp housing until the lamp housing is plugged into the socket.
CAUTION
Do not use a lamp other than the NEC replacement lamp VT70LP.
Order this from your NEC dealer.
Secure it in place with the two screws.
Be sure to tighten the screws.
5. Reattach the lamp cover.
Slip the lamp cover back until it snaps into place.
47
6. Maintenance
6. Connect the supplied power cable, turn on the Main Power switch and turn on the projector.
7. Finally, select the menu → [Default] → [Clear Lamp Hour Meter] to reset the lamp usage hours.
NOTE: When the lamp exceeds 3100 hours (up to 4100 hours in Eco mode) of service, the projector cannot turn on and the menu
is not displayed.
If this happens, press the HELP button on the remote control for ten seconds to reset the lamp clock back to zero.
When the lamp time clock is reset to zero, the LAMP indicator goes out.
48
7. Appendix
ᕡ Troubleshooting
This section helps you resolve problems you may encounter while setting up or using the projector.
Indicator Messages
Power Indicator
Indicator Condition
Projector Condition
Off
Blinking light
Green
0.5 sec On,
0.5 sec Off
2.5 sec On,
0.5 sec Off
0.5 sec On,
0.5 sec Off
Green
Orange
Off Timer is enabled.
–
The projector is cooling down.
Wait for a moment.
The projector is turned on.
The projector is in Standby.
Orange
Steady light
Note
The main power is off
–
The projector is getting ready to turn on. Wait for a moment.
–
–
Status Indicator
Indicator Condition
Projector Condition
Off
Blinking light
Red
1 cycle (0.5 sec
2.5 sec Off)
2 cycle (0.5 sec
0.5 sec Off)
4 cycle (0.5 sec
0.5 sec Off)
6 cycle (0.5 sec
0.5 sec Off)
Green
Steady light
Orange
Note
Normal
–
On, Lamp cover error or lamp housing error Replace the lamp cover or lamp
housing correctly.
On, Temperature error
The projector is overheated. Move
the projector to a cooler location.
On, Fan error
Fans will not work correctly.
On, Lamp error
Lamp fails to light. Wait a full
minute and then turn on again.
Re-firing the lamp (The projector is cool- The projector is re-firing.
ing down.)
Wait for a moment.
Cabinet button is locked
You have pressed cabinet button
when Cabinet Button is locked.
Lamp Indicator
Indicator Condition
Off
Blinking light
Red
Steady light
Red
Green
Projector Condition
Normal
Lamp has reached its end of life. Lamp
replacement message will be displayed.
Lamp has been used beyond its limit. The
projector will not turn on until the lamp is
replaced.
Lamp mode is set to Eco mode
49
Note
–
Replace the lamp.
Replace the lamp.
–
7. Appendix
Common Problems & Solutions (See also " Power/Status/Lamp Indicator " on page 49.)
Problem
Check These Items
Does not turn on
• Check that the power cable is plugged in and that the power button on the projector cabinet or the remote
control is on. See pages 18 and 19.
• Ensure that the lamp cover is installed correctly. See page 47.
• Check to see if the projector has overheated or the lamp usage exceeds 3100 hours (up to 4100 hours : Eco
mode). If there is insufficient ventilation around the projector or if the room where you’re presenting is particularly warm, move the projector to a cooler location.
• The lamp may fail to light. Wait a full minute and then turn on the power again.
• The lamp has reached the end of its usable life. Replace the lamp.
Will turn off
• Ensure that the Power Management is off. See page 41.
No picture
• Use the VIDEO, the S-VIDEO or the COMPUTER button on the remote control to select your source (Computer,
Video or S-Video). See page 21. If there is still no picture, press the button again.
• Ensure your cables are connected properly.
• Use menus to adjust the brightness and contrast. See page 34.
• Remove the lens cap.
• Reset the settings or adjustments to factory preset levels using the “Default” in the Menu. See page 43.
• Enter your registered keyword if the Security function is enabled. See page 38.
• When using with a notebook PC, be sure to connect between the projector and the notebook PC before turning
on the power to the notebook PC. In most cases signal cannot be output from RGB output unless the notebook
PC is turned on after connecting with the projector.
* If the screen goes blank while using your remote control, it may be the result of the computer's screensaver or power management software.
• See also the next page.
Picture suddenly
becomes dark
• When one of the following happens, the Lamp mode automatically changes from Normal to Eco.
* When there are no signals (blue or black screen) → To return to the Normal mode, select another available
source.
* When the image is muted using the PIC-MUTE button on the remote control → Press the PIC-MUTE button
again to return to the Normal mode.
* When the room where you' re presenting is particularly warm → Move the projector to a cooler location.
Color tone or hue is
unusual
• Check if an appropriate color is selected in " Wall Color " . If so, select an appropriate option. See page 33.
• Adjust " Hue " in " Picture " . See page 34.
Image isn’t square to
the screen
• Reposition the projector to improve its angle to the screen. See page 22.
• Use the Keystone correction function to correct the trapezoid distortion. See page 24.
Picture is blurred
• Adjust the focus. See page 23.
• Reposition the projector to improve its angle to the screen. See page 22.
• Ensure that the distance between the projector and screen is within the adjustment range of the lens. See page
11.
• Condensation may form on the lens if the projector is cold, brought into a warm place and is then turned on.
Should this happen, let the projector stand until there is no condensation on the lens.
Image is scrolling
vertically, horizontally
or both
• Use the VIDEO, the S-VIDEO or the COMPUTER button on the remote control to select your source (Video, SVideo or Computer).
See page 21.
• Adjust the computer image manually with the Horizontal/Vertical in the “Advanced → Page 2”. See page 41.
Remote control does
not work
• Install new batteries. See page 10.
• Make sure there are no obstacles between you and the projector.
• Stand within 22 feet (7 m) of the projector. See page 10.
Indicator is lit or
blinking
• See the POWER/STATUS/LAMP Indicator on page 49.
Cross color in RGB
mode
• Press the AUTO ADJ. button on the projector cabinet or the remote control. See page 25.
• When “Off” is selected in Auto Adjust, adjust the computer image manually with Clock/Phase in “Advanced →
Page 2” in the menu. See pages 41 and 42.
For more information contact your dealer.
50
7. Appendix
If there is no picture, or the picture is not displayed correctly.
•
Power on process for the projector and the PC.
Be sure to connect the RGB cable between the projector and the computer before turning on the computer.
There are some notebook PCs, which do not output signal unless there is a projector or monitor connected first.
NOTE: You can check the horizontal frequency of the current signal in the projector’s menu under Information. If it reads
“0kHz”, this means there is no signal being output from the computer. See page 42 or go to next step.
•
Enabling the computer’s external display.
Displaying an image on the notebook PC’s screen does not necessarily mean it outputs a signal to the projector. When using a PC compatible laptop, a combination of function keys will enable/disable the external display.
Usually, the combination of the ‘Fn” key along with one of the 12 function keys gets the external display to come
on or off. For example, NEC laptops use Fn + F3, while Dell laptops use Fn + F8 key combinations to toggle
through external display selections.
•
Non-standard signal output from the computer
If the output signal from a notebook PC is not an industry standard, the projected image may not be displayed
correctly. Should this happen, deactivate the notebook PC’s LCD screen when the projector display is in use.
Each notebook PC has a different way of deactivate/reactivate the local LCD screens as described in the
previous step. Refer to your computer’s documentation for detailed information.
•
Image displayed is incorrect when using a Macintosh
When using a Macintosh with the projector, set the DIPswitch of the Mac adapter (not supplied with the projector) according to your resolution. After setting, restart your Macintosh for the changes to take affect.
For setting display modes other than those supported by your Macintosh and the projector, changing the DIP
switch on a Mac adapter may bounce an image slightly or may display nothing. Should this happen, set the DIP
switch to the 13” fixed mode and then restart your Macintosh. After that, restore the DIP switches to a
displayable mode and then restart the Macintosh again.
NOTE: A Video Adapter cable manufactured by Apple Computer is needed for a PowerBook which does not have a mini D-Sub
15-pin connector.
•
Mirroring on a PowerBook
* When using the projector with a Macintosh PowerBook, output may not be set to 1024 x 768 unless “mirroring” is off on your PowerBook. Refer to owner’s manual supplied with your Macintosh computer for mirroring.
•
Folders or icons are hidden on the Macintosh screen
Folders or icons may not be seen on the screen. Should this happen, select [View] → [Arrange] from the Apple
menu and arrange icons.
51
7. Appendix
ᕢ Specifications
This section provides technical information about the VT37 Projector's performance.
Model Number
VT37
Optical
LCD Panel
Resolution
Lens
0.7 " p-Si TFT active-matrix
800 006 ןpixels* native, up to SXGA with Advanced AccuBlend
Digital zoom and manual focus
F2.0 f=17.5 mm
Lamp
130W DC lamp (110W Eco mode)
Image Size (Diagonal)
25 - 300 inches / 0.6 - 7.6 m
Projection Distance
1.9 - 23.92 ft / 0.58 - 7.3 m
Projection Angle
14.0° - 14.6°
Keystone Correction (Manual) +/- 30° Vertical
Electrical
Inputs
Video Compatibility
Scan Rate
Video Bandwidth
Color Reproduction
Horizontal Resolution
External Control
Sync Compatibility
Built-in Speaker
Power Requirement
Input Current
Power Consumption
1 RGB/Component (D-Sub 15 Pin), 1 S-Video (DIN 4 Pin),
1 Video (RCA), 1 (L/R) RCA Audio, 1 Stereo Mini Audio,
1 PC Control (DIN 8 Pin)
NTSC, NTSC4.43, PAL, PAL-60, PAL-N, PAL-M, SECAM,
HDTV: 1080i, 1080i/50Hz, 720p, 576p, 480p, 480i/60Hz
Horizontal: 15 kHz to 100 kHz (RGB: 24 kHz or over)
Vertical: 50 Hz to 120 Hz
RGB: 80 MHz (-3dB)
16.7 million colors simultaneously, Full color
NTSC / NTSC4.43/PAL/PAL-M/PAL-N/PAL60: 540 TV lines
SECAM: 300 TV lines
YCbCr: 800 TV lines
RGB: 800 dots (H) 006ןdots (V)
RS232, IR
Separate Sync / Composite Sync / Sync on G
1W (monaural)
100 - 240V AC, 50 / 60 Hz
2.1 - 1.2A
8W in Standby mode /
190W in Lamp Normal mode / 155W in Lamp Eco mode
* Effective pixels are more than 99.99%.
52
7. Appendix
Mechanical
Installation Orientation
Dimensions
Desktop/Front, Desktop/Rear, Ceiling/Front, Ceiling/Rear
11.6 " (W)( " 7.3ןH)( " 2.01ןD)
294mm (W)39ןmm (H)062ןmm (D)
(not including protrusions)
Net Weight
6.5 lbs / 2.9 kg
Environmental Considerations Operational Temperatures : 41° to 95°F (5° to 35°C),
20% to 80% humidity (non-condensing)
Storage Temperatures : 14° to 122°F (-10° to 50°C),
20% to 80% humidity (non-condensing)
Regulations
For United States:
UL Approved (UL 60950)
Meets FCC Class B requirements
For Canada:
UL Approved (CSA 60950)
Meets DOC Canada Class B requirements
For Australia/New Zealand:
Meets AS/NZS CISPR.22 Class B
For Europe:
Meets EMC Directive (EN55022, EN55024, EN61000-3-2, EN61000-3-3)
Meets Low Voltage Directive (EN60950, TUV GS Approved)
For additional information visit:
US : http://www.necvisualsystems.com
Europe : http://www.neceurope.com/
Global : http://www.nec-pj.com/
The specifications are subject to change without notice.
53
54
Unit: mm (inch)
64.6 (2.5)
112.5 (4.4)
Lens center
Lens center
71.5 (2.8)
294 (11.6)
FOCUS
20.3 (0.8)
ZOOM
ZOOM
260 (10.2)
LAMP
STATUS
POWER
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
COMPUTER
SELECT
ON/STAND BY
AUTO
ADJ.
VIDEO IN
AUDIO
L/MONO AUDIO R
COMPUTER IN
S-VIDEO IN
PC CONTROL
AC IN
ᕣ Cabinet Dimensions
7. Appendix
7. Appendix
ᕤ Pin Assignments of D-Sub COMPUTER Input Connector
Mini D-Sub 15 Pin Connector
5
4 3 2 1
10 9 8 7 6
15 14 13 12 11
Signal Level
Video signal : 0.7Vp-p (Analog)
Sync signal : TTL level
Pin No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
RGB Signal (Analog)
YCbCr Signal
Red
Green or Sync on Green
Blue
Ground
Ground
Red Ground
Green Ground
Blue Ground
No Connection
Sync Signal Ground
SCART Sync
Bi-directional DATA (SDA)
Horizontal Sync or Composite Sync
Vertical Sync
Data Clock
Cr
Y
Cb
55
Cr Ground
Y Ground
Cb Ground
http://getMANUAL.com
7. Appendix
ᕥ Compatible Input Signal List
Signal
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
NTSC
PAL
PAL60
SECAM
VESA
IBM
MAC
MAC
MAC
VESA
VESA
IBM
VESA
IBM
VESA
IBM
IBM
VESA
VESA
VESA
VESA
VESA
MAC
VESA
VESA
VESA
MAC
VESA
VESA
VESA
MAC
SUN
SGI
VESA
VESA
MAC
HP
SUN
VESA
VESA
SXGA+
HDTV (1080p)
SDTV(576i)(625i)
SDTV(576p)(625p)
HDTV (1080i)(1125i)
HDTV (1080i)(1125i)
HDTV (720p)(750p)
SDTV (480p)(525p)
DVD YCbCr
DVD YCbCr
Resolution
( Dots )
–
–
–
–
640 084 ן
640 084 ן
640 084 ן
640 084 ן
640 084 ן
640 084 ן
640 084 ן
640 084 ן
640 084 ן
720 053 ן
720 004 ן
720 053 ן
720 004 ן
800 006 ן
800 006 ן
800 006 ן
800 006 ן
800 006 ן
832 426 ן
1024 867 ן
1024 867 ן
1024 867 ן
1024 867 ן
1024 867 ן
1024 867 ן
1152 468 ן
1152 078 ן
1152 009 ן
1152 009 ן
1280 069 ן
1280 4201 ן
1280 4201 ן
1280 4201 ן
1280 4201 ן
1280 4201 ן
1280 4201 ן
1400 0501 ן
1920 0801 ן
–
–
1920 0801 ן
1920 0801 ן
1280 027 ן
–
–
–
Frequency H.
( kHz )
15.734
15.625
15.734
15.625
31.47
31.47
31.47
34.97
35
37.86
37.5
39.375
43.269
31.469
37.927
39.44
39.44
35.16
37.879
48.077
46.88
53.674
49.725
35.5
48.363
56.476
60.241
60.023
68.677
67.5
68.681
61.796
71.736
60
63.981
69.89
78.125
81.13
79.976
91.146
–
67.5
15.6
31.5
33.75
28.125
45
31.47
15.734
15.625
Refresh Rate
( Hz )
60
50
60
50
59.94
60
60
66.67
66.67
72.81
75
75
85.01
70.09
85.04
87.85
87.85
56.25
60.32
72.19
75
85.06
74.55
43 Interlaced
60
70.07
74.93
75.03
85
75
75.06
65.95
76.05
60
60.02
65.18
72.01
76.11
75.03
85.02
–
60 Progressive
50
50
60 Interlace
50 Interlace
60 Progressive
59.94 Progressive
59.94 Interlaced
50 Interlaced
@ : Images in above flagged with @ are compressed with Advanced AccuBlend.
NOTE: Some composite sync signals may not be displayed correctly.
Signals other than those specified in the table above may not be displayed correctly. If this should happen, change the refresh rate or resolution on
your PC. Refer to Display Properties help section of your PC for procedures.
56
7. Appendix
ᕦ PC Control Codes and Cable Connection
PC Control Codes
Function
Code Data
POWER ON
02H
00H
00H
00H
00H
02H
POWER OFF
02H
01H
00H
00H
00H
03H
INPUT SELECT COMPUTER
02H
03H
00H
00H
02H
01H
01H
09H
INPUT SELECT VIDEO
02H
03H
00H
00H
02H
01H
06H
0EH
INPUT SELECT S-VIDEO
02H
03H
00H
00H
02H
01H
0BH
13H
PICTURE MUTE ON
02H
10H
00H
00H
00H
12H
PICTURE MUTE OFF
02H
11H
00H
00H
00H
13H
SOUND MUTE ON
02H
12H
00H
00H
00H
14H
SOUND MUTE OFF
02H
13H
00H
00H
00H
15H
NOTE: Contact your local dealer for a full list of the PC Contorol Codes if needed.
Cable Connection
Communication Protocol
Baud rate ........................................ 19200 bps
Data length ..................................... 8 bits
Parity .............................................. No parity
Stop bit .......................................... One bit
X on/off .......................................... None
Communications procedure ........... Full duplex
NOTE: Depending on the equipment, a lower baud rate may be recommended for long cable runs.
PC Control Connector (DIN-8P)
To RxD of PC
8
5
4
2
To GND of PC
6
7
3
1
To TxD of PC
NOTE: Pins 2, 3, 5, 6 and 8 are used inside the projector.
57
7. Appendix
¶ Optional Presentation Remote Control Kit (PR52KIT)
The PR52KIT is an optional remote control kit for operating your NEC projector and performing your computer mouse
operations.
Package List
• RD-408E remote control unit ....... 1
• Mouse receiver ............................ 1
• AAA batteries ................... 2
• User's manual .................. 1
Part Names and Functions of the Remote Control
1
3
5
2
OFF
ON
4
7
9
POWER
MAGNIFY
LASER
PAGE
UP
POINTER
6
8
10
15
16
18
19
22
24
25
27
29
DOWN
11
MEN U
PICTURE
SOURCE
VIEWER
ASPECT
AUTO ADJ.
SLIDE
17
20
PIC-MUTE
HELP
VOLUME
FOCUS
2. Remote Jack
Not available on this model.
13
EN T E R
E XI T
12
1. Infrared Transmitter/Laser Pointer
Transmits an infrared signal when any button other
than LASER is pressed.
Direct the remote control toward the remote sensor
on the projector cabinet.
Beams a laser light when the Laser button is pressed.
CAUTION:
* Do not look into the laser pointer while it is on.
* Do not point the laser beam at a person.
R-C LIC K
FREEZE
3. LED
Flashes when any button is pressed.
4. POWER ON Button
When the main power is on, you can use this button
to turn your projector on.
NOTE: To turn on the projector, press and hold the
POWER ON button for a minimum of two seconds.
21
23
26
ZOOM
5. POWER OFF Button
You can use this button to turn your projector off.
NOTE: To turn off the projector, press the POWER OFF
button twice.
3D REFORM
28
PJ OFF MOUSE
6. MAGNIFY (+)(–) Buttons
Use these buttons to adjust the image size.
The image can be magnified about the center of the
screen up to 400%.
14
7. LASER Button
Press and hold this button to activate the laser pointer.
When lit, you can use the laser to draw your audience's
attention to a red dot that you can place on any object.
58
7. Appendix
8. POINTER Button
Not available on this model.
18. ASPECT Button
Press this button to display the Aspect Ratio select
screen.
9. PAGE UP/DOWN Buttons*
Use these buttons to operate your computer with the
supplied remote mouse receiver. You can use these
buttons to scroll the viewing area of the window or to
move to the previous or next slide in PowerPoint on
your computer.
19. AUTO ADJ. Button
Use this button to adjust an RGB source for an optimal picture.
20. VIEWER Button
Not available on this model.
10. MENU Button
Displays the menu for various settings and adjustments.
21. SLIDE +/- Buttons
Not available on this model.
11. Mouse Button
In Mouse mode*, this button works as your computer
mouse.
In Projector mode, this button is used for projector’s
menu operation and moving the magnified image.
22. PIC-MUTE Button
This button turns off the image and sound for a short
period of time. Press again to restore the image and
sound.
23. HELP Button
Provides the Information screen.
12. ENTER Button
Executes your menu selection and activates items selected from the menu.
24. VOLUME +/– Buttons
Press (+) to increase the volume and (–) to decrease
it.
13. EXIT Button
Returns to the previous menu.
While you are in the main menu, pressing this button
will close the menu.
25. FOCUS +/- Buttons
Not available on this model.
26. ZOOM +/- Buttons
Use to finely adjust the image on the screen.
14. L-CLICK Button*
Works as the mouse left button when the supplied
remote mouse receiver is connected with your computer.
27. FREEZE Button
This button will freeze a picture. Press again to resume motion.
15. R-CLICK Button*
Works as the mouse right button when the supplied
remote mouse receiver is connected with your computer.
28. 3D REFORM Button
Not available on this model.
29. PJ ̇ OFF ̈ MOUSE Slide Switch
Use to switch mouse button operation modes between
Mouse and Projector. Setting to OFF will disable all
the buttons on the remote control.
16. PICTURE Button
Press this button to display the Picture window. Each
time this button is pressed, the option will be changed:
Wall Color → Picture Management → Brightness →
Contrast → Sharpness → Color → Hue
*NOTE: The PAGE UP/DOWN, L-CLICK, R-CLICK and MOUSE
(as computer mouse) buttons are available only when the PJ
̇ OFF ̈ MOUSE Slide Switch is set to MOUSE.
17. SOURCE Button
Use this button to select a video source such as a
PC, VCR or DVD player.
Press and release this button quickly to display the
Source List.
Each time this button is pressed for a minimum of
ONE second, the input source will change.
If no input signal is present, the input will be skipped.
59
7. Appendix
Battery Installation
1 Remove the battery cover.
2 Remove both old batteries and
NOTE: Do not pull the battery
cover by force. Doing so can
result in it coming off.
install new ones (AAA). Ensure
that you have the batteries' polarity (+/ –) aligned correctly.
3 Slip the cover back over the batteries until it snaps into place.
NOTE: Do not mix different types of
batteries or new and old batteries.
2
1
1
2
Operating Range for Wireless Remote Control
Remote sensor on projector cabinet
7m/22 feet
Remote control
30°
30°
• The infrared signal operates by line-of-sight up to a distance of about 22 feet/7 m and within a 60-degree angle of
the remote sensor on the projector cabinet.
• The projector will not respond if there are objects between the remote control and the sensor, or if strong light falls
on the sensor.
Weak batteries will also prevent the remote control from properly operating the projector.
Remote Control Precautions
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Handle the remote control carefully.
If the remote control gets wet, wipe it dry immediately.
Avoid excessive heat and humidity.
If you will not be using the remote control for a long time, remove the batteries.
Do not place the batteries upside down.
Do not use new and old batteries together, or use different types of batteries together.
Dispose of used batteries according to your local regulations.
60
7. Appendix
Using the Laser Pointer
You can use the laser to draw your audience's attention to a red dot that you can place on any object.
CAUTION:
• Do not look into the laser pointer while it is on.
• Do not point the laser beam at a person.
• Do not allow children to use the laser pointer.
Press and hold the LASER button to activate the laser pointer.
R
SE
LA
To disable the laser pointer, set the function switch to “Off”.
Decide whether to enable or disable laser, then set the switch as necessary using the tip of a thin ball-point pen. On
this model, the other selector switch is not used.
ON
OFF
Laser enable/disable
switch
Not used
On: Enabled (the laser lights when the LASER button is pressed) [Factory default]
Off: Disabled (the laser does not light even when the LASER button is pressed)
Disable the laser when using in an environment in which the unit is accessible to children.
61
7. Appendix
Using Remote Mouse Receiver
The remote mouse receiver enables you to operate your computer’s mouse functions from the remote control. It is a
great convenience for clicking through your computer-generated presentations.
Connecting the remote mouse receiver to your computer
If you wish to use the remote mouse function, connect the mouse receiver and computer.
The mouse receiver can be connected directly to the computer’s USB port (type A).
NOTE: Depending on the type of connection or OS installed on your computer, you may have to restart your computer or change
your computer settings.
Computer
Remote mouse receiver
To USB port of PC or Macintosh
When operating a computer via the remote mouse receiver
7m/22 feet
30˚
30˚
Remote sensor on the
remote mouse receiver
When connecting using the USB terminal
For PC, the mouse receiver can only be used with a Windows 98/Me/XP* or Windows 2000 operating system.
* NOTE: In Windows XP, if the mouse cursor will not move correctly, do the following:
Clear the Enhance pointer precision check box underneath the mouse speed slider in the Mouse Properties dialog box [Pointer
Options tab].
NOTE: Wait at least 5 seconds after disconnecting the mouse receiver before reconnecting it and vice versa. The computer may
not identify the mouse receiver if it is repeatedly connected and disconnected in rapid intervals.
Operating your computer’s mouse from the remote control
You can operate your computer's mouse from the remote control.
PAGE UP/DOWN Button ..... scrolls the viewing area of the window or to move to the previous or next slide in PowerPoint
on your computer.
Mouse Button.................. moves the mouse cursor on your computer.
L-CLICK Button ............... works as the mouse left button.
R-CLICK Button .............. works as the mouse right button.
62
7. Appendix
º Troubleshooting Check List
Before contacting your dealer or service personnel, check the following list to be sure repairs are needed also by
referring to the “Troubleshooting” section in your user’s manual. This checklist below will help us solve your problem
more efficiently.
* Print the following pages.
Frequency of occurrence Ⅺ always Ⅺ sometimes (How often?_____________________) Ⅺ other (__________________)
Power
No power (POWER indicator does not light green) See also “Status Indicator (STATUS)”.
Power cable's plug is fully inserted into the wall outlet.
Main power switch is pressed to the ON position.
Lamp cover is installed correctly .
Lamp Hour Meter (lamp operation hours) was cleared after
lamp replacement.
No power even though you press and hold the POWER button
for a minimum of 2 seconds.
Shut down during operation.
Power cable's plug is fully inserted into the wall outlet.
Lamp cover is installed correctly .
Power Management is turned off (only models with the Power
Management function).
Sleep Timer is turned off (only models with the Sleep Timer
function ).
Video and Audio
No image is displayed from your PC or video equipment to the
projector.
Still no image even though you connect the projector to the PC
first, then start the PC.
Enabling your notebook PC’s signal output to the projector.
• A combination of function keys will enable/disable the external display. Usually, the combination of the “Fn” key along
with one of the 12 function keys turns the external display
on or off.
No image (blue background, logo, no display).
Still no image even though you press the AUTO ADJUST button.
Still no image even though you carry out “Reset” in the
projector’s menu.
Signal cable's plug is fully inserted into the input connector
A message appears on the screen.
( _____________________________________________ )
The source connected to the projector is active and available.
Still no image even though you adjust the brightness and/or
the contrast.
Input source's resolution and frequency are supported by the
projector.
Parts of the image are lost.
Still unchanged even though you press the AUTO ADJUST button.
Still unchanged even though you carry out “Reset” in the
projector’s menu.
Image is too dark.
Remains unchanged even though you adjust the brightness
and/or the contrast.
Image is distorted.
Image appears to be trapezoidal (unchanged even though you
carry out the “Keystone " or “3D Reform” adjustment).
No sound.
Audio cable is correctly connected to the audio input of the
projector.
Still unchanged even though you adjusted the volume level.
AUDIO OUT is connected to your audio equipment (only models with the AUDIO OUT connector).
Image is shifted in the vertical or horizontal direction.
Horizontal and vertical positions are correctly adjusted on a
computer signal.
Input source's resolution and frequency are supported by the
projector.
Some pixels are lost.
Image is flickering.
Still unchanged even though you press the AUTO ADJUST button.
Still unchanged even though you carry out “Reset” in the
projector’s menu.
Image shows flickering or color drift on a computer signal.
Image appears blurry or out of focus.
Still unchanged even though you checked the signal’s resolution on PC and changed it to projector’s native resolution.
Still unchanged even though you adjusted the focus.
Other
Remote control does not work.
No obstacles between the sensor of the projector and the remote control.
Projector is placed near a fluorescent light that can disturb the
infrared remote controls.
One or more remote sensors are enabled (only models with
the Remote Sensor Selection function).
Batteries are new and are not reversed in installation.
If present on the remote control, projector selector switch is
not used.
Buttons on the projector cabinet do not work ( only models with
the Key Lock function).
Cabinet Button Lock is not turned on or is disabled in the menu.
Still unchanged even though you press and hold the EXIT button for a minimum of 10 seconds.
63
7. Appendix
In the space below please describe your problem in detail.
Information on application and environment where your projector is used
Installation environment
Projector
Model number:
Screen size:
Serial No.:
Screen type:
Ⅺ White matte Ⅺ Beads Ⅺ Polarization
Ⅺ Wide angle Ⅺ High contrast
Date of purchase:
Throw distance:
Lamp operating time (hours):
Lamp Mode:
inch
Ⅺ Normal Ⅺ Eco
Orientation:
feet/inch/m
Ⅺ Ceiling mount Ⅺ Desktop
Power outlet connection:
Information on input signal:
Horizontal synch frequency [
] kHz
Ⅺ Connected directly to wall outlet
Vertical synch frequency
[
] Hz
Synch polarity
H Ⅺ (+) Ⅺ (–)
Ⅺ Connected to power cord extender or other (the number of connected equipment______________)
Ⅺ Connected to a power cord reel or other (the number
of connected equipment______________)
V Ⅺ (+) Ⅺ (–)
Synch type
Ⅺ Separate Ⅺ Composite
Ⅺ Sync on Green
Computer
STATUS Indicator:
Steady light
Ⅺ Orange Ⅺ Green
Manufacturer:
Flashing light
[
Model number:
] cycles
Remote control model number:
Notebook PC Ⅺ / Desktop Ⅺ
Native resolution:
Refresh rate:
Video adapter:
Projector
Other:
PC
DVD player
Video equipment
Signal cable
VCR, DVD player, Video camera, Video game or other
NEC standard or other manufacturer’s cable?
Model number:
Length:
inch/m
Manufacturer:
Distribution amplifier
Model number:
Model number:
Switcher
Model number:
Adapter
Model number:
64
7. Appendix
¾ TravelCare Guide
5) Problems or damage caused by use in hot or humid places, in
vehicles, boats or ships, etc.
TravelCare - a service for international travelers
6) Problems or damage caused by expendable supplies or devices
connected to the product other than those designated by NEC.
This product is eligible for " TravelCare " , NEC's unique international warranty.
Please note that TravelCare coverage differs in part from coverage under the warranty included with the product.
7) Problems caused by natural consumption, wear or deterioration
of parts under normal usage conditions.
8) Problems or damage to lamps and other expendable supplies,
included parts or optional parts.
Services offered with TravelCare
9) Other conditions stipulated in the warranty included with the product also apply.
This warranty allows customers to receive service on their product at
the NEC and NEC-designated service stations in the countries listed
herein when temporarily traveling internationally for business or pleasure.
For details on services offered by the different service stations, please
refer to the " List of TravelCare Outlets " below.
NOTE: The product can be used overseas with voltages of 100 to 120V and 200
to 240V by using a power cable suited for the standards and power source voltage of the country in which the product is being used.
List of TravelCare Outlets
1 Repair services
The product will be repaired and delivered within 10 business days,
not including shipping time.
During the term of warranty, the cost of maintenance parts, labor
costs for repairs and shipping costs within the service station's coverage area are covered by the warranty.
This list applies as of December 1, 2004.
For the most up-to-date information, please refer to the websites of the
service stations in the various countries on the List of TravelCare Outlets or to the NEC website at http://www.nec-pj.com.
In Europe
NEC Europe, Ltd. / European Technical Centre
Address:
Unit G, Stafford Park 12, Telford TF3 3BJ, U.K.
Telephone:
+44 1952 237000
Fax Line:
+44 1952 237006
Email Address:
AFR@uk.neceur.com
WEB Address:
http://www.neceur.com
2 Replacement product rental service
If the customer desires, he or she can rent a replacement product
while the original product is being repaired.
Fee: US$200 for 12 days
This fee must be paid at the local service station in cash or credit
card.
The $200 rental fee is non-refundable even if the customer rents it
less than 12 days before returning.
The replacement product will be delivered within 3 business days.
If the customer did not return the replacement product within 12 days,
the customer will be charged the price of the unit.
If the customer returned the replacement product in a faulty or damaged condition, the repair cost will be charged to the customer.
Note that this service is not offered in all countries and regions. Please
refer to the " List of TravelCare Outlets " .
In addition, this replacement product rental service is not offered after the product's warranty has expired.
(Regions Covered)
EU:
Austria*, Belgium*, Denmark*, Finland*, France*, Germany*,
Greece*, Ireland*, Italy*, Luxembourg*, The Netherlands*,
Portugal*, Spain*, Sweden* and the United Kingdom*
EEA:
Norway*, Iceland and Liechtenstein
In North America
NEC Solutions (America), Inc.
Address:
1250 N. Arlington Heights Road, Itasca,
Illinois 60143, U.S.A.
Telephone:
+1 800 836 0655
Fax Line:
+1 800 356 2415
Email Address:
vsd.tech-support@necsam.com
WEB Address:
http://www.necvisualsystems.com
Term of warranty
1
a. Upon presentation of the warranty or receipt received upon purchase:
(Regions Covered)
U.S.A. *, Canada*
Valid for the term indicated on the warranty or the normal term of
warranty for the country of purchase.
In Oceania
NEC Australia Pty., Ltd.
Address: New South Wales;
184 Milperra Road, Reversby 2212
Victoria;
480 Princess Hwy Noble Park 3174
South Australia;
84A Richmond Road, Keswick 5035
Queensland;
116 Ipswich Road, Woollongabba 4102
Western Australia;
45 Sarich Court Osborne Park 6017
Telephone:
131 632 (from domestic)
+61 8 8375 5706 (from overseas)
Fax Line:
+61 8 8375 5757
Email Address:
lee.gramola@nec.com.au
WEB Address:
http://www.nec.com.au
b. When only the product is brought in:
Valid for a period of within 14 months of the date of manufacture
indicated by the serial number attached to the product.
2 When a product whose term of warranty is expired is brought in:
Repairs will be offered for a fee. In this case the customer is not
eligible for the replacement product rental service.
3 In the following cases, repairs may be charged, even if the product's
warranty is still in effect:
1) If the term of warranty, model name, serial number and name of
the store of purchase are not indicated on the warranty or have
been altered.
2) Problems or damage caused by dropping or shocks during shipment or movement by the customer or by improper handling by
the customers.
3) Problems or damage caused by improper usage or unwarrantable alterations or repairs by the customer.
(Regions Covered)
Australia*, New Zealand
4) Problems or damage caused by fire, salt damage, gas damage,
earthquakes, lightning damage, storm or flood damage or other
natural disasters or such external factors as dust, cigarette
smoke, abnormal voltage, etc.
65
http://getMANUAL.com
7. Appendix
In Asia and Middle East
NEC Viewtechnology, Ltd.
Address:
686-1, Nishioi, Oi-Machi, Ashigarakami-Gun,
Kanagawa 258-0017, Japan
Telephone:
+81 465 85 2369
Fax Line:
+81 465 85 2393
Email Address:
support_pjweb@nevt.nec.co.jp
http://www.nec-pj.com
WEB Address:
Lenso Communication Co., Ltd.
Address:
292 Lenso House 4, 1st Floor, Srinakarin Road,
Huamark, Bangkapi, Bangkok 10240, Thailand
Telephone:
+66 2 375 2425
Fax Line:
+66 2 375 2434
Email Address:
pattara@lenso.com
http://www.lenso.com
WEB Address:
(Regions Covered)
Thailand
(Regions Covered)
Japan*
NEC Hong Kong Ltd.
Address:
Telephone:
Fax Line:
Email Address:
WEB Address:
ABBA Electronics L.L.C.
Address:
Tariq Bin Ziyad Road, P.O.Box 327, Dubai,
United Arab Emirates
Telephone:
+971 4 371800
Fax Line:
+971 4 364283
Email Address:
ABBA@emirates.net.ae
11th Floor, Tower B, New Mandarin Plaza, 14
Science Museum Road,
Tsim Sha Tsui East, Kowloon, Hong Kong
+852 2369 0335
+852 2795 6618
esmond_au@nechk.nec.com.hk
http://www.nec.com.hk
(Regions Covered)
United Arab Emirates
(Regions Covered)
Hong Kong
NEC Taiwan Ltd.
Address:
Telephone:
Fax Line:
Email Address:
WEB Address:
Samir Photographic Supplies
Address:
P.O.Box 599, Jeddah 21421, Saudi Arabia
Telephone:
+966 2 6828219
Fax Line:
+966 2 6830820
Email Address:
vartkes@samir-photo.com
7F, No.167, SEC.2, Nan King East Road, Taipei,
Taiwan, R.O.C.
+886 2 8500 1734
+886 2 8500 1420
nickliao@nec.com.tw
http://www.nec.com.tw
(Regions Covered)
Saudi Arabia
NOTE: In countries designated with an asterisk(*), replacement product rental
service are offered.
(Regions Covered)
Taiwan
NEC Solutions Asia Pacific Pte. Ltd
Address:
401 Commonwealth Drive, #07-02, Haw Par
Technocentre, Singapore 149598
Telephone:
+65 6 273 8333
Fax Line:
+65 6 274 2226
Email Address:
tehgh@rsc.ap.nec.com.sg
http://www.nec.com.sg/ap
WEB Address:
(Regions Covered)
Singapore
NEC Systems Integration Malaysia Sdn Bhd
Address:
Ground Floor, Menara TA One, 22, Jalan P. Ramlee,
50250 Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia
Telephone:
+6 03 2164 1199
Fax Line:
+6 03 2160 3900
Email Address:
necare@nsm.nec.co.jp
http://www.necmalaysia.com.my
WEB Address:
(Regions Covered)
Malaysia
Tele Service Co., Ltd.
Address:
2nd Fl., Ire B/D. #2, 4Ga, Yangpyeng-Dong,
Youngdeungpo-Gu, Seoul, Korea 150-967
Telephone:
+82 2 2163 4193
Fax Line:
+82 2 2163 4196
Email Address:
moneybear@hyosung.com
(Regions Covered)
South Korea
66
7. Appendix
Date:
/
/
P-1/
,
,
TO: NEC or NEC's Authorized Service Station:
FM:
(Company & Name with signature)
Dear Sir (s),
I would like to apply your TravelCare Service Program based on attached registration and qualification sheet and agree with your
following conditions, and also the Service fee will be charged to my credit card account, if I don't return the Loan units within the
specified period. I also confirm following information is correct. Regards.
Application Sheet for TravelCare Service Program
Country,
product purchased :
User's Company Name :
User's Company Address :
Phone No., Fax No. :
User's Name :
User's Address :
Phone No., Fax No. :
Local Contact office :
Local Contact office Address :
Phone No., Fax No. :
User's Model Name :
Date of Purchase :
Serial No. on cabinet :
Problem of units per User :
Required Service :
(1) Repair and Return
(2) Loan unit
(1) Credit Card
(2) Travelers Cheque
Requested period of Loan unit :
Payment method :
In Case of Credit Card :
Card No. w/Valid Date :
67
(3) Cash
7. Appendix
5. Loan Service Charges and Conditions:
Upon acceptance of this NEC Projector, Customer agrees to assume
liability for this loan unit.
Condition of your TravelCare Service Program
Enduser is requested to understand following condition of TravelCare
Service Program and complete the necessary information on the application sheet.
The current cost of use of this loan unit is $200.00 USD for 12 calendar
days.
If Customer does not return the unit within the 12 calendar days, Customer will be charged the next highest cost up to and including the full
list price to Credit Cards, which price will be informed by NEC Authorized Service Stations. Please see the attached listing of contacts for
each country to arrange for pickup of the loan unit.
1. Service Options:
There are 3 types of " Service " available. Enduser has to understand
following condition and is required to fill in the Application Sheet.
1) Repair and Return:
The 'Faulty unit' is sent or collected from the customer. It is repaired
and returned within 10 days to the customer, excluding transport time.
If you return to their country of origin with the loan unit, you will be
charged additional freight to return the unit to the loaning country.
There may have a case, repair and return can't be done by NEC
Authorized Service Station, because of shortage of spare parts due
to same model is not sold in the territory.
Thank you for your understanding of this program.
2) Repair and Return with Loan: (This service is limited to some Service Stations)
This service is offered to the Enduser, who cannot wait until their unit
is repaired.
The customer can borrow a unit for $200 up to 12 days. Customer
then sends in inoperable unit to nearest NEC Authorized Service
Station for service. In order to prevent collection problem, Enduser is
required to fill in Application Sheet.
Enduser needs to confirm the availability of the Service to NEC Authorized Service Stations.
3) Loan Only:
For this service, NEC Authorized Service Station supplies the customer with a loan unit for US$200 up to 12 days. Customer keeps the
inoperable unit and when customer returns home, customer arranges
to have the projector serviced in the home country.
2. Warranty Exclusions:
This program does not apply if the Projector's serial number has been
defaced, modified or removed.
If, in the judgement of NEC Authorized Service Station or its agent the
defects or failures result from any cause other than fair wear and tear or
NEC neglect, or fault including the following without limitation:
1) Accidents, transportation, neglect, misuse, abuse, water, dust, smoke
or default of or by the Customer its employees or agents or any third
party;
2) Failure or fluctuation of electrical power, electrical circuitry, air conditioning, humidity control or other environmental conditions such as
use it in smoking area;
3) Any fault in the attachments or associated products or components
(whether or not supplied by NEC or its agents which do not form part
of the Product covered by this warranty);
4) Any act of God, fire, flood, war, act of violence or any similar occurrence;
5) Any attempt by any person other than any person authorized by NEC
to adjust, modify, repair, install or service the product.
6) Any Cross-border charges such as, duty, insurance, tax etc.
3. Charges for Warranty Exclusions and Out of Warranty Case:
In case faulty unit is under warranty exclusions case or under Out of
Warranty period, NEC Authorized Service Station will Inform estimation
of actual service cost to the Enduser with reason.
4. Dead on Arrival (DOA):
Enduser must take this issue up with their original supplier in the country of purchase.
NEC Authorized Service Station will repair the DOA unit as a Warranty
repair, but will not exchange DOA unit with new units.
Ver. 1 03/05
68
7N8P5671
Printed in Japan
Printed on recycled paper
© NEC Viewtechnology, Ltd. 2005
Ver. 1 03/05
Connect the supplied power cable.
Connect your computer to the projector.
S
CU
FO
ZOOM
COMPUTER IN
SELE
CT
LA
M
P
STA
S
PO
TU
W
ER
N
VID
O
COMPUTER IN
D
BY
AUDIO
N
S-V
R
EO
AUDIO
TA
L/MONO
/S
VIDEO IN
ID
EO
C
O
M
PU
TE
R
TO
AU J.
AD
S-VIDEO IN
PC CONTROL
VID
EO
S-VID
IN
L/M
ON AU
O DI
EO
O
R
IN
AU
DIO
CO
MP
UT
ER
IN
PC
AC IN
CO
NT
RO
L
AC
Power cable (supplied)
Netzkabel (Lieferumfang)
Câble d'alimentation (fourni)
Cavo d´alimentazione (in dotazione)
Cable de alimentación (suministrado)
Nätkabel (medföljer)
IN
RGB/VGA signal cable (supplied)
RGB/VGA-Signalkabel (Lieferumfang)
Câble de signal RGB/VGA (fourni)
Cavo dei segnali RGB/VGA (in dotazione)
Cable de señal RGB/VGA (suministrado)
RGB/VGA-signalkabel (medföljer)
Turn on the main power switch.
LAMP
FO
CU
S
STATUS
ZO
OM
POWER
Mini D-SUB 15 pin connector
15poliger Mini D-Sub Anschluss
Connecteur Mini D-Sub à 15 broches
Connettore mini D-SUB a 15 pin
Conector Mini D-Sub de 15 contactos
15-polig Mini D-Sub-kontakt
AC
If you encounter problems while setting up or using the projector, see
" Troubleshooting " in the user's manual on the supplied CD-ROM or the
Important Information.
Falls Sie beim Aufstellen oder bei der Verwendung des Projektors
irgendwelche Probleme haben sollten, lesen Sie bitte den Abschnitt
“Fehlersuche” im Benutzerhandbuch auf der im Lieferumfang
enthaltenen CD-ROM oder den Abschnitt Wichtige Informationen.
Si se le presenta algún problema mientras configura o utiliza el
proyector, consulte “Detección de fallos” en el manual del usuario en el
CD-ROM suministrado o información importante.
Se avete qualunque problema durante la messa a punto o nell’utilizzo
del proiettore, consultate “Localizzazione dei guasti” nel manuale delle
istruzioni nel CD-ROM fornito oppure le Informazioni Importanti.
IN
En cas de problèmes lors de l’installation ou de l’utilisation du
projecteur, voir la section “Dépistage des pannes” dans le manuel de
l’utilisateur sur le CD-ROM fourni ou les Informations Importantes.
Se “Felsökning” i bruksanvisningen på den medföljande CD-ROMskivan eller Viktig information, om du skulle få några problem då du
ställer in eller använder projektorn.
L-CLICK
LAMP
OFF
STATUS
POWER
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
COMPUTER
MAGNIFY PIC-MUTE
R-CLICK
VIDEO
COMPUTER AUTO ADJ.
LAMP
ON
MOUSE
STATUS
POWER
POWER
PAGE
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
1
COMPUTER
S-VIDEO
UP
2
SELECT
SELECT
VOLUME
DOWN
ASPECT
HELP
PICTURE
FREEZE
ON/STAND BY
ON/STAND BY
AUTO
ADJ.
MENU
AUTO
ADJ.
Turn on the projector.
To turn on the power to the projector, press and hold the ON/STAND BY button on the
projector cabinet or the POWER ON button on the remote control for a minimum of 2
seconds.
Selecting a Source.
Turn on the computer. Press the COMPUTER button on the projector cabinet or the
COMPUTER 1 button on the remote control.
NOTE: Press the AUTO ADJ. button to optimize an RGB image automatically.
Schalten Sie den Projektor ein.
Drücken und halten Sie zum Einschalten des Projektors die ON/STAND BY-Taste am
Projektorgehäuse oder die POWER ON-Taste auf der Fernbedienung mindestens 2
Sekunden lang gedrückt.
Auswählen einer Quelle.
Schalten Sie den Computer ein. Drücken Sie die COMPUTER-Taste am Projektorgehäuse
oder die COMPUTER 1-Taste auf der Fernbedienung.
HINWEIS: Drücken Sie die AUTO ADJ.-Taste, um ein RGB-Bild automatisch zu
optimieren.
Allumer le projecteur.
Pour allumer le projecteur, appuyer sur la touche ON/STAND BY du coffret du projecteur
ou sur la touche POWER ON de la télécommande et la maintenir enfoncée pendant au
moins 2 secondes.
Sélectionner une source.
Mettre l'ordinateur en marche. Presser la touche COMPUTER du projecteur ou la touche
COMPUTER 1 de la télécommande.
REMARQUE: Presser la touche AUTO ADJ. pour optimiser automatiquement l’image
RGB.
Accensione del proiettore.
Per accendere la corrente del proiettore, premete e mantenete premuto il tasto ON/
STAND BY sull´involucro del proiettore o il tasto POWER ON del telecomando,
mantenendolo premuto per almeno 2 secondi.
Selezione di una fonte.
Accendete il computer. Premete il tasto COMPUTER sull’armadietto del proiettore o il
tasto COMPUTER 1 sul telecomando.
NOTA: Premere il tasto AUTO ADJ. per ottimizzare automaticamente un’immagine RGB.
Encienda el proyector.
Para conectar la alimentación del proyector, pulse el botón ON/STAND BY en la cubierta
del proyector o el botón POWER ON en el mando a distancia durante al menos 2
segundos.
Selección de una fuente.
Encienda el ordenador. Pulse el botón COMPUTER en el gabinete del proyector o el
botón COMPUTER 1 en el mando a distancia.
NOTA: Pulse el botón AUTO ADJ. para optimizar automáticamente la imagen RGB.
Slå på strömmen till projektorn.
Tryck på ON/STAND BY-tangenten på projektorhöljet eller POWER ON-tangenten på
fjärrkontrollen intryckt i minst 2 sekunder för att slå på strömmen till projektorn.
Välja en källa.
Slå på datorn. Tryck på COMPUTER-tangenten på projektorns hölje eller COMPUTER 1tangenten på fjärrkontrollen.
OBSERVERA: Tryck på AUTO ADJ.-tangenten för att optimera en RGB-bild automatiskt.
W
AT
ST
US
CT
LE
SE
LA
MP
PO
ER
VI
ON
/S
DE
O
TA
ND
BY
S-
VI
DE
O
CO
MP
ER
UT
TO
AU J.
AD
1
S
CU
FO
2
CU
FO
ZO
OM
S
S
CU
ZOO
ZOO
M
M
FO
Adjustable Tilt Foot lever
Einstellbare Kippfußtaste
Touche du pied à inclinaison réglable
Tasto del piede di inclinazione regolabile
Botón de pata de inclinación ajustable
Justerbar lutningsfottangent
2
Adjustable Tilt Foot lever
Einstellbare Kippfußtaste
Touche du pied à inclinaison réglable
Tasto del piede di inclinazione regolabile
Botón de pata de inclinación ajustable
Justerbar lutningsfottangent
Digital ZOOM button
Tasto Digital ZOOM
Digital-ZOOM-Taste
Botón Digital ZOOM
Touche du ZOOM numérique Knappen för digital ZOOM
Focus ring
Anello di messa a fuoco
Fokussierring
Aro de enfoque
Anneau de l’objectif Fokusring
ST
LA
MP
AT
US
PO
W
ER
ON
/S
DE
VI
O
TA
ND
BY
S-
VI
DE
O
CO
MP
UT
ER
TO
AU J
AD
Adjustable Tilt Foot
Einstellbarer Kippfuß
Pied à inclinaison réglable
Piede d’inclinazione regolabile
Pata de inclinación ajustable
Justerbar lutningsfot
Adjusting the image size and the focus.
Zoom: Use the Digital ZOOM button on the projector cabinet to electronically enlarge or
reduce the image size.
Focus: Use the Focus ring to obtain the best focus.
CT
LE
SE
4
FO
S
CU
ZO
OM
3
4
Adjust the Tilt Foot.
Push up and hold the Adjustable Tilt Foot Button on the front of the projector to extend the
adjustable tilt feet (maximum height).
Einstellung des Kippfußes.
Halten Sie die einstellbare Kippfußtaste an der Vorderseite des Projektors gedrückt, um die
einstellbaren Kippfüße auszufahren (maximale Höhe).
Régler le pied de réglage de l’inclinaison.
Pousser vers le haut et maintenir le bouton de réglage de l’inclinaison à l’avant du projecteur
pour augmenter la hauteur du pied de réglage (hauteur maximale).
Regolate il piedino d’inclinazione.
Alzate e tenete il tasto del piedino d’inclinazione regolabile sulla parte anteriore del
proiettore per aprire i piedi inclinabili e regolabili (altezza massima).
Ajuste de las patas de inclinación.
Presione hacia arriba (y manténgalo en dicha posición) el botón de las patas de inclinación,
situado en la parte delantera del proyector, para extender las patas ajustables (altura máxima).
Justera lutningen med foten.
Tryck upp och håll justerfotsknappen på projektorns framsida för att förlänga justerfötterna
(maxhöjd).
Stellen Sie die Bildgröße und den Fokus ein.
Zoom: Mit Hilfe der sich am Projektorgehäuse befindlichen Digital-ZOOM-Taste können Sie
die das Bild elektronisch vergrößern oder verkleinern.
Fokus: Verwenden Sie den Fokussierring zum Erzielen der besten Fokusleistung.
Régler la taille de l'image et effectuer la mise au point optique de l'objectif.
Zoom: Utiliser la touche du ZOOM numérique située sur le boîtier du projecteur pour
agrandir ou réduire électroniquement la taille de l’image.
Mise au point optique: Utiliser la bague de mise au point optique pour obtenir l’image la
plus nette à l’écran.
Regolate la dimensione dell'immagine e la messa a fuoco.
Zoom: Utilizzate il tasto Digital ZOOM del proiettore per ingrandire o ridurre
elettronicamente le dimensioni dell’immagine.
Fuoco: Usate l’anello di messa a fuoco per ottenere la migliore messa a fuoco.
Ajuste el tamaño y enfoque de la imagen.
Zoom: Utilice el botón Digital ZOOM, situado en la cubierta del proyector, para ampliar o
reducir electrónicamente el tamaño de la imagen.
Enfoque: Utilice el aro de enfoque para lograr el mejor enfoque.
Justera bildstorlek och fokus.
Zoom: Använd knappen för digital zoom på projektorkåpan för att förstora eller förminska
bildstorleken elektroniskt.
Fokus: Använd Fokusringen för att fokusera.
Correcting Keystone Distortion [Keystone]
This feature corrects the keystone (trapezoidal) distortion
to make the top of the screen longer or shorter to be the
same as the bottom.
Korrigieren der Trapezverzerrung [Trapez]
Die Trapez-Korrektur ermöglicht Ihnen das Korrigieren von
Trapez-Verzerrungen (trapezförmig), um den oberen
Bildschirmteil zu verlängern oder zu verkürzen, damit er
mit dem unteren Bildschirmteil identisch ist.
Correction de la déformation trapézoïdale
[Keystone]
Cette fonction corrige la distorsion keystone
(trapézoïdale) pour rendre le haut de l’écran plus long ou
plus court identique au bas.
Correzione della deformazione trapezoidale
[Chiave]
Questa funzione corregge la distorsione trapezoidale per
rendere più lunga o più corta la parte superiore dello
schermo affinchè sia uguale alla parte inferiore.
Corrección de la distorsión trapezoidal
[Keystone]
Esta característica corrige la distorsión keystone (trapezoidal) para alargar o acortar la parte de arriba de la
pantalla para que sea igual a la parte de abajo.
Korrigera den keystonedistorsionen [Keystone]
Detta alternativ rättar till keystone- (trapetsformad)
förvrängning och justerar bildens översta kant så att den
blir lika lång som den understa kanten.
1. Press the MENU button. The menu will be displayed.
2. Use the SELECT ̄ button to select “Image” and then press the
SELECT ̈ button. The “Keystone” will be displayed.
3. Use the SELECT ̇ or ̈ button to correct the vertical
keystone distortion.
4. Press the MENU button to close the menu.
1. Drücken Sie die MENU-Taste. Das Menü wird gezeigt.
2. Wählen Sie zunächst mit der SELECT ̄ -Taste “Bild-Optionen”
aus und drücken Sie dann die SELECT ̈ -Taste. Die Anzeige
“Trapez” wird eingeblendet.
3. Korrigieren Sie die vertikale Trapezverzerrung mit der
SELECT ̇ bzw. ̈ -Taste.
4. Drücken Sie die MENU-Taste, um das Menü zu
schließen.
1. Appuyer sur la touche MENU. Le Menu s’affiche.
2. Utiliser la touche SELECT ̄ pour sélectionner “Options image”,
puis appuyer sur la touche SELECT ̈. La fonction “Keystone”
s’affiche.
3. Utiliser la touche SELECT ̇ ou ̈ pour corriger la
distorsion trapézoïdale verticale.
4. Appuyez sur la touche MENU pour fermer le menu.
1. Premete il tasto MENU. Viene visualizzato il menu.
2. Utilizzate il tasto SELECT ̄ per selezionare “Opz. immagine” e
premete il tasto SELECT ̈. Viene visualizzato “Chiave”.
3. Utilizzate i tasti SELECT ̇ o ̈ per correggere la
distorsione trapezoidale verticale.
4. Premete il tasto MENU per chiudere il menu.
1. Pulse el botón MENU. Se visualizará el menú.
2. Utilice el botón SELECT ̄ para seleccionar “Opc. de imagen” y,
a continuación, pulse el botón SELECT ̈. Se visualizará
“Keystone”.
3. Utilice el botón SELECT ̇ o ̈ para corregir la
distorsión trapezoidal vertical.
4. Pulse el botón MENU para cerrar el menú.
1. Tryck på MENU-tangenten. Menyn visas.
2. Använd SELECT ̄ -tangenten för att välja “Bildalternativ“ och
tryck sedan på SELECT ̈ -tangenten. “Keystone” visas.
3. Använd tangenten SELECT ̇ eller ̈ för att korrigera
den vertikala keystonedistorsionen.
4. Tryck på MENU-tangenten för att stänga menyn.
PRINTED WITH
SOY INK
TM
Portable Projector
VT37
Important Infomation
What's in the Box?
ST
FO
S
CU
ZO
OM
SE
LE
C
T
LA
MP
AT
US
PO
W
ER
VI
ON
/S
DE
O
TA
ND
BY
S-
VI
DE
O
CO
MP
UT
ER
TO
AU J.
AD
Make sure your box contains everything listed. If any pieces are missing, contact your dealer.
Please save the original box and packing materials if you ever need to ship your projector.
(24F40111)
(24BS7423)
FF
O
N
O
ER
W
PO
UTE
C-M
PI
Y
NIF
AG
M
E
G
PA
UP
U
EN
M
DO
W
N
R
TE
EN
CK
CLI
LIT
EX
RCL
IC
DEO
VI
S-
K
TO
E
M
LU
VO
USE R AU
O
M
TE
PU
M
CO 1
DEO
VI
AD
2
J.
CT
PE
AS
P
HEL
RE
CTU
PI
ZE
EE
FR
(7N900522)
(US: 7N080212)
(EU: 7N080005)
(7N520032)
k
ic
Qu tup
Se ide
Gu
For North America only
Registration card
Limited warranty
nt
rta ion
po at
Im orm
f
In
For Europe only
Guarantee policy
English
ᕡ How to Use the Supplied User Documents
Three user documents are included with the projector.
Important Information
•
First read Important Information. It covers information about projector safety, cautions, lamp replacement,
troubleshooting and other key specifications.
Quick Setup Guide
•
The Quick Setup Guide provides initial setup and usage information regarding source connection, turning on
the power, selecting a source and other basic operating instructions.
User's Manual on CD-ROM
•
The complete user's manual is supplied on the CD-ROM in PDF (Portable Document Format) and provides
detailed product and usage information for your NEC projector.
The manual is available in six languages (English, German, French, Italian, Spanish and Swedish).
To view or print the PDF files Adobe Acrobat Reader™ or Adobe Reader™ is required.
NOTE: Adobe Acrobat Reader or Adobe Reader can be downloaded from Adobe’s website.
Visit http://www.adobe.com and obtain the current version for your OS.
•
To view the user's manual (PDF)
[Windows]
1. Place the supplied CD-ROM in your computer's CD-ROM drive.
2. Double-click the [My Computer] icon on the Windows desktop.
3. Double-click the [NECPJ-UM] CD-ROM icon.
4. Double-click [start_menu.pdf].
• Adobe Acrobat Reader or Adobe Reader will start and allow you to view the Start Menu.
5. Click [User's Manual].
The Index menu will be displayed.
6. Click the chapter title you want to view.
[Macintosh]
1. Place the supplied CD-ROM in your Macintosh's CD-ROM drive.
2. Double-click the [NECPJ-UM] CD-ROM icon on your Macintosh' Desktop.
3. Double-click [start_menu.pdf].
• Adobe Acrobat Reader or Adobe Reader will start and allow you to view the Start Menu.
4. Click [User's Manual].
The Index menu will be displayed.
5. Click the chapter title you want to view.
•
To copy the User's Manual (PDF) to your computer:
The user's manuals on the supplied CD-ROM can be copied to your computer hard drive.
Select your language version of [vt37_index_*.pdf] and [vt37_manual_*.pdf] from the [manual] folder on the
supplied CD-ROM and copy them to your computer hard drive.
© NEC Viewtechnology, Ltd. 2005
See the User’s manual (PDF format)
on the supplied CD-ROM for detailed
information.
E-1
ᕢ Safety Cautions
Precautions
Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC VT37 Projector and keep the manual handy for future
reference. Your serial number is located on the bottom of your projector. Record it here:
CAUTION
To turn off main power, be sure to remove the plug from power outlet.
The power outlet socket should be installed as near to the equipment as possible, and should be easily
accessible.
CAUTION
TO PREVENT SHOCK, DO NOT OPEN THE CABINET.
NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED NEC SERVICE PERSONNEL.
This symbol warns the user that uninsulated voltage within the unit may be sufficient to cause electrical
shock. Therefore, it is dangerous to make any kind of contact with any part inside of the unit.
This symbol alerts the user that important information concerning the operation and maintenance of this
unit has been provided.
The information should be read carefully to avoid problems.
WARNING: TO PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
DO NOT USE THIS UNIT’S PLUG WITH AN EXTENSION CORD OR IN AN OUTLET UNLESS ALL THE PRONGS
CAN BE FULLY INSERTED.
DO NOT OPEN THE CABINET. THERE ARE HIGH-VOLTAGE COMPONENTS INSIDE. ALL SERVICING MUST
BE DONE BY QUALIFIED NEC SERVICE PERSONNEL.
DOC Compliance Notice (for Canada only)
This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.
Acoustic Noise Information Ordinance-3. GSGV (for Germany only):
The sound pressure level is less than 70 dB (A) according to ISO 3744 or ISO 7779.
CAUTION
Avoid displaying stationary images for a prolonged period of time.
Doing so can result in these images being temporarily sustained on the surface of the LCD panel.
If this should happen, continue to use your projector. The static background from previous images will
disappear.
CAUTION
Do not put the projector on its side when the lamp is turned on.
Doing so may cause damage to the projector.
WARNING TO CALIFORNIA RESIDENTS:
Handling the cables supplied with this product, will expose you to lead, a chemical known to the State of California
to cause birth defects or other reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling.
E-2
RF Interference (for USA only)
WARNING
The Federal Communications Commission does not allow any modifications or changes to the unit EXCEPT those
specified by NEC Solutions (America), Inc. in this manual. Failure to comply with this government regulation could
void your right to operate this equipment. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by
turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the
following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio / TV technician for help.
For UK only: In UK, a BS approved power cable with moulded plug has a Black (five Amps) fuse installed for use with
this equipment. If a power cable is not supplied with this equipment please contact your supplier.
Important Safeguards
These safety instructions are to ensure the long life of your projector and to prevent fire and shock. Please read them
carefully and heed all warnings.
Installation
1. For best results, use your projector in a darkened room.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Place the projector on a flat, level surface in a dry area away from dust and moisture.
Do not place your projector in direct sunlight, near heaters or heat radiating appliances.
Exposure to direct sunlight, smoke or steam can harm internal components.
Handle your projector carefully. Dropping or jarring can damage internal components.
6. Do not place heavy objects on top of the projector.
7. If you wish to have the projector installed on the ceiling:
a. Do not attempt to install the projector yourself.
b. The projector must be installed by qualified technicians in order to ensure proper operation and reduce the
risk of bodily injury.
c. In addition, the ceiling must be strong enough to support the projector and the installation must be in accordance with any local building codes.
d. Please consult your dealer for more information.
Place the projector in a horizontal position
The tilt angle of the projector should not exceed 10 degrees, nor should the projector be installed in any way other than
the desktop and ceiling mount, otherwise lamp life could decrease dramatically.
10˚
E-3
http://getMANUAL.com
Fire and Shock Precautions
1. Ensure that there is sufficient ventilation and that vents are unobstructed to prevent the build-up of heat inside
your projector. Allow at least 4 inches (10 cm) of space between your projector and a wall.
2. Prevent foreign objects such as paper clips and bits of paper from falling into your projector.
Do not attempt to retrieve any objects that might fall into your projector. Do not insert any metal objects such as
a wire or screwdriver into your projector. If something should fall into your projector, disconnect it immediately
and have the object removed by a qualified NEC service personnel.
3. Do not place any liquids on top of your projector.
4. Do not look into the lens while the projector is on. Serious damage to your eyes could result.
5. Keep any items such as magnifying glass out of the light path of the projector. The light being projected from the
lens is extensive, therefore any kind of abnormal objects that can redirect light coming out of the lens, can
cause unpredictable outcome such as fire or injury to the eyes.
6. Do not cover the lens with the supplied lens cap or equivalent while the projector is on. Doing so can lead to
melting of the cap and possibly burning your hands due to the heat emitted from the light output.
7. Do not place any objects, which are easily affected by heat, in front of the projector lens or a projector exhaust
vent.
Doing so could lead to the object melting or getting your hands burned from the heat that is emitted from the
light output and exhaust.
8. The projector is designed to operate on a power supply of 100-240V AC 50/60 Hz. Ensure that your power
supply fits this requirement before attempting to use your projector.
9. Handle the power cable carefully and avoid excessive bending.
A damaged cord can cause electric shock or fire.
10. If the projector is not to be used for an extended period of time, disconnect the plug from the power outlet.
11. Do not touch the power plug during a thunderstorm. Doing so can cause electrical shock or fire.
12. Do not handle the power plug with wet hands.
CAUTION
• Do not try to touch the ventilation outlet on the left side (when seen from the front) as it can become heated
while the projector is turned on.
• Do no use the tilt-foot for purposes other than originally intended. Misuses such as gripping the tilt-foot or
hanging on the wall can cause damage to the projector.
• Do not send the projector in the soft case by parcel delivery service or cargo shipment. The projector inside
the soft case could be damaged.
• Select [High] in Fan mode if you continue to use the projector for consecutive days. (From the menu, select
[Advanced] → [Fan Mode] → [High].)
• Do not unplug the power cable from the wall outlet under any one of the following circumstances.
Doing so can cause damage to the projector:
* While the Hour Glass icon appears.
* While the cooling fans are running. (The cooling fans continue to work for 30 seconds after the projector is
turned off).
E-4
Lamp Replacement
•
To replace the lamp, follow all instructions provided on page E-8.
•
Be sure to replace the lamp when the message “The lamp has reached the end of its usable life. Please
replace the lamp.” appears. If you continue to use the lamp after the lamp has reached the end of its usable
life, the lamp bulb may shatter, and pieces of glass may be scattered in the lamp case. Do not touch them as the
pieces of glass may cause injury.
If this happens, contact your NEC dealer for lamp replacement.
•
Allow a minimum of 30 seconds to elapse after turning off the projector. Then turn off the main power switch,
disconnect the power cable and allow 60 minutes to cool the projector before replacing the lamp.
E-5
ᕣ Cleaning or Replacing the Filter
The air-filter sponge keeps dust and dirt from getting inside the projector and should be cleaned after every 100 hours
of operation (more often in dusty conditions). If the filter is dirty or clogged, your projector may overheat.
CAUTION
•
Turn off the projector, turn off the main power switch and unplug the projector before replacing the filter.
•
Only clean the outside of the filter cover with a vacuum cleaner.
•
Do not attempt to operate the projector without the filter cover.
To clean the air-filter:
FO
S
CU
ZO
OM
SE
LE
C
T
MP
LA
US
AT
ST
ER
W
PO
O
DE
VI
ND
TA
/S
ON
BY
O
DE
VI
S-
ER
UT
MP
CO
TO
AU J.
AD
Vacuum the filter-through the filter cover.
To reset the filter usage time, from the menu, select [Default] → [Clear Filter Usage].
See also page 43 (User’s Manual) for resetting the filter usage time.
To replace the filter (sponge):
1. Remove the filter cover by pushing down on the catch of the cover until you feel it detach.
Catch
2. Gently peel off the filter (sponge) and replace it with the new one.
E-6
3. Reinstall the new filter cover.
NOTE: Do not wash the filter with soap and water. Soap and water will damage the filter membrane. Before replacing the filter,
remove dust and dirt from the projector cabinet. Keep out dust and dirt during filter replacement.
NOTE: When you replace the lamp, it is also wise to replace the filter. The filter comes in the same package with your replacement
lamp.
ᕤ Cleaning the Cabinet and the Lens
1. Turn off the projector before cleaning.
2. Clean the cabinet periodically with a damp cloth. If heavily soiled, use a mild detergent. Never use strong
detergents or solvents such as alcohol or thinner.
3. Use a blower or lens paper to clean the lens, and be careful not to scratch or mar the lens.
CU
FO
TO
AU J.
AD
S
SE
LE
C
T
MP
LA
US
AT
ST
ER
W
PO
O
DE
VI
ND
TA
/S
ON
BY
O
DE
VI
S-
ER
UT
MP
CO
ZOO
M
SEL
ECT
LA
ST
MP
AT
PO
US
W
ER
VI
ON
/S
DE
O
TA
ND
BY
SVI
DE
O
CO
MP
UT
ER
ZO
OM
TO
AU J.
AD
IN
L/MO
O IN
NO
AU
DIO
R
AU
DIO
S
CU
EO
IDE
FO
VID
S-V
CO
MP
UTE
R IN
PC
CO
NTR
OL
AC
IN
E-7
ᕥ Replacing the Lamp
After your lamp has been operating for 3000 hours (up to 4000 hours in Eco mode) or longer, the LAMP indicator in the
cabinet will blink red and the message “The lamp has reached the end of its usable life. Please replace the lamp.”
will appear. Even though the lamp may still be working, replace it at 3000 (up to 4000 hours in Eco mode) hours to
maintain optimal projector performance. After replacing the lamp, be sure to clear the lamp hour meter. See page 43
(User’s Manual).
CAUTION
•
DO NOT TOUCH THE LAMP immediately after it has been used. It will be extremely hot. Turn the projector off,
wait 30 seconds, turn off the main power switch and then disconnect the power cable. Allow at least one hour
for the lamp to cool before handling.
•
DO NOT REMOVE ANY SCREWS except two lamp case screws. You could receive an electric shock.
•
Do not break the glass on the lamp housing.
Keep finger prints off the glass surface on the lamp housing. Leaving finger prints in the glass surface might
cause an unwanted shadow and poor picture quality.
•
The projector will turn off and go into standby mode after 3100 (up to 4100 hours in Eco mode) hours of service.
If this happens, be sure to replace the lamp. If you continue to use the lamp after 3000 hours (up to 4000 hours
in Eco mode) of use, the lamp bulb may shatter, and pieces of glass may be scattered in the lamp case. Do not
touch them as the pieces of glass may cause injury. If this happens, contact your NEC dealer for lamp replacement.
To replace the lamp:
Optional lamp and tools needed for replacement:
• Replacement lamp VT70LP
• Phillips screwdriver or equivalent
1. Place the projector on a soft cloth and turn it over to access the lamp cover on the bottom.
2. Use a Philips screwdriver to push and release the tab.
Push up and remove the lamp cover.
Philips
screwdriver
Catch
E-8
3. Loosen the two screws securing the lamp housing until the phillips screwdriver goes into a freewheeling
condition. The two screws are not removable.
Remove the lamp housing by holding it.
Interlock
NOTE: There is an interlock on this case to prevent the risk of electrical shock. Do not attempt to circumvent this interlock.
4. Insert a new lamp housing until the lamp housing is plugged into the socket.
CAUTION
Do not use a lamp other than the NEC replacement lamp VT70LP.
Order this from your NEC dealer.
Secure it in place with the two screws.
Be sure to tighten the screws.
5. Reattach the lamp cover.
Slip the lamp cover back until it snaps into place.
6. Connect the supplied power cable, turn on the Main Power switch and turn on the projector.
7. Finally, select the menu → [Default] → [Clear Lamp Hour Meter] to reset the lamp usage hours.
NOTE: When the lamp exceeds 3100 hours (up to 4100 hours in Eco mode) of service, the projector cannot turn on and the menu
is not displayed.
If this happens, press the HELP button on the remote control for ten seconds to reset the lamp clock back to zero.
When the lamp time clock is reset to zero, the LAMP indicator goes out.
E-9
ᕦ Troubleshooting
This section helps you resolve problems you may encounter while setting up or using the projector.
Indicator Messages
Power Indicator
Indicator Condition
Projector Condition
Off
Blinking light
Green
The main power is off
Note
–
0.5 sec On,
0.5 sec Off
The projector is getting ready to turn on. Wait for a moment.
2.5 sec On,
Off Timer is enabled.
–
The projector is cooling down.
Wait for a moment.
Green
The projector is turned on.
–
Orange
The projector is in Standby.
–
0.5 sec Off
Orange
Steady light
0.5 sec On,
0.5 sec Off
Status Indicator
Indicator Condition
Off
Blinking light
Red
Projector Condition
Note
–
Normal
1 cycle (0.5 sec On, Lamp cover error or lamp housing error Replace the lamp cover or lamp
2.5 sec Off)
2 cycle (0.5 sec On, Temperature error
0.5 sec Off)
housing correctly.
4 cycle (0.5 sec On, Fan error
0.5 sec Off)
Fans will not work correctly.
6 cycle (0.5 sec On, Lamp error
0.5 sec Off)
Lamp fails to light. Wait a full
minute and then turn on again.
The projector is overheated. Move
the projector to a cooler location.
Green
Steady light
Re-firing the lamp (The projector is cool- The projector is re-firing.
Orange
ing down.)
Cabinet button is locked
Wait for a moment.
You have pressed cabinet button
when Cabinet Button is locked.
Lamp Indicator
Indicator Condition
Off
Projector Condition
Normal
Note
–
Blinking light
Red
Lamp has reached its end of life. Lamp Replace the lamp.
Steady light
Red
replacement message will be displayed.
Lamp has been used beyond its limit. The Replace the lamp.
projector will not turn on until the lamp is
replaced.
Green
Lamp mode is set to Eco mode
E-10
–
Common Problems & Solutions (See also " Power/Status/Lamp Indicator " on page E-10.)
(The numbers in the table refer to pages in the User’s Manual)
Problem
Check These Items
Does not turn on
• Check that the power cable is plugged in and that the power button on the projector cabinet or the remote
control is on. See pages 18 and 19.
• Ensure that the lamp cover is installed correctly. See page 47.
• Check to see if the projector has overheated or the lamp usage exceeds 3100 hours (up to 4100 hours : Eco
mode). If there is insufficient ventilation around the projector or if the room where you’re presenting is particularly warm, move the projector to a cooler location.
• The lamp may fail to light. Wait a full minute and then turn on the power again.
• The lamp has reached the end of its usable life. Replace the lamp.
Will turn off
• Ensure that the Power Management is off. See page 41.
No picture
• Use the VIDEO, the S-VIDEO or the COMPUTER button on the remote control to select your source (Computer,
Video or S-Video). See page 21. If there is still no picture, press the button again.
• Ensure your cables are connected properly.
• Use menus to adjust the brightness and contrast. See page 34.
• Remove the lens cap.
• Reset the settings or adjustments to factory preset levels using the “Default” in the Menu. See page 43.
• Enter your registered keyword if the Security function is enabled. See page 38.
• When using with a notebook PC, be sure to connect between the projector and the notebook PC before turning
on the power to the notebook PC. In most cases signal cannot be output from RGB output unless the notebook
PC is turned on after connecting with the projector.
* If the screen goes blank while using your remote control, it may be the result of the computer's screensaver or power management software.
• See also the next page.
Picture suddenly
becomes dark
• When one of the following happens, the Lamp mode automatically changes from Normal to Eco.
* When there are no signals (blue or black screen) → To return to the Normal mode, select another available
source.
* When the image is muted using the PIC-MUTE button on the remote control → Press the PIC-MUTE button
again to return to the Normal mode.
* When the room where you' re presenting is particularly warm → Move the projector to a cooler location.
Color tone or hue is
unusual
• Check if an appropriate color is selected in " Wall Color " . If so, select an appropriate option. See page 33.
• Adjust " Hue " in " Picture " . See page 34.
Image isn’t square to
the screen
• Reposition the projector to improve its angle to the screen. See page 22.
• Use the Keystone correction function to correct the trapezoid distortion. See page 24.
Picture is blurred
• Adjust the focus. See page 23.
• Reposition the projector to improve its angle to the screen. See page 22.
• Ensure that the distance between the projector and screen is within the adjustment range of the lens. See page
11.
• Condensation may form on the lens if the projector is cold, brought into a warm place and is then turned on.
Should this happen, let the projector stand until there is no condensation on the lens.
Image is scrolling
vertically, horizontally
or both
• Use the VIDEO, the S-VIDEO or the COMPUTER button on the remote control to select your source (Video, SVideo or Computer).
See page 21.
• Adjust the computer image manually with the Horizontal/Vertical in the “Advanced → Page 2”. See page 41.
Remote control does
not work
• Install new batteries. See page 10.
• Make sure there are no obstacles between you and the projector.
• Stand within 22 feet (7 m) of the projector. See page 10.
Indicator is lit or
blinking
• See the POWER/STATUS/LAMP Indicator on page 49.
Cross color in RGB
mode
• Press the AUTO ADJ. button on the projector cabinet or the remote control. See page 25.
• When “Off” is selected in Auto Adjust, adjust the computer image manually with Clock/Phase in “Advanced →
Page 2” in the menu. See pages 41 and 42.
For more information contact your dealer.
E-11
If there is no picture, or the picture is not displayed correctly.
•
Power on process for the projector and the PC.
Be sure to connect the RGB cable between the projector and the computer before turning on the computer.
There are some notebook PCs, which do not output signal unless there is a projector or monitor connected first.
NOTE: You can check the horizontal frequency of the current signal in the projector’s menu under Information. If it reads
“0kHz”, this means there is no signal being output from the computer. See page 42 (User’s Manual) or go to next step.
•
Enabling the computer’s external display.
Displaying an image on the notebook PC’s screen does not necessarily mean it outputs a signal to the projector. When using a PC compatible laptop, a combination of function keys will enable/disable the external display.
Usually, the combination of the ‘Fn” key along with one of the 12 function keys gets the external display to come
on or off. For example, NEC laptops use Fn + F3, while Dell laptops use Fn + F8 key combinations to toggle
through external display selections.
•
Non-standard signal output from the computer
If the output signal from a notebook PC is not an industry standard, the projected image may not be displayed
correctly. Should this happen, deactivate the notebook PC’s LCD screen when the projector display is in use.
Each notebook PC has a different way of deactivate/reactivate the local LCD screens as described in the
previous step. Refer to your computer’s documentation for detailed information.
•
Image displayed is incorrect when using a Macintosh
When using a Macintosh with the projector, set the DIPswitch of the Mac adapter (not supplied with the projector) according to your resolution. After setting, restart your Macintosh for the changes to take affect.
For setting display modes other than those supported by your Macintosh and the projector, changing the DIP
switch on a Mac adapter may bounce an image slightly or may display nothing. Should this happen, set the DIP
switch to the 13” fixed mode and then restart your Macintosh. After that, restore the DIP switches to a
displayable mode and then restart the Macintosh again.
NOTE: A Video Adapter cable manufactured by Apple Computer is needed for a PowerBook which does not have a mini D-Sub
15-pin connector.
•
Mirroring on a PowerBook
* When using the projector with a Macintosh PowerBook, output may not be set to 1024 x 768 unless “mirroring” is off on your PowerBook. Refer to owner’s manual supplied with your Macintosh computer for mirroring.
•
Folders or icons are hidden on the Macintosh screen
Folders or icons may not be seen on the screen. Should this happen, select [View] → [Arrange] from the Apple
menu and arrange icons.
E-12
TROUBLESHOOTING
1. Operation check
A certain degree of malfunction can be identified by making an operation check carried out in normally operating
conditions.
Prior to the removal of the top cover, the following checks should be carried out:.
Is the POWER indicator lit in orange in the standby state?
NO
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The power cord is disconnected.
The vacation switch is turned OFF.
The fuse (F1) of the MSE395B PWB has blown out.
The cable (between MSE395B/W1 ~ MSE395/CN2) is disconnected.
The cable (between MSE395/CN101 ~ MAIN PWB/POPW) is disconnected.
The power block is out of order. (No supply of VCCS + 4.2V).
The fuses (F1001 ~ F1005) of the MAIN PWB have blown out.
Problems in the CPU peripheral circuits of the MAIN PWB.
YES
Is the STATUS indicator flashing in red in the standby state?
YES
• [Flashing once every 3 seconds] Dislodgment of the lamp cover
• [Flashing twice every 4 seconds] Internal temperature error. The working condition range is exceeded.
• [Flashing 4 times every 6 seconds] Fan stoppage due to fan error or intrusion
of foreign substance. No insertion of the fan cable.
• [Flashing 6 times every 8 seconds] Failure in lamp lighting. The cable POLC
is disconnected.
NO
Is the LAMP indicator lit in red in the standby state?
YES
• Lamp’s life or the replacement extension time has been exceeded. The system cannot be started in this state.
⇒ Replace the lamp.
NO
Is the LAMP indicator flashing in red in the standby or power-ON state?
YES
• [Flashing once per second]
Lamp’s life has expired. During the replacement extension time (100H) and
the expiration of lamp’s life.
⇒ Replace the lamp.
NO
Is the POWER indicator lit in green in the power-ON state?
YES
• The MAIN PWB is out of order.
• The cable is disconnected.
• The LCD panel is out of order.
NO
Circuits are out of order around the cabinet switch, remote control, light receiving block of the remote control, and
the CPU.
4-1
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
http://getMANUAL.com
TROUBLESHOOTING
2. Power block
The trouble in the power-related circuits can cause malfunction such as the failure in picture presentation, lamp
lighting, fan revolution, etc. When a trouble occurs, examine if this trouble is arising from the power block and then
check it.
• Confirm that the voltages specified below are output to the POPW and POLC connectors of the MAIN PWB.
POPW
PIN No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Signal name
4.2V
4.2V
4.2V
GND
GND
GND
6.2V
GND
15.0V
15.0V
GND
GND
17.5V
GND
PFC.ON
Stand-by mode
+4.2V
+4.2V
+4.2V
GND
GND
GND
+6.2V
GND
+15.0V
+15.0V
GND
GND
+17.5V
GND
0.0V
Power-ON mode
Related circuits
+4.2V
CPU, video processing, video input
+4.2V
CPU, video processing, video input
+4.2V
CPU, video processing, video input
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
+6.2V
MONITOR-OUT, audio AMP
GND
GND
+15.0V
Fan driver, Audio processor, Buffer circuit
+15.0V
Fan driver, Audio processor, Buffer circuit
GND
GND
GND
GND
+17.5V
LCD driver
GND
GND
+6.2V
PFC.ON
PIN No.
1
2
3
4
Signal name
RXD
GND
+3.3V
LAMP_PW
Stand-by mode
+0.2V
GND
+3.3V
+3.3V
Power-ON mode
+0.2V
GND
+3.3V
+1.6V
Related circuits
Serial I/F (Receive)
GND
–
Lamp lighting control
5
TXD
+3.3V
+3.3V
Serial I/F (Send)
POLC
4-2
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
TROUBLESHOOTING
If there is no voltage output at POPW/POLC, check the power block in the procedures specified below.
Is an AC input available at CN2 of the PS PWB?
NO
• SW1 (vacation switch) is OFF, F1 (fuse) blows out, or the AC input terminal or
the CN2 connector has poor connections.
YES
Is there F1 (fuse) OFF in the PS PWB?
YES
• Replace the fuse.
NO
Is there a DC output of about 365V (100V ~ 420V) at CN3 (connected to the BALLAST PWB) of the PS PWB?
NO
• The PS PWB is out of order. The CN3 connector poor connections.
YES
Is there ignition sound to lit up the lamp?
NO
• The BALLAST PWB is out of order.
YES
Any circuit other than the BALLAST PWB is out of order (lamp broken).
4-3
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
TROUBLESHOOTING
3. I/O. sync, and ADC blocks
3-1. No presentation of video images (for Video/CV inputs)
1 Are there digital signals available at G?O[7:0] and G?E[7:0] between Pins 101 and 160 of IC2001?
YES
• Check IC3006 or peripheral circuits. Write in the data again.
NO
2 Is the input signal for S-VIDEO?
YES
• Go to
NO
5.
3 Is a signal available at C2025 (CV signal)? Check the relevant circuit diagram for waveforms.
YES
• Check IC2001 or the peripheral circuits. Write in the data again.
NO
4 Is a signal available at FB9009 (CV signal)?
NO
• Check the signals of external video output equipment.
YES
• Investigate the terminal M9004 or peripheral circuits. Inadequate installation.
5 Are signals available at C2027 (SV–chroma signal) and C2026 (SV–brightness signal)? Check the relevant
circuit diagram for waveforms.
YES
• Check IC2001 or the peripheral circuits. Write in the data again.
NO
6 Are signals available at FB9008 (SV–chroma signal) and FB9007 (SV–brightness signal)?
NO
• Check the signals of external video output equipment.
YES
• Investigate the terminal M9005 or peripheral circuits. Inadequate installation.
4-4
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
TROUBLESHOOTING
3-2. COMPUTER/Component images (for Video/D-Sub inputs)
1 Are there digital signals available at G?O[7:0] and G?E[7:0] between Pins 101 and 160 of IC2001?
YES
• Check IC3006 or the peripheral circuits. Write in the data again.
NO
2 Are signals available at C2019 (Rch), C2020 (Gch), and C2021 (Bch)?
YES
• Check IC3006 or the peripheral circuits. Write in the data again.
NO
3 Are signals available at POIB 5pin (Rch), POIB 3pin (Gch), and POIB 1pin (Bch)?
YES
• Investigate the LPF circuit (Q1007, Q1015, etc.).
NO
4 Are signals available at Pins 1/2/3 of M9001, M9002?
NO
• Investigate the terminal M9001, M9002. Check the signals of external video
output equipment.
YES
• Check the selector circuit (IC9003) and the buffer circuit (Q9010~Q9012).
4-5
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
TROUBLESHOOTING
3-3. No presentation of video images (for Sync/D-Sub inputs)
1 Is there a horizontal sync signal available at R2036?
YES
• Check IC3006 or the peripheral circuits. Data rewriting.
NO
2 Is the horizontal sync signal available at R2015?
YES
• Go to 7.
NO
3 Is the horizontal sync signal available at FB9001/FB9003?
YES
• Check IC9002/IC9006/IC9009 and the peripheral circuits.
NO
4 Is the inut signal for Sync on Green?
NO
• Investigate the terminal M9001/M9002. Check the signals of external video
output equipment.
YES
5 Is the SOG signal available at C2024?
YES
• Investigate IC2001 or the peripheral circuits.
NO
6 Is the SOG signal available at C1097?
NO
• Investigate the terminal M9001/M9002. Check the signals of external video
output equipment.
YES
• Investigate Q1039~Q1044 or the peripheral circuits.
7 Is the vertical sync signal available at R2035?
YES
• Check IC3006 or the peripheral circuits. Write in the data again.
NO
8 Is the vertical sync signal available at R2017?
YES
• Check IC2001 or the peripheral circuits.
NO
9 Is the vertical sync signal available at FB9002/FB9004?
YES
• Check IC9002/Q9004 or the peripheral circuits.
NO
• Investigate the terminal M9001/M9002. Check the signals of external video
output equipment.
4-6
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
TROUBLESHOOTING
3-4. No presentation of MONITOR-OUT (Video system)
1 Are signals available at FB9018 (Rch), FB9019 (Gch), and FB9020 (Bch)?
YES
• Investigate the installation of parts in FB9018, FB9019,, FB9020 and FB9003.
NO
2 Are signals available at C9043 (Rch), C9045 (Gch), and C9047 (Bch)?
YES
• Investigate IC9004 or the peripheral circuits.
NO
3 Are signals available at Pins 1/2/3 of M9001/M9002?
NO
• Investigate the terminal M9001/M9002. Check the signals of external video
output equipment.
YES
• Check IC9003 and its peripheral parts and mounting conditions.
4-7
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
TROUBLESHOOTING
3-5. No generation of sound (audio system)
1 Are audio signals available at Pins 1/2 of POSP?
NO
• Disconnection in speaker cotton-covered wires, cables, or connectors.
YES
2 Are audio signals available at Pin 4 of IC9502?
YES
• Check IC4014 or the peripheral circuits.
NO
3 What input is selected at present?
(VT47)
(VT470/VT570/VT670)
6
COMPUTER → Go to
VIDEO → Go to
S- VIDEO → Go to
7
4
6
COMPUTER1/COMPUTER2 → Go to
VIDEO → Go to
S- VIDEO → Go to
7
5
4 Are audio signals available at Pins 1/30 of IC9501?
NO
• Investigate the terminal M9501. Check the external audio output equipment.
YES
• Investigate IC9501 or the peripheral circuits.
5 Are audio signals available at Pins 2/29 of IC9501?
NO
• Investigate the terminal M9502. Check the external audio output equipment.
YES
• Investigate IC9501 or the peripheral circuits.
6 Are audio signals available at Pins 3/28 of IC9501?
NO
• Investigate the terminal M9004. Check the external audio output equipment.
YES
• Investigate IC9509 or the peripheral circuits.
7 Are audio signals available at Pins 4/27 of IC9501?
NO
YES
4-8
• Investigate the terminal M9503. Check the external audio output equipment.
• Investigate IC9501 or the peripheral circuits.
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
TROUBLESHOOTING
4. LCD driver block
4-1. VT470/VT570/VT575/VT670/VT676 (LCD PANEL 30P)
Are the signal outputs specified below generated from IC6001, IC6002, and IC6003? (See the waveform diagrams.)
Pin Nos.
• IC9001– 26, 28, 30, 32, 34, 36
• IC9002– 26, 28, 30, 32, 34, 36
• IC9003– 26, 28, 30, 32, 34, 36
NO
Rch Video signals (10Vp-p)
Gch Video signals (10Vp-p)
Bch Video signals (10Vp-p)
• IC6001, IC6002, or IC6003 is out of order.
• IC6005 or the peripheral circuits are out of order.
YES
Are the signal inputs specified below entered in POPR, POPG, or POPB? (See the waveform diagrams.)
Pin Nos.
2
3, 4
8
9, 10, 11, 12
13
14, 15
17
27
6, 26
NO
Y shift register start pulse (DY)
Y shift register transfer clock (CLY, CLYB)
Pre-charge pulse (NRG)
Enable pulse (ENB1, ENB2, ENB3, ENB4)
X driver driving direction changeover (DIRX)
X shift register transfer clock (CLX, CLXB)
X shift register start pulse (DX)
Y driver driving direction changeover (DIRY)
Panel’s opposing electrode potential (LCCOM)
• Data are destroyed.
• IC6501/IC6502 or the peripheral circuits are out of order.
• IC6004 or the peripheral circuits are out of order.
YES
• The LCD panel is out of order.
• Cables are disconnected (POPR/POPG/POPB).
• Inadequate installation of connectors (POPR/POPG/POPB).
4-9
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
TROUBLESHOOTING
4-2. VT37/VT47/VT470 (LCD PANEL 24P)
Are the signal outputs specified below generated from IC6001, IC6002, and IC6003? (See the waveform diagrams.)
Pin Nos.
• IC9001– 18, 20, 22, 27, 29, 31
• IC9002– 18, 20, 22, 27, 29, 31
• IC9003– 18, 20, 22, 27, 29, 31
NO
Rch Video signals (10Vp-p)
Gch Video signals (10Vp-p)
Bch Video signals (10Vp-p)
• IC6001, IC6002, or IC6003 is out of order.
• IC6005 or the peripheral circuits are out of order.
YES
Are the signal inputs specified below entered in PORS, POGS, or POBS? (See the waveform diagrams.)
Pin Nos.
1
Uniformity improving signal (PSIG)
9
H shift register driving direction (RGT)
10
Uniformity improving signal (CLR)
13
H shift register driving start pulse (HST)
14, 15
H shift register driving clock (HCK1, HCK2)
18
Gate select pulse enable (ENB)
19
V shift register driving clock (VCK)
20
V shift register driving start pulse (VST)
21
Uniformity improving pulse (PCG)
22
V shift register driving direction (DWN)
24
Panel’s opposing electrode potential (COM)
NO
• Data are destroyed.
• IC6801~IC6805/IC6006 or the peripheral circuits are out of order.
• IC6004/IC6007 or the peripheral circuits are out of order.
YES
• The LCD panel is out of order.
• Cables are disconnected (PORS/POGS/POBS).
• Inadequate installation of connectors (PORS/POGS/POBS).
4-10
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
TROUBLESHOOTING
5. Auto-trapezoid corrector block
This section is related to fault diagnosis for screen displays, in particular, for auto-trapezoid correction.
(The VT37 is not applicable because it has no function of automatic trapezoid compensation.)
[Symptom] As illustrated below, the keystone correction results in MAX fixing conditions.
or
[Confirmation]
* Confirmation should be done in the state that the PWB is placed horizontally.
1 In the state that the PWB is placed horizontally, is a voltage output of about 1.25V available at Pin 5 of
IC3002?
NO
• IC3002 or the peripheral circuits are out of order.
YES
2 Is the setting normal for Menu, Image, AutoKeystone, Keystone, and KeystoneSave?
NO
• Re-adjustment of the horizontality
* Adjustment of the horizontality:
This adjustment is carried out each time output setting is made for the horizontal condition of auto-trapezoid correction control and detection IC (IC3002).
YES
Another setting
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
4-11
http://getMANUAL.com
TROUBLESHOOTING
Picture quality judgment standard
1. Convergence
Check the convergence by means of a cross hatch signal.
(1) Pixel displacement
The amount of pixel displacement of red and blue against green throughout the entire screen area shall be
as specified below.
1 pixel or less
In other words, there shall be no separation of all pixels of red, green, and blue throughout the entire screen
area.
If the above-mentioned pixel displacement is found to be defective, then,
1 Replace the OPT BASE ASSY, provided that an irregular color compensator jig is available.
After replacement, make adjustments by means of the irregular color compensator and the PC control
software.
2 Replace the ENGINE SASSY (SERVICE), if the irregular color compensator jig is not available.
After replacement, write the data of the floppy disc that is attached to the ENGINE SASSY (SERVICE).
2. Foreign substances (dust, flaws), pixel defects (bright dots and dark dots)
Enter the signal inputs of all black, all white, all red, all green, and all blue.
(1) Foreign substances (dust, flaws)
Foreign substances shall be considered of no problem if the pixels are correctly focused but such foreign
substances cannot be seen at a distance of 2 meters from the screen. They shall be counted as the dark
dots if they can be perceived in the unit of pixels. The foreign substances, which can be seen vaguely (not
in the unit of pixels) but cannot be removed, shall be identified in accordance with the standard (size) below
in the state that they are correctly focused.
Standard: Green : For 3 to less than 6 pixels: OK up to 1 position, NG for 6 pixels or more
Red
: For 3 to less than 8 pixels: OK up to 1 position, NG for 8 pixels or more
Blue : For 3 to less than 10 pixels: OK up to 1 position, NG for 10 pixels or more
(No problem in case of less than 3 pixels in each color; NG in case of 3 pixels or more in 2 positions)
In the case of NG for above due to foreign substances (dust), such foreign substances (dust) shall be
removed.
(2) Bright dots in high brightness
Bright dots in high brightness shall be defined as a defect that can be seen clearly at a distance of 2 meters
when a 4% ND filter is placed between the projector lens and the screen.
Standard: Red
: 2 dots or less
Green : 1 dots or less
Blue : 5 dots or less
(3) Bright dots in low brightness
Bright dots in low brightness shall be defined as a defect that can be seen clearly at a distance of 2 meters
when a 12.5% ND filter is placed between the projector lens and the screen. (OK if they cannot be seen
clearly)
Standard: Red
: 6 dots or less
Green : 4 dots or less
Blue : No problem
(4) Dark dots
6 dots or less for red, green, and blue, respectively.
In the case of NG for (2) bright dots in high brightness, (3) bright dots in low brightness, and (4) dark dots,
replace the OPT BASE ASSY or the ENGINE SASSY.
4-12
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS
PC Control Software
- Table of Contents 1. Outline software descriptions
2. Equipment and operating environment
3. Auto-adjust software installation procedures for Sub-Brightness and SubContrast
3-1. Installation
3-2. Personal computer setting
For Win98 / ME
For Win2000
For WinXP
4. Setting items for DATA writing
5. Repair and adjustment procedures
5-1. Replacement of the MAIN SASSY
5-2. Replacement of the LCD panel (Replacement of the OPT BASE ASSY)
6. Various functional descriptions
6-1. Setting
6-2. DATA
6-3. ADJ
6-3-1. Sub B/C
6-3-2. Flicker
6-3-3. Panel
6-3-4. Usage Time
6-4. Auto-adjust position change
7. Error messages
7-1. Errors appearing when the servicing adjustment software is used
7-2. Errors appearing when the auto-adjust software for Sub-Brightness and Sub-Contrast is used
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
5-1
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS
1. Outline software descriptions
This is the PC control software for servicing adjustments to be conducted during the replacement of the MAIN
SASSY, OPT BASE SASSY or the (LCD panel) for the LCD projector, the VT70 Series.
This software makes it possible to perform the following adjustments:
• Adjustment of Sub-Brightness and Sub-Contrast (Auto or Manual)
• Adjustment of Flicker
• Adjustment of Panel
• Modification of usage time for the Usage Time (Lamp, Filter, Panel, and Projector)
• READ/WRITE of various PJ DATA
[ADJ Data (Sub-Brightness/Sub-Contrast, Flicker, Panel), V-T data, Uniformity Data, Color Correction
Data, various usage time DATA (Lamp, Filter, Panel, Projector), All DATA (All factory ADJ data)]
* In order to accomplish the “automatic adjustment of Sub-Brightness/Sub-Contrast,” it is necessary to install
an appropriate auto-adjust software.
(Refer to 3. Installation Procedures for Sub-Brightness/Sub-Contrast Auto-Adjust Software.)
* In the VT70 System, FlashUPGrader.exe is used when writing the result of each adjustment (or each DATA
item) in the PJ.
(Refer to 4. Setting Procedures for DATA Writing, and set up FlashUPGrader.exe in the designated folder.)
* The servicing ADJ software should be closed each time one unit has been adjusted. To make adjustments for
the next unit, the software should be started from the beginning. If the software is not closed, the previous
adjusting data may remain.
2. Equipment to be used and environment
& lt; Equipment to be used & gt;
• Service ADJ software (Ser_VT70Series_ver***.exe ***: Version title)
* The auto-adjust software for Sub-Brightness/Sub-Contrast can be started from this Service ADJ software.
Once it is installed, it is unnecessary to start up the auto-adjust software for Sub-Brightness/Sub-Contrast.
* It is necessary to start up this Service ADJ software when writing the result of each adjustment (or each data
item) in the PJ. If operation is executed according to “4. Setting Procedures for Data Writing,” it is unnecessary
to start up FlashUPGrader.exe.
• Personal computer [Enabled to actuate WindowsXP/2000/98/Me or Windows3.1, and the serial port (any one
of COM1 – COM5) is available and of the D-SUB 9-pin.]
• RGB signal generator (Auto-adjustment type: Enabled to generate an output of a black window against allwhite background, which is a signal with the same resolution as that of the panel)
* In addition to the RGB signal generator, output can also be generated from the ANALOG RGB output circuit.
• Video signal generator [Auto-adjustment type: Enabled to generate an output of NTSC split color bars (7
colors)]
• Component signal generator [Auto-adjustment type: Enabled to generate an output of 15kHz Component
Video 60Hz split color bars (7 colors)]
• Serial cable (Accessory for the PJ main unit)
& lt; Method of connection & gt;
• Connect the PC CONTROL terminal (Mini DIN-8pin) of the PJ with either serial port of COM1 – COM5 (D-SUB
9pin) of the personal computer through a serial cable (accessory for the PJ main unit).
• During the adjustment of RGB Sub-Brightness / Sub-Contrast, connect the RGB terminal of the PJ with an
ANALOG RGB output of the personal computer or an RGB signal generator to be used for adjusting signal
generation.
• During the adjustment of Component Sub-Brightness / Sub-Contrast, connect the RGB terminal of the PJ
with a Component signal generator to be used for adjusting signal generation.
• During the adjustment of Video Sub-Brightness / Sub-Contrast, connect the VIDEO terminal with a Video
signal generator to be used for adjusting signal generation.
5-2
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS
& lt; Personal computer setting intended to obtain the adjusting pattern screen outputs & gt;
• Personal computer’s resolution, frequency, and the No. of colors
Personal computer's resolution: Make settings at panel's resolution of the projector.
Frequency
: Make settings at 60Hz.
No. of colors : Make settings at high color (16 bits).
• Method of adjusting pattern screen display
With the [ON] button located in the test pattern box, the adjusting pattern screen can be displayed on the
PC screen.
In this case, however, only the test patterns in the [Sub-B/C] tab can be displayed. All other adjusting
patterns are the internally available test patterns.
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
5-3
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS
3. Auto-adjust software installation procedures for Sub-Brightness and SubContrast
* When the use of this software is intended, it is necessary to change the PC environment.
(Refer to 3-2 PC setting.)
3-1. Installation
1 Start DGCS1000NS_install.exe.
2 Click [OK] when the screen shown below is displayed.
5-4
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS
3 Click the icon below when the screen shown below is displayed.
* The directory setting of “C : ¥DGCS 1000N” should not be modified.
4 When the screen shown below is displayed, select the program group and click [Continue].
(If there is no particular designation, immediately press the [Continue] button.)
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
5-5
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS
5 Installation is complete when the screen below of “DGCS 1000 System Setup was completed successfully” is displayed. Click the [OK] button.
Confirm that “C : ¥DGCS 1000N” has been established in the installed personal computer.
5-6
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS
6 Click the [START] button and select [Designate the File Name and Execute (R)]. Enter “C:¥DGCS
1000N¥DGCS 1000NS.exe” /E and press [OK] to start up “DGCS1000N.exe”.
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
5-7
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS
7 Then the error shown below is indicated. At that time, clickthe [OK] “DGCS1000NS.exe” /E once to
complete it.
5-8
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS
8 Enter the files below “C:¥DGCS 1000N¥Setup Data” as illustrated below. These files are located
beneath “service install¥setup data file” of the furnished CD-ROM.
* SetUp Data File
“VT47_470_RGB_SG.dat”
“VT47_470_RGB_PCOUT.dat”
“VT47_470_COMP.dat”
“VT47_470_VIDEO.dat”
“VT570_670_RGB_SG.dat”
“VT570_670_RGB_PCOUT.dat”
“VT570_670_COMP.dat”
“VT570_670_VIDEO.dat”
“Window1.exe”
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
5-9
http://getMANUAL.com
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS
9 Repeat the operation of 6 again and start [DGCS1000NS_install.exe].
8
When starting is successful, follow the steps shown below in order to add the “*.dat” file to Model_list.
This file has already been entered in “C:\DGCS 1000N\ Setup Data” as per above.
5-10
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS
8
*
When the screen shown below is obtained, the files are indicated, which has been added to the rightside window (Data File List (.dat)) as per . Choose any one out of these files and click “Add Item to
Model List” for the selected file.
The selected file moves from the right side window to the left side one. Repeat this action until the right
side files disappear.
*
Click “SAVE Model List” when the right side files disappear.
At the above-mentioned stage, the installation is over.
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
5-11
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS
*
1 5
When “DGCS1000NS.exe” is already installed, take actions of
to
in 3-1 Installation for the purpose of
version upgrading. (It is unnecessary to uninstall “DGCS1000NS.exe”.)
Since then, add the file below the distributed “service install\ SetUp Data” to the area located beneath
“C:\DGCS 1000N \ Setup Data” and carry out the operation of . At that time, “windows1.exe” can be
substituted.
9
5-12
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS
3-2. Personal computer setting
Make the following setting for the installed personal computer:
For Win98 / ME
1 Open [System] of the [Control Panel]. Then, open [Device Manager] of [System’s Property], designate
[Communication Port (COM1)] located beneath [Port (COM & LPT)], and click [Property].
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
5-13
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS
2 Open [Communication Port (COM1) Property] and click [Detailed Setting] of [Port Setting].
3 Make the receive buffer setting of [Detailed Setting of Port] to the maximum level (MAX).
At the above-mentioned stage, the personal computer setting is over.
5-14
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS
For Win2000
1 Open [System] of the [Control Panel]. Then, open [Device Manager] located below [Hardware] of
[System’s Property].
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
5-15
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS
2 Open [Communication Port (COM1)] that is located beneath [Port (COM & LPT) of [Device Manager].
3 Then, click [Detail (A)] of [Port Setting] of [Communication Port (COM1) Property].
5-16
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS
4 Make the receive buffer setting of [Detailed Setting of COM1] to the maximum level (MAX).
At the above-mentioned stage, the personal computer setting is over.
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
5-17
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS
For WinXP
1 Open [Printer and other Hardware] of the [Control Panel].
2 Open [System] shown below.
5-18
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS
3 Open [Device Manager] located beneath [Hardware] of [System’s Property].
4 Then, open [Communication Port (COM1)] that is located beneath [Port (COM & LPT) of [Device Manager].
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
5-19
http://getMANUAL.com
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS
5 Then, click [Detailed Setting (A)] located below [Port Setting] of [Communication Port (COM1) Property].
6 Make the receive buffer setting of [Detailed Setting of COM1] to the maximum level (MAX).
At the above-mentioned stage, the personal computer setting is over.
5-20
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS
4. Setting items for data writing
In the VT70 System, FlashUPGrader.exe is used when writing the result of each adjustment (or each DATA
item) in the PJ. At that time, the following setting is required:
1 Establish a folder of “C:¥PW FlashWrite” beneath Drive C.
2 Put the file shown below in the folder that has been established as per 1 above. This file is located beneath
the " \service_install\FlashUPGrader " of the furnished CD-ROM.
[FlashUPGrader]
“ FlashUPGrader.exe ”
“ Flasher VT70.Hex ”
“ VT70 series.inf ”
At this stage, all the setting has been completed.
* In the case of data rewriting, the power supply should be put in the state of standby.
5. Repair and adjustment procedures
5-1. Replacement of the MAIN SASSY
• ADJ Data, VT Data, Uniformity Data, Color Correction Data, and Usage Time Data copying
• Adjustment of Sub-Brightness/Sub-Contrast
• Horizontal adjustments
are carried out.
Caution: A caution needed when the LCD panel (FFC cable) is removed from the MAIN SASSY. (Applicable to the
VT575, VT670 series)
To examine whether the fault is located in the LCD panel (OPT BASE SASSY) or in the MAIN SASSY, the
FFC cable of the LCD panel may be disconnected from the MAIN SASSY. In such a case, the LCD panel
must be discharged, without fail.
If no discharge action is taken, the LCD panel may be destroyed and fail to be used again, due to the
occurrence of burning and others.
• Method of discharging:
As illustrated below, the LCD panel can be discharged by short-circuiting the terminals with a short clip
for more than 60 seconds, shortly after the FFC cable of the LCD panel has been disconnected (within
5 seconds). The electric charges in the LCD panel can be discharged by this short-circuiting continued
for more than 60 seconds.
Short clip (Part No. : 9N999217)
Short-circuit the terminals with a short
clip (for more than 60 seconds)
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
5-21
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS
& lt; ADJ Data, VT Data, Uniformity Data, Color Correction Data, and Usage Time Data copying & gt;
With the PJ power supply made to assume the standby mode, select the [Data] tab for the service software.
Check “ADJ ALL” or “Usage Time” in the Data Make Box and click the
After the replacement of the board, press the
Write
Make
button to establish data.
button to Write the produced Data.
* Only in the case of writing the Usage Time Data, the power supply has to be turned on (for one minute) after
the completion of data writing. After data writing with FlashUPGrader.exe, turn on the power supply. After the
lapse of one minute after the power supply has been started, the power supply should be turned off again. In
the case of the writing of lamp data only, FlashUPGrader.exe is not started.
* When data rewriting is carried out at the time of board replacement, model setup is also performed at the
same time. The extracted data can be used only in the same set.
& lt; Adjustment of sub-brightness and sub-contrast & gt;
Assume the Power ON state for the PJ power supply.
Select the [Sub-B/C] tab for servicing software.
According to the steps (1) to (5) shown below, make adjustments of RGB / Component / Video for Flash Write.
(1) Adjustment of RGB Sub-Brightness / Sub-Contrast
Select [RGB] in the Adjust Signal Box.
Make adjustments by either method of (a) or (b) below.
(a) Automatic adjustment
As an adjusting signal, enter an input of Window (Center: White) with the use of an RGB signal generator. Otherwise, enter an RGB output of the personal computer. (When the PC output is used in the autoadjustment mode, the screen is automatically changed over to the Window screen.)
When a signal generator is used, give a check to [SG]. If a personal computer output is used, give a
check to [PC-OUT]. Automatic adjustment is started when the [Auto] button is clicked in the Auto ADJ
Box.
After the completion of automatic adjustment, confirm that there is no coloring of the gray scale.
If any coloring is perceived, make fine adjustments of (b) by manual adjustment.
(b) Manual adjustment
If the automatic adjustment is impossible, manual adjustments should be carried out.
As an adjusting signal, enter an input of gray scale with the use of an RGB signal generator. Otherwise,
enter an RGB output of the personal computer and display a gray scale with the use of the [Scale] button
in the Test Pattern Box.
Use a scroll bar to adjust Sub-Brightness / Sub-Contrast, making sure not to cause black and white
chroma and also coloring in the gray scale.
After the adjustment, click the
Save
button to store the adjusting data.
* Confirm that a check mark is given to [RGB] in the Adjust Signal Box and the check box of Sub B/C in the
ADJ Check Box when the [Save] button is clicked.
When the [Reset] button is clicked, the Default value is recovered.
* Normal adjustments cannot be accomplished if the resolution of the adjusting signal and the pattern are
improper.
(2) Adjustment of Sub-Brightness/Sub-Contrast of Component
Select [Component] in the Adjust Signal Box.
Make adjustments by either method of (a) or (b) below.
(a) Auto adjustment
As an adjusting signal, enter a split color bar (7 colors) with the use of a Component (DVD) signal
generator.
Automatic adjustment is started when the [Auto] button is clicked in the Auto ADJ Box.
After the completion of automatic adjustment, use the gray scale to confirm the freedom from coloring.
If there is any coloring, make fine adjustments manually as per (b).
(b) Manual adjustment
If it is impossible to carry out automatic adjustments, manual adjustments have to be tried. As a signal for
adjustments, enter the inputs of a gray scale and a split color bar with the use of a Component signal
generator.
To prevent the gray scale from black and highlight chroma and/or coloring, adjust Sub-Brightness and
Sub-Contrast with a color bar and a scroll bar until correct color can be secured.
5-22
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS
After the adjustment, click the
Save
button to store the adjusting data.
* Confirm that a check mark is given to [COMP] in the Adjust Signal Box and the check box of Sub B/C in
the ADJ Check Box when the [Save] button is clicked.
When the [Reset] button is clicked, the Default value is recovered.
* Normal adjustments cannot be accomplished if the resolution of the adjusting signal and the pattern are
improper.
(3) Adjustment of Video Sub-Contrast
Select [Video] in the Adjust Signal Box.
Make adjustments by either method of (a) or (b) below.
(a) Auto adjustment
As an adjusting signal, enter an input of split color bar (7 colors) with the use of a Video signal generator.
When the [Auto] button is clicked in the Adjust Signal Box, automatic adjustment is started.
(b) Manual adjustment
If the automatic adjustment is impossible, manual adjustments should be carried out.
As an adjusting signal, enter an input of gray scale with the use of a Video signal generator.
Use a scroll bar to adjust Sub-Brightness of G (Y), making sure not to cause white chroma in the gray
scale.
After the adjustment, click the Save
button to store the adjusting data.
* Confirm that a check mark is given to [VIDEO] in the Adjust Signal Box and the check box of Sub B/C in
the ADJ Check Box when the [Save] button is clicked.
When the [Reset] button is clicked, the Default value is recovered.
* Normal adjustments cannot be accomplished if the resolution of the adjusting signal and the pattern are
improper.
(4) Write the result of Sub-Brightness/Sub-Contrast adjustment in the flash memory.
After the completion of adjustments, click the
Flash Write
button to write the adjusting data.
Then the adjusting data are read out and FlashUPGrader is started for data writing.
& lt; Horizontal adjustment & gt;
This adjustment should be carried out only for the model that is provided with an auto keystone function.
Prior to this adjustment, the following items should be checked:
• The horizontal accuracy for the adjusting set installation stand is kept within ±0.25 degrees.
• The ambient temperature around the adjusting set installation stand is kept stable within the range of 22 ~
28°C.
• The tilt foot of the PJ is set at the minimum.
1
2
(1) Adjustments
Let the PJ power supply stay in the Power ON state and maintain five minutes of ageing.
Move to the Service Mode.
& lt; Method of moving to the Service Mode & gt;
Use a remote control.
Press the keys in the order of [HELP] → [ENTER] → [HELP] → [ENTER] → [HELP] → & gt; [ENTER] →
[MENU].
([MENU] should be kept pressed for more than 3 seconds in the state that the menu screen is displayed.)
When [Enter Pass code] is displayed, enter key inputs of [UP] → [RIGHT] → [LEFT] → [RIGHT] →
[RIGHT] → [RIGHT] → [UP] → [UP] and press the [ENTER] key.
When [Factory] is indicated on the MENU bar, movement to the Factory Mode has been duly finished.
3 Select Service / Check Start and click the [Enter] key.
* A sandglass is displayed for confirmation that the “Change Offset” data are updated.
4 Select Service / Change Offset and click the [Enter] key.
* Confirm that the Offset data are updated and the Change Offset data are turned to 0.
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
5-23
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS
5-2. Replacement of the LCD panel
• Adjustment of Flicker
• Adjustment of Panel
* Flicker adjustments should be done, without fail. Panel adjustments may be done, as required, according
to the conditions in the set. (The latter shall be done particularly in the worst case.)
* When the LCD panel 24P is used for the model, there are some restrictions for panel adjustments. Only
the [LG Param] adjustment is possible.
& lt; Adjustment of Flicker & gt;
Select the [Flicker] tab located below the [ADJ] tab of the servicing software.
→ Click the [GET] button to call up the present setting data.
→ Adjust Floor / Ceiling, respectively.
(1) Adjustment of Floor
→ Check [Floor].
• Adjustment of Flicker-RED
Click the [TEST-R] button in the Test Pattern Box in order to display the internal horizontal line signal. Make
adjustments with the scroll bar until Flicker in the center comes to minimum.
• Adjustment of Flicker-GREEN
Click the [TEST-G] button in the Test Pattern Box in order to display the internal horizontal line signal. Make
adjustments with the scroll bar until Flicker in the center comes to minimum.
• Adjustment of Flicker-BLUE
Click the [TEST-B] button in the Test Pattern Box in order to display the internal horizontal line signal. Make
adjustments with the scroll bar until Flicker in the center comes to minimum.
(2) Adjustment of Ceiling
→ Check [Ceiling].
• Adjustment of Flicker-RED
Click the [TEST-R] button in the Test Pattern Box in order to display the internal horizontal line signal. Make
adjustments with the scroll bar until Flicker in the center comes to minimum.
• Adjustment of Flicker-GREEN
Click the [TEST-G] button in the Test Pattern Box in order to display the internal horizontal line signal. Make
adjustments with the scroll bar until Flicker in the center comes to minimum.
• Adjustment of Flicker-BLUE
Click the [TEST-B] button in the Test Pattern Box in order to display the internal horizontal line signal. Make
adjustments with the scroll bar until Flicker in the center comes to minimum.
→ When adjustments have been finished for both (1) and (2) above, click the Save
button in the Data
Box.
* After the completion of the above adjustment, confirm that a check mark is given to the check box of Flicker
in the ADJcheck Box and in the ADJcheck Box.
* Press [Reset] if it is necessary to recover the original setting during adjustment.
* Click the [CLS] button when deleting the Test Pattern.
5-24
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS
& lt; Adjustment of Panel & gt;
This adjustment is not always needed. If there is too much disorder in ghost and vertical lines, make the following adjustments:
(1) In the case of too much ghost
→ Click the [GET] button and call up the present setup data.
→ Click [Ghost] and display a test pattern for ghost adjustment.
→ Adjust [LG Param] and attain a correct setup until a normal screen is displayed and ghost disappears.
(If ghost looks dark, move the bar to the right. If it looks white, move the bar to the left.)
(2) In the case of too many vertical lines
→ Click the [GET] button and call up the present setup data.
→ Click [V-Scale] and display a test pattern for vertical line adjustment.
→ Adjust [Enable] and [F-Tune], and attain a correct setup until a normal screen is displayed and vertical
lines disappear.
After adjustments, click [Ghost] to display a test pattern for ghost adjustment. Confirm that no ghost is
discernible. If ghost is still seen, make ghost adjustments as per (1) above.
→ After the completion of Ghost / vertical line adjustments, click the
Save
button.
After the completion of adjustments, confirm that a check is given to the check box of the panel in the
ADJ Check BOX.
* Press [Reset] when recovering the previous setting in the middle of adjustment.
* Click the [CLS] button when deleting the test pattern.
After the completion of adjustments, click the
Flash Write
button to write the ADJ data in.
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
5-25
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS
6.Various functional descriptions
6-1. Setting
& lt; Model Check & gt;
When the [Model Check] button is clicked, [Model Name] and [Resolution] are displayed in the lower
status bar area.
& lt; Input Select & gt;
Used for input changeover.
& lt; Test Pattern & gt;
Used for the display of various built-in Test Patterns.
[Flicker]
: Horizontal line signal for Flicker adjustment
[H-Scale]
: 16-gradation horizontal gray scale
[V-Scale]
: 16-gradation vertical gray scale
[Ghost]
: Test pattern for Ghost adjustment
[Cross]
: Crosshatch
[Color]
: Color bar
[100% Raster] : All-white Raster
[50% Raster] : 50% brightness Raster
[25% Raster] : 25% brightness Raster
[0% Raster] : All-black Raster
[CLS]
: Test Pattern clear
[R]/[G]/[B]
: The Test Pattern comes in the color that is indicated by a check mark.
5-26
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS
& lt; COM & gt;
Used for the selection of PC Com Port and Baud Rate.
Communication will fail to start unless the baud rate coincides with the PJ setting.
The default setting value of the PJ is 19200 bps.
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
5-27
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS
6-2. DATA
& lt; Data Make & gt;
A check mark is attached to the data that are going to be read out in the Data-Make Box.
The data selected here are made when the
Make (File)
button is clicked.
& lt; Data Write & gt;
Used to write the file established as per Data Make Data.
Click the Write (File- & gt; PJ)
button and select the writing Hex File data.
Then, the Flash Data Upgrade tool (FlashUpgrade.exe) is started and the selected Hex File data are
written in the flash ROM of the PJ.
* Only for LAMP Data Writing, it is necessary to turn ON the power supply once after the completion of
Data writing.
After data writing, turn the power supply ON. After the lapse of one minute after the power supply has
been started, turn the power supply OFF again.
After the lapse of one minute after starting up the power supply, turn OFF the power supply again.
* According to the status of error, Data Make may be impossible to carry out.
* The hex files, which can be written with this tool, are only the ones read with & lt; Data Make & gt; .
5-28
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS
6-3. ADJ
& lt; ADJcheck & gt;
This provides the respective adjusting tabs. A check mark is given only to the item where the data have
been saved.
When an action of [Flash Write] is taken, only the items with the check marks are updated.
* The check mark disappears when the RESET button is pressed.
* Adjustment of Usage Time does not require the Flash Write button.
& lt; Flash Write & gt;
This tool is used to write adjusted data in the flash memory.
Only the items that are checked in the ADJ Heck Box can be updated.
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
5-29
http://getMANUAL.com
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS
6-3-1. Sub-B/C
& lt; TEST & gt;
The test patterns of Window (black window, white background) and Scale (16-gradation gray scale) are
output to the personal computer.
Used for the automatic adjustment of Sub B/C with the use of a personal computer.
& lt; DATA & gt;
Save : Data are saved after the completion of adjustments.
Reset : Data are restored to those which have been available at the time of power supply startup.
& lt; Adjust Signal & gt;
The signal for adjustment is specified.
& lt; Manual ADJ & gt;
Used for manual adjustment of Sub-Brightness / Sub-Contrast.
The data are respectively arranged for the four types of signals, RGB / Component (DVD) / Component
(HDTV) / Video. When the signal data selected in the Auto ADJ Box are acquired, respective displays of
R(Cr) / G(Y) / B(Cb) are presented beside the scroll bar on the screen.
The data acquired at first (at the time of ADJ software start) are stored as initial values and indicated on
the left side of the arrow. The present values are displayed on the right side of the arrow.
However, when Data Write is performed with [Data], the data written at that time are regarded as the initial
values.
5-30
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS
& lt; Auto ADJ & gt;
Used for automatic adjustments.
During the “SG” check, the automatic adjustment by external signals is carried out. During the “PC-OUT”
check, the automatic adjustment with the use of a PC output is carried out.
* “PC-OUT” is available only for RGB signal adjustments.
Level Read / Position:
Used when changing the level readout position with the [AUTO] button during the automatic adjustment.
In the phase of ADJ software start, setting has been made according to the specified pattern. Therefore,
no particular changes are needed. When a change is needed, refer to [6-4, Auto ADJ Position Change].
* The data adjusted with a scroll bar are temporary. Without any measures taken, the data are not
retained in the PJ.
Even when the data are saved in a file by [SAVE], this action corresponds to a fact that the data are just
saved in a file and not written in the flash ROM. Therefore, the data are not retained in the PJ.
Select the file that has been saved through execution of [Flash Write] and write the data in the Flash
ROM.
* Automatic adjustments are carried out based on a definite spot on the screen. Therefore, if the pattern,
resolution, etc., are not suitable, these adjustments are impossible to carry out.
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
5-31
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS
6-3-2. Flicker
& lt; TEST & gt;
This tool is used for the display of various built-in test patterns for flicker adjustment.
[TEST-R] : The horizontal line signal of R is displayed.
[TEST-G] : The horizontal line signal of G is displayed.
[TEST-B] : The horizontal line signal of B is displayed.
[CLS]
: Test patterns are cleared.
& lt; Data & gt;
Get
: The present set data are called up.
Save
: The DATA after adjustment are saved.
Reset
: Data are restored to those which have been available at the time of power supply startup.
* When the [Get] button is clicked after the data have been saved, the initial data (data at the
time of power supply startup) are updated.
& lt; Floor / Ceiling & gt;
The method of Floor / Ceiling projection is changed.
During Floor selection, the scroll bar for Ceiling becomes available for the selection of Floor / Ceiling.
* The data processed for adjustments with a scroll bar are the temporary ones, and they are not held in
the PJ. Even when the data are saved in a file by [SAVE], they are simply saved in the file and not
written in the Flash ROM. Therefore, they are not held in the PJ. Execute [Flash Write] to select the
saving file and write the data in the Flash ROM.
5-32
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS
6-3-3. Panel
& lt; TEST & gt;
Ghost
V-Scale
50% Raster
25% Raster
: Test pattern for ghost check
: Test pattern for vertical line check
: Test pattern for vertical line check
: Test pattern for vertical line check
& lt; DATA & gt;
GET
: Used to call up the present setup data
SAVE
: Used to store the data after adjustments
RESET : Used to recover the data at the time of power start
* When the data are saved and the [GET] button is clicked, the initial data (the data at the time of
power start) are updated.
& lt; Panel Correction & gt;
Used when too much ghost is seen.
& lt; Panel Timing & gt;
Used when too many vertical lines are seen.
* For the model where the LCD panel 24P is used, this adjustment is not required.
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
5-33
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS
6-3-4. Usage Time
& lt; DATA & gt;
GET
: Used to call up the present setup data
SET
: Used to store the ADJ data
RESET : Used to recover the data at the time of power start
* When the data are saved and the [GET] button is clicked, the initial data (the data at the time of
power start) are updated.
& lt; Change time (Lamp Usage Time) & gt;
Used to change the Lamp Usage Time.
According to the Lamp Usage Time, the possible range in percentage indication is defined.
Use a scroll bar and set up a proper time or percentage.
Adjusting range : 0 hour ~ 3000 hours (0% ~ 100%)
& lt; Change time (Filter Usage Time & gt;
Used to change the Filter Usage Time.
Adjusting range : 0 hour ~ 3200 hours (Editor input: 0 hour ~ 596523 hours)
& lt; Change time (Panel Usage Time & gt;
Used to change the Panel Usage Time.
Adjusting range : 0 hour ~ 3200 hours (Editor input: 0 hour ~ 596523 hours)
5-34
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS
& lt; Change time (Projector Usage Time & gt;
Used to change the Projector Usage Time.
Adjusting range : 0 hour ~ 3200 hours (Editor input: 0 hour ~ 596523 hours)
* For Usage Time adjustment, let the PJ power supply stay in the STANDBY state, without fail.
* After the completion of Usage Time adjustment, it is unnecessary to use the Flash Write button.
* If the Usage Time has been changed with the [SET] button, turn the power supply OFF after the lapse
of more than one minute after the power supply has been started.
* This adjustment is not required if the [Data] tab is used for Read / Write of the Usage Time Data at the
time of MAIN PWB replacement.
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
5-35
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS
6-4. Auto-adjust position change
When auto adjustment is intended for [Sub-B/C] by means of the [Auto] button, such an adjustment can
be carried out by reading out the level data of the predetermined position in the screen.
Since this read-out position can differ according to the adjusting mode and color, all patterns, resolution,
and other factors are specified and set in the relevant positions in advance. Therefore, no particular
modification is required in general operation.
Automatic adjustment is impossible, however, where a similar pattern is allocated in a slightly different
position.
In such a case, setting can be carried out according to the descriptions below.
Adjustments become impossible if a wrong position is set up.
There are upper limits for the readout position. Since a message is displayed, make settings within the
indicated possible range.
& lt; Read & gt;
This function is used to look for a position being modified.
Enter a position input in the [H], [V] editor.
The numeral to be entered is decimal. The guidelines are the number of dots for [H] and the number of
lines for [V] (half in case of interlace).
When the [Read] button is clicked, the signal level of the specified position is displayed for R/G/B, respectively.
This value is displayed within the range of 0 (black) - 255 (white).
Based on this figure, confirm where the specified position is located on the screen and look for the
position to be used for adjustment.
5-36
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS
& lt; Position & gt;
This function is used to set up the position to be used for automatic adjustment.
When the [Position] button is clicked, the position setting screen is open.
Each editor is displayed with the present set value.
At the time of ADJ software starting, the position is set up according to the specified pattern.
Enter the changing position input, confirmed by & lt; Read & gt; , in the editor.
Fix the setting with the [SET] button.
Finish the position setting screen with the [Exit] button.
Each item setting:
RGB_SG White H/V
: 100% white when a signal generator is used (White position of the Window
screen)
RGB_SG Black H/V
: 0% black when a signal generator is used (Black position of the Window
screen)
RGB_PCOUT White H/V : 100% white when a PC output is used (White position of the Window screen)
RGB_PCOUT Black H/V : 0% black when a PC output is used (Black position of the Window screen)
Component White Y H/V : 100% white (White position below the center of the split color bar)
Component White Cb H/V : 75% blue (Blue bar position of the split color bar)
Component Red Cr H/V : 75% red (Red bar position of the split color bar)
Component Black H/V
: 0% black (Black position at bottom right of the split color bar)
Component Target H/V
: 75% white (White bar position of the split color bar)
Video White YH/V
: 100% white (White position in bottom center of the split color bar)
DVD White YH/V
: 100% white (White position in bottom center of the split color bar)
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
5-37
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS
7. Error messages
7-1. Errors anticipated when this service ADJ software is used.
“ACK Error !”, “Wrong ACK Length !”
This is a communication error in conjunction with the PJ.
Check the connections and confirm whether the main power supply of the PJ is turned ON.
“ACK Error (Comm Close Error) !”
This is a failure in opening the serial port.
Confirm if there is any application that occupies the serial port.
“Wrong ACK Length (Comm Close Error) !”
This is a failure in closing the serial port.
Confirm if there is any application that occupies the serial port.
“Model Error”
This is a set discrimination error for the PJ. Confirm that the connected set belongs to any one of the
VT465/VT660K/VT460GK/VT660GK.
5-38
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS
7-2. Errors appearing during the automatic adjustment of Sub-Brightness / Sub-Contrast.
• Errors appearing when no auto-ADJ software is installed.
→ Install the software according to “3. Auto-adjust software installation procedures for SubBrightness and Sub-Contrast.”
• Errors appearing when the set data are insufficient.
→ Add the setup data according to “3. Auto-adjust software installation procedures for SubBrightness and Sub-Contrast.”
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
5-39
http://getMANUAL.com
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS
• Errors appearing when the input signals and position setting are wrong.
→ Check the input signals and position setting, referring to “5. Repair and adjustment procedures” and “6-4. Auto-adjust position change.”
(No checking is required if position setting is not carried out.)
• When the Auto-Adjust Software is closed on the way:
If the error shown above appears, the Auto-Adjust Software is closed on the way. In such a case, make the
treatments shown below and close the Auto-Adjust Software. Since then, start the auto-adjustments again.
* Do not click any button other than the designated button.
• ADJ screen: Press the [Return (R)] button.
5-40
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS
• Setting screen: Press the [Return (R)] button.
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
5-41
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS
• Main screen: Press the [End (E)] button and then the [OK] button to close the software.
*
→
•
5-42
A phenomenon shown below may occur during the RGB adjustment in the “PC-OUT” mode. In such a case,
press the [ENTER] button of the PC to withdraw from the error state. Execute the above-mentioned “AutoAdjust Software closed on the way” and then close the Auto-Adjust Software. Since then, make adjustments again.
This phenomenon occurs if there is any error in the Auto-Adjust Software in the middle of adjustment for a
certain reason.
If the screen shown below does not disappear even though the ENTER button is pressed, turn off the power
supply of the PJ once and try to make adjustments again.
A white box appears at bottom right or in the center right against the black background of the PJ screen
(RGB1), as illustrated.
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS
Optical Adjustments
1. Adjustment of the optical axis (Shadow adjustment)
1-1. Jigs and tools used
The jigs and tools specified below are needed for this adjustment.
& lt; & lt; Tools to be used & gt; & gt;
• Phillips screwdriver for FL, RL2, M1 fixing: Tip size No. 1
& lt; & lt; Jigs to be used & gt; & gt;
• Dummy load (Part No.: 9N999220, including the connector PWB and the extension connector for the
extension shown below)
• SPACER
Extension connector
PWB
15P, 5P, 4P, 3P
Dummy load PWB
Extension connector
5P
Extension connector
4P
Extension connector
3P
List of Spacers
Item name
SPACER FL T0.1 (PB52)
SPACER FL T0.2 (PB52)
SPACER FL T0.3 (PB52)
SPACER FL T0.5 (PB52)
SPACER FL T1.0 (PB52)
SPACER RL2 T0.1 (PB52)
SPACER RL2 T0.2 (PB52)
SPACER RL2 T0.3 (PB52)
SPACER RL2 T0.5 (PB52)
SPACER RL2 T1.0 (PB52)
Application
Spacer for FL adjustment
Spacer for FL adjustment
Spacer for FL adjustment
Spacer for FL adjustment
Spacer for FL adjustment
Spacer for RL2 adjustment
Spacer for RL2 adjustment
Spacer for RL2 adjustment
Spacer for RL2 adjustment
Spacer for RL2 adjustment
Parts No.
24H51241
24H51251
24H51261
24H51271
24H51281
24H51291
24H51301
24H51311
24H51321
24H51331
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
5-43
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS
1-2. Outlined description of adjusting work
1-2-1. Outlined description of adjusting work
Remove the top cover.
Remove the MAIN SASSY.
Mount the jig (Dummy load PWB)
(Refer to P.5-49 in regard to the jig, and see the diagram below in regard to connections.)
Start up the set.
Make shadow adjustments. (Details are written in 1-3 and thereafter.)
Return the set to its original state.
1
2
3
4
5
6
& lt; & lt; Connections for the dummy load PWB, the extension connector, and the connector PWB for extension & gt; & gt;
PS UNIT
INTAKE FAN
5-44
BALLAST FAN
LAMP FAN
EXHAUST FAN
BALLAST UNIT
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS
1-3. Shadow adjustment flow
Start of adjustment
Check the shadows of R, G, B at the top, bottom, right, and left.
OK for all R, G, B.
NG for both G and
B or for G only.
Make FL adjustments (G adjustment).
(1-6-1)
B only is NG.
2nd and thereafter
R is NG.
Make RL2 adjustments (R adjustment).
(1-6-2)
G is OK.
OK
Check the shadows of B at the top,
bottom, right, and left.
OK
NG
Make M1 adjustments. (1-6-3)
OK
NG
Check the shadows of R, G, B at the top, bottom, right, and left.
OK for all R, G, B.
End of adjustment
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
5-45
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS
1-4. Handling of margin in shadow adjustment
During shadow adjustment, adjust the margin so that it is balanced vertically and horizontally. If adjustments are carried out from the LCD panel, this margin cannot be seen directly. Therefore, try to move the
shadow until its top, bottom, right, or left part appears. By doing so, examine how much shadow is existing
vertically and horizontally. Stop moving the shadow where its margin seems to be well balanced.
1-5. Neutral setup position for each adjuster block
(1) FL
Vertical: The holder (FL) is held at the height of only one spacer (FL) T1.0.
Horizontal: Bosses of Cover A are located in the right and left holder (FL) holes, each in the center
position.
(2) RL2
Vertical: The holder (RL2) is held at the height of only one spacer (RL2) T1.0.
Horizontal: Bosses of Cover A are located in the right and left holder (RL2) holes, each in the center
position.
(3) M1
The outer edge plane of the separator base is joined with the edge plane of the holder (M1).
1-6. Operation of each adjusting part (Refer to 3. Adjusting/fixing parts.)
1-6-1. FL adjustment
1
2
& lt; & lt; Vertical direction & gt; & gt;
Loosen the FL fixing screws (in 1 positions) sufficiently.
Change the spacer (FL) thickness and adjust the shadow margin so that it is vertically equalized.
Arrange the spacer so that its total quantity can be reduced.
3
4
& lt; & lt; Horizontal direction & gt; & gt;
Hold the handle part of the holder (FL) by hand and move the holder to the right and left in order to
adjust the shadow margin so that it is horizontally equalized.
After adjustments, fix the FL fixing screw (1 position).
The tightening torque shall be 3.5 ± 0.5 kgf•cm.
Fixing screws
Spacer FL
Handle part of the holder (FL)
5-46
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS
1-6-2. RL2 adjustment
& lt; & lt; Vertical direction & gt; & gt;
Loosen the RL2 fixing screws (in 2 positions) sufficiently.
Change the spacer (RL2) thickness and adjust the shadow margin until it is vertically equalized.
Arrange the spacer so that its total quantity can be reduced.
1
2
3
4
& lt; & lt; Horizontal direction & gt; & gt;
Hold the handle part of the holder (RL2) by hand and move the holder to the right and left in order to
adjust the shadow margin so that it is horizontally equalized.
After adjustments, fix the RL2 fixing screw (1 position).
The tightening torque shall be 3.5 ± 0.5kgf•cm.
Fixing screws
Handle part of the holder (RL2)
Spacer (RL2)
1
2
1-6-3. M1 adjustment
Loosen the M1 fixing screws (2 positions) sufficiently.
Grip the handle part of the holder (M1) by hand and move the holder to the right and left in order to
adjust the shadow position both vertically and horizontally so that it is equally positioned. Make adjustments, paying attention to the directions of M1 rotation and fall.
After adjustments, fix the M1 fixing screws (2 positions).
The tightening torque shall be 3.5 ± 0.5 kgf•cm.
3
Fixing screws
Handle part of the holder (M1)
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
5-47
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS
1-7. Shadow adjustment for each color
1-7-1. Vertical shadow adjustment for G and B
Move the holder (FL) vertically and eliminate the vertical shadow. (Equally balanced in vertical directions)
(Make adjustments until the portions in magenta color are eliminated vertically and uniformly in the
projector screen.)
1-7-2. Horizontal shadow adjustment for G and B
Move the holder (FL) horizontally and eliminate the horizontal shadow. (Equally balanced in horizontal
directions)
(Make adjustments until the portions in magenta color are eliminated horizontally and uniformly in the
projector screen.)
1-7-3. Shadow adjustment for B only
It is possible to adjust the fall. Move the holder (M1) and eliminate the shadows in all directions. (Equalize the shadows both vertically and horizontally.)
(Make adjustments until the portions in amber color are eliminated vertically, horizontally, and uniformly
in the projector screen.)
1-7-4. Vertical shadow adjustment for R
Move the holder (RL2) vertically and eliminate the vertical shadow. (Equally balanced in vertical directions)
(Make adjustments until the portions in cyan color are eliminated vertically and uniformly in the projector
screen.)
1-7-5. Horizontal shadow adjustment for R
Move the holder (RL2) horizontally and eliminate the horizontal shadow. (Equally balanced in horizontal
directions)
(Make adjustments until the portions in cyan color are eliminated horizontally and uniformly in the projector screen.)
5-48
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS
2. Adjustment of the polarization plate (Contrast adjustment)
2-1. Jigs and tools to be used
For this adjustment, provide for the tools specified below.
& lt; & lt; Tools to be used & gt; & gt;
• Phillips screwdriver for deflection plate fixing: Tip size No. 1
& lt; & lt; Jigs to be used & gt; & gt;
• Extension connector and connector PWB for extension
& lt; & lt; List of jigs & gt; & gt;
Item name
Application
Q’ty
Remark / Part No.
Extension connector (30P) or (24P) For LCD panel
3
Existing jigs for VT660 Series are used.
Extension connector (15P)
For power supply (POPW:400W)
MAIN
1
Existing jigs for VT660 Series are used.
Extension connector (5P)
For power supply (POLC:400W)
BALLAST
1
Existing jigs for VT660 Series are used.
Extension connector (4P)
For BALLAST FAN (POF4:500W)
1
Existing jigs for MT60 Series are used.
Extension connector (3P)
For INTAKE FAN (POF:400W)
1
Existing jigs for VT660 Series are used.
Extension connector (2P)
For Thermistor 1 and Cover SW
(POTH1: 600W or 400W)
2
Existing jigs for VT660 Series are used.
Connector PWB for extension
(30P) or (24P)
For LCD panel
3
Existing jigs for VT660 Series are used.
1
Existing jigs for VT660 Series are used.
Extension connector PWB (15P) For power supply (MAIN)
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
5-49
http://getMANUAL.com
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS
Extension connector PWB (5P)
For power supply (BALLAST)
1
Existing jigs for VT47 Series are used.
Extension connector PWB (4P)
For BALLAST FAN
1
Existing jigs for VT47 Series are used.
Extension connector PWB (3P)
For INTAKE FAN
1
Existing jigs for VT660 Series are used.
Extension connector PWB (2P)
For Thermistor 1 and Cover SW
2
Existing jigs for VT660 Series are used.
Short clip (LCD panel)
Clip for LCD panel discharge
3
Existing jigs for VT660 Series are used.
(Part No.: 9N999217)
5-50
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
2-2. Outlined description of adjusting work
Remove the top cover.
Remove the MAIN SASSY and its cover (XDP).
Mount the jig and stand the MAIN SASSY on the Power case.
Start up the set and display the internal pattern (all-black signal).
Adjust the polarization plate. (Details described in 2-3)
After the completion of adjustments, return the set to its original state.
& lt; & lt; Connection of extension connector and PWB & gt; & gt;
Connector PWB for
extension (15P) and
Extension connector
(15P)
Connector PWB for extension
(30P) or (24P) and Extension
connector (30P) or (24P)
Connector PWB for
extension (2P) and
Extension connector
(2P)
Connector PWB for
extension (2P) and
Extension connector
(2P)
Connector PWB for
extension (3P) and
Extension connector
(3P)
Connector PWB for
extension (5P) and
Extension connector
(5P)
Connector PWB for
extension (4P) and
Extension connector
(4P)
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
5-51
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS
1
2
3
4
2-3. Method of adjustment (Refer to 3. Adjusting/fixing parts.)
Use a Phillips screwdriver and loosen the deflection plate fixing screw (1 position).
Rotate the polarization plate to move it. (Done manually)
Display an all-black screen and stop it where the screen becomes darkest.
Tighten the polarization plate fixing screws (in 1 positions).
The tightening torque shall be 3.5 ± 0.5kgf•cm.
Make the above-mentioned adjustments for R, G, B, respectively.
3. Adjusting and fixing parts
Polarization plate fixing (B)
Polarization plate fixing (R)
M1 fixing screw
RL2 fixing screw
FL fixing screw
Spacer block for RL2
vertical adjustments
5-52
Polarization plate
fixing (G)
Spacer block for FL vertical adjustments
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
SERVICEMAN MODE
Serviceman Mode
1. List of functions.................................................................................... 6-2
2. Modal changeover .................................................................................6-2
2.1. Expert mode ...................................................................................................... 6-2
2.2. Service mode ...................................................................................................... 6-2
2.3. How to withdraw from the mode ....................................................................... 6-2
2.4. Contents of display ............................................................................................ 6-3
3. Additional functions ............................................................................. 6-3
3.1. Information (Service mode only) ...................................................................... 6-3
3.2. Default (Serviceman mode only) ..................................................................... 6-3
3.3. Expert Menu ........................................................................................................ 6-3
3.3.1. Test Pattern ........................................................................................................................
3.3.2. Sync Protection ................................................................................................................
3.3.3. VS Begin .............................................................................................................................
3.3.4. Clamp Timing .....................................................................................................................
3.3.5. Remote Sensor .................................................................................................................
3.3.6. Message ..............................................................................................................................
3.3.7. Frame Lock .........................................................................................................................
6-3
6-3
6-4
6-4
6-4
6-4
6-4
3.4. Service Menu ...................................................................................................... 6-5
3.4.1. Check Start ........................................................................................................................
3.4.2. Change Offset ....................................................................................................................
3.4.3. Offset ..................................................................................................................................
3.4.4. Color Uniformity ................................................................................................................
3.4.5. RGB Gain White (All white color unevenness adjustment function) ............................
3.4.6. RGB Gain Black (All black color unevenness adjustment function) ............................
6-5
6-5
6-5
6-5
6-6
6-6
4. Security functions ................................................................................ 6-6
4.1. How to cancel the security functions ............................................................... 6-6
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
6-1
SERVICEMAN MODE
1. List of functions
Functions
Mode
Expert
Model
Service
Frame Lock
& lt;
& lt;
& lt;
& lt;
& lt;
& lt;
& lt;
& lt;
Auto keystone Horizontal adjustment
X
Color Uniformity
X
Clear Panel Usage
X
RGB Gain White
(All white color unevenness adjustment function)
X
& lt;
& lt;
& lt;
& lt;
& lt;
& lt;
& lt;
& lt;
& lt;
& lt;
& lt;
& lt;
RGB Gain Black
(All black color unevenness adjustment function)
X
& lt;
Test Parrern
VS Begin
Clamp Timing
Sync Projection Upper
Sync Protection Lower
Remote Sensor
Message
70s
& lt;
& lt;
& lt;
& lt;
& lt;
& lt;
& lt;
& lt;
& lt;
& lt;
& lt;
& lt;
& lt;
VT37
& lt;
& lt;
& lt;
& lt;
& lt;
X
& lt;
& lt;
& lt;
& lt;
& lt;
& lt;
& lt;
Model description
70s
VT47/VT470/VT570/VT575/VT670/VT676
VT37
VT37
2. Modal changeover
2.1. Expert mode (For setting subcontractor: any mode that can be released to a subcontractor)
While the HELP key is pressed to display the Information screen, press the keys shown below in this sequence.
TOP - & gt; LEFT - & gt; HELP
Press the MENU key to display the menu and confirm that [Expert] is displayed below the menu.
2.2. Serviceman mode
In the state of power ON:
Press the keys in the order of [HELP] - & gt; [ENTER] - & gt; [HELP] - & gt; [ENTER] - & gt; [HELP] - & gt; [ENTER] - & gt; [MENU]
pressed for 3 seconds - & gt; [ENTER], [MENU]. Then, the [Pass Code] menu is displayed.
Press the select keys in the order of [TOP] - & gt; [RIGHT] - & gt; [LEFT] - & gt; [RIGHT] - & gt; [RIGHT] - & gt; [RIGHT] - & gt; [TOP]
- & gt; [TOP] - & gt; [ENTER].
Press the [MENU] key to display the menu and confirm that [Service] is displayed below the menu.
2.3. How to withdraw from the mode
• In the state that no menu is displayed, press the [CANCEL] key to recover the original status.
• Recover the standby state by pressing the [POWER] key. When this action is taken, the original status can
also be recovered at the time of next starting.
6-2
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
SERVICEMAN MODE
2.4. Contents of display
When the service mode or the expert mode is assumed, the menu is added with the functions specified below.
• Mode display
The mode is displayed beside the section where the terminal name is displayed beneath the menu.
• Addition of the adjusting functions to the menu top
The adjusting functions usually not displayed come to be displayed. Then, adjustments become possible.
In the expert mode, an expert menu can be selected.
In the service mode, an expert menu or a service menu can be selected. In addition, [Clear Panel Usage] is
added to the initialize menu.
• Modification of processing for existing functions
In the service mode, the items to be initialized are increased for the Factory Default.
3. Additional functions
3.1. Information (Service mode only)
A basic model is displayed on the right side of Data Version.
3.2. Default (Service mode only)
Clear Panel Usage
This is an initializing function for the panel usage time. When the [Enter] key is pressed, a confirmation message is displayed.
When [Yes] is selected, the panel usage time is set at 0.P.4
3.3. Expert Menu
3.3.1. Test Pattern
A test pattern can be set up or displayed. The symbols of R, G, B, and Inv. on the right side of the test
pattern items indicate that operation of modal changeover is possible for Red / Green / Blue / Invert in
the middle of test pattern display.
Test pattern changeover and such operation are possible during test pattern display by means of a
remote control.
• Up/Down key: Test pattern changeover (Raster - & gt; Cross hatch - & gt; ...)
• Right/Left key: Level adjustment
• Menu: Red On/Off
• Aspect: Green On/Off
• Mute: Blue On/Off
• Enter: Invert On/Off
• Cancel: Test pattern cancel
3.3.2. Sync Protection
It is possible to make adjustments of Upper and Lower.
IC AD9883A, intended for the A/D conversion of RGB signals, has a function to generate the sampling
clock for A/D conversion from HSYNC that is entered in the A/D.
Actually, the HSYNC signal is divided at the dividing ratio that has been preset, so that the resultant
frequency can be compared with the frequency that is gained from VCO oscillation. The differential
signal is fed back to the VCO so that the VCO frequency can be kept to be constant and synchronized
with the HSYNC signal. (In short, a PLL effect is given to the HSYNC signal.)
At that time, however, the operation of feedback to the VCO may be wrongly performed and the
oscillation frequency of the VCO may deviate from the intended frequency if the pulse intervals of
HSYNC are wrongly changed due to the effect of equivalent pulses and incoming pulses of the HSYNC
signal.
This function has been provided to avoid such a difficulty. With this function, a period is set up to
suspend feedback operation to the VCO.
In regard to the adjusting range, the front side is defined as the UPPER side and the rear side as the
LOWER side, based on the VSYNC.
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
6-3
SERVICEMAN MODE
Practically, adjustments are made in the setting position where no malfunction occurs even though the
screen should give rise to any difficulty such as upper screen bend or the like.
3.3.3. VS Bbegin
In the PW164B, the line position and other factors to start up the display are defined based on the
timing at which the entered H sync input is transferred to the V sync mode.
The VS Begin is the circuit that determines the threshold value of the above-mentioned timing at which
H sync is switched over to V sync.
If the changeover timing from H sync to V sync seems to affect the signal display, such a problem can
be solved by adjusting the VS Begin circuit.
The phenomena, for which the effect of adjustment can be expected, are shown below.
• The screen sways in the V direction.
• The line is reversed by an interlace signal.
For reasons of some signal conditions or others, the above-mentioned improvements may fail to be
accomplished.
To obtain a better result, adjustments should be carried out where no deficiencies may arise.
3.3.4. Clamp Timing
Used to adjust clamp timing for the HSYNC signal.
If the clamp timing does not match the video start timing for the H sync signal input or if it does not
match the end-of-sync timing for the Sync on Green signal, clamping may be carried out in the middle
of video period and a black belt may be generated in vertical direction. In another case, an error may
be caused in brightness because clamping is conducted in the middle of sync period.
Adjustments should be made in a position where no malfunction occurs.
* This function is not available if there is an input of [Component Signal] or [Video Signal].
3.3.5. Remote Sensor
Setting is made to determine whether the receiver of the remote control is used or not used.
This function enables that the selected mode becomes effective when closing the menu displaying the
options.
Setting
Function
Front/Rear
Both of the light receiving blocks in the front and rear of the set are used.
Front
Only the light receiving block in the front of the set is used.
Rear
Only the light receiving block in the rear of the set is used.
3.3.6. Message
Display or non-display of the following messages is set up:
Function error: [This function cannot be used.]
Cabinet button lock: [Keys of the main unit are now locked.]
Power management: [It is 3 minutes before power OFF.]
Sleep timer: [It is 3 minutes before power OFF.]
The initial value is ON after Factory Default.
3.3.7. Frame Lock
This function is intended to make the vertical sync frequency (frame rate) of LCD panel driving match
the vertical sync frequency (frame rate) of the input signal. When the signal side (initial value) is
selected, a state of Frame Lock is assumed in regard to a signal of the vertical frequency (frame rate)
60Hz or 50Hz where the presence of motion pictures is anticipated. Therefore, if operation for Frame
Lock is performed, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of partial cutoff in motion pictures.
6-4
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
SERVICEMAN MODE
In the state of Frame Lock, the vertical sync frequency (frame rate) is lower than that of the signal for
which Frame Lock is not performed. If it is necessary to accomplish some improvements against such
flicker deterioration, setting for Frame Lock should be changed over to the OFF side. In such a case,
however, partial cutoff in motion pictures can occur when such motion pictures are displayed.
In conclusion, a decision must be made in regard to whether operation for Frame Lock is carried out
on the setup (signal) side or on the OFF side for the signals that are applied to the Computer terminal.
If input changeover or signal changeover is conducted after the modification of Signal/Off setup, operation is performed according to the setup data.
3.4. Service Menu
3.4.1. Check Start
This function is used to measure the values in horizontal state for auto trapezoidal correction or the
internal temperatures for temperature correction. This measurement should be carried out in the horizontal state, without fail.
The present value is checked and displayed in about 2 seconds. When the ENTER key is pressed,
this measurement is started and an hourglass is displayed on the screen.
When the measurement is over, a menu is displayed and the counted value is displayed in the item of
Change Offset.
3.4.2. Change Offset
This function is used to set up the values in the main unit. These values are the data measured in
horizontal state or the internal temperatures measured for temperature correction. If 0 is indicated, this
means that no measurement is carried out yet.
If any value other than “0” is displayed, the displayed value can be set up in the main unit when the
ENTER key is pressed. After the completion of operation, a menu is displayed and Value 0 is displayed.
The value set up in the main unit is displayed in the item of Offset.
3.4.3. Offset
This function is used to indicate the values obtained in horizontal state where the main unit is currently
used, or to display the internal temperatures for temperature correction.
After the completion of measurements for auto-trapezoidal compensation, cancel “Auto Keystone” of
“Image” in the menu and then turn it ON again. At the time of changing from OFF to ON, the keystone
data are updated at the preset value.
The above-mentioned menu operation is not always required. Though a new setting value is used
internally, no additional compensation is carried out until a change is sensed in the gradient from the
gradient sensor. Therefore, so long as video images are observed, it seems as if no reflection had
been made in regard to the adjusting value.
In cases other than the above-mentioned menu operation, shaking the main unit or making a restart
operation by turning off the power source can be reflected on the state of projection.
3.4.4. Color Uniformity
ON/OFF switching is conducted for the correction of color unevenness.
When the OPT base or the like is replaced, color unevenness may be increased on the contrary if the
data before replacement are used as the correction data for color unevenness. Accordingly, this function is used to check the state of correction and others. These setup data are not stored in the internal
memory of the projector.
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
6-5
SERVICEMAN MODE
3.4.5. RGB Gain White (All-white color unevenness ADJ function)
This function is used to adjust all-white color unevenness. If all-white color unevenness seems to be
too much, the brightness level may be lowered slightly. Then, this treatment will reduce all-white color
unevenness.
Setup value
0
1
2
3
Brightness
0% Down
5% Down
7% Down
9% Down
3.4.6. RGB Gain Black (All-black color unevenness ADJ function)
This function is used to adjust all-black color unevenness. If all-black color unevenness seems to be
too much, the black level of the input signal may be slightly raised. Then, this treatment will reduce allblack color unevenness. This adjustment inevitably results in the reduction of contrast. (Situation
depends on the model.)
Setup value
0
1
2
3
Contrast
0 Down
Reduction of approx. 20 ~ 30
Reduction of approx. 40 ~ 60
Reduction of approx. 45 ~ 65
4. Security functions
This is a security function similar to that of the VT60 Series.
• Keyword setting only is required for security. (The memory card cannot be used.)
• The keyword is a combination of the UP, DOWN, RIGHT, and LEFT keys.
4.1 How to cancel the security functions
If the user forgets the keyword and cannot use the projector, it is necessary to make queries to the service
station to get the keyword, in the same manner as for the VT60 Series.
This procedure is the same as for the VT60 Series. The same security-canceling tool is used.
For the security-canceling tool, the decoded keyword is indicated in alphanumerical characters. Since the
keyword for this model uses the up/down/right/left keys, it is necessary to decode the indicated alphanumerical
characters into such up/down/right/left keys.
When the keyword indicated by the security-canceling tool has to be transferred to the user, refer to the next
table and decode the numerals into the up/down/right/left keys.
Displayed keyword
1
UP
3
DOWN
4
LEFT
5
6-6
Key data sent to the user
RIGHT
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
CLEANING
Cleaning of Lens and Mirror
1. Cleaning of the projector lens
* Cleaner liquid
Absolute alcohol should be used.
If water drops seem to remain as a result of unfavorable drying, replace the absolute alcohol with new one.
* Method of cleaning
Use a piece of cloth or cleaning paper available on the market and let it be soaked with the cleaner liquid.
Draw a circle from the center of the lens toward the outer periphery. Wipe off the contaminants and dust by
nipping them at the edge part of the lens.
In this case, make sure not to wipe the lens surface too strong.
• Cleaning cloth
(92339585 or 24BS7251)
Lens
2. Cleaning of the mirror
Take away the contaminants by the use of absolute alcohol. Then wipe the area with dry cloth.
The mirror has been vapor-treated. Never grip it strongly. Do not touch it with empty hands.
(To keep the mirror surface free from fingerprints, etc.)
3. LCD panel/lens
Take away the contaminants by the use of absolute alcohol. Then wipe the area with dry cloth.
The influence of contaminants to the screen is extremely intensified when contaminants are attached to both
sides of the LCD panel, the LCD side of the relay lens 1, and the integrator (lamp side). Utmost care must be
taken to these surfaces.
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
7-1
http://getMANUAL.com
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
1. I/O terminals
1-1.
Video input terminal
• COMPUTER1 input (Mini D-SUB 15-pin 1 system)
• COMPUTER2 input (Mini D-SUB 15-pin 1 system) [VT470/VT570/VT575/VT670/VT676 only]
• VIDEO input (RCA phono-terminal 1 system)
• S-VIDEO (S-terminal 1 system)
1-2.
Video output terminal
• RGB output (Mini D-SUB 15-pin 1 system) [VT47/VT470/VT570/VT575/VT670/VT676 only]
1-3.
Audio input terminal
• RGB input (Mini Jack 1 system)
• VIDEO input (Stereo RCA phono-terminal 1 system) [S-VIDEO used in common with VT47]
• S-VIDEO input (Stereo RCA phono-terminal 1 system) [VT470/VT570/VT575/VT670 only]
1-4.
Audio output terminal
•RGB/VIDEO/S-VIDEO in common (Mini Jack 1 system) [VT470/VT570/VT575/VT670/VT676 only]
1-5.
Control terminal
• PC CONTROL (Mini DIN-8P 1 system)
2. Input signals
2-1.
Signal level
• RGB signal
• Component signal
• VIDEO signal
• S-VIDEO signal
• Sync signal
• Audio signal
: 0.7Vp-p / 75Ω
: 1.0Vp-p / 75Ω (Signal Y), 0.7Vp-p / 75Ω (Signals Cb/Cr, Pb/Pr)
: 1.0Vp-p / 75Ω
: 1.0Vp-p / 75Ω (Signal Y), 0.28Vp-p / 75Ω (Signal C burst level)
: TTL level (Positive/ Negative) / 1kΩ
: 0.5Vrms / 22kΩ or more
2-2.
RGB signal applied frequency
• Horizontal sync frequency : 15 ~ 100kHz
• Vertical sync frequency : 50 ~ 120Hz
• Max. resolution : UXGA [VT470/VT570/VT575/VT670/VT676]
SXGA [VT37/VT47]
2-3.
Component signals
The applicable component signals are as specified below.
• 525i, 625i, 480p, 576p (DVD output signal)
• 720p, 1080i (HDTV signal)
2-4.
Video input applied color system
The applicable color system is as specified below.
• NTSC3.58
• NTSC4.43
• PAL
• PAL-M
• PAL-N
• PAL-60
• SECAM
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
8-1
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
3. Circuit operation
3-1.
Input processor block (Input block, A/D converter, PLL)
The video signal inputs entered in Computer 1 (mini D-SUB, Pin 15) and Computer 2 (mini D-SUB, Pin 15)
are selected at the selector NJM2584 (IC9003) at user’s choice and transferred to the A/D converter PW2200B
(IC2001) via the buffer and the LPF. The LPF block has two types of filters that can be changed over by the
user. (No selector is provided to the VT37/VT47.) The video signals are converted into the 2-layer decoded
8-bit digital signals by the A/D converter. The converted signals are output to the PW164B (IC3006). The
signals (clamp pulses , mask pulses), intended to clamp the video signals that are needed inside the A/D
converter PW2200B (IC2001), are generated in the PW164B (IC3006) and output to the A/D converter. The
A/D converter is provided with a built-in PLL circuit. The clock signals locked at the H sync signal and the
timing pulses are output to the PW164B (IC3006).
Control of the A/D converter PW2200B (IC2001) is carried out at I2C by the PW164B (IC3006).
3-2.
Sync signal processor block (Mini D-SUB 15-pin input)
The sync signal inputs applied to Pin 15 of the mini D-SUB are selected at the selector SN74CBT3125
(IC9002) at user’s choice and entered in the A/D converter PW2200B (IC2001) via the buffer circuit. (No
selector is provided to the VT37/VT47.)
The G-sync (Sync on Green) signal is branched shortly before the LPF circuit and entered in the PW2200B
(IC2001).
The SCART signal input entered through Pin 11 of the mini D-SUB is changed over with the G-sync signal at
user’s choice and entered in the PW2200B (IC2001). Selector circuit of the G-sync and SCART signals →
Peripheral circuits of Q1044 and Q1045.
The sync signal input entered in the PW2200B (IC2001) are processed for sync separation, PLL processing,
clamp pulse generation, and Sync Protection (COAST) signal generation, and then fed to the PW164B
(IC3006).
* According to the type of the input signal, the following processing is conducted at the PW164B (IC3006).
→ Sync separation, clamp pulse generation, sync protection pulse generation
3-3.
Video signal processor block
After the termination, the Composite video signals are entered in the A/D converter PW2200B (IC2001). In
this circuit, the video signals are decoded into the digital signals, which are then output to the PW164B
(IC3006) together with the sync signal.
Control of the A/D converter PW2200B (IC2001) is carried out at I2C by the PW164B (IC3006).
3-4.
RGB output processing
When terminated at 75Ω, the video signals selected at the selector NJM2584 (IC9003) at user’s choice are
maintained at 1Vp-p and output after passing through the 6dB AMP (IC9004).
The H sync signal passes through the buffer circuit (Q9005, Q9008) and is then output.
The V sync signal passes through the buffer circuit (Q9014, Q1015) and is then output.
3-5.
Plug & Play
The V Sync circuit of Computer 1 (mini D-SUB, Pin 15) and the serial terminals of Pins 12 and 15 are
connected to the Plug & Play IC circuit (IC9001: TC9WMB1FK) so that the projector can be picked up at the
personal computer.
(No Plug & Play function is provided to the Computer 2 terminal.)
3-6.
Audio I/O processing
The audio signal input is entered in the output amplifier IC (IC9502: LM4871MX) via the audio processor IC
(IC9501: NJW1141M). Usually, an internal speaker (8Ωx1) is used. In this case, the audio signal output is a
mixture of Signal R and Signal L (1W MAX.). When the output amplifier circuit is connected to the AUDIO
OUT terminal, the internal speaker is muted and the audio output is available only at the AUDIO OUT terminal. In this case, stereo signals are output. The volume control is effective even when the AUDIO OUT
terminal is used.
Volume control is effected at the audio processor IC. In this case, I2C control is carried out with the aid of the
PW164B (IC3006).
8-2
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
3-7.
Protector
If any one of the conditions below is sensed, the projector causes the status LED to flash and the standby
status is recovered.
• Sensed when the lamp cover is removed
• Detection of fan (x 4) stoppage
• Detection of lamp non-lighting
• Detection of fan rpm control and abnormal temperature by temperature sensor
3-8.
PW164B (IC3006) (CPU, video signal processor)
The PW164B (IC3006) is an LSI where the CPU and the video signal processor circuit are combined. In this
LSI, various controls are carried out, such as conversion of resolution, keystone correction, frame rate conversion, OSD output processing, and such video signal processing plus projector control.
Programs and data used in the CPU are stored in the 8-Mbit FLASH ROM (IC3005) and the EEPROM
(IC3003).
The RGB signals, the Component signals, and the Video signals are the 2-layer decoded 8-bit digital video
outputs obtained from the A/D converter PW2200B (IC2001). These outputs are entered in the graphic port
(GPORT) of the PW164B (IC3006).
In the PW164B circuit, two types of clock signals are used; 120MHz and 65MHz (Model XGA) or 43MHz
(Model SVGA). The 120MHz clock signal is used in the CPU block (3-frequency division internally) and in the
internal SDRAM. The 65MHz or 43MHz clock signal is used in the video output block. Each clock signal is
generated in the clock generator IC (IC3007: ASM3P2508) and entered in the UNISEVEN (IC5001). The 8bitx3 video signals, which are output from the PW164B (IC3006), are directly applied to the UNISEVEN
(IC5001).
The digital zoom function (VT37/VT47) is realized through the scaling process of the PW164B.
3-9.
UNISEVEN
The UNISEVEN circuit (IC5001) is an ASIC block where various correction functions and other important
functions such as LC timing signal generation, etc., are incorporated.
• V-T correction
• Color unevenness correction
• Color correction
• Generation of timing signals for LC panel driving
• LC panel driving compensation (ghost, vertical lines)
The video input signals entered from the PW164B (IC3006) into the 8-bitx3 video signal circuit pass through
the various corrector circuits of V-T correction, color unevenness correction, color correction, wall color
correction, etc. and are then output to the 6-phase decoding AD8381 IC block (IC6001~3) in the 10-bitx3
mode. The timing signals for LC panel driving are output to the level shift circuit ADSY8401 (IC6501, 6502).
(For the VT47, level shift effected in IC6801~3) In the V-T corrector block, the video input signals are converted into the data according to the LC panel characteristics specified in the lookup table. The color unevenness corrector block has the brightness data for each 25x20 split screen. In this block, the video data are
operated and processed so that a uniform screen can be obtained as a whole. In the color corrector block,
the picture management function is utilized. For the wall color correction, hue conversion processing is
carried out for the wall correction feature.
The UNISEVEN circuit is controlled in such a manner that the address-mapped registers in the UNISEVEN
circuit are controlled by the PW164B (IC3006).
3-10. TIGHT CELL
The Tight Cell circuit (IC4002) is a G/A block where the various functions of fan control, key matrix, LED
control, etc., shown below, are incorporated. The Tight Cell circuit is controlled by the PW164B (IC3006)
through the CPU bus.
• Reset free circuit
When a power supply supervisory reset signal input is entered from the reset IC (IC4001), the reset signal
is output to each device after the removal of noise by filter processing.
• Fan control (5 systems)
The four systems are used for fan control. According to the rpm pulse signal output from the fan, the rpm
level is sensed. Based on the temperature data detected from the temperature sensor AD7417 (IC3001),
the fan rpm level is controlled so that each part of the fan can maintain its optimal temperature.
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
8-3
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
The remaining one system is used to generate a beep sound in case when the relevant button key is
pressed or at the time of the occurrence of an error.
• Key matrix control
• General-purpose I/O port
Used for the lighting control of each LED and for the control of each IC.
• UART control
Used for lamp’s power setup and for the acquisition of the operational status.
3-11. Video output processor block
The “10-bit x 3” video signal input entered from the UNISEVN (IC5001) is processed for the D/A conversion
and the level conversion at the LCD panel driver IC (IC6001-3). These signals are fed to the LCD panel after
the signals have been restored to the respective analog RGB signals (10Vp-p) of 6 phases each.
The timing signals for LCD panel driving are converted into the voltages (15.5Vp-p or 5Vp-p) needed to drive
the shift register in the LCD panel. This signal conversion is effected by the level shift IC (IC6501-2 or
IC6801-3). The obtained voltages are applied to the LCD panel. Part of the signals (uniformity improving
signal) for LC driving are supplied to the LCD panel through the buffer circuit of transistors. The voltage used
in common for the LCD panel is extended to each panel of RGB by the use of Channel 3 of the 4-ch serial D/
A (IC6004: M62334FP).
3-12. Auto-trapezoid correction processing (The VT37 is not applicable because it has no function of automatic trapezoid compensation.)
The gradient of the projector is detected by the gravity acceleration sensor (IC3002). This detection is intended for the automatic adjustment of the trapezoidal condition (keystone).
The gravity acceleration sensor generates a DC voltage output in compliance with the gradient of the projector. The output voltage is applied to the A/D converter terminal of the temperature sensor (IC3001). The data
received at the A/D converter are read out via the I2C bus and operational processing is executed at the
PW164B (IC3006).
3-13. I2C data bus control
The PW164B (IC3006) has two systems of I2C bus interfaces. The six devices specified below are controlled
from each interface.
• I2C BUS I/F1 (BUS No. 1): Normal operation
• I2C BUS I/F2 (BUS No. 2): In operation only in the period of power-ON.
Circuit symbol
IC3003
IC3007
IC2001
IC3001
IC6004
IC9501
8-4
Item name
M24C16-WMN6T
ASM3P2508A
PW2200B-10L/05L
AD7417ARU
M62334
NJW1141M
BUS No Address (Write) Address (Read)
1
A0H
A1H
1
D4H
D5H
2
62H
63H
2
50H
51H
2
98H
–
2
82H
83H
Functions
16-Kbit EEPROM
Generation of clock signals
A/D converter, video decoder
Temperature sensor
4-ch D/A converter
Audio selector
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
[Materials 1] Connector terminal allocation
The terminal allocation of the connectors used is shown below.
I/O PWB – MAIN PWB
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
POI (POIB)
B_IN
2
G_IN
4
R_IN
6
H_IN
8
V_IN
10
SCART_IN
12
CV_IN
14
Y_IN
16
C_IN
18
RGB_SEL
20
AMUTE
22
JACK_EN
24
SNOOZE
26
SDA
28
SCL
30
TXD
32
RXD
34
3.3V
36
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
POWER – MAIN PWB
POPW
4.2V
2
4.2V
4.2V
4
GND
GND
6
GND
6.2V
8
GND
15.0V
10 15.0V
GND
12 GND
17.5V
14 GND
PFC_ON
REM PWB – MAIN PWB
PORM
1
FAN_VCC
2
FAN_GND
3
FAN_DET
4
REM_IN
5
REM_IN
6
REM_3.3V
Ballast – MAIN PWB
1
2
3
4
5
POLC
RXD
GND
3.3V
LAMP_PW
TXD
GND
RGBOUT_EN
GND
GND
6.2V
6.2V
6.2V
GND
GND
9.0V
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
REM_IN
Thermistor – MAIN PWB
POTH1
1
EXT_TH
2
GND
Thermistor – MAIN PWB
POTH2
1
LAMP_TH
2
GND
FAN – MAIN PWB
POF1
1
FAN_VCC
2
GND
3
FAN_DET
FAN – MAIN PWB
POF2
1
FAN_VCC2
2
GND
3
FAN_DET2
MAIN PWB – LCD Panel (24P)
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
PORS/POGS/POBS
PSIG
2
SIG4
SIG3
4
SIG5
SIG2
6
SIG6
SIG1
8
HVDD
RGT
10 CLR
NC
12 NC
HST
14 HCK
HCKX
16 VSS
NC
18 ENB
VCK
20 VST
PCG
22 DWN
VVDD
24 COM
MAIN PWB – LCD Panel (30P)
POPR/POPG/POPB
NC
2
DY
CLY
4
CLYB
VDDY
6
LCCOM
(NRS)
8
NRS
ENB1
10 ENB2
ENB3
12 ENB4
DIRX
14 CLX
CLXB
16 VDDX
DX
18 VSSX
VID1
20 VID2
VID3
22 VID4
VID5
24 VID6
(NRS2)
26 LCCOM
DIRY
28 VSSY
DY
30 MON
FAN – MAIN PWB
POF3
1
FAN_VCC
2
GND
3
FAN_DET
FAN – MAIN PWB
POF4
1
FAN_VCC
2
GND
3
FAN_DET
4
NC
Bimetal – MAIN PWB
POBM
1
LPHOT
2
MAIN_POWER
3
NC
Cover SW – MAIN PWB
POCV
1
15V_OUT
2
15V-IN
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
8-5
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
[Materials 2] List of ICs used
A list of ICs used is shown below.
VT470/570/575/670/676
Circuit symbol Q’ty
IC1001
1
Function
Voltage • Regulator
IC1002-4,
IC10011-13,
IC10016
IC1005, IC10015,
IC9006
IC1006, IC9503
IC1007
3
←
3
PQ1MX55M2SPQ
Voltage • Regulator
2
1
←
3
1
Voltage • Regulator
Voltage • Regulator
IC1008
1
←
1
1
1
1
–
1
1
1
1
1
–
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
PQ070XZ01ZPH
PQ070XZ01ZPH (PWC-4607)
PQ1MX55M2SPQ (PWC-4632)
NJM2872AF18 (TE1) (PWC-4607)
PWC-4632 is unused.
SI-3012LU-TL
NJM2872AF33 (TE1)
NJM2872AF05 (TE1)
PW2200B-10L
PW2200B-05L
AD7417ARU-REEL7
MXA2500EL
M24C16-WMN6T
LH28F800BJE
PW164B-10TKL
PW164B-05TKL
ASM3P2508A-08SR
ST3232EBDR
NJM2872AF33 (TE1)
BD45251G-TR
UPD65943GC-L92-YEB-A
KS6M3U1864CBP (UNI7)
AD8381JST
Generation of clock signals
RS232C driver/receiver
Voltage • Regulator
Reset
TIGHTCELL (G/A)
UNISEVEN (ASIC)
LCD panel driver
1
2
–
3
1
1
1
–
–
1
1
2
1
1
M62334FP
LM224PT
ADSY8401JCPZ
TC74VHCT540AFT (EL)
NJU4052BV
SN74LVU04APW
TC9WMB1FK (TE85L)
SN74CBT3125PW-ELL2
NJM2584AM
NJ2581M
TPS60403DBVR
Photodetector TSOP34838SB1
NJW1141M
LM4871MX
4chD/A converter
Buffer AMP
Level shift AMP
General-purpose logic
Selector
General-purpose logic
Plug & Play EEPROM
General-purpose logic
RGB selector
Video AMP
Voltage • Inverter
Remote control light receiver
Audio • Controller
Audio AMP
–
7
VT37/VT47
Model
Circuit symbol Q’ty
←
1 SI-3011ZD-TL (PWC-4607)
PQ070XH02 (PWC-4632)
←
7 PQ20WZ5UJ00H
IC1009
IC3007
IC3008
IC3009
IC4001
IC4002
IC5001
IC6001-3
–
1
–
1
–
1
1
1
1
1
–
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
IC6004
IC6005
IC6501-2
–
–
–
IC9001
IC9002
IC9003
IC9004
IC9005
IC9007, IC9901
IC9501
IC9502
1
1
2
–
–
–
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
←
IC6005, IC6007
–
IC6801-3
IC6804
IC6805
←
–
–
←
←
←
←
←
IC1017
–
IC2001
IC3001
IC3002
IC3003
IC3005
IC3006
8-6
←
IC1018
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
Voltage • Regulator
Voltage • Regulator
Voltage • Regulator
Voltage • Regulator
Voltage • Regulator
A/D converter and video decoder
Temperature sensor
Gravity acceleration sensor
16kbit EEPROM
8Mbit Flash memory
CPU built-in scaling IC
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
METHOD OF DISASSEMBLY
1. Diagonal view of the main unit front
The diagonal view diagram shown below is applicable to the VT470/ VT570/VT575/VT670 and VT676 Series.
The VT37/VT47 Series is not provided with a zoom lens. A zoom button is mounted.
The computer operating buttons used in the VT470/ VT570/VT575/VT670 and VT676 Series are located in
two positions (COMPUTER 1 / COMPUTER 2). For the VT37/VT47 Series, however, only one button (COMPUTER 1) is used. The button for COMPUTER 2 is not provided.
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
9-1
METHOD OF DISASSEMBLY
2. LAMP COVER / LAMP / HOLDER FILTER ASSY
1
(1) Remove the LAMP COVER. Lossen the two
LAMP screw
and take out the LAMP.
(2) Take out the HOLDER FILTER ASSY.
LENS CAP (PB52)
24F40111
HOLDER FILTER ASSY
24FT9271
24FT9471 (Applicable only to the VT470JY)
1
LAMP OPTION
LAMP COVER
24F39602
24F40772 (Applicable only to the VT470JY)
9-2
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
METHOD OF DISASSEMBLY
3. TOP COVER ASSY
(1) Remove the five screws
COVER ASSY.
1 and take out the TOP
TOP COVER ASSY
(Refer to P11-24)
1 SCREW (CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
24N04771
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
9-3
METHOD OF DISASSEMBLY
4. MAIN SASSY / SUPPORT (MAIN PWB)
(1) Remove the one screw
PORT (MAIN PWB).
1 and take out the SUP-
2
3
(2) Remove the two screws
and the two screws
,and take out the MAIN SASSY.
2 PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
910E251L
3
MAIN SASSY
(Refer to P11-22)
1 SCREW (CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
24N04771
BRACKET (I/O) ASSY
24HS3881 (VT37 Series)
24HS3551 (VT47 Series)
24HS3671
(VT470/VT570/VT575/VT670/VT676 Series)
(Included in the MAIN SASSY.)
9-4
SUPPORT (MAIN PWB)
24F40391
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
http://getMANUAL.com
METHOD OF DISASSEMBLY
5. COVER (XDP) / GROUND METAL (DC-BS) / GROUND METAL (FAN-BS) / BRACKET
(3) Remove the three screws and take out the
(EXHAUST) T / THERMOSTAT SASSY
1
2
(1) Remove the two screws
and take out the
COVER (XDP).
(2) Remove the two screws
and take out the
GROUND MATAL (DC-BS).
3
GROUND METAL (FAN-BS) / BRACKET (EXHAUST) T.
(4) Remove the one screw and take out the THERMOSTAT SASSY.
4
2 PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
910E251L
GROUND METAL (FAN-BS)
24H51602
GROUND METAL (DC-BS)
24H49531
1 PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
910E251L
THERMISTOR
3 PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
910E251L
(SET-LAMP) SASSY
(Refer to P11-27)
CUSHION (SUPPORT) T
24J24821
BRACKET (EXHAUST) T
24H49571
COVER (XDP)
24F40172
4 PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
910E251L
THERMOSTAT SASSY
(Refer to P11-26)
5 PL-CPIMS*2.5*8*15KF
910E2523
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
9-5
METHOD OF DISASSEMBLY
6. ENGINE SASSY
(1) Remove the five screws
GINE SASSY.
1and take out the EN-
SCREW (CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
24N04771
ENGINE SASSY
9-6
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
METHOD OF DISASSEMBLY
7. BALLAST SASSY
(1) Remove the three screws
BALLAST SASSY.
1 and take out the
1 SCREW (CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
24N04771
BALLAST SASSY
(Refer to P10-3)
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
9-7
METHOD OF DISASSEMBLY
8. DC FAN
(1) Remove the two screws
BRACKET (FAN80).
1 and take out the
DC FAN 3110K L-04W-B39-C52
3N170072
(Refer to P11-9 in regard to the cushion
adhesion position. )
(2) Remove the two screws
FAN
2 and take out the DC
1 SCREW (CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
24N04771
CUSHION
24J24661
2 SCREW
PL-CPIMS*3*30*3KF
910E3196
BRACKET (FAN80)
24H49561
CUSHION (EXHAUST FAN) B
24J24671
9-8
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
METHOD OF DISASSEMBLY
9. PS SASSY
(1) Remove the four screws
SASSY.
1 and take out the PS
(2) Remove the two screws
PWB ASSY.
2 and take out the REM
1 SCREW (CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
24N04771
SHIELD CASE (POWER) T
24H49512
POWER SUPPLY UNIT (MAIN)
3N100611
REM PWB ASSY
(Refer to P11-22)
2 PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
910E251L
BURRIER (POWER)
24J24151
SHIELD CASE (POWER) B
24H49521
PWB HOLDER
24C01001
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
9-9
METHOD OF DISASSEMBLY
10. DUCT (LAMP FAN) SASSY / DC FAN
1
(1) Remove the two screws
and take out the
DUCT (LAMP FAN) SASSY / DC FAN.
1 SCREW (CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
24N04771
DUCT (LAMP FAN) SASSY
(Refer to P11-4)
CUSHION (FAN ROLL)
24J24831
(Refer to P11-5)
9-10
DC FAN D06F-12SS7 01A (EX)
3N170073
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
METHOD OF DISASSEMBLY
11.BRACKET (DETECT SW) / DETECT SW SASSY / POWER SUPPLY UNIT
1
(1) Remove the two screws
and take out the
BRACKET (DETECT SW).
(2) Remove the one screw
and take out the DETECT SW SASSY.
2
(3) Remove the one screw
POWER SUPPLY UNIT.
3 and take out the
3 SCREW (CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
BARRIER (FILTER)
24J24601
BRACKET (DETECT SW)
24H49541
1 SCREW (CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
2 SCREW (CBIPS *2*6*15BF)
91112031
DETECT SW SASSY
(Refer to P11-3)
POWER SUPPLY UNIT
(FILTER)
3N100621
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
9-11
METHOD OF DISASSEMBLY
12. DUCT (LCD FAN) SASSY / DC FAN
1
(1) Remove the four screws
and take out the
DUCT (LCD FAN) SASSY / DC FAN.
1 SCREW (CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
24N04771
DUCT (LCDFAN) SASSY
(Refer to P11-6)
DC FAN BG 1002-B042-00S-01
3N170075
CUSHION (FAN ROLL)
24J24831
(Refer to P11-7)
BOTTOM COVER ASSY
24DT9871 (VT37 Series)
24DT9322 (VT47/VT570/VT575 Series)
24DT9412 (VT470/VT670/VT676 Series)
24DT9562 (VT470JY)
9-12
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
METHOD OF DISASSEMBLY
13.BOTTOM COVER ASSY
(1) Applied to the VT37/VT47/VT470/ VT570/VT575/
VT670 and VT675 Series.
PUSH NUT (3.0)
24N06001
SPRING (FOOT F)
24H44271
LEVER (FOOT F) R
24G08831
HOLDER (FOOT) R
24F39931
SPRING (FOOT F)
24H44271
LEVER (FOOT) L
24G08781
SCREW (CBP_TIGHT 3*25*3GF)
24N07471
HOLDER (FOOT) L
24F39661
FOOT F
24F39651
SCREW (CBP_TIGHT 3*25*3GF)
24N07471
CUSHION (FOOT F)
24J20781
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
9-13
METHOD OF DISASSEMBLY
14.BOTTOM COVER ASSY
(1) Applied to the VT470JY.
PUSH NUT (3.0)
24N06001
SPRING (FOOT F)
24H44271
LEVER (FOOT F) R
24G08881
HOLDER (FOOT) R
24F40751
SPRING (FOOT F)
24H44271
LEVER (FOOT) L
24G088711
SCREW (CBP_TIGHT 3*25*3GF)
24N07471
HOLDER (FOOT) L
24F40741
FOOT F
24F40731
SCREW (CBP_TIGHT 3*25*3GF)
24N07471
9-14
CUSHION (FOOT F)
24J20781
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
http://getMANUAL.com
METHOD OF DISASSEMBLY
15. OPT BASE SASSY
(1) Remove the two screws
BASE SASSY.
1 and take out the OPT
1 SCREW,PL-CPIMS*3*8*3GF
910E305L
OPT BASE SASSY
(Refer to P11-21)
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
9-15
METHOD OF DISASSEMBLY
16.POLARIZER R SASSY / POLARIZER G SASSY / POLARIZER B SASSY
(1) Remove the one screws
POLARIZER R SASSY.
1 and take out the
(2) Handle the POLARIZER G SASSY and the POLARIZER B SASSY in the same manner.
1 PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
910E251L
POLARIZER R SASSY
(Refer to P11-17)
POLARIZER G SASSY
(Refer to P11-17)
POLARIZER B SASSY
(Refer to P11-17)
9-16
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
METHOD OF DISASSEMBLY
17. RELAY LENS2 SASSY / FIELD LENS SASSY
1
(1) Remove the two screws
and take out the
COVER B.
(2) Remove the one screw
and take out the FIELD
LENS SASSY.
2
FIELD LENS SASSY
82J33311
or
82J21311
1 PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
910E251L
(3) Remove the one screw
LAY LENS2 SASSY.
3 and take out the RE-
2 SCREW,PL-CPIMS*2.5*8*15KF
910E2523
3 SCREW,PL-CPIMS*2.5*8*15KF
910E2523
RELAY LENS 2 SASSY
82J33321
COVER B
24F40162
SPACER RL2
(Refer to P11-18)
SPACER FL
(Refer to P11-18)
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
9-17
METHOD OF DISASSEMBLY
18.COVER A SASSY
(1) Remove the eight screws
COVER A SASSY.
1 and take out the
1 SCREW (CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
24N04771
COVER A SASSY
(Refe to P11-15)
9-18
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
METHOD OF DISRASSEMBLY
19.HOLDER (M1) / BARRIER (IT) / PS-CONVERTER SASSY / INTEGRATOR SASSY
1 and take out the
(1) Remove the two screws
HOLDER (M1).
(2) Take out the BARRIER (IT).
2
(3) Remove the two screws
and take out the PSCONVERTER SASSY/INTEGRATOR SASSY.
2 PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
910E251L
PS-CONVERTER SASSY
82J33231 (VT37,47,470,570,575,676)
82J27231 (VT670)
INTEGRATOR SASSY
82J33251 (VT37,47,570,575)
82J21251 (VT470,670,676)
BARRIER (IT)
24H51111
(VT37/VT47/VT470/VT570/
VT575/VT676 Series)
24H52391
(VT670 Series)
1 PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
910E251L
HOLDER (M1)
24F40321
MIRROR1 (PB52)
12JS8531
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
9-19
METHOD OF DISASSEMBLY
20. MIRROR1 / MIRROR2 / DICHROIC MIRROR1 / DICHROIC MIRROR2 / RELAY LENS1 / CONDENSER LENS-R / G / B
(1) Remove the LEAF SPRING MIRROR and take
out the MIRROR1 / MIRROR2 / DICHROIC MIRROR1 /DICHROIC MIRROR2.
DAICHROIC MIRROR 2 (PB52)
12JS8521
LEAF SPRING MIRROR (PB52)
24H51091
CONDENSER LENS R (PB52-TC)
12JS8401
LEAF SPRING MIRROR (PB52)
24H51091
MIRROR 2 (PB52)
12JS8541
DAICHROIC
MIRROR 1 (PB52)
12JS8511
LEAF SPRING
MIRROR (PB52)
24H51091
RELAY LENS 1 (PB52-C)
12JS8461
CONDENSER LENS G (PB52-TC)
12JS8411
CONDENSER LENS B (PB52-TC)
12JS8421
9-20
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
DISASSEMBLY
• Main body
SW012
TOP COVER ASSY
(Refer to P11-24)
MAIN PWB ASSY
(Refer to P11-22)
SW012
GROUND METAL (DC-BS)
24H49531
SW016
SRW113
THERMISTOR (SET-LAMP) SASSY
(Refer to P11-27)
THERMOSTAT
SASSY
(Refer to P11-26)
SW012
COVER (XDP)
24F40172
SW002
SW002
SRW118
SW006
SW003
SW004
DUCT (LAMP FAN)
SASSY
(Refer to P11-4)
SRW119
SW002
DUCT (LCD FAN) SASSY
(Refer to P11-6)
GROUND METAL (FAN-BS)
24H51602
SW015
CUSHION
(SUPPORT) T
24J24821
BRACKET (EXHAUST) T
24H49571
CUSHION
24J24661
SW007
SW011
CUSHION
24J24831
BALLAST SASSY
(Refer to P10-3)
SUPPORT
(MAIN PWB)
24F40391
BARRIER (FILTER)
24J24601
THERMISTOR
(SET-LAMP) SASSY
(Refer to P11-27)
POWER SUPPLY
SW008
UNIT
3N100621
DC FAN
BG 1002B042-00S-01
3N170075
SW005
SHIELD CASE (POWER) T
24H49512
REM PWB ASSY
(Refer to P11-22)
DC FAN
D06F-12SS7
01A (EX)
3N170073
BRACKET (FAN80)
24H49561
SW014
POWER SUPPLY UNIT (MAIN)
3N100611
SW001
SW024
BURRIER (POWER)
24J24151
CUSHION
(EXHAUST FAN) B
24J24671
SW001
SW001
DC FAN 3110K L-04W-B39-C52
3N170072
(Refer to P11-9 in regard to the
cushion adhesion position. )
SHIELD CASE (POWER) B
24H49521
PWB HOLDER
24C01001
LAMP OPTION
LAMP COVER
24F39602
24F40772
(Applicable only to the VT470JY)
HOLDER FILTER ASSY
24FT9271
24FT9472 (Applicable only to the VT470JY)
BOTTOM COVER ASSY
24DT9871 (VT37 Series)
24DT9322 (VT47/VT570/VT575 Series)
24DT9412 (VT470/VT670/VT676 Series)
24DT9562 (VT470JY)
(Refer to P9-13 and P9-14 )
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
10-1
DISASSEMBLY
• Engine sassy
FIELD LENS SASSY
82J33311
or
SRW114
82J21311
RELAY LENS 2 SASSY
82J33321
POLARIZER G SASSY
(Refer to P11-17)
SRW115
SRW111
SRW111
DAICHROIC
MIRROR 2
(PB52)
12JS8521
SRW110
COVER B
24F40162
PS-CONVERTER SASSY
82J33231 (VT37,47,470,570,575,676)
82J27231 (VT670)
POLARIZER B SASSY
(Refer to P11-17)
POLARIZER R SASSY
(Refer to P11-17)
SRW111
SPACER RL2 (Refer to P11-18)
LEAF SPRING
MIRROR (PB52)
24H51091
SRW117
COVER A SASSY
(Refer to P11-15)
SPACER FL (Refer to P11-18)
SRW117
SRW116
OPT BASE SASSY
(Refer to P11-21)
SRW105
CONDENSER
LENS B (PB52-TC)
12JS8421
SRW109
INTEGRATOR SASSY
82J33251 (VT37,47,570,575)
82J21251 (VT470,670,676)
MIRROR 2 (PB52)
12JS8541
LEAF SPRING
MIRROR (PB52)
24H51091
LEAF SPRING
MIRROR (PB52)
24H51091
CONDENSER
LENS G (PB52-TC)
12JS8411
SRW112
BARRIER (IT)
24H51111
(VT37/VT47/VT470/VT570/VT575/VT676 Series)
24H52391
DAICHROIC MIRROR 1
(VT670 Series)
(PB52) 12JS8511
LEAF SPRING
MIRROR (PB52)
24H51091
MIRROR 2 (PB52)
12JS8541
CONDENSER LENS R (PB52-TC)
12JS8401
HOLDER (M1)
24F40321
MIRROR 1 (PB52)
12JS8531
SEPARATE BASE SASSY
(Refer to P11-11)
10-2
RELAY LENS 1 (PB52-C)
12JS8461
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
DISASSEMBLY
SHIELD CASE (BS) R
24H49551
DC FAN D05F-12BM 05A (EX)
3N170074
PWB HOLDER
24C01001
SW022
SHIELD (BS) F
24H49581
BURRIER (BS)
24J24161
POWER SUPPLY UNIT (BALLAST)
3N100581 (VT37/VT47/VT570/VT575 Series)
3N100571 (VT470/VT67/VT676 Series)
BALLAST SASSY
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
10-3
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM
Assembly Diagram 1
Diagram symbol
Circuit symbol
PS SASSY
Part name
Part code
Q’ty
101
102
SHIELD CASE (POWER) B
PWB HOLDER
24H49521
24C01001
1
3
201
BURRIER (POWER)
24J24151
1
301
POWER SUPPLY UNIT
3N100611
1
7NWEW010
Remarks
1
302
CNPW
CN 15P (PW) 70W, 1007-24
Check the type name of 301. SAFETY (MAIN)
Type name : MSE395
201
302
101
102
301
SAFETY
Check the type name of the power supply.
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
11-1
http://getMANUAL.com
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM
Assembly Diagram 2
Diagram symbol
BALLAST SASSY
Circuit symbol
Part name
Part code
Q’ty
Remarks
101
102
201
SHIELD CASE (BS) R
PWB HOLDER
BURRIER (BS)
24H49551
24C01001
24J24161
1
3
1
301
POWER SUPPLY UNIT
3N100581
1
301
POWER SUPPLY UNIT
3N100571
1
7NW3W057
7NW5W030
910E251L
1
1
1
Torque: 2.5~3.5kgf
VT37/VT47/VT570/VT575 series Type name :
PHG201G18BD (BALLAST) SAFETY
VT470/VT670/VT676 series Type name :
PHG201G18AD (BALLAST) SAFETY
Insert 302 firmly in CN1 of 301. SAFETY
302
303
304
CNDC
CNLC
SW021
CN 3P (DC) 225W, 1015-22
CN 5P (LC) 210W, 1061-28
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
401
402
SW022
DC FAN D05F-12BM 05A (EX)
SCREW PL-CPIMS*3*30*3KF
3N170074
910E3196
1
2
Torque: 4~6kgf
501
502
SW020
SHIELD (BS) F
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
24H49581
910E251L
1
2
Torque: 2.5~3.5kgf
TAPE, SCOTCH SUPER10
92203961
1
Approx. 30mm
601
Check the type name of the
power supply.
201: Let this side face outside.
SAFETY
304
101
102
201
301
401
501
402
502
303
302
Here, “101”
should be made
to face outside.
Here, “502”
should be made
to face outside.
SAFETY
Insert 302 firmly in CN1 of 301.
Direction of 302: The side of a shorter distance (5mm side) between terminal
and tube should be inserted in 301.
601
Tube
11-2
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM
Assembly Diagram 3
Diagram symbol
101
101
101
101
Circuit symbol
BOTTOM COVER ASSY
Part code
24DT9871
24DT9322
24DT9412
24DT9562
Q’ty
1
1
1
1
POWER SUPPLY UNIT
102
Part name
BOTTOM COVER ASSY (VT37)
BOTTOM COVER ASSY (VT47)
BOTTOM COVER ASSY (VT470)
BOTTOM COVER ASSY (VT470JY)
3N100621
1
Remarks
VT37 series
VT47/VT570/VT575 series
VT470/VT670/VT676 series
VT470JY
Check the type name of 102. SAFETY
Type name : MSE395B
103
104
SW007
BARRIER (FILTER)
SCREW (CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
24J24601
24N04771
1
1
Torque: 6~8kgf
201
202
SW009
DETECT SW SASSY
SCREW (CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
82J33691
24N04771
1
2
(FILTER)
Torque: 6~8kgf
201
Bend the portion where the wiring tube is not present.
Form it beneath the taped portion of the metal fitting.
Pass the SW wiring material beneath the metal fitting.
In this case, however, there must be no overlapping of the
wiring materials between SW and 102.
101
201
202
102
SAFETY
Check the type name of the
power supply.
The wiring material of 102 shall not touch the coil of 102.
103
104
The wiring material of 102 shall have no “kink” and “droop.”
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
11-3
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM
Assembly Diagram 4
Diagram symbol
101
102
DUCT (LAMP FAN) SASSY
Circuit symbol
Part name
DUCT (LAMP FAN)
CUSHION (FAN DUCT)
Part code
Q’ty
24F40071
24J24581
Remarks
1
2
101
102
11-4
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM
Assembly Diagram 5
Diagram symbol
Circuit symbol
SW004
Part code
Q’ty
DC FAN D06F-12SS7 01A (EX)
CUSHION (FAN ROLL)
101
102
201
202
DC FAN
Part name
3N170073
24J24831
1
1
DUCT (LAMP FAN) SASSY
SCREW (CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
24N04771
1
3
Remarks
Constitutive parts: Refer to the P11-4.
Torque: 6~8kgf
101
102
202
201
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
11-5
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM
Assembly Diagram 6
Diagram symbol
Circuit symbol
DUCT (LCD FAN)
Part name
Part code
Q’ty
Remarks
101
102
DUCT (LCD FAN)
CUSHION (FAN DUCT)
24F40141
24J24581
1
3
All models except for VT676.
101
DUCT (LCD FAN) ASSY
24FT9571
1
VT676 only
101
102
11-6
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM
Assembly Diagram 7
Diagram symbol
Part name
Part code
Q’ty
101
DC FAN BG1002-B042-OOS-01
3N170075
1
102
CUSHION (FAN ROLL)
24J24831
1
DUCT (LCD FAN) SASSY
SCREW (CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
24N04771
1
4
Constitutive parts: Refer to the P11-6.
Torque: 6~8kgf
HOLDER FILTER ASSY (VT47)
HOLDER FILTER ASSY (VT470JY)
24FT9271
24FT9472
1
1
Applicable only to the VT470JY
201
202
Circuit symbol
DC FAN
SW003
301
301
Remarks
101
102
201
301
202
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
11-7
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM
Assembly Diagram 8
Diagram symbol
PS SASSY
Circuit symbol
101
Part name
Part code
201
202
203
204
205
206
SHIELD CASE (POWER) T
SCREW (CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
GASKET (PS)
BARRIER (REM-PWB)
EARTH STRAP (E07S406200
TAPE, SCOTCH SUPER10
SW005
24H49512
24N04771
24J24891
24J25101
7NN1N021
92203961
Remarks
1
PS SASSY
Q’ty
Constitutive parts: Refer to the P11-1.
Insert 302 firmly in CN1 of 301. SAFETY
1
4
1
1
1
1
Torque: 6~8kgf
Approx. 30mm
101
SAFETY
Insert the wire material firmly
in CN2 of 101.
To be stuck, aligned to this plane.
Shield (power supply) T
204
201: This side shall be put in the interior of the bottom shield of 101.
Adjust it to the upper edge of 201.
201
Adjust it to the side edge of 201.
202
203
Barrier of 101: The upper side shall be faced outwards.
Bend the cable in this position and
apply it to the power supply (barrier) T.
Tighten them together.
The earth strap shall be bent downwards
so that the engine does not override it.
201: This side shall be put in the interior of the bottom shield of 101.
It shall be arranged not to come out of
the duct.
206
Apply the cable to the embossed part and
fix it with an adhesive tape.
NG
205
Set wiring between ribs.
Lay the cable in this notch.
11-8
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM
Assembly Diagram 9
Diagram symbol
Part code
Q’ty
BRACKET (FAN 80)
DC FAN 3110KL-04W-B39-C52
SCREW PL-CPIMS*3*3*3KF
24H49561
3N170072
910E3196
1
1
2
104
105
CUSHION (EXHAUST FAN) T
CUSHION (EXHAUST) S
24J24661
24J24811
1
1
201
CUSHION (EXHAUST FAN) B
24J24671
1
101
102
103
Circuit symbol
EXHAUST FAN SASSY
SW024
101
Part name
Remarks
Torque: 4~6kgf
Never pass the wiring material through this hook part.
104
102
103
105
201
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
11-9
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM
Assembly Diagram 10
Diagram symbol
101
102
Circuit symbol
SW008
EXHAUST FAN SASSY
Part name
EXHAUST FAN SASSY
SCREW (CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
Part code
Q’ty
24N04771
1
2
Remarks
Constitutive parts: Refer to the P11-9.
Torque: 6~8kgf
101
102
11-10
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM
Assembly Diagram 11
Diagram symbol
Circuit symbol
SW101
Part code
Q’ty
SEPARATE BASE (PB52)
LEAF SPRING (M1)
101
102
103
104
SEPARATE BASE SASSY
Part name
24F40192
24H51161
1
1
PLATE (DUCT)
CBIPS*2*6*3HF
24H51081
24N05321
1
4
Remarks
Torque: 2.5~3.5kgf
102
103
101
104
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
11-11
http://getMANUAL.com
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM
Assembly Diagram 12
Diagram symbol
SEPARATE BASE SASSY
Circuit symbol
Part name
Part code
Q’ty
Remarks
101
SEPARATE BASE SASSY
1
Constitutive parts: Refer to the P11-11.
201
LAMP
1
Torque: 4~6kgf
5
Torque: 6~8kgf
301
SW002
SCREW (CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
24N04771
101
Accessory screw for 201
201
Accessory screw for 201
301
11-12
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
OPTION
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM
Assembly Diagram 13
Diagram symbol
IT-PBS SASSY
Circuit symbol
Part name
Part code
Q’ty
Remarks
101
101
INTEGRATOR SASSY
INTEGRATOR SASSY
82J33251
82J21251
1
1
VT37/VT47/VT570/VT575 series
VT470/VT670/VT676 series
102
102
PS-CONVERTER SASSY
PS-CONVERTER SASSY
82J33231
82J27231
1
1
VT37/VT47/VT470 /VT570/VT575/VT676 series
VT670 series
CBIPS*2*6*3KF
24N05321
2
Torque: 2.0~2.5kgf
103
SRW105
101
103
Insert the flat PBS in the claw of the integrator SA.
103
102
102: For Series VT670
102: For Series VT47, 470, and 570
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
11-13
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM
Assembly Diagram 14
Diagram symbol
Optical Parts
Circuit symbol
Part name
Part code
Q’ty
Remarks
BARRIER (IT)
BARRIER (IT) (PB52)
IT-PBS SASSY
24H51111
24H52391
1
1
1
VT37/VT47/VT470/VT570/VT575/VT676 series
VT670 series
Constitutive parts: Refer to the P11-13.
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
910E251L
2
Torque: 2.5~3.5kgf
301
302
MIRROR 1 (PB52)
HOLDER (M1)
12JS8531
24F40321
1
1
401
402
403
DAICHROIC MIRROR 1 (PB52)
DAICHROIC MIRROR 2 (PB52)
RELAY LENS (PB52-C)
12JS8511
12JS8521
12JS8461
1
1
1
404
405
MIRROR 2 (PB52)
MIRROR 2 (PB52)
12JS8541
12JS8541
1
1
501
CONDENSER LENS R (PB52-TC)
12JS8401
1
502
CONDENSER LENS G (PB52-TC)
12JS8411
1
503
CONDENSER LENS B (PB52-TC)
12JS8421
1
601
LEAF SPRING MIRROR (PB52)
24H51091
8
101
201
202
SW109
501
502
503
Marking provided
301
Marking
XDP side
601: 8pcs.
302
405
Marking
XDP side
404
Marking
XDP side
403
402
Marking XDP side
401
Marking XDP side
201
202
101
For Series VT47,470 and 570
11-14
For Series VT670
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM
Assembly Diagram 15
Diagram symbol
101
102
Circuit symbol
COVER A SASSY
Part name
Part code
Q’ty
COVER A
CUSHION (COVER A)
24F40152
24J24571
Remarks
1
4
101
102
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
11-15
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM
Assembly Diagram 16
Diagram symbol
Circuit symbol
101
102
COVER A SASSY
Part name
COVER A SASSY
SCREW (CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
Part code
Q’ty
24N04771
1
8
Remarks
Constitutive parts: Refer to the P11-15.
Torque: 6~8kgf
101
102
11-16
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM
Assembly Diagram 17
Diagram symbol
POLARIZER R SASSY
Circuit symbol
Part name
Part code
Q’ty
24F40271
12JS9201
1
1
Part code
Q’ty
24F40271
12JS8071
1
1
Part code
Q’ty
HOLDER (POL T0.5)
HOLDER (POL T1.8)
24F40271
24F40351
1
1
VT37/VT47/VT570/VT575 series
VT470/VT670/VT676 series
POLARIZER B (PB55)
POLARIZER B (PB52)
12JS8081
12JS8051
1
1
VT37/VT47/VT570/VT575 series
VT470/VT670/VT676 series
HOLDER (POL T0.5)
POLARIZER R (PB55)
Remarks
POLARIZER G SASSY
Diagram symbol
Circuit symbol
Part name
HOLDER (POL T0.5)
POLARIZER G (PB55)
Remarks
POLARIZER B SASSY
Diagram symbol
Circuit symbol
Part name
Remarks
101
Marking
102
102: Let the convex side face 101.
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
11-17
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM
Assembly Diagram 18
Diagram symbol
Optical Parts
Circuit symbol
Part name
Part code
Q’ty
Remarks
101
102
POLARIZER R SASSY
POLARIZER G SASSY
82J33181
82J33191
1
1
Constitutive parts: Refer to the P11-17.
Constitutive parts: Refer to the P11-17.
103
POLARIZER B SASSY
82J33201
1
103
POLARIZER B SASSY
82J21201
1
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
910E251L
3
Constitutive parts: Refer to the P11-17.
VT37/VT47/VT570/VT575 series
Constitutive parts: Refer to the P11-17.
VT470/VT670 /VT676series
Torque: 2.5~3.5kgf
SPACER RL2 T0.1 (PB52)
SPACER RL2 T0.2 (PB52)
SPACER RL2 T0.3 (PB52)
SPACER RL2 T0.5 (PB52)
SPACER RL2 T1.0 (PB52)
24H51291
24H51301
24H51311
24H51321
24H51331
RELAY LENS 2 SASSY
SCREW, PL-CPIMS*2.5*8*15KF
82J33321
910E2523
301
301
301
301
301
SPACER FL T0.1 (PB52)
SPACER FL T0.2 (PB52)
SPACER FL T0.3 (PB52)
SPACER FL T0.5 (PB52)
SPACER FL T1.0 (PB52)
24H51241
24H51251
24H51261
24H51271
24H51281
302
302
FIELD LENS SASSY
FIELD LENS SASSY
82J33311
82J21311
1
OR
104
SRW111
201
201
201
201
201
202
203
SRW115
As required, change the spacer type during adjustment.
1
1
Torque: 2.5~3.5kgf
As required, change the spacer type during adjustment.
303
SRW114
SCREW, PL-CPIMS*2.5*8*15KF
910E2523
1
Torque: 2.5~3.5kgf
401
402
SRW110
COVER B
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
24F40162
910E251L
1
2
Torque: 2.5~3.5kgf
501
SRW112
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
910E251L
2
Torque: 2.5~3.5kgf
104
501
203
202
101
103
402
102
201
0.1
401
0.2
0.5
1.0
303
1.0
302
11-18
0.5
0.2
0.1
301
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM
Assembly Diagram 19
Diagram symbol
Circuit symbol
101
BALLAST SASSY
Part name
Part code
BALLAST SASSY
Q’ty
Remarks
1
Constitutive parts: Refer to the P11-2.
102
SW006
SCREW (CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
24N04771
4
Torque: 6~8kgf
202
SRW119
SCREW, PL-CPIMS*2.5*8*15KF
910E2523
2
Torque: 2.5~3.5kgf
301
302
SW016
GROUND METAL (DC-BS)
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
24H49531
910E251L
1
2
Torque: 2.5~3.5kgf
SAFETY
Insert the wire material of 101 firmly in CN3.
CN3
301
302
202
Lamp connector
101
102
102
Pull the AC filter toward you and screw-tighten it.
Tighten the earth strap together with ballast.
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
11-19
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM
Assembly Diagram 20
Diagram symbol
Circuit symbol
THERMOSTAT SASSY
Part name
Part code
Q’ty
Remarks
“100P” VT37/VT47/VT570/VT575 Series
Constitutive parts: Refer to the P11-26.
“120P” VT470/VT670/VT676 Series
Constitutive parts: Refer to the P11-26.
101
THERMOSTAT SASSY
82J33711
1
101
THERMOSTAT SASSY
82J21711
1
102
SRW118
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
910E251L
1
Torque: 2.5~3.5kgf
201
202
SW015
BRACKET (EXHAUST) T
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
24H49571
910E251L
1
2
Torque: 2.5~3.5kgf
301
302
303
SRW025
SW015
GROUND METAL (FAN-BS)
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
24H51602
910E251L
910E251L
1
1
1
Torque: 2.5~3.5kgf
Torque: 2.5~3.5kgf
401
402
SW015
THERMISTOR (SET-LAMP) SASY
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
82J33751
910E251L
1
1
Constitutive parts: Refer to the P11-27.
Torque: 2.5~3.5kgf
TAPE, SCOTCH SUPER10
92203961
1
Approx. 30mm
501
402
Adjust it to the edge.
Adjust it to
the edge.
401
202
201
The tip shall not touch here.
102
303
(201 and 301 tightened
together)
101
301
“100P” for VT47, 570
“120P” for VT470, 670
302
501
Ballast position for the wiring material of the
ballast power supply
11-20
Fix the core with an adhesive tape.
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM
Assembly Diagram 21
Diagram symbol
Circuit symbol
OPT BASE SASSY
Part name
Part code
Q’ty
Remarks
101
101
OPT BASE LRL (PB55) SASSY
OPT BASE RLR (PB55) SASSY
82J33121
82J33131
1
OR
101
OPT BASE LRL (PB53) SASSY
82J27121
1
101
OPT BASE RLR (PB53) SASSY
82J27131
OR
101
OPT BASE LRL (PB53A) SASSY
82J65121
1
101
OPT BASERLR (PB53A) SASSY
82J65131
OR
101
OPT BASE LLL (PB54) SASSY
82J24121
1
VT570 series
101
101
OPT BASW LRL (PB54) SASSY
OPT BASE RLR (PB54) SASY
82J98121
82J98131
1
OR
VT575 series
VT575 series
101
101
OPT BASE LRL (PB52) SASSY
OPT BASE RLR (PB52) SASSY
82J21121
82J21131
1
OR
VT670 series
VT670 series
101
101
OPT BASE LRL (PB52) SASSY
OPT BASE RLR (PB52) SASSY
82K35121
82K35131
1
OR
VT676 series
VT676 series
VT37/VT47 series
VT37/VT47 series
VT470 series (Applicable where the 8th digit of
the serial number is “N” or “H” or “F.”) VT470JY
VT470 series (Applicable where the 8th digit of
the serial number is “N” or “H” or “F.”) VT470JY
VT470 series (Applicable where the 8th digit of
the serial number is “T” or “V or “U.”)
VT470 series (Applicable where the 8th digit of
the serial number is “T” or “V or “U.”)
102
SRW116
SCREW, PL-CPIMS*3*8*3GF
910E305L
2
Torque: 4~6kgf
201
202
SRW113
COVER (XDP)
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
24F40172
910E251L
1
1
Torque: 2.5~3.5kgf
203
204
SRW113
THERMISTOR (SET-LAMP) SASSY
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
82J33751
910E251L
1
1
Constitutive parts: Refer to the P11-27.
Torque: 2.5~3.5kgf
101
102
203
201
204
202
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
11-21
http://getMANUAL.com
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM
Assembly Diagram 22
Diagram symbol
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
102
201
201
201
Circuit symbol
MAIN SASSY
Part name
REM PWB ASSY
REM PWB ASSY
REM PWB ASSY
REM PWB ASSY
REM PWB ASSY
REM PWB ASSY
REM PWB ASSY
REM PWB ASSY
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
MAIN SASSY
MAIN SASSY
MAIN SASSY
Part code
82K406B3
82J336B1
82J276B1
82J656B1
82J246B1
82J986B1
82J216B1
82K356B3
910E251L
82K406A3
82J336A1
82J276A1
Q’ty
OR
1
OR
OR
OR
OR
OR
OR
2
1
1
1
201
MAIN SASSY
82J656A1
1
201
201
201
201
202
203
204
302
MAIN SASSY
MAIN SASSY
MAIN SASSY
MAIN SASSY
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SCREW (CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
TAPE, SCOTCH SUPER10
82J246A1
82J986A1
82J216A1
82K356A3
910E251L
910E251L
24N04771
92203961
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
3
SW014
SW012
SW013
SW010
101
Caution for the mounting position:
Lead wires of the REM-PWB shall
not cause short-circuiting with the
power case.
Remarks
All model
VT37 series
VT47 series
VT470 series (Applicable where the 8th digit of
the serial number is “N” or “H” or “F.”), VT470JY
VT470 series (Applicable where the 8th digit of
the serial number is “T” or “V” or “U.”)
VT570 series
VT575 series
VT670 series
VT676 series
Torque: 2.5~3.5kgf
Torque: 2.5~3.5kgf
Torque: 6~8kgf
APPROX. 30mm
(PWB rear side)
The lead wire of the light-receiving
element shall be cut into a length
of less than 1mm.
POF2
302
102
REM-PWB
PORM
102
PS
POPW
POTH2
Thermistor (lamp) (2p)
302
Cables may be crossed.
302
POF3
POTH
BS (FAN) (4p)
Lower fan (2p)
Thermostat (3p)
POF4
BS (5p)
Exhaust fan (3p)
POCV
POBM
Thermistor (SET) (2p)
POLC
Suction Fan (3p)
POF1
202
204
201
203
5mm
2mm
Tape fastener added
Barrier (PS)
Shield (power supply) T
Nip the core with a cushion
and fix it.
Make sure the cable does not come
in contact with the speaker.
11-22
PS-BS cable
Fix the PS-BS cable with a tape so that
this cable can pass through this area.
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM
Assembly Diagram 23
Diagram symbol
SUPPORT (MAIN PWB)
Circuit symbol
Part name
Part code
Q’ty
Remarks
201
CUSHION (LED)
24J24801
1
Adhesion shall be done so that a rectangular silk-screen print of the PWB [D4009,
D4010, and D4011] can be seen.
203
BARRIER (MAIN PWB)
24J25111
1
Adhesion shall not override the tact SW.
101
SUPPORT (MAIN PWB)
24F40391
1
SCREW (CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
24N04771
1
102
SW011
Torque: 6~8kgf
Adhesion shall not override the tact SW.
203
MAIN part of the MAIN-PWB block
Adhesion shall be done so that a rectangular
silk-screen print of the PWB [D4009, D4010,
and D4011] can be seen.
201
101
102
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
11-23
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM
Assembly Diagram 24
Diagram symbol
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
Circuit symbol
TOP COVER ASSY
Part name
TOP COVER ASSY (VT37)
TOP COVER ASSY (VT47)
TOP COVER ASSY (VT470)
TOP COVER ASSY (VT570)
TOP COVER ASSY (VT575)
TOP COVER ASSY (VT670)
TOP COVER ASSY (VT676)
TOP COVER ASSY (VT470JY)
Part code
24DT9861
24DT9313
24DT9423
24DT9433
24DT9673
24DT9443
24DT9731
24DT9573
Q’ty
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
CAUTION LABEL (SERVICE)
24L46401
1
Do not forget the adhesion of the label.
SAFETY
Put the label top to face the front of the set.
SCREW (CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
24N04771
5
Torque: 6~8kgf
301
301
LAMP COVER (VT47)
LAMP COVER (VT470JY)
24F39602
24F40772
1
1
Applicable only to the VT470JY
302
CAUTION LABEL (LAMP COVER)
24L54091
1
102
201
SW001
Remarks
VT37 series
VT47 series
VT470 series
VT570 series
VT575G
VT670 series
VT676 series
VT470JY
Do not forget the adhesion of the label. SAFETY
Put the label top to face the front of the set.
101
102
Adjust it to the circle
( ) of the top cover.
SAFETY
Do not forget the adhesion of the label.
301
In the center of this section
302
Approx. 2~3mm
11-24
201
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM
Assembly Diagram 25
Diagram symbol
Circuit symbol
LABEL
Part name
Part code
Q’ty
101
102
201
LENS CAP (PB52)
STRAP
LABEL (PIXEL WORKS)
24F40111
24C07601
24L53141
1
1
1
301
401
401
501
502
502
502
502
502
502
502
502
502
502
502
502
502
502
502
502
502
502
502
502
502
502
502
502
502
502
502
502
502
502
502
502
502
502
502
502
503
CAUTION LABEL (LENZ 4)
CAUTION LABEL (VT70LP)
CAUTION LABEL (VT75LP)
CAUTION LABEL (FILTER)
NAME PLATE (VT37)
NAME PLATE (VT37) TS
NAME PLATE (VT37) SS
NAME PLATE (VT37G)
NAME PLATE (VT37G) C
NAME PLATE (VT47)
NAME PLATE (VT47) NK
NAME PLATE (VT47) TS
NAME PLATE (VT47G)
NAME PLATE (VT47G) C
NAME PLATE (VT47+) TS
NAME PLATE (VT470)
NAME PLATE (VT470) TS
NAME PLATE (VT470G)
NAME PLATE (VT470G) C
NAME PLATE (VT470+) TS
NAME PLATE (VT470JY)
NAME PLATE (VT470JY) TTS
NAME PLATE (VT570)
NAME PLATE (VT570) NK
NAME PLATE (VT570) TS
NAME PLATE (VT570G)
NAME PLATE (VT570G) C
NAME PLATE (VT575G)
NAME PLATE (VT575G) C
NAME PLATE (VT670)
NAME PLATE (VT670) TS
NAME PLATE (VT670G)
NAME PLATE (VT670G) C
NAME PLATE (VT670+) TS
NAME PLATE (VT675+)
NAME PLATE (VT676)
NAME PLATE (VT676) TS
NAME PLATE (VT676G)
NAME PLATE (VT676G) TS
NAME PLATE (VT676+) TS
LABEL, SERIAL MANUFACTURE
SERIAL LABEL
24L54101
24L54071
24L55221
24L54081
24L57301
24L57341
24L57471
24L57311
24L57351
24L54061
24L54511
24L54471
24L54361
24L54481
24L54561
24L54381
24L54451
24L54391
24L54461
24L54551
24L55511
24L55521
24L54361
24L54491
24L54431
24L54371
24L54441
24L56541
24L56551
24L54341
24L54411
24L54351
24L54421
24L54531
24L56591
24L56991
24L57011
24L57001
24L57021
24L57291
18775141
16761791
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Remarks
Put the label top to face the top of the set.
Do not forget the adhesion of the label.
SAFETY
VT37/VT47/VT570/VT575 series
VT470/VT670/VT676 series
VT37 (Made in Japan)
VT37 (Made in China)
VT37 (Made in China)
VT37 (Made in Japan)
VT37G (Made in China)
VT47 (Made in Japan))
VT47 (Made in China)
VT47 (Made in China)
VT47G (Made in Japan)
VT47G (Made in China)
VT47+ (Made in China)
VT470 (Made in Japan)
VT470 (Made in China)
VT470G (Made in Japan)
VT470G (Made in China)
VT470+ (Made in China)
VT470JY (Made in Japan)
VT470JY (Made in China)
VT570 (Made in Japan)
VT570 (Made in China)
VT570 (Made in China)
VT570G (Made in Japan)
VT570G (Made in China)
VT575G (Made in Japan)
VT575G (Made in China)
VT670 (Made in Japan)
VT670 (Made in China)
VT670G (Made in Japan)
VT670G (Made in China)
VT670+ (Made in China)
VT675+ (Made in China)
VT676 (Made in Japan)
VT676 (Made in China)
VT676G (Made in Japan)
VT676G (Made in China)
VT676+ (Made in China)
Put the label top to face the front of the set.
101
VT470/VT570/VT575/VT670/VT676 series
201
2~3mm
301
0~2mm
102
502
4~6mm
2~3mm
1~2mm
401
0~2mm
503
501
4~6mm
1~2mm
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
11-25
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM
Assembly Diagram 26
Diagram symbol
THERMOSTAT SASSY
Part code
Q’ty
CN 3P (BM) 50S, 3533-28
7NW30005
1
102
102
THERMOSTAT 67L 100P
THERMOSTAT 67L 120P
7N970010
7N970022
1
1
VT37/VT47/VT570/VT575 series
VT470/VT670/VT676 series
103
SUMI TUBE-K (2.4)
9R050002
2
(Approx. 12mm*2)
THERMOSTAT SASSY
THERMOSTAT SASSY
82J33711
82J21711
1
1
VT37/VT47/VT570/VT575 series
VT470/VT670/VT676 series
101
Circuit symbol
Part name
CNBM
Remarks
101
102
Shrinkage of corner tubes by a
blast jet
Bind and solder the connector.
103
The corner tube shall be arranged so that it
covers the soldered part and the connector.
11-26
Cut off the corner tube at the
extreme end of the lead.
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM
Assembly Diagram 27
Diagram symbol
101
102
103
THERMISTOR (SET-LAMP) SASSY
Circuit symbol
Part code
Q’ty
CN 2P (TH) 70S, 1685-26
THERMISTOR 103AT-2-3411
SUMITUBE-K (2.4)
7NW20029
3N810006
9R050002
1
1
2
THERMISTOR (SET-LAMP) SASSY
TH001
Part name
82J33751
Remarks
1
Approx. 12mm*2pcs
101
102
After the completion of soldering,
cut off the 102 lead with a portion
of about 12mm.
Bind and solder 101 on 102.
103
• This section shall be arranged so that it covers the soldered part and the connector.
• Treatment for shrinkage with a blast jet
• After shrinkage, cut off this section at the extreme end of the lead.
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
11-27
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM
Replacement of the Zoom Lever / Focus Ring
1) Replacement of the zoom lever (Part No.: 24F40121)
• Applicable to the VT470/VT570/VT575/VT670/VT676 Series. It is not applicable to the VT37/VT47 Series
where the fixed lens is used.
• There are two methods in regard to the installation of the zoom lever.
(In one case, the zoom lever is fixed to the place where Screw
is located. In another case, it is fixed Screw
is located. In both cases, the lever is fixed with two screws.)
• Remove two pieces of Screw
or Screw
and take out the zoom lever. [Refer to the picture shown below.]
• Pay attention to the mounting direction when the zoom lever is mounted.
* Fix the lever where it has been removed.
* The shorter part A should be positioned in the front and the longer part B should be positioned on the OPT
BASE side.
2
1
1
2
Zoom lever handle part
A
B
Screw 2
Screw 1
1
2) Replacement of the focus ring (Part No.: 24F40131)
• Remove three pieces of Screw
and take out the focus ring. [Refer to the picture shown below.]
• Pay attention to the screw fixing parts (in 3 positions) when the focus ring is mounted.
(As shown in the picture below, the focus ring is fixed with a screw in one place. Since then, the focus ring is
fixed with the remaining two screws, each apart from the first fixing part by 120°.
For the VT470/VT570/VT575/VT670/VT676 Series, use the three holes on the left side as seen from the
boundary line.
For the VT37/VT47 Series, use the three holes on the right side as seen from the boundary line.
Boundary line
Screw 1
120°
120
Focus ring
For the VT47 Series
120°
120
Screw 1
120°
120
11-28
Screw 1
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
PACKAGING
1. VT37
Soft case (VT470) : 24BS7423
Carton sheet (VT70): 24MU9932
To be put on the accessory box (VT70).
* Note: To be accommodated in the state
of being contained in the bag at the time
of delivery.
• To be accommodated so that the set
insertion hole side or the bottom side
comes to the front side of the corrugated
cardboard box.
• To be accommodated so that the softcase
front (buckle side) is faced downwards.
*Note: Put it almost in the center of the box.
Registration card (USA): 7N8P1351
To be put on the accessory box (VT70).
VT37 IMPORTANT INFO (U/G): 7N8P5681
VT70 WARRANTY SHEET (US): 7N8P5691
VT37 USER'S MANUAL CD-ROM (U/G): 7N950631
VT37 QUICK GUIDE (U/G): 7N8P5671
LABEL (INSTA CARE) (VT70LP): 24L54112
POW CORD U2 L3.0 7.0A V: 7N080212
CABLE RGB 1.8M VER3 TE: 7N520032
RD-409E: 7N900522
Battery R03UG (JE) SP-2 : 6N800007 2pcs.
Are to be accommodated.
*Note: Put the printed matter and CD-ROM in the first place.
Spacer L (VT70)
24MU9581
Accessory box (VT70): 24MU9601
Main body
Protection bag (420*460): 24M16171
Put the main unit in, and fold back the bag.
Spacer R (VT70)
24MU9591
Bar code label adhesion side
Carton box (VT70): 24MU9611
Front side
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
12-1
PACKAGING
Indication and indicating plate
• Print the following items to the bar code serial label (16761791)
∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗
VT37
Commodity No.
Serial NO.
• Stick the barcode serial label and the discrimination label (20. blue) to the corrugated
cardboard box in the predetermined positions.
Discrimination label (20. blue): 24L53171
Projector
N E C
Bar code serial label
(Label adhesion side)
Adhesion of the label (carton)
• Stick the label (carton) in the specified position as illustrated below.
Stick it, aligned to the section above [ ] printed on the corrugated cardboard.
VT
37
Bar code label
VT
37
Label (carton) (VT37)
24L57321
12-2
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
PACKAGING
2. VT47
Soft case (VT470) : 24BS7423
Carton sheet (VT70): 24MU9932
To be put on the accessory box (VT70).
* Note: To be accommodated in the state
of being contained in the bag at the time
of delivery.
• To be accommodated so that the set
insertion hole side or the bottom side
comes to the front side of the corrugated
cardboard box.
• To be accommodated so that the softcase
front (buckle side) is faced downwards.
*Note: Put it almost in the center of the box.
Registration card (USA): 7N8P1351
To be put on the accessory box (VT70).
VT70 IMPORTANT INFO (U/G): 7N8P4402
VT70 WARRANTY SHEET (US): 7N8P4412
VT70 USER'S MANUAL CD-ROM (U/G): 7N950493
VT70 QUICK GUIDE (U/G): 7N8P4372
LABEL (INSTA CARE) (VT70LP): 24L54112
POW CORD U2 L3.0 7.0A V: 7N080212
CABLE RGB 1.8M VER3 TE: 7N520032
RD-409E: 7N900522
Are to be accommodated.
*Note: Put the printed matter and CD-ROM in the first place.
Spacer L (VT70)
24MU9581
Accessory box (VT70): 24MU9601
Main body
Protection bag (420*460): 24M16171
Put the main unit in, and fold back the bag.
Spacer R (VT70)
24MU9591
Bar code label adhesion side
Carton box (VT70): 24MU9611
Front side
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
12-3
http://getMANUAL.com
PACKAGING
Indication and indicating plate
• Print the following items to the bar code serial label (16761791)
∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗
VT47
Commodity No.
Serial NO.
• Stick the barcode serial label and the discrimination label (20. blue) to the corrugated
cardboard box in the predetermined positions.
Discrimination label (20. blue): 24L53171
Projector
N E C
Bar code serial label
(Label adhesion side)
Adhesion of the label (carton)
• Stick the label (carton) L and the label (carton) R in the specified position as illustrated below.
Stick it, aligned to the section above [ ] printed on the corrugated cardboard.
VT
47
47
VT
U
C
UP
Label (carton) (47) L
24L54751
12-4
Bar code label
VT
47
47
VT
U
Label (carton) (47) R
24L54762
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
PACKAGING
3. VT470
Soft case (VT470) : 24BS7423
Carton sheet (VT70): 24MU9932
To be put on the accessory box (VT70).
* Note: To be accommodated in the state
of being contained in the bag at the time
of delivery.
• To be accommodated so that the set
insertion hole side or the bottom side
comes to the front side of the corrugated
cardboard box.
• To be accommodated so that the softcase
front (buckle side) is faced downwards.
*Note: Put it almost in the center of the box.
Registration card (USA): 7N8P1351
To be put on the accessory box (VT70).
VT70 IMPORTANT INFO (U/G): 7N8P4402
VT70 WARRANTY SHEET (US): 7N8P4412
VT70 USER'S MANUAL CD-ROM (U/G): 7N950493
VT70 QUICK GUIDE (U/G): 7N8P4372
LABEL (INSTA CARE) (VT75LP): 24L55232
POW CORD U2 L4.5 7.0A LF V: 7N080213
CABLE RGB 1.8M VER3 TE: 7N520032
Receiver unit T103 : 7N900561
RD-409E: 7N900522
Battery R03UG (JE) SP-2 : 6N800007 2pcs.
Are to be accommodated.
*Note: Put the printed matter and CD-ROM in the first place.
Accessory box (VT70): 24MU9601
Spacer L (VT70)
24MU9581
Handle (VT70): 24F39671
This item shall be accommodated in the
state that it is contained in a bag at the
time of shipment.
Special screw (Handle M4): 24N07502*2
Screwdriver (M4): 24H51611
These items shall be contained in the protection
bag (screws): 24M18361.
The bag shall be folded back and fastened with
an adhesive tape.
It shall be packed in the accessory box.
Main body
Protection bag (420*460): 24M16171
Put the main unit in, and fold back the bag.
Spacer R (VT70)
24MU9591
Bar code label adhesion side
Carton box (VT70): 24MU9611
Front side
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
12-5
PACKAGING
Indication and indicating plate
• Print the following items to the bar code serial label (16761791)
∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗
VT470
Commodity No.
Serial NO.
• Stick the bar code serial label to the corrugated cardboard box in the specified position.
Projector
N E C
Bar code serial label
(Label adhesion side)
Adhesion of the label (carton)
• Stick the label (carton) L and the label (carton) R in the specified position as illustrated below.
Stick it, aligned to the section above [ ] printed on the corrugated cardboard.
VT
47
0
0
47 U
VT
C
UP
Label (carton) (470) L
24L54691
12-6
Bar code label
VT
47
0
47
VT
0
U
Label (carton) (470) R
24L54702
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
PACKAGING
4. VT570
Soft case (VT470) : 24BS7423
To be put on the accessory box (VT70).
* Note: To be accommodated in the state
of being contained in the bag at the time
of delivery.
• To be accommodated so that the set
insertion hole side or the bottom side
comes to the front side of the corrugated
cardboard box.
• To be accommodated so that the softcase
front (buckle side) is faced downwards.
Registration card (USA): 7N8P1351
To be put on the accessory box (VT70).
Carton sheet (VT70): 24MU9932
*Note: Put it almost in the center of the box.
VT70 IMPORTANT INFO (U/G): 7N8P4401
VT70 WARRANTY SHEET (US): 7N8P4411
VT70 USER'S MANUAL CD-ROM (U/G): 7N950492
VT70 QUICK GUIDE (U/G): 7N8P4371
LABEL (INSTA CARE) (VT70LP): 24L54112
POW CORD U2 L3.0 7.0A V: 7N080212
CABLE RGB 1.8M VER3 TE: 7N520032
RD-412E: 7N900551
Are to be accommodated.
*Note: Put the printed matter and CD-ROM in the first place.
Spacer L (VT70)
24MU9581
Accessory box (VT70): 24MU9601
Main body
Protection bag (420*460): 24M16171
Put the main unit in, and fold back the bag.
Spacer R (VT70)
24MU9591
Bar code label adhesion side
Front side
Carton box (VT70): 24MU9611
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
12-7
PACKAGING
Indication and indicating plate
• Print the following items to the bar code serial label (16761791)
∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗
VT570
Commodity No.
Serial NO.
• Stick the bar code serial label to the corrugated cardboard box in the specified position.
Projector
N E C
Bar code serial label
(Label adhesion side)
Adhesion of the label (carton)
• Stick the label (carton) L and the label (carton) R in the specified position as illustrated below.
Stick it, aligned to the section above [ ] printed on the corrugated cardboard.
VT
57
0
0
57 U
VT
C
UP
Label (carton) (570) L
24L54651
12-8
Bar code label
VT
57
0
57
VT
0
U
Label (carton) (570) R
24L54661
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
PACKAGING
5. VT575
Soft case (VT470) : 24BS7423
Carton sheet (VT70): 24MU9932
To be put on the accessory box (VT70).
* Note: To be accommodated in the state
of being contained in the bag at the time
of delivery.
• To be accommodated so that the set
insertion hole side or the bottom side
comes to the front side of the corrugated
cardboard box.
• To be accommodated so that the softcase
front (buckle side) is faced downwards.
*Note: Put it almost in the center of the box.
Registration card (USA): 7N8P1351
To be put on the accessory box (VT70).
VT70 IMPORTANT INFO (U/G): 7N8P4402
VT70 WARRANTY SHEET (US): 7N8P4412
VT70 USER'S MANUAL CD-ROM (U/G): 7N950493
VT70 QUICK GUIDE (U/G): 7N8P4372
POW CORD U2 L4.5 7.0A LF V: 7N080212
CABLE RGB 1.8M VER3 TE: 7N520032
RD-409E: 7N900522
LABEL (INSTA CARE) (VT70LP) : 24L54112
Battery R03UG (JE) SP-2 : 6N800007 2pcs.
Are to be accommodated.
*Note: Put the printed matter and CD-ROM in the first place.
Accessory box (VT70): 24MU9601
Spacer L (VT70)
24MU9581
Main body
Protection bag (420*460): 24M16171
Put the main unit in, and fold back the bag.
Spacer R (VT70)
24MU9591
Bar code label adhesion side
Front side
Carton box (VT70): 24MU9611
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
12-9
PACKAGING
Indication and indicating plate
• Print the following items to the bar code serial label (16761791)
∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗
VT575
Commodity No.
Serial NO.
• Stick the bar code serial label to the corrugated cardboard box in the specified position.
Projector
N E C
Bar code serial label
(Label adhesion side)
Adhesion of the label (carton)
• Stick the label (carton) in the specified position as illustrated below.
Stick it, aligned to the section above [ ] printed on the corrugated cardboard.
VT
57
5
VT
Bar code label
57
5
Label (carton) (VT575) L
24L57231
Label (carton) (VT575) R
24L57241
12-10
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
PACKAGING
6. VT670
Soft case (VT470) : 24BS7423
To be put on the accessory box (VT70).
* Note: To be accommodated in the state
of being contained in the bag at the time
of delivery.
• To be accommodated so that the set
insertion hole side or the bottom side
comes to the front side of the corrugated
cardboard box.
• To be accommodated so that the softcase
front (buckle side) is faced downwards.
Registration card (USA): 7N8P1351
To be put on the accessory box (VT70).
Carton sheet (VT70): 24MU9932
*Note: Put it almost in the center of the box.
VT70 IMPORTANT INFO (U/G): 7N8P4402
VT70 WARRANTY SHEET (US): 7N8P4412
VT70 USER'S MANUAL CD-ROM (U/G): 7N950493
VT70 QUICK GUIDE (U/G): 7N8P4372
LABEL (INSTA CARE) (VT75LP): 24L55232
POW CORD U2 L4.5 7.0A LF V: 7N080213
CABLE RGB 1.8M VER3 TE: 7N520032
RD-409E: 7N900522
Receiver unit T103 : 7N900561
Battery R03UG (JE) SP-2 : 6N800007 2pcs.
Are to be accommodated.
*Note: Put the printed matter and CD-ROM in the first place.
Accessory box (VT70): 24MU9601
Spacer L (VT70)
24MU9581
Handle (VT70): 24F39671
This item shall be accommodated in the
state that it is contained in a bag at the
time of shipment.
Special screw (Handle M4): 24N07502*2
Screwdriver (M4): 24H51611
These items shall be contained in the protection
bag (screws): 24M18361.
The bag shall be folded back and fastened with
an adhesive tape.
It shall be packed in the accessory box.
Main body
Protection bag (420*460): 24M16171
Put the main unit in, and fold back the bag.
Spacer R (VT70)
24MU9591
Bar code label adhesion side
Front side
Carton box (VT70): 24MU9611
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
12-11
PACKAGING
Indication and indicating plate
• Print the following items to the bar code serial label (16761791)
∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗
VT670
Commodity No.
Serial NO.
• Stick the bar code serial label to the corrugated cardboard box in the specified position.
Projector
N E C
Bar code serial label
(Label adhesion side)
Adhesion of the label (carton)
• Stick the label (carton) L and the label (carton) R in the specified position as illustrated below.
Stick it, aligned to the section above [ ] printed on the corrugated cardboard.
VT
67
0
0
67 U
VT
C
UP
Label (carton) (670) L
24L54591
12-12
Bar code label
VT
67
0
0
67 U
VT
Label (carton) (670) R
24L54601
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
PACKAGING
7. VT676
Soft case (VT470) : 24BS7423
To be put on the accessory box (VT70).
* Note: To be accommodated in the state
of being contained in the bag at the time
of delivery.
• To be accommodated so that the set
insertion hole side or the bottom side
comes to the front side of the corrugated
cardboard box.
• To be accommodated so that the softcase
front (buckle side) is faced downwards.
Registration card (USA): 7N8P1351
To be put on the accessory box (VT70).
Carton sheet (VT70): 24MU9932
*Note: Put it almost in the center of the box.
VT70 IMPORTANT INFO (U/G): 7N8P4402
VT70 WARRANTY SHEET (US): 7N8P4412
VT70 USER'S MANUAL CD-ROM (U/G): 7N950493
VT70 QUICK GUIDE (U/G): 7N8P4372
LABEL (INSTA CARE) (VT75LP): 24L55232
POW CORD U2 L4.5 7.0A LF V: 7N080213
CABLE RGB 1.8M VER3 TE: 7N520032
RD-409E: 7N900522
Receiver unit T103 : 7N900561
Battery R03UG (JE) SP-2 : 6N800007 2pcs.
Are to be accommodated.
*Note: Put the printed matter and CD-ROM in the first place.
Accessory box (VT70): 24MU9601
Spacer L (VT70)
24MU9581
Handle (VT70): 24F39671
This item shall be accommodated in the
state that it is contained in a bag at the
time of shipment.
Special screw (Handle M4): 24N07502*2
Screwdriver (M4): 24H51611
These items shall be contained in the protection
bag (screws): 24M18361.
The bag shall be folded back and fastened with
an adhesive tape.
It shall be packed in the accessory box.
Main body
Protection bag (420*460): 24M16171
Put the main unit in, and fold back the bag.
Spacer R (VT70)
24MU9591
Bar code label adhesion side
Front side
Carton box (VT70): 24MU9611
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
12-13
http://getMANUAL.com
PACKAGING
Indication and indicating plate
• Print the following items to the bar code serial label (16761791)
∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗
VT676
Commodity No.
Serial NO.
• Stick the bar code serial label to the corrugated cardboard box in the specified position.
Projector
N E C
Bar code serial label
(Label adhesion side)
Adhesion of the label (carton)
• Stick the label (carton) in the specified position as illustrated below.
Stick it, aligned to the section above [ ] printed on the corrugated cardboard.
VT
67
6
6
67
VT
UP
C
Bar code label
VT
67
6
6
67
VT
C
UP
Label (carton) (VT676)
24L57201
12-14
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
PACKAGING
8. VT37G
Soft case (VT470) : 24BS7423
To be put on the accessory box (VT70).
* Note: To be accommodated in the state
of being contained in the bag at the time
of delivery.
• To be accommodated so that the set
insertion hole side or the bottom side
comes to the front side of the corrugated
cardboard box.
• To be accommodated so that the softcase
front (buckle side) is faced downwards.
Carton sheet (VT70): 24MU9932
*Note: Put it almost in the center of the box.
VT37 IMPORTANT INFO (U/G): 7N8P5681
WARRANTY SHEET (EUROPE): 7N8P1612
VT37 USER'S MANUAL CD-ROM (U/G): 7N950631
VT37 QUICK GUIDE (U/G): 7N8P5671
POW CORD E2 L3.0 2.5A LF K: 7N080009
CABLE RGB 1.8M VER3 TE: 7N520032
RD-409E: 7N900522
Battery R03UG (JE) SP-2 : 6N800007 2pcs.
Are to be accommodated.
*Note: Put the printed matter and CD-ROM in the first place.
Spacer L (VT70)
24MU9581
Accessory box (VT70): 24MU9601
Main body
Protection bag (420*460): 24M16171
Put the main unit in, and fold back the bag.
Spacer R (VT70)
24MU9591
Bar code label adhesion side
Front side
Carton box (VT70): 24MU9611
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
12-15
PACKAGING
Indication and indicating plate
• Print the following items to the bar code serial label (16761791)
∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗
VT37G
Commodity No.
Serial NO.
• Stick the barcode serial label and the discrimination label (20. blue) to the corrugated
cardboard box in the predetermined positions.
Discrimination label (20. blue): 24L53171
Projector
N E C
Bar code serial label
(Label adhesion side)
Adhesion of the label (carton)
• Stick the label (carton) in the specified position as illustrated below.
Stick it, aligned to the section above [ ] printed on the corrugated cardboard.
VT
37G
Bar code label
VT
37G
Label (carton) (VT37G)
24L57331
12-16
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
PACKAGING
9. VT47G
Soft case (VT470) : 24BS7423
To be put on the accessory box (VT70).
* Note: To be accommodated in the state
of being contained in the bag at the time
of delivery.
• To be accommodated so that the set
insertion hole side or the bottom side
comes to the front side of the corrugated
cardboard box.
• To be accommodated so that the softcase
front (buckle side) is faced downwards.
Carton sheet (VT70): 24MU9932
*Note: Put it almost in the center of the box.
VT70 IMPORTANT INFO (U/G): 7N8P4402
WARRANTY (EUROPE): 7N8P1612
VT70 USER'S MANUAL CD-ROM (U/G): 7N950493
VT70 QUICK GUIDE (U/G): 7N8P4372
POW CORD E2 L3.0 2.5A K: 7N080005
CABLE RGB 1.8M VER3 TE: 7N520032
RD-409E: 7N900522
Are to be accommodated.
*Note: Put the printed matter and CD-ROM in the first place.
Accessory box (VT70): 24MU9601
Spacer L (VT70)
24MU9581
Main body
Protection bag (420*460): 24M16171
Put the main unit in, and fold back the bag.
Spacer R (VT70)
24MU9591
Bar code label adhesion side
Front side
Carton box (VT70): 24MU9611
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
12-17
PACKAGING
Indication and indicating plate
• Print the following items to the bar code serial label (16761791)
∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗
VT47G
Commodity No.
Serial NO.
• Stick the bar code serial label to the corrugated cardboard box in the specified position.
Discrimination label (20. blue): 24L53171
Projector
N E C
Bar code serial label
(Label adhesion side)
Adhesion of the label (carton)
• Stick the label (carton) L and the label (carton) R in the specified position as illustrated below.
Stick it, aligned to the section above [ ] printed on the corrugated cardboard.
VT
47
G
Label (carton) (47G) L
24L54772
12-18
Bar code label
VT
47
G
Label (carton) (47G) R
24L54782
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
PACKAGING
10. VT470G
Soft case (VT470) : 24BS7423
To be put on the accessory box (VT70).
* Note: To be accommodated in the state
of being contained in the bag at the time
of delivery.
• To be accommodated so that the set
insertion hole side or the bottom side
comes to the front side of the corrugated
cardboard box.
• To be accommodated so that the softcase
front (buckle side) is faced downwards.
Carton sheet (VT70): 24MU9932
*Note: Put it almost in the center of the box.
VT70 IMPORTANT INFO (U/G): 7N8P4402
WARRANTY (EUROPE): 7N8P1612
VT70 USER'S MANUAL CD-ROM (U/G): 7N950493
VT70 QUICK GUIDE (U/G): 7N8P4372
POW CORD E2 L4.5 2.5A LF V: 7N080007
CABLE RGB 1.8M VER3 TE: 7N520032
RD-409E: 7N900522
Receiver unit T103 : 7N900561
Battery R03UG (JE) SP-2 : 6N800007 2pcs.
Are to be accommodated.
*Note: Put the printed matter and CD-ROM in the first place.
Accessory box (VT70): 24MU9601
Spacer L (VT70)
24MU9581
Handle (VT70): 24F39671
This item shall be accommodated in the
state that it is contained in a bag at the
time of shipment.
Special screw (Handle M4): 24N07502*2
Screwdriver (M4): 24H51611
These items shall be contained in the protection
bag (screws): 24M18361.
The bag shall be folded back and fastened with
an adhesive tape.
It shall be packed in the accessory box.
Main body
Protection bag (420*460): 24M16171
Put the main unit in, and fold back the bag.
Spacer R (VT70)
24MU9591
Bar code label adhesion side
Front side
Carton box (VT70): 24MU9611
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
12-19
PACKAGING
Indication and indicating plate
• Print the following items to the bar code serial label (16761791)
∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗
VT470G
Commodity No.
Serial NO.
• Stick the bar code serial label to the corrugated cardboard box in the specified position.
Projector
N E C
Bar code serial label
(Label adhesion side)
Adhesion of the label (carton)
• Stick the label (carton) L and the label (carton) R in the specified position as illustrated below.
Stick it, aligned to the section above [ ] printed on the corrugated cardboard.
VT
47
0G
Label (carton) (470G) L
24L54712
12-20
Bar code label
VT
47
0G
Label (carton) (470G) R
24L54722
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
PACKAGING
11. VT570G
Soft case (VT470) : 24BS7423
To be put on the accessory box (VT70).
* Note: To be accommodated in the state
of being contained in the bag at the time
of delivery.
• To be accommodated so that the set
insertion hole side or the bottom side
comes to the front side of the corrugated
cardboard box.
• To be accommodated so that the softcase
front (buckle side) is faced downwards.
Carton sheet (VT70): 24MU9932
*Note: Put it almost in the center of the box.
VT70 IMPORTANT INFO (U/G): 7N8P4402
WARRANTY (EUROPE): 7N8P1612
VT70 USER'S MANUAL CD-ROM (U/G): 7N950492
VT70 QUICK GUIDE (U/G): 7N8P4371
POW CORD E2 L3.0 2.5A K: 7N080005
CABLE RGB 1.8M VER3 TE: 7N520032
RD-412E: 7N900551
Are to be accommodated.
*Note: Put the printed matter and CD-ROM in the first place.
Accessory box (VT70): 24MU9601
Spacer L (VT70)
24MU9581
Main body
Protection bag (420*460): 24M16171
Put the main unit in, and fold back the bag.
Spacer R (VT70)
24MU9591
Bar code label adhesion side
Front side
Carton box (VT70): 24MU9611
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
12-21
PACKAGING
Indication and indicating plate
• Print the following items to the bar code serial label (16761791)
∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗
VT570G
Commodity No.
Serial NO.
• Stick the bar code serial label to the corrugated cardboard box in the specified position.
Projector
N E C
Bar code serial label
(Label adhesion side)
Adhesion of the label (carton)
• Stick the label (carton) L and the label (carton) R in the specified position as illustrated below.
Stick it, aligned to the section above [ ] printed on the corrugated cardboard.
VT
57
0G
Label (carton) (570G) L
24L54672
12-22
Bar code label
VT
57
0G
Label (carton) (570G) R
24L54681
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
PACKAGING
12. VT575G
Soft case (VT470) : 24BS7423
To be put on the accessory box (VT70).
* Note: To be accommodated in the state
of being contained in the bag at the time
of delivery.
• To be accommodated so that the set
insertion hole side or the bottom side
comes to the front side of the corrugated
cardboard box.
• To be accommodated so that the softcase
front (buckle side) is faced downwards.
Carton sheet (VT70): 24MU9932
*Note: Put it almost in the center of the box.
VT70 IMPORTANT INFO (U/G): 7N8P4402
WARRANTY (EUROPE): 7N8P1612
VT70 USER'S MANUAL CD-ROM (U/G): 7N950493
VT70 QUICK GUIDE (U/G): 7N8P4372
POW CORD E2 L4.5 2.5A LF K: 7N080007
CABLE RGB 1.8M VER3 TE: 7N520032
RD-409E: 7N900522
Battery R03UG (JE) SP-2 : 6N800007 2pcs.
Are to be accommodated.
*Note: Put the printed matter and CD-ROM in the first place.
Accessory box (VT70): 24MU9601
Spacer L (VT70)
24MU9581
Main body
Protection bag (420*460): 24M16171
Put the main unit in, and fold back the bag.
Spacer R (VT70)
24MU9591
Bar code label adhesion side
Front side
Carton box (VT70): 24MU9611
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
12-23
http://getMANUAL.com
PACKAGING
Indication and indicating plate
• Print the following items to the bar code serial label (16761791)
∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗
VT575G
Commodity No.
Serial NO.
• Stick the bar code serial label to the corrugated cardboard box in the specified position.
Projector
N E C
Bar code serial label
(Label adhesion side)
Adhesion of the label (carton)
• Stick the label (carton) L and the label (carton) R in the specified position as illustrated below.
Stick it, aligned to the section above [ ] printed on the corrugated cardboard.
VT
57
5G
Label (carton) (575G) L
24L56561
12-24
Bar code label
VT
57
5G
Label (carton) (575G) R
24L56571
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
PACKAGING
13. VT670G
Soft case (VT470) : 24BS7423
To be put on the accessory box (VT70).
* Note: To be accommodated in the state
of being contained in the bag at the time
of delivery.
• To be accommodated so that the set
insertion hole side or the bottom side
comes to the front side of the corrugated
cardboard box.
• To be accommodated so that the softcase
front (buckle side) is faced downwards.
Carton sheet (VT70): 24MU9932
*Note: Put it almost in the center of the box.
VT70 IMPORTANT INFO (U/G): 7N8P4402
WARRANTY (EUROPE): 7N8P1612
VT70 USER'S MANUAL CD-ROM (U/G): 7N950493
VT70 QUICK GUIDE (U/G): 7N8P4372
POW CORD E2 L4.5 2.5A LF K: 7N080007
CABLE RGB 1.8M VER3 TE: 7N520032
RD-409E: 7N900522
Receiver unit T103 : 7N900561
Battery R03UG (JE) SP-2 : 6N800007 2pcs.
Are to be accommodated.
*Note: Put the printed matter and CD-ROM in the first place.
Accessory box (VT70): 24MU9601
Spacer L (VT70)
24MU9581
Handle (VT70): 24F39671
This item shall be accommodated in the
state that it is contained in a bag at the
time of shipment.
Special screw (Handle M4): 24N07502*2
Screwdriver (M4): 24H51611
These items shall be contained in the protection
bag (screws): 24M18361.
The bag shall be folded back and fastened with
an adhesive tape.
It shall be packed in the accessory box.
Main body
Protection bag (420*460): 24M16171
Put the main unit in, and fold back the bag.
Spacer R (VT70)
24MU9591
Bar code label adhesion side
Front side
Carton box (VT70): 24MU9611
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
12-25
PACKAGING
Indication and indicating plate
• Print the following items to the bar code serial label (16761791)
∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗
VT670G
Commodity No.
Serial NO.
• Stick the bar code serial label to the corrugated cardboard box in the specified position.
Projector
N E C
Bar code serial label
(Label adhesion side)
Adhesion of the label (carton)
• Stick the label (carton) L and the label (carton) R in the specified position as illustrated below.
Stick it, aligned to the section above [ ] printed on the corrugated cardboard.
VT
67
0G
Label (carton) (670G) L
24L54612
12-26
Bar code label
VT
67
0G
Label (carton) (670G) R
24L54621
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
PACKAGING
14. VT676G
Soft case (VT470) : 24BS7423
To be put on the accessory box (VT70).
* Note: To be accommodated in the state
of being contained in the bag at the time
of delivery.
• To be accommodated so that the set
insertion hole side or the bottom side
comes to the front side of the corrugated
cardboard box.
• To be accommodated so that the softcase
front (buckle side) is faced downwards.
Carton sheet (VT70): 24MU9932
*Note: Put it almost in the center of the box.
VT70 IMPORTANT INFO (U/G): 7N8P4402
WARRANTY (EUROPE): 7N8P1612
VT70 USER'S MANUAL CD-ROM (U/G): 7N950493
VT70 QUICK GUIDE (U/G): 7N8P4372
POW CORD E2 L4.5 2.5A LF K: 7N080007
CABLE RGB 1.8M VER3 TE: 7N520032
RD-409E: 7N900522
Receiver unit T103 : 7N900561
Battery R03UG (JE) SP-2 : 6N800007 2pcs.
Are to be accommodated.
*Note: Put the printed matter and CD-ROM in the first place.
Accessory box (VT70): 24MU9601
Spacer L (VT70)
24MU9581
Handle (VT70): 24F39671
This item shall be accommodated in the
state that it is contained in a bag at the
time of shipment.
Special screw (Handle M4): 24N07502*2
Screwdriver (M4): 24H51611
These items shall be contained in the protection
bag (screws): 24M18361.
The bag shall be folded back and fastened with
an adhesive tape.
It shall be packed in the accessory box.
Main body
Protection bag (420*460): 24M16171
Put the main unit in, and fold back the bag.
Spacer R (VT70)
24MU9591
Bar code label adhesion side
Front side
Carton box (VT70): 24MU9611
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
12-27
PACKAGING
Indication and indicating plate
• Print the following items to the bar code serial label (16761791)
∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗
VT676G
Commodity No.
Serial NO.
• Stick the bar code serial label to the corrugated cardboard box in the specified position.
Projector
N E C
Bar code serial label
(Label adhesion side)
Adhesion of the label (carton)
• Stick the label (carton) in the specified position as illustrated below.
Stick it, aligned to the section above [ ] printed on the corrugated cardboard.
VT
67
6G
Bar code label
VT
67
6G
Label (carton) (VT676G)
24L57211
12-28
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
PACKAGING
15. VT47JA
Soft case (VT470) : 24BS7423
To be put on the accessory box (VT70).
* Note: To be accommodated in the state
of being contained in the bag at the time
of delivery.
• To be accommodated so that the set
insertion hole side or the bottom side
comes to the front side of the corrugated
cardboard box.
• To be accommodated so that the softcase
front (buckle side) is faced downwards.
VLC registration sheet: 7N8P0962
To be put on the accessory box (VT70).
Carton sheet (VT70): 24MU9932
*Note: Put it almost in the center of the box.
VT47 USER'S MANUAL (J): 7N8P5062
VT47J QUICK GUIDE (J): 7N8P5072
POW CORD J2 L3.0 7.0A LF K: 7N080114
CABLE RGB 1.8M VER3 TE: 7N520032
RD-409E: 7N900522
Are to be accommodated.
*Note: Put the printed matter and CD-ROM in the first place.
Accessory box (VT70): 24MU9601
Spacer L (VT70)
24MU9581
Main body
Protection bag (420*460): 24M16171
Put the main unit in, and fold back the bag.
Spacer R (VT70)
24MU9591
Bar code label adhesion side
Front side
Carton box (VT70): 24MU9611
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
12-29
PACKAGING
Protection warranty sheet 7N8P0025
Put it in a warranty sheet bag (polyethylene)
100*200 78047921 and fasten it to the inner
flap with an adhesive tape.
VT
47J
Label (carton) (47J) L
24L54791
Bar code label
Indication and indicating plate
• Print the following items to the bar code serial label (16761791)
∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗
VT47J
Commodity No.
Serial NO.
• Stick the bar code serial label to the corrugated cardboard box in the specified position.
Discrimination label (20. blue): 24L53171
Projector
N E C
Bar code serial label
(Label adhesion side)
Adhesion of the label (carton)
• Stick the label (carton) L and the label (carton) R in the specified position as illustrated below.
Stick it, aligned to the section above [ ] printed on the corrugated cardboard.
VT
47J
Label (carton) (47J) L
24L54791
12-30
Bar code label
VT
47J
Label (carton) (47J) R
24L54801
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
PACKAGING
16. VT470J
Soft case (VT470) : 24BS7423
To be put on the accessory box (VT70).
* Note: To be accommodated in the state
of being contained in the bag at the time
of delivery.
• To be accommodated so that the set
insertion hole side or the bottom side
comes to the front side of the corrugated
cardboard box.
• To be accommodated so that the softcase
front (buckle side) is faced downwards.
VLC registration sheet: 7N8P0962
To be put on the accessory box (VT70).
Carton sheet (VT70): 24MU9932
*Note: Put it almost in the center of the box.
VT47J USER'S MANUAL (J): 7N8P5062
VT47J QUICK GUIDE (J): 7N8P5072
POW CORD J2 L4.5 7.0A LF K: 7N080115
CABLE RGB 1.8M VER3 TE: 7N520032
RD-409E: 7N900522
Receiver unit T103 : 7N900561
Battery R03UG (JE) SP-2 : 6N800007 2pcs.
Are to be accommodated.
*Note: Put the printed matter and CD-ROM in the first place.
Accessory box (VT70): 24MU9601
Spacer L (VT70)
24MU9581
Handle (VT70): 24F39671
This item shall be accommodated in the
state that it is contained in a bag at the
time of shipment.
Special screw (Handle M4): 24N07502*2
Screwdriver (M4): 24H51611
These items shall be contained in the protection
bag (screws): 24M18361.
The bag shall be folded back and fastened with
an adhesive tape.
It shall be packed in the accessory box.
Main body
Protection bag (420*460): 24M16171
Put the main unit in, and fold back the bag.
Spacer R (VT70)
24MU9591
Bar code label adhesion side
Front side
Carton box (VT70): 24MU9611
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
12-31
PACKAGING
Protection warranty sheet 7N8P0025
Put it in a warranty sheet bag (polyethylene)
100*200 78047921 and fasten it to the inner
flap with an adhesive tape.
VT
470
J
Label (carton) (470J) L
24L54731
Bar code label
Indication and indicating plate
• Print the following items to the bar code serial label (16761791)
∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗
VT470J
Commodity No.
Serial NO.
• Stick the bar code serial label to the corrugated cardboard box in the specified position.
Projector
N E C
Bar code serial label
(Label adhesion side)
Adhesion of the label (carton)
• Stick the label (carton) L and the label (carton) R in the specified position as illustrated below.
Stick it, aligned to the section above [ ] printed on the corrugated cardboard.
VT
470
J
Label (carton) (470J) L
24L54731
12-32
Bar code label
VT
470
J
Label (carton) (470J) R
24L54741
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
PACKAGING
17. VT470JY
Soft case (VT470) : 24BS7423
To be put on the accessory box (VT70).
* Note: To be accommodated in the state
of being contained in the bag at the time
of delivery.
• To be accommodated so that the set
insertion hole side or the bottom side
comes to the front side of the corrugated
cardboard box.
• To be accommodated so that the softcase
front (buckle side) is faced downwards.
VLC registration sheet: 7N8P0962
To be put on the accessory box (VT70).
Carton sheet (VT70): 24MU9932
*Note: Put it almost in the center of the box.
VT470JY USER'S MANUAL : 7N8P5021
VT470JY QUICK GUIDE (J): 7N8P5031
POW CORD J2 L4.5 7.0A LF K: 7N080115
CABLE RGB 1.8M VER3 TE: 7N520032
RD-408E: 7N900511
Battery LR03 : 6N800012 2pcs.
Receiver unit T103 : 7N900561
Cable conversion ADP-CV1: 7N520046
Are to be accommodated.
*Note: Put the printed matter and CD-ROM in the first place.
Accessory box (VT70): 24MU9601
Spacer L (VT70)
24MU9581
Handle (VT470JY): 24F40781
This item shall be accommodated in the
state that it is contained in a bag at the
time of shipment.
Special screw (Handle M4): 24N07502*2
Screwdriver (M4): 24H51611
These items shall be contained in the protection
bag (screws): 24M18361.
The bag shall be folded back and fastened with
an adhesive tape.
It shall be packed in the accessory box.
Main body
Protection bag (420*460): 24M16171
Put the main unit in, and fold back
the bag.
Spacer R (VT70)
24MU9591
Bar code label adhesion side
Carton box (VT70): 24MU9611
Front side
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
12-33
http://getMANUAL.com
PACKAGING
Protection warranty sheet 7N8P0025
Put it in a warranty sheet bag (polyethylene)
100*200 78047921 and fasten it to the inner
flap with an adhesive tape.
Label (carton) (470JY) L
24L55531
VT
470
Bar code label
Indication and indicating plate
• Print the following items to the bar code serial label (16761791)
∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗
VT470JY
Commodity No.
Serial NO.
• Stick the bar code serial label to the corrugated cardboard box in the specified position.
Projector
N E C
Bar code serial label
(Label adhesion side)
Adhesion of the label (carton)
• Stick the label (carton) L and the label (carton) R in the specified position as illustrated below.
Stick it, aligned to the section above [ ] printed on the corrugated cardboard.
VT
470
VT
470
Bar code label
Label (carton) (VT470JY) L
24L55531
12-34
Label (carton) (VT470JY) R
24L55551
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
PACKAGING
18. VT670J
Soft case (VT470) : 24BS7423
To be put on the accessory box (VT70).
* Note: To be accommodated in the state
of being contained in the bag at the time
of delivery.
• To be accommodated so that the set
insertion hole side or the bottom side
comes to the front side of the corrugated
cardboard box.
• To be accommodated so that the softcase
front (buckle side) is faced downwards.
VLC registration sheet: 7N8P0962
To be put on the accessory box (VT70).
Carton sheet (VT70): 24MU9932
*Note: Put it almost in the center of the box.
VT47J USER'S MANUAL (J) : 7N8P5062
VT47J QUICK GUIDE (J): 7N8P5072
POW CORD J2 L4.5 7.0A LF K: 7N080115
CABLE RGB 1.8M VER3 TE: 7N520032
RD-409E: 7N900522
Receiver unit T103 : 7N900561
Battery R03UG (JE) SP-2 : 6N800007 2pcs.
Are to be accommodated.
*Note: Put the printed matter and CD-ROM in the first place.
Accessory box (VT70): 24MU9601
Spacer L (VT70)
24MU9581
Handle (VT70): 24F39671
This item shall be accommodated in the
state that it is contained in a bag at the
time of shipment.
Special screw (Handle M4): 24N07502*2
Screwdriver (M4): 24H51611
These items shall be contained in the protection
bag (screws): 24M18361.
The bag shall be folded back and fastened with
an adhesive tape.
It shall be packed in the accessory box.
Main body
Protection bag (420*460): 24M16171
Put the main unit in, and fold back the bag.
Spacer R (VT70)
24MU9591
Bar code label adhesion side
Front side
Carton box (VT70): 24MU9611
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
12-35
PACKAGING
Protection warranty sheet 7N8P0025
Put it in a warranty sheet bag (polyethylene)
100*200 78047921 and fasten it to the inner
flap with an adhesive tape.
VT
670
J
Label (carton) (670J) L
24L54631
Bar code label
Indication and indicating plate
• Print the following items to the bar code serial label (16761791)
∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗
VT670J
Commodity No.
Serial NO.
• Stick the bar code serial label to the corrugated cardboard box in the specified position.
Projector
N E C
Bar code serial label
(Label adhesion side)
Adhesion of the label (carton)
• Stick the label (carton) L and the label (carton) R in the specified position as illustrated below.
Stick it, aligned to the section above [ ] printed on the corrugated cardboard.
VT
670
J
Label (carton) (670J) L
24L54631
12-36
Bar code label
VT
670
J
Label (carton) (670J) R
24L54641
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
PACKAGING
19. VT676J
Soft case (VT470) : 24BS7423
To be put on the accessory box (VT70).
* Note: To be accommodated in the state
of being contained in the bag at the time
of delivery.
• To be accommodated so that the set
insertion hole side or the bottom side
comes to the front side of the corrugated
cardboard box.
• To be accommodated so that the softcase
front (buckle side) is faced downwards.
VLC registration sheet: 7N8P0962
To be put on the accessory box (VT70).
Carton sheet (VT70): 24MU9932
*Note: Put it almost in the center of the box.
VT70 USER'S MANUAL (J) : 7N8P5062
VT70 QUICK GUIDE (J): 7N8P5072
POW CORD J2 L4.5 7.0A LF K: 7N080115
CABLE RGB 1.8M VER3 TE: 7N520032
RD-409E: 7N900522
Receiver unit T103 : 7N900561
Battery R03UG (JE) SP-2 : 6N800007 2pcs.
Are to be accommodated.
*Note: Put the printed matter and CD-ROM in the first place.
Accessory box (VT70): 24MU9601
Spacer L (VT70)
24MU9581
Handle (VT70): 24F39671
This item shall be accommodated in the
state that it is contained in a bag at the
time of shipment.
Special screw (Handle M4): 24N07502*2
Screwdriver (M4): 24H51611
These items shall be contained in the protection
bag (screws): 24M18361.
The bag shall be folded back and fastened with
an adhesive tape.
It shall be packed in the accessory box.
Main body
Protection bag (420*460): 24M16171
Put the main unit in, and fold back the bag.
Spacer R (VT70)
24MU9591
Bar code label adhesion side
Front side
Carton box (VT70): 24MU9611
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
12-37
PACKAGING
Protection warranty sheet 7N8P0025
Put it in a warranty sheet bag (polyethylene)
100*200 78047921 and fasten it to the inner
flap with an adhesive tape.
VT
676
J
Label (carton) (VT676J)
24L57221
Bar code label
Indication and indicating plate
• Print the following items to the bar code serial label (16761791)
∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗
VT676J
Commodity No.
Serial NO.
• Stick the bar code serial label to the corrugated cardboard box in the specified position.
Projector
N E C
Bar code serial label
(Label adhesion side)
Adhesion of the label (carton)
• Stick the label (carton) in the specified position as illustrated below.
Stick it, aligned to the section above [ ] printed on the corrugated cardboard.
VT
676
J
Bar code label
VT
676
J
Label (carton) (VT676J)
24L57221
12-38
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
REPLACEMENT PART LIST
Notes:
1. Parts orders must contain model name, parts number and description.
2. When you place an order for spare parts, please refer to the respective service manual and mention the right parts number on your P.O.
Sheets.
3. The components identitied by a mark or with the symbol Nos. shaded are critical for safety. Replace only with parts number specified.
The letters NSP in the table indicate non-service parts.
4. Please note that the part, which is attached with an asterisk (*) at the head of its part number, is not in stock.
• Since this part is rarely used, it is not registered in some cases.
• If the part is needed, it will be registered and kept in stock.
1. VT37 series (VT37/VT37G)
SYMBOL
PART NO
DESCRIPTION
REMARK
*** PWB ASSYS ***
82K406A3
82K406B3
MAIN SASSY
REM PWB ASSY
*** ELECTRICAL PARTS & MISCELLANEOUS PARTS ***
3N100581
POWER SUPPLY UNIT
3N100611
POWER SUPPLY UNIT
3N100621
POWER SUPPLY UNIT
3N170072
DC FAN 3110KL-04W-B39-C52
3N170073
DC FAN D06F-12SS7 01A(EX)
3N170074
DC FAN D05F-12BM 05A(EX)
3N170075
DC FAN BG1002-B042-OOS-01
3N670111
LCD LCX034CNB-7(R/R)
3N670113
LCD LCX034CNB-6(R/B)
3N670122
LCD LCX034CPB-8(L/G)
3N670112
LCD LCX034CNB-8(R/G)
3N670121
LCD LCX034CPB-7(L/R)
3N670123
LCD LCX034CPB-6(L/B)
TH001
N.S.P 3N810006
THERMISTOR 103AT-2-34119
N.S.P 6N160014
CORE E04SR150718
6N300016
SPEAKER 40X40 8H 1.5W L50
N.S.P 7N970010
THERMOSTAT 67L 100P
N.S.P 7NW20029 CN 2P(TH)80S,1685-26
N.S.P 7NW20030 CN 2P(CV)130S,1061-26
CNBM
N.S.P 7NW30005 CN 3P(BM)50S,3533-28
CNDC
N.S.P 7NW3W057 CN 3P(DC)225W,1015-22
CNLC
N.S.P 7NW5W030 CN 5P(LC)300W,1061-28
PORM2
N.S.P 7NW6W022 CN 6P(RM)70W,1061-26
CNPW
N.S.P 7NWEW010 CN 15P(PW)70W,1061-26
82J33711
THERMOSTAT SASSY
82J33751
THERMISTOR(SET,LAMP)SASSY
*** APPEARANCE PARTS ***
12JS9201
12JS9211
12JS8081
CLR-J
12JS8401
CLG-J
12JS8411
CLB-J
12JS8421
12JS8461
12JS8511
12JS8521
12JS8531
12JS8541
12JS8751
N.S.P 24C01001
24C07601
24DT9861
POWER SUPPLY UNIT(BALLAST)
POWER SUPPLY UNIT(MAIN)
POWER SUPPLY UNIT(FILTER)
For 82J33131
For 82J33131
For 82J33131
For 82J33121
For 82J33121
For 82J33121
POLARIZER R(PB55)
POLARIZER G(PB55)
POLARIZER B(PB55)
CONDENSER LENS R(PB52-TC)
CONDENSER LENS G(PB52-TC)
CONDENSER LENS B(PB52-TC)
RELAY LENS 1(PB52-C)
DAICHROIC MIRROR 1(PB52)
DAICHROIC MIRROR 2(PB52)
MIRROR 1(PB52)
MIRROR 2(PB52)
FIXED LENS(PB55)
PWB HOLDER
STRAP
TOP COVER ASSY(VT37)
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
13-1
VT37 series
*** APPEARANCE PARTS ***
24DT9871
24F39603
N.S.P 24F39611
24F39651
N.S.P 24F39661
N.S.P 24F39931
N.S.P 24F39951
N.S.P 24F40071
24F40111
N.S.P 24F40141
N.S.P 24F40152
N.S.P 24F40162
N.S.P 24F40172
N.S.P 24F40192
N.S.P 24F40271
N.S.P 24F40281
N.S.P 24F40292
N.S.P 24F40321
N.S.P 24F40391
* 24FT9271
* 24G08781
* 24G08831
N.S.P 24H44271
N.S.P 24H49491
N.S.P 24H49512
N.S.P 24H49521
N.S.P 24H49531
N.S.P 24H49541
N.S.P 24H49551
N.S.P 24H49561
N.S.P 24H49571
N.S.P 24H49581
N.S.P 24H51091
N.S.P 24H51101
N.S.P 24H51111
N.S.P 24H51161
24H51241
24H51251
24H51261
24H51272
24H51282
24H51291
24H51301
24H51311
24H51322
24H51332
N.S.P 24H51602
N.S.P 24HS3881
N.S.P 24J24101
N.S.P 24J24111
N.S.P 24J24131
N.S.P 24J24141
N.S.P 24J24151
N.S.P 24J24161
N.S.P 24J24571
N.S.P 24J24581
N.S.P 24J24601
N.S.P 24J24611
N.S.P 24J24651
N.S.P 24J24661
13-2
BOTTOM COVER ASSY(VT37)
LAMP COVER(VT47)
HOLDER(FILTER)(VT47)
FOOT F
HOLDER(FOOT)L
HOLDER(FOOT)R
HOLDER(IT)
DUCT(LAMP FAN)
LENS CAP(PB52)
DUCT(LCDFAN)
COVER A
COVER B
COVER(XDP)
SEPARATE BASE(PB52)
HOLDER(POL T0.5)
HOLDER(RL2)
HOLDER(FL)
HOLDER(M1)
SUPPORT(MAIN PWB)
HOLDER FILTER ASSY(VT47)
LEVER(FOOT)L
LEVER(FOOT)R
SPRING(FOOT F)
BRACKET(I/O)
SHIELD CASE(POWER)T
SHIELD CASE(POWER)B
GROUND METAL(DC-BS)
BRACKET(DETECT SW)
SHIELD CASE(BS)R
BRACKET(FAN 80)
BRACKET(EXHAUST)T
SHIELD(BS)F
LEAF SPRING MIRROR(PB52)
BRACKET(PBS)
BARRIER(IT)
LEAF SPRING(M1)
SPACER FL T0.1(PB52)
SPACER FL T0.2(PB52)
SPACER FL T0.3(PB52)
SPACER FL T0.5(PB52)
SPACER FL T1.0(PB52)
SPACER RL2 T0.1(PB52)
SPACER RL2 T0.2(PB52)
SPACER RL2 T0.3(PB52)
SPACER RL2 T0.5(PB52)
SPACER RL2 T1.0(PB52)
GROUND METAL(FAN-BS)
BRACKET(I/O)ASSY(VT37)
CUSHION(FOOT F)
CUSHION(FOOT R)
FILTER(SIDE)
CUSHION(SPEAKER)B
BURRIER(POWER)
BURRIER(BS)
CUSHION(COVER A)
CUSHION (FAN DUCT)
BARRIER(FILTER)
CUSHION(LAMP FAN)
WASHER(S-VIDEO)
CUSHION(EXHAUST FAN)T
Parts for adjustment of
optical system.
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
VT37 series
*** APPEARANCE PARTS ***
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
24J24671
24J24801
24J24811
24J24821
24J24831
24J24891
24J24901
24J25101
24J25111
24J25121
24J25131
24J25141
24K25821
24L45001
24L46401
24L46421
24L53141
24L54071
24L54081
24L54101
24L57301
* 24L57341
* 24L57471
24L57311
* 24L57351
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
*
*
*
SRW018
SRW025
SRW101
SRW102
SRW102
SRW103
SRW103
SRW104
SRW104
SRW105
SRW106
SRW106
SRW107
SRW107
SRW108
SRW108
SRW109
SRW110
*
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
24L55991
7N970027
7NN1N021
82J33121
82J33131
82J33181
82J24191
82J33201
82J33231
82J33251
82J33311
82J33321
83J33101
24N05831
24N06001
24N07471
24N07451
910E251L
24N05321
24N04771
24N04771
91051033
91051033
24N06901
24N06901
24N05321
24N07411
24N07411
24N04771
24N04771
24N04771
24N04771
910E251L
910E251L
CUSHION(EXHAUST FAN)B
CUSHION(LED)
CUSHION(EXHAUST)S
CUSHION(SUPPORT)T
CUSHION (FAN ROLL)
GASKET(PS)
CUSHION(10*40*T6)
BARRIER(REM-PWB)
BARRIER(MAIN PWB)
CUSHION(20*40*T3)
TAPE(13*18)
TAPE(35*55)
DECOR PLATE(I/O)(VT47)
LABEL(3.5*20)
CAUTION LABEL(SERVICE)
CAUTION LABEL(LAMP COVER)
LABEL(PIXEL WORKS)
CAUTION LABEL(VT70LP)
CAUTION LABEL(FILTER)
CAUTION LABEL(LENZ 4)
NAME PLATE(VT37)
NAME PALTE(VT37)TS
NAME PALTE(VT37)SS
NAME PLATE(VT37G)
NAME PALTE(VT37G)C
LABEL,SERIAL MANUFACTURE
E10K250-28X28H
EARTH STRAP(E07S406200)
OPTBASE LRL(PB55) SASSY
OPT BASE RLR(PB55) SASSY
POLARIZER R SASSY
POLARIZER G SASSY
POLARIZER B SASSY
PS-CONVERTER SASSY
INTEGRATOR SASSY
FIELD LENS SASSY
RELAY LENS 2 SASSY
ENGINE SASSY
STUD(D-SUB)
PUSHNUT(3.0)
SCREW(CB P_TIGHT3*25*3GF)
CPIPS*3*8*15KF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
CBIPS*2*6*3KF
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
CFIMS*1.7*6*15KF
CFIMS*1.7*6*15KF
SPECIAL SCREW(M2*2.2)
SPECIAL SCREW(M2*2.2)
CBIPS*2*6*3KF
SPECIAL SCREW(M3*8)
SPECIAL SCREW(M3*8)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
VT37 only
Label for the Chinese production
VT37 only
VT37G only
Label for the Chinese production
VT37G only
OR
Corresponds by POLARIZER R
Corresponds by POLARIZER G
Corresponds by POLARIZER B
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
13-3
VT37 series
*** APPEARANCE PARTS ***
SRW111
SRW112
SRW113
SRW114
SRW115
SRW116
SRW117
SRW118
SRW119
SW001
SW002
SW003
SW004
SW005
SW006
SW007
SW008
SW009
SW010
SW011
SW012
SW013
SW014
SW015
SW016
SW017
SW019
SW021
SW022
SW023
SW024
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
910E251L
910E251L
910E251L
910E2523
910E2523
910E305L
24N04771
910E251L
910E2523
24N04771
24N04771
24N04771
24N04771
24N04771
24N04771
24N04771
24N04771
24N04771
24N04771
24N04771
910E251L
910E251L
910E251L
910E251L
910E251L
910E251L
9111251L
910E251L
910E3196
91112031
910E3196
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SCREW,PL-CPIMS*2.5*8*15KF
SCREW,PL-CPIMS*2.5*8*15KF
SCREW,PL-CPIMS*3*8*3GF
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SCREW,PL-CPIMS*2.5*8*15KF
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SCREW CBIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SCREW PL-CPIMS*3*30*3KF
SCREW,CBIMS*2*6*15BF
SCREW PL-CPIMS*3*30*3KF
*** PRINTED & PACKING MATERIALS ***
24BS7423
CARRYING CASE(VT470)
24M16171
PROTECTION BOX
24MU9581 SPACER L(VT70)
24MU9591 SPACER R(VT70)
24MU9601 PART BOX(VT70)
24MU9932 CARTON SHEET(VT70)
24L53171
MARKING LABEL(20,BULE)
24MU9611 CARTON BOX(VT70)
7N520032
CABLE RGB 1.8M VER3 TE
7N900522
REM-T HAND UNIT RD-409E
7N8P5681
VT37 IMPORTANT INFO(U/G)
7N950631
VT37 U/M CD-ROM(U/G)
7N8P5671
VT37 QUICK GUIDE (U/G)
24L54112
LABEL(INSTA CARE)(VT70LP)
7N8P1351
REGISTRATIOM CARD(USA)
7N8P5691
VT37 LW & FCC SHEET (USA)
24L57321
LABEL(CARTON)(37)
* 24L57361
LABEL(CARTON)(37)C
7N080212
POWER CODE U2 L3.0 7.0A V
* 24L57371
LABEL(CARTON)(37G)C
24L57331
LABEL(CARTON)(37G)
7N8P1612
WARRANTY(EUROPE)
7N080009
POWER CODE E2 L3.0 2.5A LF K
13-4
VT37 only
Label for the Chinese production
Label for the Chinese production
VT37G only
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
VT37 series
Product number
*** OPTION
Product name
***
01161087
01957616
01957617
01161013
01161042
01161051
01161050
VT70LP(replacement lamp)
VL-CA10MD
VL-CA02MD
VL-CA03V
CA03D
ADP-CV1
ADP-DT1
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
13-5
http://getMANUAL.com
VT47 series
2. VT47 series (VT47/VT47G/VT47J/VT47+)
SYMBOL
PART NO
DESCRIPTION
REMARK
*** PWB ASSYS ***
82J336A3
82J336B3
MAIN SASSY
REM PWB ASSY
*** ELECTRICAL PARTS & MISCELLANEOUS PARTS ***
TH001
CNBM
CNDC
CNLC
PORM2
CNPW
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
3N100581
3N100611
3N100621
3N170072
3N170073
3N170074
3N170075
3N670111
3N670113
3N670122
3N670112
3N670121
3N670123
3N810006
6N160014
6N300016
7N970010
7NW20029
7NW20030
7NW30005
7NW3W057
7NW5W030
7NW6W022
7NWEW010
82J33711
82J33751
POWER SUPPLY UNIT
POWER SUPPLY UNIT
POWER SUPPLY UNIT
DC FAN 3110KL-04W-B39-C52
DC FAN D06F-12SS7 01A(EX)
DC FAN D05F-12BM 05A(EX)
DC FAN BG1002-B042-OOS-01
LCD LCX034CNB-7(R/R)
LCD LCX034CNB-6(R/B)
LCD LCX034CPB-8(L/G)
LCD LCX034CNB-8(R/G)
LCD LCX034CPB-7(L/R)
LCD LCX034CPB-6(L/B)
THERMISTOR 103AT-2-34119
CORE E04SR150718
SPEAKER 40X40 8H 1.5W L50
THERMOSTAT 67L 100P
CN 2P(TH)80S,1685-26
CN 2P(CV)130S,1061-26
CN 3P(BM)50S,3533-28
CN 3P(DC)225W,1015-22
CN 5P(LC)300W,1061-28
CN 6P(RM)70W,1061-26
CN 15P(PW)70W,1061-26
THERMOSTAT SASSY
THERMISTOR(SET,LAMP)SASSY
POWER SUPPLY UNIT(BALLAST)
POWER SUPPLY UNIT(MAIN)
POWER SUPPLY UNIT(FILTER)
For 82J33131
For 82J33131
For 82J33131
For 82J33121
For 82J33121
For 82J33121
*** APPEARANCE PARTS ***
CLR-J
CLG-J
CLB-J
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
13-6
12JS9201
12JS9211
12JS8081
12JS8401
12JS8411
12JS8421
12JS8461
12JS8511
12JS8521
12JS8531
12JS8541
12JS8751
24C01001
24C07601
24DT9311
24DT9521
24DT9321
24F39603
24F39611
24F39651
24F39661
24F39931
POLARIZER R(PB55)
POLARIZER G(PB55)
POLARIZER B(PB55)
CONDENSER LENS R(PB52-TC)
CONDENSER LENS G(PB52-TC)
CONDENSER LENS B(PB52-TC)
RELAY LENS 1(PB52-C)
DAICHROIC MIRROR 1(PB52)
DAICHROIC MIRROR 2(PB52)
MIRROR 1(PB52)
MIRROR 2(PB52)
FIXED LENS(PB55)
PWB HOLDER
STRAP
TOP COVER ASSY(VT47)
TOP COVER ASSY(VT47+)
VT47+ only
Although original Part number for + version is written here for just reference,
common part with other version will be supplied.
BOTTOM COVER ASSY(VT47)
LAMP COVER(VT47)
HOLDER(FILTER)(VT47)
FOOT F
HOLDER(FOOT)L
HOLDER(FOOT)R
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
VT47 series
*** APPEARANCE PARTS ***
N.S.P
N.S.P
24F39951
24F40071
24F40111
N.S.P 24F40141
N.S.P 24F40152
N.S.P 24F40162
N.S.P 24F40172
N.S.P 24F40191
N.S.P 24F40271
N.S.P 24F40281
N.S.P 24F40292
N.S.P 24F40321
N.S.P 24F40391
* 24FT9271
* 24G08781
* 24G08831
N.S.P 24H44271
N.S.P 24H49491
N.S.P 24H49512
N.S.P 24H49521
N.S.P 24H49531
N.S.P 24H49541
N.S.P 24H49551
N.S.P 24H49561
N.S.P 24H49571
N.S.P 24H49581
N.S.P 24H51091
N.S.P 24H51101
N.S.P 24H51111
N.S.P 24H51161
24H51241
24H51251
24H51261
24H51272
24H51282
24H51291
24H51301
24H51311
24H51322
24H51332
N.S.P 24H51602
N.S.P 24HS3551
N.S.P 24J24101
N.S.P 24J24111
N.S.P 24J24131
N.S.P 24J24141
N.S.P 24J24151
N.S.P 24J24161
N.S.P 24J24571
N.S.P 24J24581
N.S.P 24J24601
N.S.P 24J24611
N.S.P 24J24651
N.S.P 24J24661
N.S.P 24J24671
N.S.P 24J24801
N.S.P 24J24811
N.S.P 24J24821
N.S.P 24J24831
N.S.P 24J24891
HOLDER(IT)
DUCT(LAMP FAN)
LENS CAP(PB52)
DUCT(LCDFAN)
COVER A
COVER B
COVER(XDP)
SEPARATE BASE(PB52)
HOLDER(POL T0.5)
HOLDER(RL2)
HOLDER(FL)
HOLDER(M1)
SUPPORT(MAIN PWB)
HOLDER FILTER ASSY(VT47)
LEVER(FOOT)L
LEVER(FOOT)R
SPRING(FOOT F)
BRACKET(I/O)
SHIELD CASE(POWER)T
SHIELD CASE(POWER)B
GROUND METAL(DC-BS)
BRACKET(DETECT SW)
SHIELD CASE(BS)R
BRACKET(FAN 80)
BRACKET(EXHAUST)T
SHIELD(BS)F
LEAF SPRING MIRROR(PB52)
BRACKET(PBS)
BARRIER(IT)
LEAF SPRING(M1)
SPACER FL T0.1(PB52)
SPACER FL T0.2(PB52)
SPACER FL T0.3(PB52)
SPACER FL T0.5(PB52)
SPACER FL T1.0(PB52)
SPACER RL2 T0.1(PB52)
SPACER RL2 T0.2(PB52)
SPACER RL2 T0.3(PB52)
SPACER RL2 T0.5(PB52)
SPACER RL2 T1.0(PB52)
GROUND METAL(FAN-BS)
BRACKET(I/O)ASSY(VT47)
CUSHION(FOOT F)
CUSHION(FOOT R)
FILTER(SIDE)
CUSHION(SPEAKER)B
BURRIER(POWER)
BURRIER(BS)
CUSHION(COVER A)
CUSHION (FAN DUCT)
BARRIER(FILTER)
CUSHION(LAMP FAN)
WASHER(S-VIDEO)
CUSHION(EXHAUST FAN)T
CUSHION(EXHAUST FAN)B
CUSHION(LED)
CUSHION(EXHAUST)S
CUSHION(SUPPORT)T
CUSHION (FAN ROLL)
GASKET(PS)
Parts for adjustment of
optical system.
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
13-7
VT47 series
*** APPEARANCE PARTS ***
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
24J24901
24J25101
24J25111
24J25121
24J25131
24J25141
24K25821
24L45001
24L46401
24L46421
24L53141
24L54062
* 24L54472
* 24L54512
24L54401
* 24L54481
CUSHION(10*40*T6)
BARRIER(REM-PWB)
BARRIER(MAIN PWB)
CUSHION(20*40*T3)
TAPE(13*18)
TAPE(35*55)
DECOR PLATE(I/O)(VT47)
LABEL(3.5*20)
CAUTION LABEL(SERVICE)
CAUTION LABEL(LAMP COVER)
LABEL(PIXEL WORKS)
NAME PLATE(VT47)
NAME PALTE(VT47)TS
NAME PALTE(VT47)NK
NAME PLATE(VT47G)
NAME PALTE(VT47G)C
*
*
*
*
LABEL(LAMP)(VT70+)
LABEL(FILTER)(VT70+)
LABEL(LENZ4)(VT70+)
NAME PALTE(VT47+)TS
CAUTION LABEL(VT70LP)
CAUTION LABEL(FILTER)
CAUTION LABEL(LENZ 4)
LABEL,SERIAL MANUFACTURE
E10K250-28X28H
EARTH STRAP(E07S406200)
OPTBASE LRL(PB55) SASSY
OPT BASE RLR(PB55) SASSY
POLARIZER R SASSY
POLARIZER G SASSY
POLARIZER B SASSY
PS-CONVERTER SASSY
INTEGRATOR SASSY
FIELD LENS SASSY
RELAY LENS 2 SASSY
ENGINE SASSY
STUD(D-SUB)
PUSHNUT(3.0)
SCREW(CB P_TIGHT3*25*3GF)
CPIPS*3*8*15KF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
CBIPS*2*6*3KF
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
CFIMS*1.7*6*15KF
CFIMS*1.7*6*15KF
SPECIAL SCREW(M2*2.2)
SPECIAL SCREW(M2*2.2)
CBIPS*2*6*3KF
SPECIAL SCREW(M3*8)
SPECIAL SCREW(M3*8)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
*
*
*
SRW018
SRW025
SRW101
SRW102
SRW102
SRW103
SRW103
SRW104
SRW104
SRW105
SRW106
SRW106
SRW107
SRW107
SRW108
SRW108
SRW109
SRW110
SRW111
SRW112
13-8
*
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
24L54921
24L54931
24L54941
24L54561
24L54071
24L54081
24L54101
24L55991
7N970027
7NN1N021
82J33121
82J33131
82J33181
82J24191
82J33201
82J33231
82J33251
82J33311
82J33321
83J33101
24N05831
24N06001
24N07471
24N07451
910E251L
24N05321
24N04771
24N04771
91051033
91051033
24N06901
24N06901
24N05321
24N07411
24N07411
24N04771
24N04771
24N04771
24N04771
910E251L
910E251L
910E251L
910E251L
VT47 only
Label for the Chinese production
VT47 only
VT47G and VT47J only
Label for the Chinese production
VT47G and VT47J only
VT47+ only
OR
Corresponds by POLARIZER R
Corresponds by POLARIZER G
Corresponds by POLARIZER B
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
VT47 series
*** APPEARANCE PARTS ***
SRW113
SRW114
SRW115
SRW116
SRW117
SRW118
SRW119
SW001
SW002
SW003
SW004
SW005
SW006
SW007
SW008
SW009
SW010
SW011
SW012
SW013
SW014
SW015
SW016
SW017
SW019
SW021
SW022
SW023
SW024
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
910E251L
910E2523
910E2523
910E305L
24N04771
910E251L
910E2523
24N04771
24N04771
24N04771
24N04771
24N04771
24N04771
24N04771
24N04771
24N04771
24N04771
24N04771
910E251L
910E251L
910E251L
910E251L
910E251L
910E251L
9111251L
910E251L
910E3196
91112031
910E3196
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SCREW,PL-CPIMS*2.5*8*15KF
SCREW,PL-CPIMS*2.5*8*15KF
SCREW,PL-CPIMS*3*8*3GF
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SCREW,PL-CPIMS*2.5*8*15KF
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SCREW CBIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SCREW PL-CPIMS*3*30*3KF
SCREW,CBIMS*2*6*15BF
SCREW PL-CPIMS*3*30*3KF
*** PRINTED & PACKING MATERIALS ***
24BS7423
24M16171
24MU9581
24MU9591
24MU9601
24MU9932
24L53171
24MU9611
7N520032
7N900522
7N8P4402
7N950493
7N8P4372
24L54112
7N8P1351
7N8P4412
24L54751
24L54762
* 24L54891
7N080212
7N8P1612
7N080009
24L54782
24L54772
24L54902
CARRYING CASE(VT470)
PROTECTION BOX
SPACER L(VT70)
SPACER R(VT70)
PART BOX(VT70)
CARTON SHEET(VT70)
MARKING LABEL(20,BULE)
CARTON BOX(VT70)
CABLE RGB 1.8M VER3 TE
REM-T HAND UNIT RD-409E
VT70 IMPORTANT INFO(U/G)
VT70 U/M CD-ROM(U/G)
VT70 QUICK GUIDE (U/G)
LABEL(INSTA CARE)(VT70LP)
REGISTRATIOM CARD(USA)
VT70 LW & FCC SHEET (USA)
LABEL(CARTON)(47)L
LABEL(CARTON)(47)R
LABEL(CARTON)(47C)L
POWER CODE U2 L3.0 7.0A V
WARRANTY(EUROPE)
POWER CODE E2 L3.0 2.5A LF K
LABEL(CARTON)(47G)R
LABEL(CARTON)(47G)L
LABEL(CARTON)(47GC)L
VT47 and VT47G only
VT47 only
Label for the Chinese production
VT47G only
Label for the Chinese production
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
13-9
VT47 series
*** PRINTED & PACKING MATERIALS ***
*
*
*
*
*
*
24L54801
24L54791
24L54911
78047921
7N8P0024
7N8P5061
7N8P5071
7N8P0962
7N080114
24MU9871
7N080503
7N90P212
7N8P4592
7N8P4602
Product number
*** OPTION
Label for the Chinese production
VT47J only
VT47+ only
Product name
***
01161087
01957616
01957617
01161013
01161042
01161051
01161050
13-10
LABEL(CARTON)(47J)R
LABEL(CARTON)(47J)L
LABEL(CARTON)(47JC)L
WARRANTY ENVELOPE(100*220
PROJECTOR WARRANTY
VT70 USER MANUAL(J)
VT70 QUICK GUIDE (J)
VLC REGISTRATION
POWER CODE J2 L3.0 7.0A LF K
CARTON BOX(VT47+)TS
POWER CODE C2 L3.0 2.5A K
WARRANTY CARD2 (CN)
VT70+ USER MANUAL (CH)
VT70+ QUICK GUIDE (CH)
VT70LP(replacement lamp)
VL-CA10MD
VL-CA02MD
VL-CA03V
CA03D
ADP-CV1
ADP-DT1
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
VT470 series
3. VT470 series (VT470/VT470G/VT470J/VT470+)
Notes:
There are four kinds of OPT Base Assys, LCD panels, and two kinds of Main PWB ASSYs used for Model VT470.
This is due to use of different manufacturer’s LCD Panels.
Therefore please be careful to place order for spare parts for the parts of this model and use them by referring as below.
• Confirm the alphabet, which is eighth digit of serial number of the set.
The serial number is indicated on the label that is located at the bottom cover of the projector.
• Information about REMARK (#1)
This part is used for product with eighth digit of serial number either “T”, “V”, or “U” .
• Information about REMARK (#2)
This part used for product with eighth digit of serial number either “N”, “H” or “F” .
• There are no interchangeability between the parts of REMARK (#1) and REMARK (#2).
SYMBOL
PART NO
DESCRIPTION
REMARK
*** PWB ASSYS & MISCELLANEOUS PARTS ***
82J656A3
82J656B3
3N670111
3N670113
3N670122
3N670112
3N670121
3N670123
82J65121
82J65131
* 83J65101
24L53171
82J276A3
82J276B3
3N670138
3N670147
3N670149
3N670137
3N670139
3N670148
82J27121
82J27131
* 83J27101
MAIN SASSY
REM PWB ASSY
LCD LCX034CNB-7(R/R)
LCD LCX034CNB-6(R/B)
LCD LCX034CPB-8(L/G)
LCD LCX034CNB-8(R/G)
LCD LCX034CPB-7(L/R)
LCD LCX034CPB-6(L/B)
OPTBASE LRL(PB53A) SASSY
OPTBASE RLR(PB53A) SASSY
ENGINE SASSY
MARKING LABEL(20,BULE)
MAIN SASSY
REM PWB ASSY
LCD L3P07S-41G00G
LCD L3P07S-42G00R
LCD L3P07S-42G00B
LCD L3P07S-41G00R
LCD L3P07S-41G00B
LCD L3P07S-42G00G
OPT BASE LRL(PB53) SASSY
OPT BASE RLR(PB53) SASSY
ENGINE SASSY
*** ELECTRICAL PARTS & MISCELLANEOUS PARTS ***
3N100571
POWER SUPPLY UNIT
3N100611
POWER SUPPLY UNIT
3N100621
POWER SUPPLY UNIT
3N170072
DC FAN 3110KL-04W-B39-C52
3N170073
DC FAN D06F-12SS7 01A(EX)
3N170074
DC FAN D05F-12BM 05A(EX)
3N170075
DC FAN BG1002-B042-OOS-01
TH001
N.S.P 3N810006
THERMISTOR 103AT-2-34119
N.S.P 6N160014
CORE E04SR150718
6N300016
SPEAKER 40X40 8H 1.5W L50
N.S.P 7N970022
THERMOSTATS (67L 120P)
N.S.P 7NW20029 CN 2P(TH)80S,1685-26
N.S.P 7NW20030 CN 2P(CV)130S,1061-26
CNBM
N.S.P 7NW30005 CN 3P(BM)50S,3533-28
CNDC
N.S.P 7NW3W057 CN 3P(DC)225W,1015-22
CNLC
N.S.P 7NW5W030 CN 5P(LC)300W,1061-28
PORM2
N.S.P 7NW6W022 CN 6P(RM)70W,1061-26
CNPW
N.S.P 7NWEW010 CN 15P(PW)70W,1061-26
82J21711
THERMOSTAT SASSY
82J33751
THERMISTOR(SET,LAMP)SASSY
(#1)
(#1)
(#1)
(#1)
(#1)
(#1)
(#1)
(#1)
(#1)
(#1)
(#1)
(#2)
For 82J65131
For 82J65131
For 82J65131
For 82J65121
For 82J65121
For 82J65121
(#2)
(#2)
(#2)
(#2)
(#2)
(#2)
(#2)
(#2)
(#2)
For 82J27131
For 82J27131
For 82J27131
For 82J27121
For 82J27121
For 82J27121
OR
OR
POWER SUPPLY UNIT(BALLAST)
POWER SUPPLY UNIT(MAIN)
POWER SUPPLY UNIT(FILTER)
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
13-11
VT470 series
*** APPEARANCE PARTS ***
CLR-J
CLG-J
CLB-J
N.S.P
N.S.P
12JS7971
12JS8051
12JS9201
12JS8071
12JS8401
12JS8411
12JS8421
12JS8461
12JS8511
12JS8521
12JS8531
12JS8541
24C01001
24C07601
24DT9412
24DT9423
24DT9511
24F39603
24F39611
24F39651
N.S.P 24F39661
N.S.P 24F39931
N.S.P 24F39951
N.S.P 24F40071
24F40111
N.S.P 24F40141
N.S.P 24F40152
N.S.P 24F40162
N.S.P 24F40172
N.S.P 24F40191
N.S.P 24F40271
N.S.P 24F40281
N.S.P 24F40292
N.S.P 24F40321
N.S.P 24F40351
N.S.P 24F40391
* 24FT9271
* 24G08781
* 24G08831
N.S.P 24H44271
N.S.P 24H49491
N.S.P 24H49512
N.S.P 24H49521
N.S.P 24H49531
N.S.P 24H49541
N.S.P 24H49551
N.S.P 24H49561
N.S.P 24H49571
N.S.P 24H49581
N.S.P 24H51091
N.S.P 24H51101
N.S.P 24H51111
N.S.P 24H51161
N.S.P
13-12
ZOOM LENS(PB52)
POLARIZER B(PB52)
POLARIZER R(PB55)
POLARIZER G(PB55)
CONDENSER LENS R(PB52-TC)
CONDENSER LENS G(PB52-TC)
CONDENSER LENS B(PB52-TC)
RELAY LENS 1(PB52-C)
DAICHROIC MIRROR 1(PB52)
DAICHROIC MIRROR 2(PB52)
MIRROR 1(PB52)
MIRROR 2(PB52)
PWB HOLDER
STRAP
BOTTOM COVER ASSY(VT470)
TOP COVER ASSY(VT470)
TOP COVER ASSY(VT470+)
VT470+ only
Although original Part number for + version is written here for just reference,
common part with other version will be supplied.
LAMP COVER(VT47)
HOLDER(FILTER)(VT47)
FOOT F
HOLDER(FOOT)L
HOLDER(FOOT)R
HOLDER(IT)
DUCT(LAMP FAN)
LENS CAP(PB52)
DUCT(LCDFAN)
COVER A
COVER B
COVER(XDP)
SEPARATE BASE(PB52)
HOLDER(POL T0.5)
HOLDER(RL2)
HOLDER(FL)
HOLDER(M1)
HOLDER(POL T1.8)
SUPPORT(MAIN PWB)
HOLDER FILTER ASSY(VT47)
LEVER(FOOT)L
LEVER(FOOT)R
SPRING(FOOT F)
BRACKET(I/O)
SHIELD CASE(POWER)T
SHIELD CASE(POWER)B
GROUND METAL(DC-BS)
BRACKET(DETECT SW)
SHIELD CASE(BS)R
BRACKET(FAN 80)
BRACKET(EXHAUST)T
SHIELD(BS)F
LEAF SPRING MIRROR(PB52)
BRACKET(PBS)
BARRIER(IT)
LEAF SPRING(M1)
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
VT470 series
*** APPEARANCE PARTS ***
24H51241
24H51251
24H51261
24H51272
24H51282
24H51291
24H51301
24H51311
24H51322
24H51332
N.S.P 24H51602
N.S.P 24HS3671
N.S.P 24J24101
N.S.P 24J24111
N.S.P 24J24131
N.S.P 24J24141
N.S.P 24J24151
N.S.P 24J24161
N.S.P 24J24451
N.S.P 24J24461
N.S.P 24J24571
N.S.P 24J24581
N.S.P 24J24601
N.S.P 24J24611
N.S.P 24J24651
N.S.P 24J24661
N.S.P 24J24671
N.S.P 24J24801
N.S.P 24J24811
N.S.P 24J24821
N.S.P 24J24831
N.S.P 24J24891
N.S.P 24J24901
N.S.P 24J25021
N.S.P 24J25101
N.S.P 24J25111
N.S.P 24J25121
N.S.P 24J25131
N.S.P 24J25141
N.S.P 24K25891
N.S.P 24L45001
24L46401
24L46421
24L53141
24L54081
24L54101
24L54382
* 24L54452
SPACER FL T0.1(PB52)
SPACER FL T0.2(PB52)
SPACER FL T0.3(PB52)
SPACER FL T0.5(PB52)
SPACER FL T1.0(PB52)
SPACER RL2 T0.1(PB52)
SPACER RL2 T0.2(PB52)
SPACER RL2 T0.3(PB52)
SPACER RL2 T0.5(PB52)
SPACER RL2 T1.0(PB52)
GROUND METAL(FAN-BS)
BRACKET(I/O)ASSY(VT470)
CUSHION(FOOT F)
CUSHION(FOOT R)
FILTER(SIDE)
CUSHION(SPEAKER)B
BURRIER(POWER)
BURRIER(BS)
CUSHION(ZOOM)A
CUSHION(ZOOM)B
CUSHION(COVER A)
CUSHION (FAN DUCT)
BARRIER(FILTER)
CUSHION(LAMP FAN)
WASHER(S-VIDEO)
CUSHION(EXHAUST FAN)T
CUSHION(EXHAUST FAN)B
CUSHION(LED)
CUSHION(EXHAUST)S
CUSHION(SUPPORT)T
CUSHION (FAN ROLL)
GASKET(PS)
CUSHION(10*40*T6)
CUSHION(DIRECT-LED)
BARRIER(REM-PWB)
BARRIER(MAIN PWB)
CUSHION(20*40*T3)
TAPE(13*18)
TAPE(35*55)
DECOR PLATE(I/O)(VT470)
LABEL(3.5*20)
CAUTION LABEL(SERVICE)
CAUTION LABEL(LAMP COVER)
LABEL(PIXEL WORKS)
CAUTION LABEL(FILTER)
CAUTION LABEL(LENZ 4)
NAME PALTE(VT470)
NAME PALTE(VT470)TS
24L54391
* 24L54461
NAME PALTE(VT470G)
NAME PALTE(VT470G)C
*
*
*
*
CAUTION LABEL(VT75LP,+)
LABEL(FILTER)(VT70+)
LABEL(LENZ 4)(VT70+)
NAME PALTE(VT470+)TS
CAUTION LABEL(VT75LP)
LABEL,SERIAL MANUFACTURE
E10K250-28X28H
EARTH STRAP(E07S406200)
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
24L56321
24L54931
24L54941
24L54551
24L55221
24L55991
7N970027
7NN1N021
Parts for adjustment of
optical system.
VT470 only
VT470 only
Label for the Chinese production
VT470G and VT470J only
VT470G and VT470J only
Label for the Chinese production
VT470+ only
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
13-13
VT470 series
*** APPEARANCE PARTS ***
SRW018
SRW025
SRW101
SRW102
SRW102
SRW103
SRW103
SRW104
SRW104
SRW105
SRW106
SRW107
SRW108
SRW109
SRW110
SRW111
SRW112
SRW113
SRW114
SRW115
SRW116
SRW117
SRW118
SRW119
SW001
SW002
SW003
SW004
SW005
SW006
SW007
SW008
SW009
SW010
SW011
SW012
SW013
SW014
SW015
SW016
SW017
SW019
SW021
SW022
SW023
SW024
13-14
* 82J21201
82J21251
82J21311
* 82J33181
* 82J33191
82J33231
82J33321
N.S.P 24N05831
N.S.P 24N06001
N.S.P 24N07471
N.S.P 24N07451
N.S.P 910E251L
N.S.P 24N05321
N.S.P 24N04771
N.S.P 24N04771
N.S.P 91051033
N.S.P 91051033
N.S.P 24N06901
N.S.P 24N06901
N.S.P 24N05321
N.S.P 24N07411
N.S.P 24N04771
N.S.P 24N04771
N.S.P 910E251L
N.S.P 910E251L
N.S.P 910E251L
N.S.P 910E251L
N.S.P 910E251L
N.S.P 910E2523
N.S.P 910E2523
N.S.P 910E305L
N.S.P 24N04771
N.S.P 910E251L
N.S.P 910E2523
N.S.P 24N04771
N.S.P 24N04771
N.S.P 24N04771
N.S.P 24N04771
N.S.P 24N04771
N.S.P 24N04771
N.S.P 24N04771
N.S.P 24N04771
N.S.P 24N04771
N.S.P 24N04771
N.S.P 24N04771
N.S.P 910E251L
N.S.P 910E251L
N.S.P 910E251L
N.S.P 910E251L
N.S.P 910E251L
N.S.P 910E251L
N.S.P 9111251L
N.S.P 910E251L
N.S.P 910E3196
N.S.P 91112031
N.S.P 910E3196
POLARIZER B(PB52) SASSY
INTEGRATOR SASSY
FIELD LENS(PB52) SASSY
POLARIZER R SASSY
POLARIZER G SASSY
PS-CONVERTER SASSY
RELAY LENS 2 SASSY
STUD(D-SUB)
PUSHNUT(3.0)
SCREW(CB P_TIGHT3*25*3GF)
CPIPS*3*8*15KF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
CBIPS*2*6*3KF
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
CFIMS*1.7*6*15KF
CFIMS*1.7*6*15KF
SPECIAL SCREW(M2*2.2)
SPECIAL SCREW(M2*2.2)
CBIPS*2*6*3KF
SPECIAL SCREW(M3*8)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SCREW,PL-CPIMS*2.5*8*15KF
SCREW,PL-CPIMS*2.5*8*15KF
SCREW,PL-CPIMS*3*8*3GF
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SCREW,PL-CPIMS*2.5*8*15KF
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SCREW CBIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SCREW PL-CPIMS*3*30*3KF
SCREW,CBIMS*2*6*15BF
SCREW PL-CPIMS*3*30*3KF
Corresponds by POLARIZER B
Corresponds by POLARIZER R
Corresponds by POLARIZER G
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
VT470 series
*** PRINTED & PACKING MATERIALS ***
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
24BS7423
24F39671
24H51611
24M16171
24M18361
24MU9581
24MU9591
24MU9601
24MU9611
24MU9932
24N07502
6N800007
7N520032
7N900522
7N900561
7N8P4402
7N950493
7N8P4372
24L55232
7N080213
7N8P1351
7N8P4412
24L54702
24L54691
24L54861
7N080007
7N8P1612
24L54722
24L54712
24L54872
24L54741
24L54731
24L54881
7N080115
7N8P0962
7N8P5071
78047921
7N8P0024
7N8P5061
24MU9861
7N080505
7N90P212
7N8P4592
7N8P4602
CARRYING CASE(VT470)
HANDLE(VT70)
SCREW DRIVER(M4)
PROTECTION BOX
PROTECTION BAG(SCREW)
SPACER L(VT70)
SPACER R(VT70)
PART BOX(VT70)
CARTON BOX(VT70)
CARTON SHEET(VT70)
SPECIAL SCREW(HANDLE M4)
BATTERY,DRY CELL R03UG(JE
CABLE RGB 1.8M VER3 TE
REM-T HAND UNIT RD-409E
RECEIVER UNIT T103
VT70 IMPORTANT INFO(U/G)
VT70 U/M CD-ROM(U/G)
VT70 QUICK GUIDE (U/G)
LABEL(INSTA CARE)(VT75LP)
POWER CORD U2 L4.5 7A V
REGISTRATIOM CARD(USA)
VT70 LW & FCC SHEET (USA)
LABEL(CARTON)(470)R
LABEL(CARTON)(470)L
LABEL(CARTON)(470C)L
POWER CORD E2 L4.5 2.5A LF K
WARRANTY(EUROPE)
LABEL(CARTON)(470G)R
LABEL(CARTON)(470G)L
LABEL(CARTON)(470GC)L
LABEL(CARTON)(470J)R
LABEL(CARTON)(470J)L
LABEL(CARTON)(470JC)L
POWER CORD J2 L4.5 7A LF K
VLC REGISTRATION
VT70 QUICK GUIDE (J)
WARRANTY ENVELOPE(100*220
PROJECTOR WARRANTY
VT70 USER MANUAL(J)
CARTON BOX(VT470+)TS
POWER CORD C2 L4.5 2.5A K
WARRANTY CARD2 (CN)
VT70+ USER MANUAL (CH)
VT70+ QUICK GUIDE (CH)
VT470 and VT470G only
VT470 only
Label for the Chinese production
VT470G only
Label for the Chinese production
Label for the Chinese production
VT470J only
VT470+ only
*** APPEARANCE PARTS ***
Product number
*** OPTION
Product name
***
01161088
01957616
01957617
01161013
01161042
01161051
01161050
VT75LP(replacement lamp)
VL-CA10MD
VL-CA02MD
VL-CA03V
CA03D
ADP-CV1
ADP-DT1
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
13-15
http://getMANUAL.com
VT470JY
4. VT470JY (Japanese model)
SYMBOL
PART NO
DESCRIPTION
REMARK
*** PWB ASSYS ***
82J276A3
82J276B3
MAIN SASSY
REM PWB ASSY
*** ELECTRICAL PARTS & MISCELLANEOUS PARTS ***
TH001
CNBM
CNDC
CNLC
PORM2
CNPW
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
3N100571
3N100611
3N100621
3N170072
3N170073
3N170074
3N170075
3N670138
3N670147
3N670149
3N670137
3N670139
3N670148
3N810006
6N160014
6N300016
7N970022
7NW20029
7NW20030
7NW30005
7NW3W057
7NW5W030
7NW6W022
7NWEW010
82J21711
82J33751
POWER SUPPLY UNIT
POWER SUPPLY UNIT
POWER SUPPLY UNIT
DC FAN 3110KL-04W-B39-C52
DC FAN D06F-12SS7 01A(EX)
DC FAN D05F-12BM 05A(EX)
DC FAN BG1002-B042-OOS-01
LCD L3P07S-41G00G
LCD L3P07S-42G00R
LCD L3P07S-42G00B
LCD L3P07S-41G00R
LCD L3P07S-41G00B
LCD L3P07S-42G00G
THERMISTOR 103AT-2-34119
CORE E04SR150718
SPEAKER 40X40 8H 1.5W L50
THERMOSTATS (67L 120P)
CN 2P(TH)80S,1685-26
CN 2P(CV)130S,1061-26
CN 3P(BM)50S,3533-28
CN 3P(DC)225W,1015-22
CN 5P(LC)300W,1061-28
CN 6P(RM)70W,1061-26
CN 15P(PW)70W,1061-26
THERMOSTAT SASSY
THERMISTOR(SET,LAMP)SASSY
POWER SUPPLY UNIT(BALLAST)
POWER SUPPLY UNIT(MAIN)
POWER SUPPLY UNIT(FILTER)
For 82J27131
For 82J27131
For 82J27131
For 82J27121
For 82J27121
For 82J27121
*** APPEARANCE PARTS ***
CLR-J
CLG-J
CLB-J
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
13-16
12JS7971
12JS8051
12JS9201
12JS8071
12JS8401
12JS8411
12JS8421
12JS8461
12JS8511
12JS8521
12JS8531
12JS8541
24C01001
24C07601
24DT9562
24DT9573
24F40773
24F39611
24F39651
24F39661
24F39931
24F39951
24F40071
24F40111
ZOOM LENS(PB52)
POLARIZER B(PB52)
POLARIZER R(PB55)
POLARIZER G(PB55)
CONDENSER LENS R(PB52-TC)
CONDENSER LENS G(PB52-TC)
CONDENSER LENS B(PB52-TC)
RELAY LENS 1(PB52-C)
DAICHROIC MIRROR 1(PB52)
DAICHROIC MIRROR 2(PB52)
MIRROR 1(PB52)
MIRROR 2(PB52)
PWB HOLDER
STRAP
BOTTOM COVER ASSY(VT470JY)
TOP COVER ASSY(VT470JY)
LAMP COVER(VT470JY)
HOLDER(FILTER)(VT47)
FOOT F
HOLDER(FOOT)L
HOLDER(FOOT)R
HOLDER(IT)
DUCT(LAMP FAN)
LENS CAP(PB52)
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
VT470JY
*** APPEARANCE PARTS ***
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
*
*
*
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
24F40141
24F40152
24F40162
24F40191
24F40271
24F40281
24F40292
24F40321
24F40351
24F40391
24FT9471
24G08781
24G08831
24H44271
24H49491
24H49512
24H49521
24H49531
24H49541
24H49551
24H49561
24H49571
24H49581
24H51091
24H51101
24H51111
24H51161
24H51241
24H51251
24H51261
24H51272
24H51282
24H51291
24H51301
24H51311
24H51322
24H51332
24H51602
24HS3671
24J24101
24J24111
24J24131
24J24141
24J24151
24J24161
24J24451
24J24461
24J24571
24J24581
24J24601
24J24611
24J24651
24J24661
24J24671
24J24801
24J24811
24J24821
24J24831
24J24891
24J24901
DUCT(LCDFAN)
COVER A
COVER B
SEPARATE BASE(PB52)
HOLDER(POL T0.5)
HOLDER(RL2)
HOLDER(FL)
HOLDER(M1)
HOLDER(POL T1.8)
SUPPORT(MAIN PWB)
HOLDER FILTER ASSY(VT470JY)
LEVER(FOOT)L
LEVER(FOOT)R
SPRING(FOOT F)
BRACKET(I/O)
SHIELD CASE(POWER)T
SHIELD CASE(POWER)B
GROUND METAL(DC-BS)
BRACKET(DETECT SW)
SHIELD CASE(BS)R
BRACKET(FAN 80)
BRACKET(EXHAUST)T
SHIELD(BS)F
LEAF SPRING MIRROR(PB52)
BRACKET(PBS)
BARRIER(IT)
LEAF SPRING(M1)
SPACER FL T0.1(PB52)
SPACER FL T0.2(PB52)
SPACER FL T0.3(PB52)
SPACER FL T0.5(PB52)
SPACER FL T1.0(PB52)
SPACER RL2 T0.1(PB52)
SPACER RL2 T0.2(PB52)
SPACER RL2 T0.3(PB52)
SPACER RL2 T0.5(PB52)
SPACER RL2 T1.0(PB52)
GROUND METAL(FAN-BS)
BRACKET(I/O)ASSY(VT470)
CUSHION(FOOT F)
CUSHION(FOOT R)
FILTER(SIDE)
CUSHION(SPEAKER)B
BURRIER(POWER)
BURRIER(BS)
CUSHION(ZOOM)A
CUSHION(ZOOM)B
CUSHION(COVER A)
CUSHION (FAN DUCT)
BARRIER(FILTER)
CUSHION(LAMP FAN)
WASHER(S-VIDEO)
CUSHION(EXHAUST FAN)T
CUSHION(EXHAUST FAN)B
CUSHION(LED)
CUSHION(EXHAUST)S
CUSHION(SUPPORT)T
CUSHION (FAN ROLL)
GASKET(PS)
CUSHION(10*40*T6)
Parts for adjustment of
optical system.
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
13-17
VT470JY
*** APPEARANCE PARTS ***
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
*
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
*
*
*
SRW018
SRW025
SRW101
SRW102
SRW102
SRW103
SRW103
SRW104
SRW104
SRW105
SRW106
SRW107
SRW108
SRW109
SRW110
SRW111
SRW112
SRW113
SRW114
SRW115
SRW116
SRW117
SRW118
SRW119
SW001
SW002
SW003
SW004
13-18
*
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
24J25021
24J25101
24J25111
24J25121
24J25131
24J25141
24K25891
24L45001
24L46401
24L46421
24L53141
24L54081
24L54101
24L55511
24L55521
24L55221
24L55991
7N970027
7NN1N021
82J21201
82J21251
82J21311
82J33181
82J33191
82J33231
82J33321
82J27121
82J27131
83J27101
24N05831
24N06001
24N07471
24N07451
910E251L
24N05321
24N04771
24N04771
91051033
91051033
24N06901
24N06901
24N05321
24N07411
24N04771
24N04771
910E251L
910E251L
910E251L
910E251L
910E251L
910E2523
910E2523
910E305L
24N04771
910E251L
910E2523
24N04771
24N04771
24N04771
24N04771
CUSHION(DIRECT-LED)
BARRIER(REM-PWB)
BARRIER(MAIN PWB)
CUSHION(20*40*T3)
TAPE(13*18)
TAPE(35*55)
DECOR PLATE(I/O)(VT470)
LABEL(3.5*20)
CAUTION LABEL(SERVICE)
CAUTION LABEL(LAMP COVER)
LABEL(PIXEL WORKS)
CAUTION LABEL(FILTER)
CAUTION LABEL(LENZ 4)
NAME PALTE(VT470JY)
NAME PALTE(VT470JY)TTS
CAUTION LABEL(VT75LP)
LABEL,SERIAL MANUFACTURE
E10K250-28X28H
EARTH STRAP(E07S406200)
POLARIZER B(PB52) SASSY
INTEGRATOR SASSY
FIELD LENS(PB52) SASSY
POLARIZER R SASSY
POLARIZER G SASSY
PS-CONVERTER SASSY
RELAY LENS 2 SASSY
OPT BASE LRL(PB53) SASSY
OPT BASE RLR(PB53) SASSY
ENGINE SASSY
STUD(D-SUB)
PUSHNUT(3.0)
SCREW(CB P_TIGHT3*25*3GF)
CPIPS*3*8*15KF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
CBIPS*2*6*3KF
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
CFIMS*1.7*6*15KF
CFIMS*1.7*6*15KF
SPECIAL SCREW(M2*2.2)
SPECIAL SCREW(M2*2.2)
CBIPS*2*6*3KF
SPECIAL SCREW(M3*8)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SCREW,PL-CPIMS*2.5*8*15KF
SCREW,PL-CPIMS*2.5*8*15KF
SCREW,PL-CPIMS*3*8*3GF
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SCREW,PL-CPIMS*2.5*8*15KF
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
Label for the Chinese production
Corresponds by POLARIZER B
Corresponds by POLARIZER R
Corresponds by POLARIZER G
OR
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
VT470JY
*** APPEARANCE PARTS ***
SW005
SW006
SW007
SW008
SW009
SW010
SW011
SW012
SW013
SW014
SW015
SW016
SW017
SW019
SW021
SW022
SW023
SW024
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
24N04771
24N04771
24N04771
24N04771
24N04771
24N04771
24N04771
910E251L
910E251L
910E251L
910E251L
910E251L
910E251L
9111251L
910E251L
910E3196
91112031
910E3196
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SCREW CBIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SCREW PL-CPIMS*3*30*3KF
SCREW,CBIMS*2*6*15BF
SCREW PL-CPIMS*3*30*3KF
*** PRINTED & PACKING MATERIALS ***
24BS7423
24F40781
24H51611
24L53171
24L55551
24L55531
24L55541
24M16171
24M18361
24MU9581
24MU9591
24MU9601
24MU9611
24MU9931
24N07501
6N800012
7N080115
7N520032
7N520046
7N8P0962
7N8P5031
78047921
7N8P0024
7N900511
7N900561
7N8P5021
Product number
*** OPTION
CARRYING CASE(VT470)
HANDLE(VT470JY)
SCREW DRIVER(M4)
MARKING LABEL(20,BULE)
LABEL(CARTON)(470JY)R
LABEL(CARTON)(470JY)L
LABEL(CARTON)(470JY C)L
PROTECTION BOX
PROTECTION BAG(SCREW)
SPACER L(VT70)
SPACER R(VT70)
PART BOX(VT70)
CARTON BOX(VT70)
CARTON SHEET(VT70)
SPECIAL SCREW(HANDLE M4)
BATTERY ALKLINE AAA
POWER CORD J2 L4.5 7A LF K
CABLE RGB 1.8M VER3 TE
CABLE ADP-CV1
VLC REGISTRATION
VT470JY QUICK GUIDE
WARRANTY ENVELOPE(100*220
PROJECTOR WARRANTY
REM-T HAND UNIT RD-408E
RECEIVER UNIT T103
VT470JY USER MANUAL
Product name
***
01161088
01957616
01957617
01161013
01161042
01161051
01161050
VT75LP(replacement lamp)
VL-CA10MD
VL-CA02MD
VL-CA03V
CA03D
ADP-CV1
ADP-DT1
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
13-19
VT570 series
5. VT570 series (VT570/VT570G)
SYMBOL
PART NO
DESCRIPTION
REMARK
*** PWB ASSYS ***
82J246A3
82J246B3
MAIN SASSY
REM PWB ASSY
*** ELECTRICAL PARTS & MISCELLANEOUS PARTS ***
N.S.P
N.S.P
TH001
CNBM
CNDC
CNLC
PORM2
CNPW
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
3N100581
3N100611
3N100621
3N170072
3N170073
3N170074
3N170075
3N670094
3N670095
3N670096
3N810006
6N160014
6N300016
7N970010
7NW20029
7NW20030
7NW30005
7NW3W057
7NW5W030
7NW6W022
7NWEW010
82J33711
82J33751
POWER SUPPLY UNIT
POWER SUPPLY UNIT
POWER SUPPLY UNIT
DC FAN 3110KL-04W-B39-C52
DC FAN D06F-12SS7 01A(EX)
DC FAN D05F-12BM 05A(EX)
DC FAN BG1002-B042-OOS-01
LCD L3P07X-41G00R
LCD L3P07X-41G00G
LCD L3P07X-41G00B
THERMISTOR 103AT-2-34119
CORE E04SR150718
SPEAKER 40X40 8H 1.5W L50
THERMOSTAT 67L 100P
CN 2P(TH)80S,1685-26
CN 2P(CV)130S,1061-26
CN 3P(BM)50S,3533-28
CN 3P(DC)225W,1015-22
CN 5P(LC)300W,1061-28
CN 6P(RM)70W,1061-26
CN 15P(PW)70W,1061-26
THERMOSTAT SASSY
THERMISTOR(SET,LAMP)SASSY
POWER SUPPLY UNIT(BALLAST)
POWER SUPPLY UNIT(MAIN)
POWER SUPPLY UNIT(FILTER)
*** APPEARANCE PARTS ***
CLR-J
CLG-J
CLB-J
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
13-20
12JS7971
12JS9201
12JS9211
12JS8081
12JS8401
12JS8411
12JS8421
12JS8461
12JS8511
12JS8521
12JS8531
12JS8541
24C01001
24C07601
24DT9322
24DT9433
24F39603
24F39611
24F39651
24F39661
24F39931
24F39951
24F40071
24F40111
24F40141
24F40152
24F40162
ZOOM LENS(PB52)
POLARIZER R(PB55)
POLARIZER G(PB55)
POLARIZER B(PB55)
CONDENSER LENS R(PB52-TC)
CONDENSER LENS G(PB52-TC)
CONDENSER LENS B(PB52-TC)
RELAY LENS 1(PB52-C)
DAICHROIC MIRROR 1(PB52)
DAICHROIC MIRROR 2(PB52)
MIRROR 1(PB52)
MIRROR 2(PB52)
PWB HOLDER
STRAP
BOTTOM COVER ASSY(VT47)
TOP COVER ASSY(VT570)
LAMP COVER(VT47)
HOLDER(FILTER)(VT47)
FOOT F
HOLDER(FOOT)L
HOLDER(FOOT)R
HOLDER(IT)
DUCT(LAMP FAN)
LENS CAP(PB52)
DUCT(LCDFAN)
COVER A
COVER B
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
VT570 series
*** APPEARANCE PARTS ***
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
*
*
*
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
24F40172
24F40191
24F40271
24F40281
24F40292
24F40321
24F40391
24FT9271
24G08781
24G08831
24H44271
24H49491
24H49512
24H49521
24H49531
24H49541
24H49551
24H49561
24H49571
24H49581
24H51091
24H51101
24H51111
24H51161
24H51241
24H51251
24H51261
24H51272
24H51282
24H51291
24H51301
24H51311
24H51322
24H51332
24H51602
24HS3671
24J24101
24J24111
24J24131
24J24141
24J24151
24J24161
24J24451
24J24461
24J24571
24J24581
24J24581
24J24601
24J24611
24J24651
24J24661
24J24671
24J24801
24J24811
24J24821
24J24831
24J24891
24J24901
24J25021
24J25101
COVER(XDP)
SEPARATE BASE(PB52)
HOLDER(POL T0.5)
HOLDER(RL2)
HOLDER(FL)
HOLDER(M1)
SUPPORT(MAIN PWB)
HOLDER FILTER ASSY(VT47)
LEVER(FOOT)L
LEVER(FOOT)R
SPRING(FOOT F)
BRACKET(I/O)
SHIELD CASE(POWER)T
SHIELD CASE(POWER)B
GROUND METAL(DC-BS)
BRACKET(DETECT SW)
SHIELD CASE(BS)R
BRACKET(FAN 80)
BRACKET(EXHAUST)T
SHIELD(BS)F
LEAF SPRING MIRROR(PB52)
BRACKET(PBS)
BARRIER(IT)
LEAF SPRING(M1)
SPACER FL T0.1(PB52)
SPACER FL T0.2(PB52)
SPACER FL T0.3(PB52)
SPACER FL T0.5(PB52)
SPACER FL T1.0(PB52)
SPACER RL2 T0.1(PB52)
SPACER RL2 T0.2(PB52)
SPACER RL2 T0.3(PB52)
SPACER RL2 T0.5(PB52)
SPACER RL2 T1.0(PB52)
GROUND METAL(FAN-BS)
BRACKET(I/O)ASSY(VT470)
CUSHION(FOOT F)
CUSHION(FOOT R)
FILTER(SIDE)
CUSHION(SPEAKER)B
BURRIER(POWER)
BURRIER(BS)
CUSHION(ZOOM)A
CUSHION(ZOOM)B
CUSHION(COVER A)
CUSHION (FAN DUCT)
CUSHION (FAN DUCT)
BARRIER(FILTER)
CUSHION(LAMP FAN)
WASHER(S-VIDEO)
CUSHION(EXHAUST FAN)T
CUSHION(EXHAUST FAN)B
CUSHION(LED)
CUSHION(EXHAUST)S
CUSHION(SUPPORT)T
CUSHION (FAN ROLL)
GASKET(PS)
CUSHION(10*40*T6)
CUSHION(DIRECT-LED)
BARRIER(REM-PWB)
Parts for adjustment of
optical system.
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
13-21
VT570 series
*** APPEARANCE PARTS ***
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
24J25111
24J25121
24J25131
24J25141
24K25891
24L45001
24L46401
24L46421
24L53141
24L54101
24L54362
* 24L54432
* 24L54492
24L54371
* 24L54441
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
*
*
*
SRW103
SW023
SRW018
SRW025
SRW101
SRW102
SRW104
SRW105
SRW106
SRW106
SRW107
SRW107
SRW108
SRW108
SRW109
SRW110
SRW111
SRW112
SRW113
SRW114
SRW115
SRW116
SRW117
SRW118
SRW119
SW001
SW002
13-22
*
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
24L54071
24L54081
24L55991
7N970027
7NN1N021
82J24121
82J33181
82J24191
82J33201
82J33231
82J33251
82J33311
82J33321
83J24101
24N05831
24N06001
24N07471
91052036
91112031
24N07451
910E251L
24N05321
24N04771
24N06901
24N05321
24N07411
24N07411
24N04771
24N04771
24N04771
24N04771
910E251L
910E251L
910E251L
910E251L
910E251L
910E2523
910E2523
910E305L
24N04771
910E251L
910E2523
24N04771
24N04771
BARRIER(MAIN PWB)
CUSHION(20*40*T3)
TAPE(13*18)
TAPE(35*55)
DECOR PLATE(I/O)(VT470)
LABEL(3.5*20)
CAUTION LABEL(SERVICE)
CAUTION LABEL(LAMP COVER)
LABEL(PIXEL WORKS)
CAUTION LABEL(LENZ 4)
NAME PALTE(VT570)
NAME PALTE(VT570)TS
NAME PALTE(VT570)NK
NAME PALTE(VT570G)
NAME PALTE(VT570G)C
CAUTION LABEL(VT70LP)
CAUTION LABEL(FILTER)
LABEL,SERIAL MANUFACTURE
E10K250-28X28H
EARTH STRAP(E07S406200)
OPTBASE LLL(PB54) SASSY
POLARIZER R SASSY
POLARIZER G SASSY
POLARIZER B SASSY
PS-CONVERTER SASSY
INTEGRATOR SASSY
FIELD LENS SASSY
RELAY LENS 2 SASSY
ENGINE SASSY
STUD(D-SUB)
PUSHNUT(3.0)
SCREW(CB P_TIGHT3*25*3GF)
SCREW,CFIMS*2*6*3KF
SCREW,CBIMS*2*6*15BF
CPIPS*3*8*15KF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
CBIPS*2*6*3KF
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SPECIAL SCREW(M2*2.2)
CBIPS*2*6*3KF
SPECIAL SCREW(M3*8)
SPECIAL SCREW(M3*8)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SCREW,PL-CPIMS*2.5*8*15KF
SCREW,PL-CPIMS*2.5*8*15KF
SCREW,PL-CPIMS*3*8*3GF
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SCREW,PL-CPIMS*2.5*8*15KF
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
VT570 only
VT570 only
Label for the Chinese production
VT570G only
VT570G only
Label for the Chinese production
Corresponds by POLARIZER R
Corresponds by POLARIZER G
Corresponds by POLARIZER B
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
VT570 series
*** APPEARANCE PARTS ***
SW003
SW004
SW005
SW006
SW007
SW008
SW009
SW010
SW011
SW012
SW013
SW014
SW015
SW016
SW017
SW019
SW021
SW022
SW024
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
24N04771
24N04771
24N04771
24N04771
24N04771
24N04771
24N04771
24N04771
24N04771
910E251L
910E251L
910E251L
910E251L
910E251L
910E251L
9111251L
910E251L
910E3196
910E3196
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SCREW CBIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SCREW PL-CPIMS*3*30*3KF
SCREW PL-CPIMS*3*30*3KF
*** PRINTED & PACKING MATERIALS ***
24BS7423
24M16171
24MU9581
24MU9591
24MU9601
24MU9611
24MU9932
7N8P4401
7N950492
7N8P4371
7N520032
7N900551
7N8P4411
7N8P1351
24L54112
24L54651
24L54661
* 24L54841
7N080212
7N8P1612
7N080009
24L54672
24L54681
* 24L54852
Product number
*** OPTION
CARRYING CASE(VT470)
PROTECTION BOX
SPACER L(VT70)
SPACER R(VT70)
PART BOX(VT70)
CARTON BOX(VT70)
CARTON SHEET(VT70)
VT70 IMPORTANT INFO(U/G)
VT70 U/M CD-ROM(U/G)
VT70 QUICK GUIDE (U/G)
CABLE RGB 1.8M VER3 TE
REM-T HAND UNIT RD-412E
VT70 LW & FCC SHEET (USA)
REGISTRATIOM CARD(USA)
LABEL(INSTA CARE)(VT70LP)
LABEL(CARTON)(570)L
LABEL(CARTON)(570)R
LABEL(CARTON)(570C)L
POWER CODE U2 L3.0 7.0A V
WARRANTY(EUROPE)
POWER CODE E2 L3.0 2.5A LF K
LABEL(CARTON)(570G)L
LABEL(CARTON)(570G)R
LABEL(CARTON)(570GC)L
VT570 only
Label for the Chinese production
VT570G only
Label for the Chinese production
Product name
***
01161087
01957616
01957617
01161013
01161042
01161051
01161050
VT70LP(replacement lamp)
VL-CA10MD
VL-CA02MD
VL-CA03V
CA03D
ADP-CV1
ADP-DT1
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
13-23
VT575 series
6. VT575 series (VT5750/VT575G)
SYMBOL
PART NO
DESCRIPTION
REMARK
*** PWB ASSYS ***
82J986A3
82J986B3
MAIN SASSY
REM PWB ASSY
*** ELECTRICAL PARTS & MISCELLANEOUS PARTS ***
N.S.P
N.S.P
TH001
CNBM
CNDC
CNLC
PORM2
CNPW
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
3N100581
3N100611
3N100621
3N170072
3N170073
3N170074
3N170075
3N670097
3N670099
3N670108
3N670098
3N670107
3N670109
3N810006
6N160014
6N300016
7N970010
7NW20029
7NW20030
7NW30005
7NW3W057
7NW5W030
7NW6W022
7NWEW010
82J33711
82J33751
POWER SUPPLY UNIT
POWER SUPPLY UNIT
POWER SUPPLY UNIT
DC FAN 3110KL-04W-B39-C52
DC FAN D06F-12SS7 01A(EX)
DC FAN D05F-12BM 05A(EX)
DC FAN BG1002-B042-OOS-01
LCD L3P07X-45G00R
LCD L3P07X-45G00B
LCD L3P07X-46G00G
LCD L3P07X-45G00G
LCD L3P07X-46G00R
LCD L3P07X-46G00B
THERMISTOR 103AT-2-34119
CORE E04SR150718
SPEAKER 40X40 8H 1.5W L50
THERMOSTAT 67L 100P
CN 2P(TH)80S,1685-26
CN 2P(CV)130S,1061-26
CN 3P(BM)50S,3533-28
CN 3P(DC)225W,1015-22
CN 5P(LC)300W,1061-28
CN 6P(RM)70W,1061-26
CN 15P(PW)70W,1061-26
THERMOSTAT SASSY
THERMISTOR(SET,LAMP)SASSY
POWER SUPPLY UNIT(BALLAST)
POWER SUPPLY UNIT(MAIN)
POWER SUPPLY UNIT(FILTER)
For 82J98121
For 82J98121
For 82J98121
For 82J98131
For 82J98131
For 82J98131
*** APPEARANCE PARTS ***
CLR-J
CLG-J
CLB-J
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
13-24
12JS7971
12JS9201
12JS9211
12JS8081
12JS8401
12JS8411
12JS8421
12JS8461
12JS8511
12JS8521
12JS8531
12JS8541
24C01001
24C07601
24DT9322
24DT9673
24F39603
24F39611
24F39651
24F39661
24F39931
24F39951
24F40071
ZOOM LENS(PB52)
POLARIZER R(PB55)
POLARIZER G(PB55)
POLARIZER B(PB55)
CONDENSER LENS R(PB52-TC)
CONDENSER LENS G(PB52-TC)
CONDENSER LENS B(PB52-TC)
RELAY LENS 1(PB52-C)
DAICHROIC MIRROR 1(PB52)
DAICHROIC MIRROR 2(PB52)
MIRROR 1(PB52)
MIRROR 2(PB52)
PWB HOLDER
STRAP
BOTTOM COVER ASSY(VT47)
TOP COVER ASSY(VT575G)
LAMP COVER(VT47)
HOLDER(FILTER)(VT47)
FOOT F
HOLDER(FOOT)L
HOLDER(FOOT)R
HOLDER(IT)
DUCT(LAMP FAN)
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
VT575 series
*** APPEARANCE PARTS ***
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
*
*
*
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
24F40111
24F40141
24F40152
24F40162
24F40172
24F40191
24F40271
24F40281
24F40292
24F40321
24F40391
24FT9271
24G08781
24G08831
24H44271
24H49491
24H49512
24H49521
24H49531
24H49541
24H49551
24H49561
24H49571
24H49581
24H51091
24H51101
24H51111
24H51161
24H51241
24H51251
24H51261
24H51272
24H51282
24H51291
24H51301
24H51311
24H51322
24H51332
24H51602
24HS3671
24J24101
24J24111
24J24131
24J24141
24J24151
24J24161
24J24451
24J24461
24J24571
24J24581
24J24581
24J24601
24J24611
24J24651
24J24661
24J24671
24J24801
24J24811
24J24821
24J24831
LENS CAP(PB52)
DUCT(LCDFAN)
COVER A
COVER B
COVER(XDP)
SEPARATE BASE(PB52)
HOLDER(POL T0.5)
HOLDER(RL2)
HOLDER(FL)
HOLDER(M1)
SUPPORT(MAIN PWB)
HOLDER FILTER ASSY(VT47)
LEVER(FOOT)L
LEVER(FOOT)R
SPRING(FOOT F)
BRACKET(I/O)
SHIELD CASE(POWER)T
SHIELD CASE(POWER)B
GROUND METAL(DC-BS)
BRACKET(DETECT SW)
SHIELD CASE(BS)R
BRACKET(FAN 80)
BRACKET(EXHAUST)T
SHIELD(BS)F
LEAF SPRING MIRROR(PB52)
BRACKET(PBS)
BARRIER(IT)
LEAF SPRING(M1)
SPACER FL T0.1(PB52)
SPACER FL T0.2(PB52)
SPACER FL T0.3(PB52)
SPACER FL T0.5(PB52)
SPACER FL T1.0(PB52)
SPACER RL2 T0.1(PB52)
SPACER RL2 T0.2(PB52)
SPACER RL2 T0.3(PB52)
SPACER RL2 T0.5(PB52)
SPACER RL2 T1.0(PB52)
GROUND METAL(FAN-BS)
BRACKET(I/O)ASSY(VT470)
CUSHION(FOOT F)
CUSHION(FOOT R)
FILTER(SIDE)
CUSHION(SPEAKER)B
BURRIER(POWER)
BURRIER(BS)
CUSHION(ZOOM)A
CUSHION(ZOOM)B
CUSHION(COVER A)
CUSHION (FAN DUCT)
CUSHION (FAN DUCT)
BARRIER(FILTER)
CUSHION(LAMP FAN)
WASHER(S-VIDEO)
CUSHION(EXHAUST FAN)T
CUSHION(EXHAUST FAN)B
CUSHION(LED)
CUSHION(EXHAUST)S
CUSHION(SUPPORT)T
CUSHION (FAN ROLL)
Parts for adjustment of
optical system.
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
13-25
http://getMANUAL.com
VT575 series
*** APPEARANCE PARTS ***
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
24J24891
24J24901
24J25021
24J25101
24J25111
24J25121
24J25131
24J25141
24K25891
24L45001
24L46401
24L46421
24L53141
24L54101
24L57171
* 24L57191
GASKET(PS)
CUSHION(10*40*T6)
CUSHION(DIRECT-LED)
BARRIER(REM-PWB)
BARRIER(MAIN PWB)
CUSHION(20*40*T3)
TAPE(13*18)
TAPE(35*55)
DECOR PLATE(I/O)(VT470)
LABEL(3.5*20)
CAUTION LABEL(SERVICE)
CAUTION LABEL(LAMP COVER)
LABEL(PIXEL WORKS)
CAUTION LABEL(LENZ 4)
NAME PALTE(VT575)
NAME PALTE(VT575)TS
24L56541
* 24L56551
NAME PALTE(VT575G)
NAME PALTE(VT575G)C
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
*
*
*
SRW018
SRW025
SRW101
SRW102
SRW102
SRW103
SRW103
SRW104
SRW104
SRW105
SRW106
SRW106
SRW107
SRW107
SRW108
SRW108
SRW109
SRW110
SRW111
SRW112
SRW113
SRW114
13-26
*
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
24L54071
24L54081
24L55991
7N970027
7NN1N021
82J98121
82J98131
82J33181
82J24191
82J33201
82J33231
82J33251
82J33311
82J33321
83J98101
24N05831
24N06001
24N07471
24N07451
910E251L
24N05321
24N04771
24N04771
91052036
91052036
24N06901
24N06901
24N05321
24N07411
24N07411
24N04771
24N04771
24N04771
24N04771
910E251L
910E251L
910E251L
910E251L
910E251L
910E2523
CAUTION LABEL(VT70LP)
CAUTION LABEL(FILTER)
LABEL,SERIAL MANUFACTURE
E10K250-28X28H
EARTH STRAP(E07S406200)
OPTBASE LRL(PB54) SASSY
OPTBASE RLR(PB54) SASSY
POLARIZER R SASSY
POLARIZER G SASSY
POLARIZER B SASSY
PS-CONVERTER SASSY
INTEGRATOR SASSY
FIELD LENS SASSY
RELAY LENS 2 SASSY
ENGINE SASSY
STUD(D-SUB)
PUSHNUT(3.0)
SCREW(CB P_TIGHT3*25*3GF)
CPIPS*3*8*15KF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
CBIPS*2*6*3KF
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW,CFIMS*2*6*3KF
SCREW,CFIMS*2*6*3KF
SPECIAL SCREW(M2*2.2)
SPECIAL SCREW(M2*2.2)
CBIPS*2*6*3KF
SPECIAL SCREW(M3*8)
SPECIAL SCREW(M3*8)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SCREW,PL-CPIMS*2.5*8*15KF
VT575 only
VT575 only
Label for the Chinese production
VT575G only
VT575G only
Label for the Chinese production
OR
Corresponds by POLARIZER R
Corresponds by POLARIZER G
Corresponds by POLARIZER B
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
VT575 series
*** APPEARANCE PARTS ***
SRW115
SRW116
SRW117
SRW118
SRW119
SW001
SW002
SW003
SW004
SW005
SW006
SW007
SW008
SW009
SW010
SW011
SW012
SW013
SW014
SW015
SW016
SW017
SW019
SW021
SW022
SW023
SW024
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
910E2523
910E305L
24N04771
910E251L
910E2523
24N04771
24N04771
24N04771
24N04771
24N04771
24N04771
24N04771
24N04771
24N04771
24N04771
24N04771
910E251L
910E251L
910E251L
910E251L
910E251L
910E251L
9111251L
910E251L
910E3196
91112031
910E3196
SCREW,PL-CPIMS*2.5*8*15KF
SCREW,PL-CPIMS*3*8*3GF
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SCREW,PL-CPIMS*2.5*8*15KF
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SCREW CBIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SCREW PL-CPIMS*3*30*3KF
SCREW,CBIMS*2*6*15BF
SCREW PL-CPIMS*3*30*3KF
*** PRINTED & PACKING MATERIALS ***
24BS7423
24M16171
24MU9581
24MU9591
24MU9601
24MU9611
24MU9932
7N8P4402
7N950493
7N8P4372
7N520032
7N900522
7N8P4412
7N8P1351
24L54112
7N080212
24L57231
24L57241
* 24L57281
7N8P1612
7N080009
24L56561
24L56571
* 24L56581
CARRYING CASE(VT470)
PROTECTION BOX
SPACER L(VT70)
SPACER R(VT70)
PART BOX(VT70)
CARTON BOX(VT70)
CARTON SHEET(VT70)
VT70 IMPORTANT INFO(U/G)
VT70 U/M CD-ROM(U/G)
VT70 QUICK GUIDE (U/G)
CABLE RGB 1.8M VER3 TE
REM-T HAND UNIT RD-409E
VT70 LW & FCC SHEET (USA)
REGISTRATIOM CARD(USA)
LABEL(INSTA CARE)(VT70LP)
POWER CODE U2 L3.0 7.0A V
LABEL(CARTON)(VT575)L
LABEL(CARTON)(VT575)R
LABEL(CARTON)(VT575C)L
WARRANTY(EUROPE)
POWER CODE E2 L3.0 2.5A LF K
LABEL(CARTON)L(570G)
LABEL(CARTON)R(570G)
LABEL(CARTON)L(570G)C
VT575 only
Label for the Chinese production
VT575G only
Label for the Chinese production
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
13-27
VT575 series
Product number
*** OPTION
***
01161087
01957616
01957617
01161013
01161042
01161051
01161050
13-28
Product name
VT70LP(replacement lamp)
VL-CA10MD
VL-CA02MD
VL-CA03V
CA03D
ADP-CV1
ADP-DT1
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
VT670 series
7. VT670 series (VT670/VT670G/VT670J/VT670+/VT675+)
SYMBOL
PART NO
DESCRIPTION
REMARK
*** PWB ASSYS ***
82J216A3
82J216B3
MAIN SASSY
REM PWB ASSY
*** ELECTRICAL PARTS & MISCELLANEOUS PARTS ***
TH001
CNBM
CNDC
CNLC
PORM2
CNPW
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
3N100571
3N100611
3N100621
3N170072
3N170073
3N170074
3N170075
3N670098
3N670107
3N670109
3N670099
3N670097
3N670108
3N810006
6N160014
6N300016
7N970022
7NW20029
7NW20030
7NW30005
7NW3W057
7NW5W030
7NW6W022
7NWEW010
82J21711
82J33751
POWER SUPPLY UNIT
POWER SUPPLY UNIT
POWER SUPPLY UNIT
DC FAN 3110KL-04W-B39-C52
DC FAN D06F-12SS7 01A(EX)
DC FAN D05F-12BM 05A(EX)
DC FAN BG1002-B042-OOS-01
LCD L3P07X-45G00G
LCD L3P07X-46G00R
LCD L3P07X-46G00B
LCD L3P07X-45G00B
LCD L3P07X-45G00R
LCD L3P07X-46G00G
THERMISTOR 103AT-2-34119
CORE E04SR150718
SPEAKER 40X40 8H 1.5W L50
THERMOSTATS (67L 120P)
CN 2P(TH)80S,1685-26
CN 2P(CV)130S,1061-26
CN 3P(BM)50S,3533-28
CN 3P(DC)225W,1015-22
CN 5P(LC)300W,1061-28
CN 6P(RM)70W,1061-26
CN 15P(PW)70W,1061-26
THERMOSTAT SASSY
THERMISTOR(SET,LAMP)SASSY
POWER SUPPLY UNIT(BALLAST)
POWER SUPPLY UNIT(MAIN)
POWER SUPPLY UNIT(FILTER)
For 82J21131
For 82J21131
For 82J21131
For 82J21121
For 82J21121
For 82J21121
*** APPEARANCE PARTS ***
CLR-J
CLG-J
CLB-J
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
12JS7971
12JS8051
12JS9201
12JS8071
12JS8401
12JS8411
12JS8421
12JS8461
12JS8511
12JS8521
12JS8531
12JS8541
24C01001
24C07601
24DT9412
24DT9443
24DT9491
24DT9681
24F39603
24F39611
24F39651
24F39661
ZOOM LENS(PB52)
POLARIZER B(PB52)
POLARIZER R(PB55)
POLARIZER G(PB55)
CONDENSER LENS R(PB52-TC)
CONDENSER LENS G(PB52-TC)
CONDENSER LENS B(PB52-TC)
RELAY LENS 1(PB52-C)
DAICHROIC MIRROR 1(PB52)
DAICHROIC MIRROR 2(PB52)
MIRROR 1(PB52)
MIRROR 2(PB52)
PWB HOLDER
STRAP
BOTTOM COVER ASSY(VT470)
TOP COVER ASSY(VT670)
TOP COVER ASSY(VT670+)
VT670+ only
TOP COVER ASSY(VT675+)
VT675+ only
Although original Part number for + version is written here for just reference,
common part with other version will be supplied.
LAMP COVER(VT47)
HOLDER(FILTER)(VT47)
FOOT F
HOLDER(FOOT)L
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
13-29
VT670 series
*** APPEARANCE PARTS ***
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
24F39931
24F39951
24F40071
24F40111
N.S.P 24F40141
N.S.P 24F40152
N.S.P 24F40162
N.S.P 24F40172
N.S.P 24F40271
N.S.P 24F40281
N.S.P 24F40292
N.S.P 24F40321
N.S.P 24F40391
* 24FT9271
* 24G08781
* 24G08831
N.S.P 24H44271
N.S.P 24H49491
N.S.P 24H49512
N.S.P 24H49521
N.S.P 24H49531
N.S.P 24H49541
N.S.P 24H49551
N.S.P 24H49561
N.S.P 24H49571
N.S.P 24H49581
N.S.P 24H51091
N.S.P 24H51101
N.S.P 24H51111
N.S.P 24H51161
24H51241
24H51251
24H51261
24H51272
24H51282
24H51291
24H51301
24H51311
24H51322
24H51332
N.S.P 24H51531
N.S.P 24H51602
N.S.P 24H51622
N.S.P 24H51622
N.S.P 24H52391
N.S.P 24HS3671
N.S.P 24J24101
N.S.P 24J24111
N.S.P 24J24131
N.S.P 24J24141
N.S.P 24J24151
N.S.P 24J24161
N.S.P 24J24451
N.S.P 24J24461
N.S.P 24J24571
N.S.P 24J24581
N.S.P 24J24601
N.S.P 24J24611
N.S.P 24J24651
N.S.P 24J24661
13-30
HOLDER(FOOT)R
HOLDER(IT)
DUCT(LAMP FAN)
LENS CAP(PB52)
DUCT(LCDFAN)
COVER A
COVER B
COVER(XDP)
HOLDER(POL T0.5)
HOLDER(RL2)
HOLDER(FL)
HOLDER(M1)
SUPPORT(MAIN PWB)
HOLDER FILTER ASSY(VT47)
LEVER(FOOT)L
LEVER(FOOT)R
SPRING(FOOT F)
BRACKET(I/O)
SHIELD CASE(POWER)T
SHIELD CASE(POWER)B
GROUND METAL(DC-BS)
BRACKET(DETECT SW)
SHIELD CASE(BS)R
BRACKET(FAN 80)
BRACKET(EXHAUST)T
SHIELD(BS)F
LEAF SPRING MIRROR(PB52)
BRACKET(PBS)
BARRIER(IT)
LEAF SPRING(M1)
SPACER FL T0.1(PB52)
SPACER FL T0.2(PB52)
SPACER FL T0.3(PB52)
SPACER FL T0.5(PB52)
SPACER FL T1.0(PB52)
SPACER RL2 T0.1(PB52)
SPACER RL2 T0.2(PB52)
SPACER RL2 T0.3(PB52)
SPACER RL2 T0.5(PB52)
SPACER RL2 T1.0(PB52)
BRACKET LCD(PB53)
GROUND METAL(FAN-BS)
BRACKET PBS (PB52)
BRACKET PBS (PB52)
BARRIER IT(PB52)
BRACKET(I/O)ASSY(VT470)
CUSHION(FOOT F)
CUSHION(FOOT R)
FILTER(SIDE)
CUSHION(SPEAKER)B
BURRIER(POWER)
BURRIER(BS)
CUSHION(ZOOM)A
CUSHION(ZOOM)B
CUSHION(COVER A)
CUSHION (FAN DUCT)
BARRIER(FILTER)
CUSHION(LAMP FAN)
WASHER(S-VIDEO)
CUSHION(EXHAUST FAN)T
Parts for adjustment of
optical system.
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
VT670 series
*** APPEARANCE PARTS ***
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
24J24671
24J24801
24J24811
24J24821
24J24831
24J24891
24J24901
24J25021
24J25101
24J25111
24J25121
24J25131
24J25141
24K25891
24L45001
24L53141
24L46401
24L46421
24L55991
24L54081
24L54101
24L55221
24L54342
* 24L54412
CUSHION(EXHAUST FAN)B
CUSHION(LED)
CUSHION(EXHAUST)S
CUSHION(SUPPORT)T
CUSHION (FAN ROLL)
GASKET(PS)
CUSHION(10*40*T6)
CUSHION(DIRECT-LED)
BARRIER(REM-PWB)
BARRIER(MAIN PWB)
CUSHION(20*40*T3)
TAPE(13*18)
TAPE(35*55)
DECOR PLATE(I/O)(VT470)
LABEL(3.5*20)
LABEL(PIXEL WORKS)
CAUTION LABEL(SERVICE)
CAUTION LABEL(LAMP COVER)
LABEL,SERIAL MANUFACTURE
CAUTION LABEL(FILTER)
CAUTION LABEL(LENZ 4)
CAUTION LABEL(VT75LP)
NAME PALTE(VT670)
NAME PALTE(VT670)TS
24L54351
* 24L54421
NAME PALTE(VT670G)
NAME PALTE(VT670G)C
*
*
*
*
CAUTION LABEL(VT75LP,+)
LABEL(FILTER)(VT70+)
LABEL(LENZ 4)(VT70+)
NAME PALTE(VT670+)TS
24L56321
24L54931
24L54941
24L54531
* 24L56591
N.S.P
N.S.P
*
*
*
SRW018
SRW025
SRW101
SRW102
SRW102
SRW103
SRW103
SRW104
SRW104
SRW105
*
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
7N970027
7NN1N021
82J21121
82J21131
82J21201
82J21251
82J21311
82J27231
82J33181
82J33191
82J33321
83J21101
24N05831
24N06001
24N07471
24N07451
910E251L
24N05321
24N04771
24N04771
91052036
91052036
24N06901
24N06901
24N05321
NAME PALTE(VT675+)TS
E10K250-28X28H
EARTH STRAP(E07S406200)
OPTBASE LRL(PB52) SASSY
OPTBASE RLR(PB52) SASSY
POLARIZER B(PB52) SASSY
INTEGRATOR SASSY
FIELD LENS(PB52) SASSY
PS-CONVERTER SASSY
POLARIZER R SASSY
POLARIZER G SASSY
RELAY LENS 2 SASSY
ENGINE SASSY
STUD(D-SUB)
PUSHNUT(3.0)
SCREW(CB P_TIGHT3*25*3GF)
CPIPS*3*8*15KF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
CBIPS*2*6*3KF
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW,CFIMS*2*6*3KF
SCREW,CFIMS*2*6*3KF
SPECIAL SCREW(M2*2.2)
SPECIAL SCREW(M2*2.2)
CBIPS*2*6*3KF
VT670,VT670G and VT670J only
VT670 only
VT670 only
Label for the Chinese production
VT670G and VT670J only
VT670G and VT670J only
Label for the Chinese production
VT670+ and VT675+ only
VT670+ only
Label for the Chinese production
VT675+ only
Label for the Chinese production
OR
Corresponds by POLARIZER B
Corresponds by POLARIZER R
Corresponds by POLARIZER G
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
13-31
VT670 series
*** APPEARANCE PARTS ***
SRW106
SRW107
SRW108
SRW109
SRW110
SRW111
SRW112
SRW113
SRW114
SRW115
SRW116
SRW117
SRW118
SRW119
SW001
SW002
SW003
SW004
SW005
SW006
SW007
SW008
SW009
SW010
SW011
SW012
SW013
SW014
SW015
SW016
SW017
SW019
SW021
SW022
SW023
SW024
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
24N07411
24N04771
24N04771
910E251L
910E251L
910E251L
910E251L
910E251L
910E2523
910E2523
910E305L
24N04771
910E251L
910E2523
24N04771
24N04771
24N04771
24N04771
24N04771
24N04771
24N04771
24N04771
24N04771
24N04771
24N04771
910E251L
910E251L
910E251L
910E251L
910E251L
910E251L
9111251L
910E251L
910E3196
91112031
910E3196
SPECIAL SCREW(M3*8)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SCREW,PL-CPIMS*2.5*8*15KF
SCREW,PL-CPIMS*2.5*8*15KF
SCREW,PL-CPIMS*3*8*3GF
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SCREW,PL-CPIMS*2.5*8*15KF
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SCREW CBIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SCREW PL-CPIMS*3*30*3KF
SCREW,CBIMS*2*6*15BF
SCREW PL-CPIMS*3*30*3KF
*** PRINTED & PACKING MATERIALS ***
24BS7423
24M16171
24MU9581
24MU9591
24MU9601
24MU9611
24MU9932
24N07501
6N800007
24H51611
7N900522
7N900561
24M18361
24F39671
7N520032
7N8P4402
7N950493
7N8P4372
13-32
CARRYING CASE(VT470)
PROTECTION BOX
SPACER L(VT70)
SPACER R(VT70)
PART BOX(VT70)
CARTON BOX(VT70)
CARTON SHEET(VT70)
SPECIAL SCREW(HANDLE M4)
BATTERY,DRY CELL R03UG(JE
SCREW DRIVER(M4)
REM-T HAND UNIT RD-409E
RECEIVER UNIT T103
PROTECTION BAG(SCREW)
HANDLE(VT70)
CABLE RGB 1.8M VER3 TE
VT70 IMPORTANT INFO(U/G)
VT70 U/M CD-ROM(U/G)
VT70 QUICK GUIDE (U/G)
VT670 and VT670G only
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
*** PRINTED & PACKING MATERIALS ***
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
24L54591
24L54601
24L54811
7N8P4411
7N8P1351
7N080213
24L55232
24L54612
24L54621
24L54822
7N8P1612
7N080007
24L54631
24L54641
24L54831
7N8P5061
7N8P5071
7N8P0962
78047921
7N080115
7N8P0024
24MU9841
24MV0191
24M19951
7N080505
7N90P212
7N8P4592
7N8P4602
Product number
*** OPTION
LABEL(CARTON)(670)L
LABEL(CARTON)(670)R
LABEL(CARTON)(670C)L
VT70 LW & FCC SHEET (USA)
REGISTRATIOM CARD(USA)
POWER CORD U2 L4.5 7A V
LABEL(INSTA CARE)(VT75LP)
LABEL(CARTON)(670G)L
LABEL(CARTON)(670G)R
LABEL(CARTON)(670GC)L
WARRANTY(EUROPE)
POWER CORD E2 L4.5 2.5A LF K
LABEL(CARTON)(670J)L
LABEL(CARTON)(670J)R
LABEL(CARTON)(670JC)L
VT70 USER MANUAL(J)
VT70 QUICK GUIDE (J)
VLC REGISTRATION
WARRANTY ENVELOPE(100*220
POWER CORD J2 L4.5 7A LF K
PROJECTOR WARRANTY
CARTON BOX(VT670+)TS
CARTON BOX(VT675+)TS
OUTSIDE C/B(VT70+ TTS)
POWER CORD C2 L4.5 2.5A K
WARRANTY CARD2 (CN)
VT70+ USER MANUAL (CH)
VT70+ QUICK GUIDE (CH)
VT670 only
VT670G only
VT670J only
VT670+ only
VT675+ only
VT670+ and VT675+ only
Product name
***
01161088
01957616
01957617
01161013
01161042
01161051
01161050
VT75LP(replacement lamp)
VL-CA10MD
VL-CA02MD
VL-CA03V
CA03D
ADP-CV1
ADP-DT1
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
13-33
VT676 series
8. VT676 series (VT676/VT676G/VT676J/VT676+)
SYMBOL
PART NO
DESCRIPTION
REMARK
*** PWB ASSYS ***
82K356A3
82K356B3
MAIN SASSY
REM PWB ASSY
*** ELECTRICAL PARTS & MISCELLANEOUS PARTS ***
TH001
CNBM
CNDC
CNLC
PORM2
CNPW
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
3N100571
3N100611
3N100621
3N170072
3N170073
3N170074
3N170075
3N670191
3N670193
3N670202
3N670192
3N670201
3N670203
3N810006
6N160014
6N300016
7N970022
7NW20029
7NW20030
7NW30005
7NW3W057
7NW5W030
7NW6W022
7NWEW010
82J21711
82J33751
POWER SUPPLY UNIT
POWER SUPPLY UNIT
POWER SUPPLY UNIT
DC FAN 3110KL-04W-B39-C52
DC FAN D06F-12SS7 01A(EX)
DC FAN D05F-12BM 05A(EX)
DC FAN BG1002-B042-OOS-01
LCD L3P07X-45G10R
LCD L3P07X-45G10B
LCD L3P07X-46G10G
LCD L3P07X-45G10G
LCD L3P07X-46G10R
LCD L3P07X-46G10B
THERMISTOR 103AT-2-34119
CORE E04SR150718
SPEAKER 40X40 8H 1.5W L50
THERMOSTATS (67L 120P)
CN 2P(TH)80S,1685-26
CN 2P(CV)130S,1061-26
CN 3P(BM)50S,3533-28
CN 3P(DC)225W,1015-22
CN 5P(LC)300W,1061-28
CN 6P(RM)70W,1061-26
CN 15P(PW)70W,1061-26
THERMOSTAT SASSY
THERMISTOR(SET,LAMP)SASSY
POWER SUPPLY UNIT(BALLAST)
POWER SUPPLY UNIT(MAIN)
POWER SUPPLY UNIT(FILTER)
For 82K35121
For 82K35121
For 82K35121
For 82K35131
For 82K35131
For 82K35131
*** APPEARANCE PARTS ***
CLR-J
CLG-J
CLB-J
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
13-34
12JS7971
12JS8051
12JS9201
12JS8071
12JS8401
12JS8411
12JS8421
12JS8461
12JS8511
12JS8521
12JS8531
12JS8541
24C01001
24C07601
24DT9412
24DT9731
24DT9851
24F39603
24F39611
24F39651
24F39661
24F39931
ZOOM LENS(PB52)
POLARIZER B(PB52)
POLARIZER R(PB55)
POLARIZER G(PB55)
CONDENSER LENS R(PB52-TC)
CONDENSER LENS G(PB52-TC)
CONDENSER LENS B(PB52-TC)
RELAY LENS 1(PB52-C)
DAICHROIC MIRROR 1(PB52)
DAICHROIC MIRROR 2(PB52)
MIRROR 1(PB52)
MIRROR 2(PB52)
PWB HOLDER
STRAP
BOTTOM COVER ASSY(VT470)
TOP COVER ASSY(VT676)
TOP COVER ASSY(VT676+)
VT676+ only
Although original Part number for + version is written here for just reference,
common part with other version will be supplied.
LAMP COVER(VT47)
HOLDER(FILTER)(VT47)
FOOT F
HOLDER(FOOT)L
HOLDER(FOOT)R
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
VT676 series
*** APPEARANCE PARTS ***
N.S.P
N.S.P
24F39951
24F40071
24F40111
N.S.P 24F40141
N.S.P 24F40152
N.S.P 24F40162
N.S.P 24F40172
N.S.P 24F40271
N.S.P 24F40281
N.S.P 24F40292
N.S.P 24F40321
N.S.P 24F40391
* 24FT9271
* 24G08781
* 24G08831
N.S.P 24H44271
N.S.P 24H49491
N.S.P 24H49512
N.S.P 24H49521
N.S.P 24H49531
N.S.P 24H49541
N.S.P 24H49551
N.S.P 24H49561
N.S.P 24H49571
N.S.P 24H49581
N.S.P 24H51091
N.S.P 24H51101
N.S.P 24H51111
N.S.P 24H51161
24H51241
24H51251
24H51261
24H51272
24H51282
24H51291
24H51301
24H51311
24H51322
24H51332
N.S.P 24H51531
N.S.P 24H51602
N.S.P 24H51101
N.S.P 24H52391
N.S.P 24HS3671
N.S.P 24J24101
N.S.P 24J24111
N.S.P 24J24131
N.S.P 24J24141
N.S.P 24J24151
N.S.P 24J24161
N.S.P 24J24451
N.S.P 24J24461
N.S.P 24J24571
N.S.P 24J24581
N.S.P 24J24601
N.S.P 24J24611
N.S.P 24J24651
N.S.P 24J24661
N.S.P 24J24671
N.S.P 24J24801
HOLDER(IT)
DUCT(LAMP FAN)
LENS CAP(PB52)
DUCT(LCDFAN)
COVER A
COVER B
COVER(XDP)
HOLDER(POL T0.5)
HOLDER(RL2)
HOLDER(FL)
HOLDER(M1)
SUPPORT(MAIN PWB)
HOLDER FILTER ASSY(VT47)
LEVER(FOOT)L
LEVER(FOOT)R
SPRING(FOOT F)
BRACKET(I/O)
SHIELD CASE(POWER)T
SHIELD CASE(POWER)B
GROUND METAL(DC-BS)
BRACKET(DETECT SW)
SHIELD CASE(BS)R
BRACKET(FAN 80)
BRACKET(EXHAUST)T
SHIELD(BS)F
LEAF SPRING MIRROR(PB52)
BRACKET(PBS)
BARRIER(IT)
LEAF SPRING(M1)
SPACER FL T0.1(PB52)
SPACER FL T0.2(PB52)
SPACER FL T0.3(PB52)
SPACER FL T0.5(PB52)
SPACER FL T1.0(PB52)
SPACER RL2 T0.1(PB52)
SPACER RL2 T0.2(PB52)
SPACER RL2 T0.3(PB52)
SPACER RL2 T0.5(PB52)
SPACER RL2 T1.0(PB52)
BRACKET LCD(PB53)
GROUND METAL(FAN-BS)
BRACKET PBS
BARRIER IT(PB52)
BRACKET(I/O)ASSY(VT470)
CUSHION(FOOT F)
CUSHION(FOOT R)
FILTER(SIDE)
CUSHION(SPEAKER)B
BURRIER(POWER)
BURRIER(BS)
CUSHION(ZOOM)A
CUSHION(ZOOM)B
CUSHION(COVER A)
CUSHION (FAN DUCT)
BARRIER(FILTER)
CUSHION(LAMP FAN)
WASHER(S-VIDEO)
CUSHION(EXHAUST FAN)T
CUSHION(EXHAUST FAN)B
CUSHION(LED)
Parts for adjustment of
optical system.
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
13-35
http://getMANUAL.com
VT676 series
*** APPEARANCE PARTS ***
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
24J24811
24J24821
24J24831
24J24891
24J24901
24J25021
24J25101
24J25111
24J25121
24J25131
24J25141
24K25891
24L45001
24L53141
24L46401
24L46421
24L55991
24L54081
24L54101
24L55221
24L56991
* 24L57011
CUSHION(EXHAUST)S
CUSHION(SUPPORT)T
CUSHION (FAN ROLL)
GASKET(PS)
CUSHION(10*40*T6)
CUSHION(DIRECT-LED)
BARRIER(REM-PWB)
BARRIER(MAIN PWB)
CUSHION(20*40*T3)
TAPE(13*18)
TAPE(35*55)
DECOR PLATE(I/O)(VT470)
LABEL(3.5*20)
LABEL(PIXEL WORKS)
CAUTION LABEL(SERVICE)
CAUTION LABEL(LAMP COVER)
LABEL,SERIAL MANUFACTURE
CAUTION LABEL(FILTER)
CAUTION LABEL(LENZ 4)
CAUTION LABEL(VT75LP)
NAME PALTE(VT676)
NAME PALTE(VT676)C
24L57211
* 24L57261
NAME PALTE(VT676G)
NAME PALTE(VT676G)C
24L57161
* 24L57181
NAME PALTE(VT676J)
NAME PALTE(VT676J)C
*
*
*
*
N.S.P
N.S.P
*
*
*
SRW018
SRW025
SRW101
SRW102
SRW102
SRW103
SRW103
SRW104
SRW104
SRW105
SRW106
SRW107
13-36
*
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
24L56321
24L54931
24L54941
24L57291
7N970027
7NN1N021
82K35121
82K35131
82J21201
82J21251
82J21311
82J33231
82J33181
82J33191
82J33321
83K35101
24N05831
24N06001
24N07471
24N07451
910E251L
24N05321
24N04771
24N04771
91052036
91052036
24N06901
24N06901
24N05321
24N07411
24N04771
CAUTION LABEL(VT75LP,+)
LABEL(FILTER)(VT70+)
LABEL(LENZ 4)(VT70+)
NAME PALTE(VT676+)TS
E10K250-28X28H
EARTH STRAP(E07S406200)
OPTBASE LRL(PB52) SASSY
OPTBASE RLR(PB52) SASSY
POLARIZER B(PB52) SASSY
INTEGRATOR SASSY
FIELD LENS(PB52) SASSY
PS-CONVERTER SASSY
POLARIZER R SASSY
POLARIZER G SASSY
RELAY LENS 2 SASSY
ENGINE SASSY
STUD(D-SUB)
PUSHNUT(3.0)
SCREW(CB P_TIGHT3*25*3GF)
CPIPS*3*8*15KF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
CBIPS*2*6*3KF
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW,CFIMS*2*6*3KF
SCREW,CFIMS*2*6*3KF
SPECIAL SCREW(M2*2.2)
SPECIAL SCREW(M2*2.2)
CBIPS*2*6*3KF
SPECIAL SCREW(M3*8)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
VT676,VT676G and VT676J only
VT676 only
VT676 only
Label for the Chinese production
VT676G only
VT676G only
Label for the Chinese production
VT676J only
VT676J only
Label for the Chinese production
VT676+ only
OR
Corresponds by POLARIZER B
Corresponds by POLARIZER R
Corresponds by POLARIZER G
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
VT676 series
*** APPEARANCE PARTS ***
SRW108
SRW109
SRW110
SRW111
SRW112
SRW113
SRW114
SRW115
SRW116
SRW117
SRW118
SRW119
SW001
SW002
SW003
SW004
SW005
SW006
SW007
SW008
SW009
SW010
SW011
SW012
SW013
SW014
SW015
SW016
SW017
SW019
SW021
SW022
SW023
SW024
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
N.S.P
24N04771
910E251L
910E251L
910E251L
910E251L
910E251L
910E2523
910E2523
910E305L
24N04771
910E251L
910E2523
24N04771
24N04771
24N04771
24N04771
24N04771
24N04771
24N04771
24N04771
24N04771
24N04771
24N04771
910E251L
910E251L
910E251L
910E251L
910E251L
910E251L
9111251L
910E251L
910E3196
91112031
910E3196
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SCREW,PL-CPIMS*2.5*8*15KF
SCREW,PL-CPIMS*2.5*8*15KF
SCREW,PL-CPIMS*3*8*3GF
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SCREW,PL-CPIMS*2.5*8*15KF
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
SCREW(CBIPS 3*10*15BF)
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SCREW CBIMS*2.5*6*3GF
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SCREW PL-CPIMS*3*30*3KF
SCREW,CBIMS*2*6*15BF
SCREW PL-CPIMS*3*30*3KF
*** PRINTED & PACKING MATERIALS ***
24BS7423
CARRYING CASE(VT470)
24M16171
PROTECTION BOX
24MU9581 SPACER L(VT70)
24MU9591 SPACER R(VT70)
24MU9601 PART BOX(VT70)
24MU9611 CARTON BOX(VT70)
24MU9932 CARTON SHEET(VT70)
24N07502
SPECIAL SCREW(HANDLE M4)
6N800007
BATTERY,DRY CELL R03UG(JE
24H51611
SCREW DRIVER(M4)
7N900522
REM-T HAND UNIT RD-409E
7N900561
RECEIVER UNIT T103
24M18361
PROTECTION BAG(SCREW)
24F39671
HANDLE(VT70)
7N520032
CABLE RGB 1.8M VER3 TE
7N8P4402
VT70 IMPORTANT INFO(U/G)
7N950493
VT70 U/M CD-ROM(U/G)
7N8P4372
VT70 QUICK GUIDE (U/G)
24L57201
LABEL(CARTON)(VT676)
24L57251
LABEL(CARTON)(VT676)C
7N8P4412
VT70 LW & FCC SHEET (USA)
7N8P1351
REGISTRATIOM CARD(USA)
7N080213
POWER CORD U2 L4.5 7A V
24L55232
LABEL(INSTA CARE)(VT75LP)
VT676 and VT676G only
VT676 only
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
13-37
VT676 series
*** PRINTED & PACKING MATERIALS ***
*
*
*
*
*
24L57211
24L57261
7N8P1612
7N080007
24L57221
24L57271
7N8P5062
7N8P5072
7N8P0962
78047921
7N080115
7N8P0025
24MV0371
7N080505
7N90P212
7N8P4593
7N8P4603
Product number
*** OPTION
VT676G only
VT676J only
VT676+ only
Product name
***
01161088
01957616
01957617
01161013
01161042
01161051
01161050
13-38
LABEL(CARTON)(VT676G)
LABEL(CARTON)(VT676G)C
WARRANTY(EUROPE)
POWER CORD E2 L4.5 2.5A LF K
LABEL(CARTON)(VT676J)
LABEL(CARTON)(VT676J)C
VT70 USER MANUAL(J)
VT70 QUICK GUIDE (J)
VLC REGISTRATION
WARRANTY ENVELOPE(100*220
POWER CORD J2 L4.5 7A LF K
PROJECTOR WARRANTY
CARTON BOX(VT676+)TS
POWER CORD C2 L4.5 2.5A K
WARRANTY CARD2 (CN)
VT70+ USER MANUAL (CH)
VT70+ QUICK GUIDE (CH)
VT75LP(replacement lamp)
VL-CA10MD
VL-CA02MD
VL-CA03V
CA03D
ADP-CV1
ADP-DT1
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
CONNECTION DIAGRAMS
VT70Series Connection Diagram
(VT37/VT47/VT470:LCD PANEL 24P)
COVER-SW
THERMISTOR1
THERMISTOR2
I/O_PWB
(PWC-4607B)
LCD PANEL
MAIN_PWB
(PWC-4607A)
PS-UNIT
REM_PWB
(PWC-4607C)
BALLAST-UNIT
LAMP FAN
BIMETAL
INTAKEFAN
EXHAUSTFAN
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
BALLASTFAN
14-1
CONNECTION DIAGRAMS
VT70Series Connection Diagram
(VT470/VT570/VT575/VT670/VT676:LCD PANEL 30P)
COVER-SW
THERMISTOR1
THERMISTOR2
I/O_PWB
(PWC-4607B)
LCD PANEL
MAIN_PWB
(PWC-4607A)
PS-UNIT
REM_PWB
(PWC-4607C)
BALLAST-UNIT
LAMP FAN
BIMETAL
14-2
INTAKEFAN
EXHAUSTFAN
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
BALLAST FAN
BLOCK DIAGRAMS
VT70 Series Main PWB Block Diagram
IIC_BUS_1
LPF
B_IN
GO[7:0]
B
BO[7:0]
LPF_SEL
SCART_IN
B[7:0]
IC3008
ST3232E
(RS232C)
RH/RV
TxD/RxD
AMUTE
JACK_SW
CPURESET_
CTL_SIG
REMOUT
FANSTOP
B[9.0]
RESET_
REKINT
CPUCLK
IIC_BUS_2
MCLK
BIMETAL
KEYIN[3:0]
KEYOUT[3:0]
PFC_ON
PWM[4:1]
FAN_DET[4:1]
LED_CTL[9:0]
S15V
MAIN_POWER
RGB2
(*1)
LAMP_COVER_SW
DOWN CANCEL
IC6003
AD8381
(DecDriver)
IC3002
MXA2500E
(GSensor)
VCC_EXH
TELE (*2) WIDE (*2) POWER ENTER
UP
FAN_CTL
FAN_EN
MENU
AUTO
RGB1
LEFT
RIGHT
S-VID
VIDEO
FAN_DET2
FAN_EN
POWER STATUS LAMP
RGB1
RGB2
(*1)
NRS
CTL_SIG
IC6804
NJU4052
(SEL)
(*2)
VIDB[6:1]
0.7'LCD(G)
0.7'LCD(B)
VCOM
THERMISTOR1
THERMISTOR2
VT470 : D3-SVGA (EP)
VT570/VT575 : D3-XGA(EP)
VT670 : D3XGAw/MLA (EP)
VT676 : D3-5XGA w/MLA (EP)
VT37/VT47/VT470 (LCD_P 24P) : SVGA (SN)
The VT37 is not provided with IC3002.
EXHAUST-FAN
IC1012
REG
PANEL-FAN
PWM1
FA
N
FAN_DET3
FAN_EN
PWM2
(*1) VT470/VT570/VT575/VT670/VT676
(*2) VT37/VT47
LED_CTL[9:0]
PWM3
IC6801-03
VHCT540/1
(Logic)
(*2)
VIDG[6:1]
IC6502
CTL_SIG
ADSY8401
(L/S)
(*1)
LPHOT
LAMP_POWR
CTL_SIG
IC3001
AD7417ARU
(Temp & A/D)
IC3005
LH28F800BJE
(8M FLASH)
IC4002
UPD65943GC
(TIGHT CELL)
REMF
IC6002
AD8381
(DecDriver)
0.7'LCD(R)
VIDR[6:1]
CTL_SIG
IC6501
ADSY8401
(*1)
(L/S)
TOUT
IC4001
BD45251
(Reset)
IC6001
AD8381
(DecDriver)
IC6004
M62334FP
(4chD/A)
CPU_BUS
CPURESET
S3.3V
+4.2V
+6.2V
+15V
+17.5V
PFC_ON
MCLK
RESET_
IIC_BUS_2
RGB_EN/SEL
REMR
PS UNIT
IC5001
KS6000UNI7
(UNISEVEN) G[9:0]
RCLK
AMUTE
JACK_SW
BEEP
RXD
TXD
LAMP_ON
IC3006
PW164B
G[7:0]
(CPU & SCALER)
GFBK
C_IN
BALLAST
UNIT
MCLK
CTL_SIG
GCLK
S_IN
REM_PWB
PWC-4607C
R[9:0]
R[7:0]
GH/GV
CV_IN
TxD/RxD
(*1) VT470/VT570/VT575/VT670/VT676
(*2) VT37/VT47/VT470 (LCD_P 24P)
RE[7:0]
IC2001
GE[7:0]
PW2200B
(A/D & VDEC) BE[7:0]
HD/VD_IN
VREF
PSIG
(for VT47A)
G_IN
RO[7:0]
G
R_IN
CPUCLK
R
IC3003
24C16
(E2PROM)
LPHOT
COVERDET
14.31818MHz
27MHz
I/O_PWB
PWC4607B
RCLK
IC3007
ASM2508
(PLL & SS)
VOX
CPUCLK : 120MHz(w/SS)
RCLK
: 43MHz(w/SS) VT37/VT47/VT470
65MHz(w/SS) VT570/VT575/VT670/VT676
IC1011
REG
FAN_DET1
FAN_EN
PW
M4
FA
N
REM_PWB
PWC4607C
LAMP-FAN
IC1010
REG
FAN_DET4
FAN_EN
IC1013
REG
FA
N
FA
N
BALLAST-FAN
VIDEO SVIDEO
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
15-1
BLOCK DIAGRAMS
VT70Series I/O_PWB BLOCK DIAGRAM
S+5V
P & P
EEPROM
IC9001
TC9WMB1FK
+9V
VT470/VT570/VT575/VT670/VT676:OPEN
VT37/VT47
:SHORT
SDA
S-5V
Reg(-5V)
IC9005
TPS60403
SCL
H_IN_1
V_IN_1
COMPUTER_1
SCART
IN
S+5V
RGB_IN_1
(ONLY VT470/VT570/VT575/VT670/VT676)
COMPUTER_2
H_IN_2
V_IN_2
Reg(5V)
IC9006
PQ1MX55
A+5V
+6.2V
Reg(5V)
IC9503
PQ070X701ZP
S+5V
RGB
INPUT
SELECT
+9V
S+5V
RGB_IN
R_IN
G_IN
B_IN
BUFFER
IC9003
NJM2584AM
S-5V
RGB AMP
(6dB)
(ONLYVT470/VT570/
VT575/VT670/VT676)
RGB_IN_2
COMPUTER
OUT
S+5V
RGB_OUT
IC9004
NJM2581M
The VT37 is not
provided with OUT.
HV_OUT
SCART_IN
S+5V
(ONLY VT470/VT570/VT575/VT670/VT676)
SYNC
SELECT
IC9002
SN74CBT3125
RGB_SEL
RGB_SEL
H_IN
V_IN
H_IN
HV_IN
V_IN
S-V_Y_IN
S-VIDEO
VT470/VT570/VT575/VT670/VT676:OPEN
VT37/VT47
:SHORT
S-VIDEO_Y_IN
S-VIDEO_C_IN
S-V_C_IN
C-VIDEO_IN
IIC_SCLK
IIC_SDATA
BEEP
AUDIO_MUTE
CV_IN
+9V
C-VIDEO
L_
IN
SDATA
BEEP_IN
A+5V
R_IN
AUDIO
INPUT
SELECT
R_
IN
IC9501
NJW1141
L_IN
S-VIDEO
AUDIO
SCLK
L_
IN
AUDIO_IN
AUDIO
AMP
IC9502
LM4871
L_IN
REM_IN
REM_3.3V
TXD
RXD
L_OUT
R_
IN
R_OUT
PC-CONTROL
COMPUTER
AUDIO
AUDIO_OUT
(ONLY VT470/VT570/VT575/VT670/VT676)
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
The VT37 is not provided
with IC9007.
IC9007
IR-RECEIVER
-
R_IN
(ONLY VT470/VT570/VT575/VT670/VT676)
15-2
SPEAKER
+
TXD
RXD
JACK_EN
" Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC. "
" Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC. "
" Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC. "
http://getMANUAL.com
" Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC. "
" Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC. "
" Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC. "
" Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC. "
" Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC. "
" Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC. "
" Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC. "
" Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC. "
" Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC. "
" Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC. "
http://getMANUAL.com
" Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC. "
" Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC. "
" Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC. "
" Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC. "
" Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC. "
" Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC. "
" Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC. "
" Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC. "
" Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC. "
SCEMATIC DIAGRAMS
• Difference in parts used in the circuits between VT47 and VT37
VT47 (LCD PANEL 24P)
Circuit symbol Material code
Item name
VT37 (LCD PANEL 24P)
Quantity
required
Material code
Item name
Quantity
required
C3003
4NBA0033
CK730B1A104K-T
1
4NKH0101
RM7301/16W0.0HJT
1
C3005
4NBA0033
CK730B1A104K-T
1
4NKH0101
RM7301/16W0.0HJT
1
C3006
4NBA0064
CK731B1E473K-T
1
NC
C3010
4NBA0064
CK731B1E473K-T
1
NC
RM7301/16W0.0HJT
1
C3011
4NBA0253
CK732D1A106M-T
1
NC
C9023
4NBA0033
CK730B1A104K-T
1
4NKH0101
C9025
4NBA0115
CK732B0J475K-T
1
NC
C9043
4NBA0115
CK732B0J475K-T
1
NC
C9044
4NBA0027
CK730B1C103K-T
1
NC
C9045
4NBA0115
CK732B0J475K-T
1
NC
C9046
4NBA0027
CK730B1C103K-T
1
NC
C9047
4NBA0115
CK732B0J475K-T
1
NC
C9048
4NBA0027
CK730B1C103K-T
1
NC
C9049
4NBA0033
CK730B1A104K-T
1
NC
C9050
4NBA0033
CK730B1A104K-T
1
NC
C9051
4NBA0033
CK730B1A104K-T
1
NC
C9052
4NBA0033
CK730B1A104K-T
1
NC
C9053
4NBA0115
CK732B0J475K-T
1
NC
C9054
4NBA0162
CK731B1A105K-T
1
NC
C9057
4NBA0115
CK732B0J475K-T
1
NC
C9058
4NBA0033
CK730B1A104K-T
1
NC
C9059
4NBA0033
CK730B1A104K-T
1
NC
C9060
4NBA0033
CK730B1A104K-T
1
NC
C9061
4NBA0033
CK730B1A104K-T
1
NC
C9062
4NBA0180
CK732B1C105K-T
1
NC
C9063
4NBA0180
CK732B1C105K-T
1
NC
C9064
4NBA0027
CK730B1C103K-T
1
NC
C9065
4NCK0115
CE326W0J101M-T
1
NC
D9013
3NFK0015
DI KDS122-RTK
1
NC
D9014
3NFK0015
DI KDS122-RTK
1
NC
D9015
3NFK0015
DI KDS122-RTK
1
NC
FB9016
6N1F0051
Chip beads BK1608HS600-T
1
NC
FB9017
6N1F0051
¡Chip beads BK1608HS600-T
1
NC
FB9018
6N1F0153
Chip beads BK2125LL560-T
1
NC
FB9019
6N1F0153
Chip beads BK2125LL560-T
1
NC
FB9020
6N1F0153
Chip beads BK2125LL560-T
1
NC
FB9021
6N1F0153
Chip beads BK2125LL560-T
1
NC
FB9022
6N1F0153
Chip beads BK2125LL560-T
1
NC
IC3002
3NGK0168
IC MXA2500EL
1
NC
IC9004
3N7K0016
IC NJM2581M
1
NC
IC9005
3NGK0021
IC TPS60403DBVR
1
NC
IC9007
3N7J0008
Light receiver element TSOP34838SB1
1
NC
M9003
7N030057
D-SUB∫»∏¿1226-00D-15S-CA
1
NC
Q9005
3NEG0006
TR EMZ1-T2R
1
NC
Q9008
3NEG0006
TR EMZ1-T2R
1
NC
Q9014
3NEG0006
TR EMZ1-T2R
1
NC
Q9015
3NEG0006
TR EMZ1-T2R
1
NC
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
16-23
http://getMANUAL.com
VT47 (LCD PANEL 24P)
Circuit symbol Material code
Item name
VT37 (LCD PANEL 24P)
Quantity
required
Material code
R3016
4NKG0201
RM7311/10W0.0HJT
1
NC
R3018
4NKH1071
RM7301/16W8.2KFT
1
NC
R3022
4NKH1071
RM7301/16W8.2KFT
1
NC
R3023
4NKG0201
RM7311/10W0.0HJT
1
NC
R9038
4NKG0201
RM7311/10W0.0HJT
1
NC
R9052
4NKH0182
RM7301/16W2.2KJT
1
NC
R9053
4NKH0134
RM7301/16W22HJT
1
NC
R9054
4NKH0182
RM7301/16W2.2KJT
1
NC
R9055
4NKH0134
RM7301/16W22HJT
1
NC
R9066
4NKH0158
RM7301/16W220HJT
1
NC
R9068
4NKH0158
RM7301/16W220HJT
1
NC
R9070
4NKH0158
RM7301/16W220HJT
1
NC
R9073
4NKH0126
RM7301/16W10HJT
1
NC
R9074
4NKH0126
RM7301/16W10HJT
1
NC
R9087
4NKH0182
RM7301/16W2.2KJT
1
NC
R9088
4NKH0134
RM7301/16W22HJT
1
NC
R9089
4NKH0182
RM7301/16W2.2KJT
1
NC
R9090
4NKH0134
RM7301/16W22HJT
1
NC
R9091
4NKH0126
RM7301/16W10HJT
1
NC
R9092
4NKH0126
RM7301/16W10HJT
1
NC
R9093
4NKH0198
RM7301/16W10KJT
1
NC
R9094
4NKG0201
RM7311/10W0.0HJT
1
NC
R9095
4NKG0201
RM7311/10W0.0HJT
1
Item name
NC
R9102
4NKH0158
RM7301/16W220HJT
1
NC
R9106
4NKD0722
RM 7331/4W75HFT
1
NC
R9107
4NKD0722
RM 7331/4W75HFT
1
NC
R9108
4NKD0722
RM 7331/4W75HFT
1
NC
R9109
4NKH0138
RM7301/16W33HJT
1
NC
R9110
4NKH0138
RM7301/16W33HJT
1
NC
R9113
4NKH0150
RM7301/16W100HJT
1
NC
16-24
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
Quantity
required
APPENDIX
VT70 Series (VT676/670/575/570/470/47/37) Specifications
Specifications
VT676/VT676G/VT676J/VT676+
VT670/VT670G/VT670J/VT670+
VT575/VT575G
VT570/VT570G
VT470/VT470G/VT470J/VT470+
VT470JY(Japanese model)
VT47/VT47G/VT47J/VT47+
VT37/VT37G
Panel
0.7 " p-Si TFT
0.7 " p-Si TFT
0.7 " p-Si TFT
0.7 " p-Si TFT
0.7 " p-Si TFT
0.7 " p-Si TFT
0.7 " p-Si TFT
0.7 " p-Si TFT
MLA
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
Resolution
XGA
XGA
XGA
XGA
SVGA
SVGA
SVGA
SVGA
UXGA-VGA
UXGA-VGA
UXGA-VGA
UXGA-VGA
UXGA-VGA
UXGA-VGA
SXGA-VGA
SXGA-VGA
1.8m
1.8m
1.8m
1.8m
1.8m
1.8m
1.5m
1.5m
Throw ratio
1.48~1.79
1.48~1.79
1.48~1.79
1.48~1.79
1.48~1.79
1.48~1.79
1.2
1.2
F NO.
F 1.7 - 2.0
F 1.7 - 2.0
F 1.7 - 2.0
F 1.7 - 2.0
F 1.7 - 2.0
F 1.7 - 2.0
F2.0
F2.0
Focus
21.6 - 25.9 mm
21.6 - 25.9 mm
21.6 - 25.9 mm
21.6 - 25.9 mm
21.6 - 25.9 mm
21.6 - 25.9 mm
17.5 mm
17.5 mm
Zoom
Opt
1.2(Manual)
1.2(Manual)
1.2(Manual)
1.2(Manual)
1.2(Manual)
1.2(Manual)
No (Digital zoom)
No (Digital zoom)
Signal
Lens
Brightness
Throw distance @60 "
ANSI lumens(Catalog)
2500
2100*5
1500
1300*4
2000
2000
1500*5
1500
21 - 300 inchs
21 - 300 inchs
21 - 300 inchs
21 - 300 inchs
21 - 300 inchs
21 - 300 inchs
25 - 300 inchs
25 - 300 inchs
Normal/Eco Mode
180/150W
30 sec
180/150W
30 sec
130/110W
30 sec
130/110W
30 sec
180/150W
30 sec
180/150W
30 sec
130/110W
30 sec
130/110W
30 sec
400 :1
400 :1
400 :1
400 :1
400 :1
400 :1
400 :1
400 :1
Normal / Eco Mode
2000/3000H
2000/3000H
3000/4000H
3000/4000H
2000/3000H
2000/3000H
3000/4000H
3000/4000H
Projection Size
Lamp
After Cooling
Contrast
Lamp life
(Optional Lamp)
Mecha
Cabinet size
(VT75LP)
(VT75LP)
(VT70LP)
(VT70LP)
294x260x93mm
294x260x93mm
294x260x93mm
294x260x93mm
2.9Kg(6.4lbs.)
2.9Kg(6.4lbs.)
2.9Kg(6.4lbs.)
2.9Kg(6.4lbs.)
2.9Kg(6.4lbs.)
2.9Kg(6.4lbs.)
2.9Kg(6.4lbs.)
PC-ABS
PC-ABS
PC-ABS
PC-ABS
PC-ABS
PC-ABS
PC-ABS
White & Silrver
White
White
White & Silrver
Rose silver
White
Gray
Rear
Ventilation
(VT75LP)
294x260x93mm
White & Silrver
Terminal location
(VT70LP)
294x260x93mm
PC-ABS
Cabinet Color
(VT70LP)
294x260x93mm
2.9Kg(6.4lbs.)
Material of Cabinet
(VT75LP)
294x260x93mm
(W*D*H)
Weight
Fan noise
No
Rear
Rear
Rear
Rear
Rear
Rear
Rear
Side
Remote receiver location
Side
Side
Side
Side
Side
Side
Side
35/30dB
Normal/Eco Mode
35/30dB
33/28dB
33/28dB
35/30dB
35/30dB
33/28dB
33/28dB
1 ( Rear)
2 ( Front & rear )
2 ( Front & rear )
2 ( Front & rear )
2 ( Front & rear )
2 ( Front & rear )
2 ( Front & rear )
Bottom
Bottom
Bottom
Bottom
Bottom
Bottom
Bottom
Bottom
Audio Speaker
Elec
2 ( Front & rear )
Lamp replace
1W mono
1W mono
1W mono
1W mono
1W mono
1W mono
1W mono
1W mono
Function
Eco
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 (80%)
±30 deg. (Auto)
±30 deg. (Auto)
±30 deg. (Auto)
±30 deg. (Auto)
±30 deg. (Auto)
±30 deg. (Auto)
±30 deg. (Manual)
Yes
Yes(Manual)
Color management
Wall Color Correction
1
±30 deg. (Auto)
Keystone V
Yes
Yes(Manual)
Yes
Yes(Manual)
Yes
Yes(Manual)
Yes
Yes(Manual)
21 *1
Yes
Yes(Manual)
Yes
Yes
Yes (Manual)
21 *1
Yes (Manual)
21
21 *1
21 *1
21 *1
21 *1
21 *1
Sleep Timer
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Bottun Click Sound
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Pseudo I/P Conv.
Yes
Language
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Computer/Component in
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
Computer out
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
No
Video in
Terminal
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Stereo Phono :1
Stereo Phono :1
S-Video in
Audio in
Video
Stereo Phono :1
Stereo Phono :1
Stereo Phono :1
Stereo Phono :1
Stereo Phono :1
Stereo Phono :1
S-Video
Stereo Phono :1
Stereo Phono :1
Stereo Phono :1
Stereo Phono :1
Stereo Phono :1
Stereo Phono :1
Computer
Stereo mini :1
Stereo mini :1
Stereo mini :1
Stereo mini :1
Stereo mini :1
Stereo mini :1
Stereo mini :1
Stereo mini :1
Stereo mini :1
Stereo mini :1
No
No
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
13
Cabinet key
Stereo mini :1
Stereo mini :1
1
PC CONTROL
Stereo mini :1
Stereo mini :1
Audio-out
13
13
13
13
13
14
14
(Power,Video,S-Video,RGB,
(Power,Video,S-Video,
(Power,Video,S-Video,
(Power,Video,S-Video,
(Power,Video,S-Video,
(Power,Video,S-Video,
(Power,Video,S-Video,RGB,
ComputerX2,Auto-ADJ,Menu,
ComputerX2,Auto-ADJ,Menu,
ComputerX2,Auto-ADJ,Menu,
ComputerX2,Auto-ADJ,Menu,
ComputerX2,Auto-ADJ,Menu,
Auto-ADJ,Menu,Enter,
Enter,Cancel,Selectx4)
7
Cabinet LED
(Power,Video,S-Video,
ComputerX2,Auto-ADJ,Menu,
Enter,Cancel,Selectx4)
7
Enter,Cancel,Selectx4)
7
Enter,Cancel,Selectx4)
7
Enter,Cancel,Selectx4)
7
Enter,Cancel,Selectx4)
7
(Lamp,Status,Power,Video
(Lamp,Status,Power,Video
(Lamp,Status,Power,Video
(Lamp,Status,Power,Video
(Lamp,Status,Power,Video
(Lamp,Status,Power,Video
S-Video,Computer1,computer2)
S-Video,Computer1,computer2)
S-Video,Computer1,computer2)
S-Video,Computer1,computer2)
S-Video,Computer1,computer2)
S-Video,Computer1,computer2)
Cancel,Select*4,Zoom +/-)
6
(Lamp,Status,PowerVideo,
S-Video,Computer/Component)
Auto-ADJ,Menu,Enter,
Cancel,Select*4,Zoom +/-)
6
(Lamp,Status,PowerVideo,
S-Video,Computer/Component)
AC-SW
Power
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Scaler
Pixcelworks
Pixcelworks
Pixcelworks
Pixcelworks
Pixcelworks
Pixcelworks
Pixelworks
Pixelworks
250/200W
250/200W
190/155W
190/155W
250/200W
250/200W
190/155W
190/155W
8W
8W
8W
8W
8W
8W
8W
8W
100-240V AC ,50/60Hz
100-240V AC ,50/60Hz
100-240V AC ,50/60Hz
100-240V AC ,50/60Hz
100-240V AC ,50/60Hz
-
100-240V AC ,50/60Hz
100-240V AC ,50/60Hz
Consumption
Normal/Eco Mode
Stand-by
Source
Europe/Asia
US
Operating Temparature Range
Acc
Remote unit
Mouse receiver unit
Power cable
Lens cap
100-240V AC ,50/60Hz
100-240V AC ,50/60Hz
100-240V AC ,50/60Hz
100-240V AC ,50/60Hz
100-240V AC ,50/60Hz
-
100-240V AC ,50/60Hz
100-240V AC ,50/60Hz
Japan
100-240V AC ,50/60Hz
100-240V AC ,50/60Hz
100-240V AC ,50/60Hz
100-240V AC ,50/60Hz
100-240V AC ,50/60Hz
100-240V AC ,50/60Hz
100-240V AC ,50/60Hz
100-240V AC ,50/60Hz
5 - 35 dgree C
5 - 35 dgree C
5 - 35 dgree C
5 - 35 dgree C
5 - 35 dgree C
5 - 35 dgree C
5 - 35 dgree C
5 - 35 dgree C
Presentation Remote(RD-409E)
Yes
Presentation Remote(RD-409E)
Yes
Presentation Remote(RD-409E)
Simple Remote(RD-412E)
Presentation Remote(RD-409E)
No
Presentation Remote(RD-408E)
Yes
Presentation Remote(RD-409E)
No
Presentation Remote(RD-409E)
Yes
No
No
Yes (4.5m)
Yes (4.5m)
Yes (3m)
Yes (3m)
Yes (4.5m)
Yes (4.5m)
Yes (3m)
Yes (3m)
Yes *2
Yes *2
Yes *2
Yes *2
Yes *2
Yes *2
Yes *2
Yes
Computer cable
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Soft carring case
Handle
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes(CDROM) *3
Yes(CDROM) *3
Yes(CDROM) *3
Yes(CDROM) *3
Yes(CDROM) *3
Yes(Parper)
Yes(CDROM) *3
Yes(CDROM)
User's manual
*1 English, German, French, Italian, Spanish, Swedish, Japanese, Korean, Chinese (Simplified Chinese Character), Polish, Hungarian, Russian, Greek,
Turkish, Dutch, Norwegian, Finnish, Portuguese, Czech, Arabic, Danish
*2 Lens cap is attached to Projector with string and rivet.
*3 English, German, French, Spanish, Dutch, Danish, Italian
*4 Lowest brightness limit will be 70% of catalogue value.
*5 Lowest brightness limit will be 75% of catalogue value.
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
17-1
1
CONTENTS
1. PJ composition and names
⋅ Internal composition
⋅ General names of optical components
⋅ Color and flow of light
2. Roles of optical components
⋅ Classification of components and roles
⋅ Components and roles
3. Materials for reference
17-2
1. PJ composition and names
17-3
Internal composition(VT70s)
Optical engine
Opt Base unit
17-4
Correspondence table of the machine type and exchange part (VT70’s)
PBS unit
Lamp unit
27
26
FL unit
24
22
21
20
18
15
12
9
6
4
19
29
28
IT unit
Corre s ponde nce table of the machine type and e xchange part
No.
Ge ne ral name
Exchange unit
OPTB ASE SASSY
1 Proje ction Le ns
2 Cros s Dichroic Pris m
3 Analyze r R
4 Analyze r G
5 Analyze r B
6 Pre Analyze r G
7 Pre Analyze r B
8 LCD R
9 LCD G
10 LCD B
11 Polarize r R
POLARIZER R
12 Polarize r G
POLARIZER G
13 Polarize r B
POLARIZER B
14 Conde ns e r Le ns R
CONDENSER LENS R
15 Conde ns e r Le ns G
CONDENSER LENS G
16 Conde ns e r Le ns B
CONDENSER LENS B
M IRROR 2
17 M irror 3
18 M irror 2
19 M irror 1
M IRROR 1
20 Dichroic M irror 2
DAICHROIC M IRROR 2
21 Dichroic M irror 1
DAICHROIC M IRROR 1
22 Re lay Le ns 1
RELAY LENS 1
23 Re lay Le ns 2
RELAY LENS 2 SASSY
24 Fie ld Le ns
FIELD LENS SASSY
25 Flat Polarize d B e am Supuritta PS-CONVERTER SASSY
INTEGRATOR SASSY
26 Inte grator 2
27 Inte grator 1
OPTION LAM P
28 Cove r Glas s
29 Re fle cte r Lamp
*Part that showe d it with the de ficit is an as s e mbling article .
23
2
RL2 unit
25
17
16 13 10 7 5
3 8 11 14
Opt Base unit
1
17-5π
2
Color and flow of light
Blue flow
Green flow
Red flow
17-6
2. Roles of optical components
17-7
7
Classification of components and roles
The roles (functions) of optical components are as specified below.
Each component comes in a multi-functional component where multiple functions
are available.
1. Illumination function: (illumination)
This function is that light is produced to illuminate the liquid crystal by
controlling the illumination distribution.
[ LAMP, REFLCTER, INTEGRATOR, PBS : Polarized Beam Splitter,
FIELD LENS, CONDENSER LENS, RELAY LENS ]
2. Color separation and synthesis function : (color)
White light is separated into R,G,B and the separated R, G, B rays are
synthesized again.
[ LAMP, DICHROIC MIRROR, CROSS PRISM : XDP, POLARIZER,
Liquid crystal panel , ANALYZER ]
3. Projection function: (projection)
A small LC image is enlarged and projected at a large screen.
[ Liquid crystal panel, ZOOM LENS]
17-8
http://getMANUAL.com
4. Reliability and safety control function: (trustworthiness)
Reliability and safety are assured.
[REFLCTER, INTEGRATOR, IR MIRROR, PBS : Polarized Beam Splitter,
UV CUT FILTE ]
5. Polarization control function: (polarization)
The polarization of light is controlled.
[ PBS :Polarized Beam Splitter, POLARIZER, ANALYZER, Liquid crystal
panel ]
6. Direction control function: (direction)
This role is used to bend the light beam.
[REFLCTER, IR MIRROR, PBS : Polarized Beam Splitter, RELAY LENS ,
FIELD LENS, CONDENSER LENS, DICHROIC MIRROR, CROSS
PRISM : XDP ]
17-9
Components and roles
[LAMP]: [illumination][color]
This component is intended to generate the light inside the PJ.
It is composed of a quartz bulb and tungsten electrodes, from which the light is
generated by the effect of discharges.
According to the type of a material (mercury, etc.) put in the bulb, the emission
spectrum changes.
While the lamp is glowing, the electrodes in the bulb are heated at a temperature
of some thousand degrees centigrade. Even the bulb surface is heated at a high
temperature of 1000 degrees centigrade.
BULB
17-10
[REFLCTER]: [illumination][direction][trustworthiness]
This is a reflection mirror where the light generated in the lamp is collected and
projected forward.
The shape of the reflector comes in a parabolic form or an oval form.
The roles of the reflector are as follows.
(1) Light is collected and projected forward. (Reflection mirror)
(2) The infrared rays are not projected forward. (A cold coat is provided.)
→The infrared rays pass by behind the projector.
(3) It has a role of protection when the lamp is broken.
→This glass has a mechanical strength that is stronger than ordinary glass.
(4) It has a role of holding the lamp.
REFLCTER
17-11
[Cover glass]: [trustworthiness]
It has a role of protecting parts in the engine when the lamp is broken or
preventing the scattering of fractions.
Its surface is generally provided with an AR coat of Pyrex, etc. The glass used has
a high mechanical strength and a high durability against heat.
For the parts to be protected against lamp fracture, the glass thickness is 3 to 5mm.
17-12
[AR coat]
The glass surface used for the projector is always coated.
The AR coating (Anti-Reflection coating) is typical.
By suppressing the reflection from the glass surface, the transmission factor can be
raised.
Incident light
Incident light
AR coating
Reflected beam (1)
(Approx. 4%)
Reflected beam (1)
(Approx. 0.25%)
Anti-reflection coating
AR coating
Reflected beam (2)
(Approx. 4%)
Reflected beam (2)
(Approx. 0.25%)
Glass plate
Refraction factor assumed to be 1.52
Transmission beam
Approx. 92%
(Without coating)
Anti-reflection coating
Transmission beam
Approx. 99.5%
(With coating)
17-13
[INTEGRATOR]: [illumination][trustworthiness]
The light source (lamp) can be made into the multiple type. This component can
assure the unified radiation of the LCD panel.
Generally, it comes in a composition of Integrator 1 and Integrator 2.A combination
of single lenses called the field lens comes after it.
In some cases, Integrator 1 may have an evaporation of UV coating or UV-IR
coating.
1st lens array
Lamp
Rectangular lens
Reflector
2nd lens array
Relay lens
LCLV
Field lens
Condenser lens
17-14
[Integrator cell]
The number of integrator cells can change according to each model.
Size and the number of cells are determined by illumination design, dimensions
of the illumination system, and the shape of the illuminated object (LCD, etc.).
8 lines
6 rows
17-15
[PBS]: [illumination][polarization][direction]
PBS is an acronym of the Polarized Beam Splitter. (General name)
It is a sort of prism with the function of splitting the non-polarized beam into Rays
S and Rays P.
After splitting into the S/P rays, the PBS used for the projector permits either rays
to be transmitted through the phase differential plate so that the optical efficiency
can be raised through the alignment of the polarized rays.
Integrator
Polarized rays P
Phase differential plate
Polarized rays S
Polarized rays S
Polarized rays S
17-16
[Polarized rays S and P]
The outgoing light from the lamp is a “random” beam without any polarization.
If the PBS or the like is used for transmission and reflection, it is possible to
obtain the polarized rays S and P, where vibration of light is aligned in the same
direction.
Polarized rays P: Parallel
Polarized rays S: Vertical
The polarization is defined based on the reflection
plane.
Polarized rays P
Plane of incidence
Polarized rays S
When the light enters the reflection plane, the
plane is called the plane of incidence where the
perpendicular line on the reflection plane and the
incident light are included.
The polarized rays S are the polarization whose
vibrating direction of the light (electric field) is
perpendicular to the plane of incidence.
Reflection plane
The polarized rays P are the polarization whose
vibrating direction of the light is parallel to the plane
of incidence.
17-17
[DICHROIC MIRROR]: [color] [direction]
A component of a flat glass plate provided with a dichroic coating is called the
dichroic mirror (filter).
The dichroic coating has a function of dividing colors in such a manner that
white color is divided into monochromic colors of red and blue or a color
mixture of yellow, cyan, etc.
In many cases, the dichroic mirror used for the projector is placed at an angle
of 45 degrees. Since it establishes the reflection (transmission) characteristics
for the incident angle of 45 degrees, the DM for the transmission of “red only”
in the projector functions as a filter. Therefore, a fluorescent lamp does not
look red.
17-18
http://getMANUAL.com
[MIRROR, FILTER and PRISM]
The projector components have the names of ****** MIRROR and ****** FILTER.
The IR (coating) filter and the IR (coating) mirror are the examples. These names
indicate the difference between mirror and filter or prism.
Light
Light
Offset
When the light passes
through an object, such an
item is called the FILTER.
When the light is reflected
at an object, such an item
is called the MIRROR.
Light
A polyhedron made of
glass is called the PRISM.
The light passing through the MIRROR is attached
with an offset in conjunction with the incident light.
However, the light passing through the PRISM has
no offset. (For the cube type)
17-19
[Wedge coating]
The category of dichroic coating involves a somewhat specific coating called
the wedge coating. The dichroic mirror used to separate colors in the projector
generally has a characteristic of color separation in conjunction with the
incident light at 45 degrees. (The specification is based on the incident angle of
45 degrees.)
In actual projectors, however, beams in a spread mode pass through the
dichroic mirrors and some of them are partially transmitted at 45 degrees or 30
degrees, or 60 degrees.
The dichroic mirror has a characteristic of incident angle dependency.
Therefore, the cutoff wavelength for color separation can change according to
the incident angle. This characteristic gives rise to problems such as color
unevenness, brightness unevenness, hue unevenness, and others.
To solve the problems of color unevenness, etc., the dichroic mirrors have
tended to use wedges recently. However, there is a rise in cost in comparison
with ordinary dichroic mirrors. Therefore, careful examination is needed to
specify the effect of investment.
17-20
[Wedge coating]
The incident angle is changed by positioning.
DM
1st lens array
2nd lens array
Lamp
Reflector
LCD
Condenser lens
Condenser lens
17-21
[UV FILTER]:
[trustworthiness]
The LCD panels and the polarization plates are degraded by ultraviolet (UV) rays.
Recently, not only the effect of ultraviolet rays but also that of visible rays of
about 420nm began to be indicated.
The UV absorption (UV reflection) filters began to be used to prevent the beams
of such a wavelength domain from approaching the LCD panel.
Since the projector uses the UV filter and the IR filter in the proximity of the lamp,
two UV filters are actually used in the unit.
17-22
[UV absorption filter and UV reflection filter]
The UV (R) absorption glass and the UV (R) reflection glass offer the differences as
described below.
& lt; Heat rays (R) absorption glass & gt;
This glass contains a very small quantity of metals such as nickel, iron, cobalt, etc.
It efficiently absorbs the light of wavelength near infrared rays that have a large quantity
of heat to suppress the temperature rise.
& lt; UV absorption glass & gt;
This glass contains a material that absorbs ultraviolet rays.
→The UV absorption glass is a specific type of glass where a material is contained
to absorb the objective wavelength.
& lt; Heat rays (R) reflection glass & gt;
This glass is coated with a thin metallic membrane on the surface.
In reverse to the heat rays absorption glass, this glass reflects the light of wavelength
near infrared rays that have a large quantity of heat to suppress the temperature rise.
& lt; UV reflection glass & gt;
This glass is coated with a thin metallic membrane on the surface.
→The reflection glass is coated with a thin membrane on the glass surface by
evaporation. It is a sort of the dichroic filter (mirror) that reflects the objective
17-23
wavelength. The glass to be used is a general white plate or the like.
[Condenser lens] :[illumination][projection][direction]
Many condenser lenses (single lenses) are used in the projector.
The projector lens and the integrator can be regarded as a group of the single
lenses.
Names of the condenser lenses and the relay lenses are attached with the
functional names for easy distinction.
Their basic roles are the collection and the bending of beams.
Lens types
Biconvex lens
Plan-convex lens
Biconcave lens
Plan-concave lens
17-24
[LCD panel]: [color][projection][polarization]
This is a device to display a video image.
The role of the projector is the enlargement of this image and the projection of the
image at a screen. The panel is the core item for the projector.
Since the LCD panel is used to display images through the rotation of the
polarized beams, the polarization plates are always installed on the incident and
outgoing sides of the light.
An MLA is installed to increase the brightness (= transmission factor = opening
factor). A dust-proofing glass is attached so that dust and contaminants can be
made less visible on the display block. Many functions are secured in such a
manner.
17-25
[Panel configuration: MLA configuration]
MLA : Micro Lens Array System
Without MLA
With MLA
Incident beam
Incident beam
Micro Lens Array
Micro lens
TFT
Shield mask
Glass substrate
LC layer
TFT substrate
TFT
Shield mask
Glass substrate LC layer
TFT substrate
17-26
[Polarization plate]: [projection][ polarization]
This is a component intended to enter the polarized beam in the LCD panel.
Unlike the polarizer, this item comes in a thin film stuck to an ordinary glass
substrate, referred to as the polarization plate.
The analyzer (plate) is a polarizer allocated on the outgoing side of the LCD
panel. It is called the analyzer for distinction.
Recently, the polarization plates have tended to be the adhesion of the
wavelength plates, compared to the polarized wave attribute of the XDP.
17-27
[Polarizer and Analyzer [polarization plate and analyzer plate]]
Basically, the polarizer and the analyzer are the same polarization films.
The LCD panel is made possible to display images when it is installed in the state that
it is sandwiched by the two polarization films.
The polarizer has a (control) function of aligning the polarized waves to be entered in
the LCD panel. The analyzer has a function of the absorption and interruption of the
light twisted and generated from the panel. Its (detecting) function is to establish
images of white, gray, and black. Because of this function, NEC calls the incident side
polarization film the polarizer and the outgoing side polarization film the analyzer.
Generally speaking, the polarizer and the analyzer are installed in such a posture that
they cross at right angles with the transmission axis where the polarized waves pass
through.
Transmission axis
Polarization film = Polarizer
LCD panel
Transmission axis
Polarization film = Analyzer
Outgoing beam
17-28
http://getMANUAL.com
[Configuration of the polarization plate]
The polarization plate configuration used in the projector comes in a variety of types.
It depends on the type of glass substrate, polarizer, presence of a phase differential plate, and the
recent use of the double polarization plate or the polarization plate where the films are piled in
stacks to be referred to as the Wide View (WV). Each has an attractive function to improve
performance. On the contrary, there are reports of cases when a problem of “color unevenness” is
caused as a result of expansion and contraction of films in the layer configuration.
& lt; & lt; Various types of polarizers and analyzers & gt; & gt;
Light
Light
Light
:Glass
:Polarizer
Glass
+ Polarizer
Glass
+ Phase differential plate
+ Polarizer
Light
Light
Phase differential plate
+ Glass
+ Polarizer
Glass
+ Polarizer
Glass
+ Polarizer
Glass
+ Phase differential plate
+ Polarizer
+ WV
:Phase differential plate
:WV
Light
Glass
+ Phase differential plate
+ Polarizer
+ WV
+ WV
17-29
[ Polarization plate and Phase difference plate]
The polarization plate and the phase differential plate come in a shape of a thin
film. (The thickness of a polarization plate is about 0.2mm and that of a phase
differential plate is about 0.1mm.)
The polarization plate has a function that only the specific polarization can pass
through. The phase differential plate has a function that a specific polarization
such as the P wave is rotated and turned into the S wave.
polarization plate
Phase difference
•Configuration
•Configuration
Protection film
Protection film
TAC film
Polarizer membrane
TAC film
Adhesive agent
Phase differential film
Adhesive agent
Separate film
Separate film
TAC :triacetylcellulose
17-30
[Sapphire glass and white-plate glass]
Along with the recent improvement of brightness for the projector, a great problem
has arisen in regard to the method of cooling because the heat load has been
increased in the polarization plate and the analyzer plate.
To solve this problem, sapphire glass has tended to be used as a glass plate where
polarizers and analyzers are stuck. Compared with the white plate, the BK7, etc.
used generally, the heat dissipation property of the glass or the heat conductivity is
extremely high and it is possible to increase the effect of cooling.
However, this material is very expensive because it is a specific type of glass. It is
the same item as the [sapphire glass or the glass that is hard to be hurt] used in
watches. In addition, it is manufactured (processed) by an expensive method.
Glass type
Specific heat
Soda glass
Quartz
BK7
F2
Sapphire
NA35
Density
kg/m3
2190
2520
2230
2510
2810
3970
2500
Specific heat
J/kgK
740
800
730
3592
2332
3140
13.4
Heat conductivity
J/msK
1.38
1.03
1.10
1.11
0.78
42.0
0.21
17-31
[XDP]: [color][projection][polarization][direction]
The KDP is an acronym of the Cross Dichroic Prism.
When it is seen from above, it looks like a character X. The name comes from this fact.
Four triangular prisms are used to make this item. By evaporation, the R and B prisms
are coated with the dichroic films of reflection and the G prisms are coated with those
of transmission. Since then, they are stuck together.
According to the model, the incident and outgoing planes are processed for AR
coating or stuck with analyzers.
17-32
[Projection lens]: [illumination] [projection]
This item is intended to project a video image that is displayed on the LCD panel.
Usually, it is composed of ten-odd single lenses.The lenses to be used are made
of expensive glass materials or processed with high accuracy.
In many projectors, zoom type lenses are used. Therefore, the zoom rings and the
focus rings are provided.
17-33
3. Materials for reference
34
17-34
Relay optical path
The current majority of the LCD projectors is an optical system where the XDP
is used. In many cases, the XDP-applied system uses a relay optical path in its
illumination system.
The relay optical path is an optical path where the parts for relaying the light
are provided. In the case of this projector, the relay optical path has a role of
radiating the light on the LCD to any other LCD located in a place where the
optical path length is different.
At present, “B” or “R” may be used as a relay optical path.
17-35
Relay optical path: Relaying of the light
The distribution of brightness (distribution of illumination) can change with the
distance from the lamp.
The relay optical path is called so because it is used to relay the light to a distant
place without changing the intensity of the illuminance distribution.
Since optical relaying is carried out by the use of lenses, the illuminance distribution
appears in an equivalent size. However, it is a reverse distribution, both vertically
and horizontally.
→This vertically and horizontally reversed illuminance distribution can be a
cause of color unevenness.
Illuminance
distribution 1
Illuminance
distribution 1’
Illuminance
distribution 2
a
Illuminance
distribution 2’
a
b
Illuminance distribution 1 ≠ Illuminance distribution 2
b
Illuminance distribution 1’
Illuminance distribution 2’
17-36
Chiral
Chiral is considered to have arisen from the word source of chiral smectic LC,
etc. It is used to indicate the direction of LC twist. (Unclear if it is general or not)
Chiral R and Chiral L are often used to mean that the LC molecules are twisted
and sealed in the panel. According to the twisting direction (clockwise or
counterclockwise), we use “R/L chiral” for distinction.
Rubbing
The TN (Twisted Nematic) type liquid crystal is arranged in a specific direction
according to the type of orientation membrane. To establish this orientation, the
rubbing method or the like is often used.
The frequently used word of 45° rubbing (orientation) or 90° rubbing
(orientation) indicates the rubbing direction (angle).
Example: Epson uses the naming of 90° rubbing and SONY uses 45° rubbing.
17-37
MPCD
The MPCD is an acronym of the Minimum Perceptible Color Difference.
According to simplified explanations, the MPCD is a value that is 2000
times of the distance from the locus of black body radiation on the
coordinates of the RUCS color system of Judd.
Accordingly, when color on the black body radiation is defined as white,
it indicates how much it is distant from white.
If the MPCD code is “+”, this indicates that it is shifted from white in the
direction of green. If it is “-“, it is shifted from white in the direction of
magenta.
17-38
http://getMANUAL.com
An explanation of optical parts functions.
Integrator
It is in order to make uniformity of picture illuminance improve.
(In order to lose hot spot at a picture center and raise illuminance ratio at environs of a picture.)
FPBS
A polarized light direction is collected in the direction of one.
By VT, S wave which has been incident upon FPBS is converted into P wave and, P wave has
penetrated as it is.
Field Lens
It is the thing to do a light bundle anthology light for a LCD panel.
Cold Mirror (M0)
It is the thing to penetrates infrared rays and reflect a light bundle except for infrared rays.
Dichroic Mirror 1 (DM1)
It is the thing to penetrates light of a red element and reflect a light bundle except for it.
(It is at the time of the case that a relay light road is blue. )
Dichroic Mirror 2 (DM2)
It is the thing to penetrates light of a blue element and reflect light of a green element.
(It is at the time of the case that a relay light road is blue.)
17-39
An explanation of optical parts functions.
Mirror 1 (M1)
It is the thing to reflect light of a red element efficiently.
(It is at the time of the case that a relay light road is blue.)
Mirror 2 and Mirror 3 (M2,M3)
It is the thing to reflect light of a blue element efficiently.
(It is at the time of the case that a relay light road is blue.)
Condenser Lens
It is the thing to be able to hold a light bundle up on a iris of a projection lens anthology light.
Reflecter Lamp
A high-pressure mercurial lamp.
The reflecter has a parabola curved surface. It parallels a light bundle.
Projection Lens
It is the thing to spread and project a reflection of a LCD panel.
Cross Dichroic Prism
It is the thing to synthesis the light of 3 elements which comes from a panel of RGB.
17-40
01150255 (VT676)
01150196 (VT670)
01150251 (VT575)
01150202 (VT570)
01150199 (VT470)
01150205 (VT47)
01150258 (VT37)
01150256 (VT676G)
01150197 (VT670G)
01150248 (VT575G)
01150203 (VT570G)
01150200 (VT470G)
01150206 (VT47G)
01150259 (VT37G)
01151060 (VT670J)
01151079 (VT676J)
01151076 (VT470JY)
01151061 (VT470J)
01151063 (VT47J)
PRINTING THE ELECTRONIC DOCUMENT
The PDF of this service manual is not designed to be printed from cover to cover. The pages vary in size, and must therefore be printed in sections
based on page dimensions.
NON-SCHEMATIC PAGES
Data that does NOT INCLUDE schematic diagrams are formatted to 8.5 x 11 inches and can be printed on standard letter-size and/or A4-sized paper.
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
The schematic diagram pages are provided in two ways, full size and tiled. The full-sized schematic diagrams are formatted on paper sizes between
8.5” x 11” and 18” x 30” depending upon each individual diagram size. Those diagrams that are LARGER than 11” x 17” in full-size mode have been
tiled for your convience and can be printed on standard 11” x 17” (tabloid-size) paper, and reassembled.
TO PRINT FULL SIZE SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
If you have access to a large paper plotter or printer capable of outputting the full-sized diagrams, output as follows:
1) Note the page size(s) of the schematics you want to output as indicated in the middle window at the bottom of the viewing screen.
2) Go to the File menu and select Print Set-up. Choose the printer name and driver for your large format printer. Confirm that the printer settings
are set to output the indicated page size or larger.
3) Close the Print Set Up screen and return to the File menu. Select “Print...” Input the page number of the schematic(s) you want to print in the
print range window. Choose OK.
TO PRINT TILED VERSION OF SCHEMATICS
Schematic pages that are larger than 11” x 17” full-size are provided in a 11” x 17” printable tiled format near the end of the document. These can be
printed to tabloid-sized paper and assembled to full-size for easy viewing.
If you have access to a printer capable of outputting the tabloid size (11” x 17”) paper, then output the tiled version of the diagram as follows:
1) Note the page number(s) of the schematics you want to output as indicated in the middle window at the bottom of the viewing screen.
2) Go to the File menu and select Print Set-up. Choose the printer name and driver for your printer. Confirm that the plotter settings are set to output
11” x 17”, or tabloid size paper in landscape (
) mode.
3) Close the Print Set Up screen and return to the File menu. Select “Print...” Input the page number of the schematic(s) you want to print in the
print range window. Choose OK.
TO PRINT SPECIFIC SECTIONS OF A SCHEMATIC
To print just a particular section of a PDF, rather than a full page, access the Graphics Select tool in the Acrobat Reader tool bar.
1) To view the Graphics Select Tool, press and HOLD the mouse button over the Text Select Tool which looks like: T
This tool will expand to reveal to additional tools.
Choose the Graphics Select tool by placing the cursor over the button on of the far right that looks like:
2) After selecting the Graphics Select Tool, place your cursor in the document window and the cursor will change to a plus (+) symbol. Click and
drag the cursor over the area you want to print. When you release the mouse button, a marquee (or dotted lined box) will be displayed outlining
the area you selected.
3) With the marquee in place, go to the file menu and select the “Print...” option. When the print window appears, choose the option under the section
called “Print Range” which says “Selected Graphic”.
Select OK and the output will print only the area that you outlined with the marquee.